SmartPlant Review

User’s Guide

Version 5.1

October 2004

DVIS2-PE-200001C

Copyright
Copyright © 2000-2004 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software--Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, MARIAN, and PDS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Preface...............................................................................................................................13 Introducing SmartPlant Review.....................................................................................15 What's New in SmartPlant Review? ...........................................................................15 Using SmartPlant Review Modules: An Overview ....................................................17
API Module....................................................................................................................... 17 Collaboration Module ....................................................................................................... 18 Construction Module ........................................................................................................ 19 On-Site Drawing Generation Module ............................................................................... 20 Photo-Realism Module ..................................................................................................... 21 Point Cloud Integrator Module ......................................................................................... 22 Simulation and Visual Effects Module ............................................................................. 23

Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview ............................................................24
Display Set Changes ......................................................................................................... 25 Function Key Changes...................................................................................................... 26 Measurement Changes ...................................................................................................... 27 VUE File Changes ............................................................................................................ 27 Position Control Changes ................................................................................................. 28

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review ......................................................................29 Understanding Project Databases: An Overview .......................................................29
Label Database Format Change ........................................................................................ 31 Working with Large Datasets ........................................................................................... 31 Sharing the Project Database Over the Network .............................................................. 32

Opening a Model File: An Overview .........................................................................33
Open Command ................................................................................................................ 34 Search Path ....................................................................................................................... 38 Create Project Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 40

Close Command..........................................................................................................44 Save Command...........................................................................................................44 Save As Command .....................................................................................................44
Save As a .VUE File ......................................................................................................... 45

Undo Command..........................................................................................................46 Redo Command ..........................................................................................................46 Cut Command.............................................................................................................46 Copy Command ..........................................................................................................47 Paste Command ..........................................................................................................47 Menu Bar Command...................................................................................................47 Status Bar Command ..................................................................................................48 Refresh Data Command..............................................................................................48 Recently Used Files Command ..................................................................................48 Exit Command ............................................................................................................49 Supporting Other Software: An Overview .................................................................50
MicroStation Design File Working Units ......................................................................... 51

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents
AutoCAD Design File Working Units.............................................................................. 52 SAT Design File Working Units....................................................................................... 52 Working with .dwg, .dxf, and .sat Files: An Overview .................................................... 52 SmartPlant Review Files................................................................................................... 53

Working with Views: An Overview................................................................................55 Arranging the View Commands: An Overview .........................................................56
Arrange All Command...................................................................................................... 56 Arrange Icons Command .................................................................................................. 56 Cascade Command............................................................................................................ 56 Elevation Command.......................................................................................................... 57 Four View Layout Command ........................................................................................... 57 Full Screen Command....................................................................................................... 57 Main Command ................................................................................................................ 58 Plan Command.................................................................................................................. 58 Refresh Command ............................................................................................................ 58 Refresh All Command ...................................................................................................... 58 Restore All Command....................................................................................................... 59 Scroll Bars Command ....................................................................................................... 59 Single View Layout Command......................................................................................... 59 Text Command ................................................................................................................. 59 Three View Layout Command.......................................................................................... 60 Tile Horizontally Command ............................................................................................. 60 Tile Vertically Command ................................................................................................. 60

Common View Commands: An Overview.................................................................61
Common Views Control ................................................................................................... 61 Looking Plan (Top) Command ......................................................................................... 62 Looking North (Front) Command..................................................................................... 62 Looking West (Right) Command...................................................................................... 62 Looking Up (Bottom) Command...................................................................................... 62 Looking South (Back) Command ..................................................................................... 63 Looking East (Left) Command ......................................................................................... 63 Isometric (Top Front Right) Command ............................................................................ 63 Isometric (Top Front Left) Command .............................................................................. 63 Isometric (Top Back Right) Command............................................................................. 63 Isometric (Top Back Left) Command............................................................................... 63 Isometric (Bottom Front Right) Command....................................................................... 64 Isometric (Bottom Front Left) Command......................................................................... 64 Isometric (Bottom Back Right) Command ....................................................................... 64 Isometric (Bottom Back Left) Command ......................................................................... 64 Rotate with Model Fit Command ..................................................................................... 65

Display Commands: An Overview.............................................................................66
Annotations Command ..................................................................................................... 66 Activate Axis Command................................................................................................... 66 XYZ Label Axis Command .............................................................................................. 66 Backfaces Command ........................................................................................................ 67 Buffer Updates Command ................................................................................................ 67 Coarse Facets Command................................................................................................... 67 Dashed View Cone Command.......................................................................................... 68 Display Order Command .................................................................................................. 68

4 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Dot Box Command ........................................................................................................... 68 End Caps Command ......................................................................................................... 69 Far to Near Clip Ratio Command ..................................................................................... 69 Flat Shading Command..................................................................................................... 69 Full Shading Command .................................................................................................... 70 Large Plant Monument Command.................................................................................... 70 Measurements Command.................................................................................................. 71 No Specular Command ..................................................................................................... 71 Object Textures Command ............................................................................................... 71 Outline Toggle .................................................................................................................. 72 Perspective Command ...................................................................................................... 72 Perspective Angle Command............................................................................................ 73 Redraw on Refresh Command .......................................................................................... 73 Shaded, Outline Command ............................................................................................... 74 Shaded/Wireframe Toggle ................................................................................................ 75 Show/Hide for Main View Command .............................................................................. 75 Show/Hide for Plan View Command ............................................................................... 76 Show/Hide for Elevation View Command ....................................................................... 76 Stroking Tolerance Command .......................................................................................... 76 Wireframe Command........................................................................................................ 77 Wireframe, Outline Command.......................................................................................... 77 Wireframe Background Color Command ......................................................................... 78

Toolbars: An Overview ..............................................................................................79
Annotation Toolbar........................................................................................................... 79 Common Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 80 Common View Tools Toolbar .......................................................................................... 82 Encircle Radius Toolbar ................................................................................................... 83 Using Key-In Commands ................................................................................................. 83 Measure Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 84 Motion Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 85 Navigation Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 86 Perspective Angle Toolbar................................................................................................ 87 Photo-Realism Toolbar ..................................................................................................... 88 Position Control Toolbar................................................................................................... 89 ScheduleReview Toolbar .................................................................................................. 90 Standard Toolbar............................................................................................................... 91 Tags Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 91 Tools Toolbar.................................................................................................................... 92 Tools MiniBar................................................................................................................... 93 Views Toolbar................................................................................................................... 94 Window Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 95 Customize Toolbars Command......................................................................................... 96

Changing View Settings: An Overview ...................................................................101
View Updates: Backing Store vs. Buffered Updates ...................................................... 101 View Settings Command ................................................................................................ 102

Fitting Views: An Overview.....................................................................................119
Fit All to Model Command............................................................................................. 119 Fit View to Model Command ......................................................................................... 120 Fit View to Object Command ......................................................................................... 120 Fit View to Volume Command....................................................................................... 121

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 5

Table of Contents
Fit View to Display Set Command ................................................................................. 122 Zoom In Command ......................................................................................................... 123 Zoom Out Command ...................................................................................................... 124 Zoom About Point Command......................................................................................... 125 Zoom Amount Command ............................................................................................... 125

Lighting Views: An Overview..................................................................................126
Direction Command........................................................................................................ 126 Ambient Command......................................................................................................... 127 Brightness Command...................................................................................................... 127 Stationary Light Positions Command ............................................................................. 128

Applying Range Rejection: An Overview................................................................129
Activate Range Rejection Command.............................................................................. 129 All Range Rejection Command ...................................................................................... 129 Main Range Rejection Command ................................................................................... 131 Plan Range Rejection Command .................................................................................... 131 Elevation Range Rejection Command ............................................................................ 131 Show Range Rejection Settings Command .................................................................... 131

Selecting Level Settings: An Overview....................................................................132
Level Settings Command................................................................................................ 132 Hide Level Command ..................................................................................................... 137

Viewing in Stereo: An Overview .............................................................................139
Activate Stereo Command .............................................................................................. 140 Left View Stereo Command ........................................................................................... 141 Right View Stereo Command ......................................................................................... 141 Stereo Distances Command ............................................................................................ 141

Working with Elumens: An Overview .....................................................................144
SmartPlant Review Commands Available in Elumens Mode......................................... 144 Activate Elumens Command .......................................................................................... 146 Elumens Settings Command ........................................................................................... 146

Using the View Cone: An Overview .............................................................................149 Position Control Toolbar ..........................................................................................150 View by Eye Point Command ..................................................................................151
View by Center Point Command .................................................................................... 151

Place Eye Point Only Command ..............................................................................152
Set Eye Point................................................................................................................... 152 Place Center Point Only Command ................................................................................ 153 Set Center Point .............................................................................................................. 154 Place Far Clipping Plane Command ............................................................................... 155 Place Near Clipping Plane Command............................................................................. 155 Set Clipping Planes ......................................................................................................... 155

Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview....................................................156
Define a Bore Sight......................................................................................................... 156 Place a Data Point ........................................................................................................... 156 Snap to an Element ......................................................................................................... 157

Navigating Through the Model: An Overview............................................................159 Using Motion Devices: An Overview ......................................................................160
Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview......................................................... 161

6 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Using the Keyboard: An Overview................................................................................. 171 Using the Joystick: An Overview ................................................................................... 175

Exploring Motion Types: An Overview ...................................................................178
Eye Point Command ....................................................................................................... 179 Display Set Motion Command........................................................................................ 180 Move Continuous Command .......................................................................................... 181 Move Single Step Command .......................................................................................... 182 Move Toggle Step Direction Command ......................................................................... 183 Motion Settings Command ............................................................................................. 184

Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview...............................193
Lateral Command............................................................................................................ 194 Horizontal Encircle Command ....................................................................................... 195 Vertical Encircle Command............................................................................................ 197 Surface Encircle Command ............................................................................................ 199 Clip to Encircle Sphere Command ................................................................................. 200 Maintain Encircle Clipping Command ........................................................................... 201

Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview...............................202
View Dependent Command............................................................................................ 203 View Dependent, Level Command................................................................................. 204 View Independent Command ......................................................................................... 205 Plant North Command .................................................................................................... 206

Using Project Manager: An Overview.........................................................................207 Project Manager Command ......................................................................................208
Display or Hide Project Manager ................................................................................... 208 View Items in the Model with Project Manager ............................................................. 209 Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager ................................................ 209

Dockable Command .................................................................................................210
Move the Project Manager Window ............................................................................... 210

Immediate Update Mode Command.........................................................................211 Working with Display Sets: An Overview ...................................................................213 Defining Display Sets: An Overview .......................................................................214
New Display Set Command............................................................................................ 215 New Display Set Folder Command ................................................................................ 217 Auto-Define Display Set Command ............................................................................... 218 Edit Display Set Definition Command ........................................................................... 220 Edit Display Set Position Command............................................................................... 233 Find Object Command.................................................................................................... 240 Assign Material to Display Sets Command .................................................................... 242 Display Material Command............................................................................................ 244 Import Display Sets Command ....................................................................................... 245 Export Display Sets Command ....................................................................................... 247

Manipulating Display Sets: An Overview................................................................250
Show Display Sets Command......................................................................................... 250 Show Membership Command......................................................................................... 251 Shade Display Sets Command ........................................................................................ 251 Dim Display Sets Command........................................................................................... 252 Reverse Dim Display Sets Command............................................................................. 252

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 7

Table of Contents
Show Only Command..................................................................................................... 252 Hide Only Command ...................................................................................................... 254 Move Display Sets Command ........................................................................................ 256 Rename Display Sets Command..................................................................................... 256 Delete Display Sets Command ....................................................................................... 257

Making Animations: An Overview...............................................................................259 Sample Animation Workflow...................................................................................260 Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview .............................................................261
Save and Recall Views Command .................................................................................. 261 Import Saved Views Command ...................................................................................... 284 Export Saved Views Command ...................................................................................... 288

Taking Snapshots: An Overview ..............................................................................291
Snapshot Command ........................................................................................................ 292

Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview .........................................................297
Display Key Frame Command........................................................................................ 297 Play Key Frame Command............................................................................................. 300 Pause Key Frame Command........................................................................................... 301 Stop Key Frame Command............................................................................................. 302 Snapshot Key Frame Command ..................................................................................... 303

Placing Measurements: An Overview..........................................................................307 Snaplock Measurement Command ...........................................................................308
Snaplock Measurement................................................................................................... 308

Surface Measurement Command..............................................................................309
Surface Measurement...................................................................................................... 309

Measure Shortest Distance between Objects Command ..........................................310
Measure Shortest Distance.............................................................................................. 310

One Click Measurement Mode Command ...............................................................311 Move Measurement Command.................................................................................312
Move Measurement ........................................................................................................ 312

Restore Measurement Position Command................................................................313
Restore Measurement Position ....................................................................................... 313

Delete Last Measurement Command........................................................................314
Delete Last Measurement ............................................................................................... 314

Delete All Measurements Command........................................................................315
Delete All Measurements................................................................................................ 315

Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview...................................................316
New Measurement Collection Command ....................................................................... 317 Edit Measurement Collections Command ...................................................................... 318 Delete All Measurement Collections Command ............................................................ 328 Delete Active Collection Measurements Command ....................................................... 329

Using Annotations: An Overview .................................................................................331 Communicating with Tags: An Overview................................................................332
Place Leader Command .................................................................................................. 333 Place No Leader Command ............................................................................................ 335 Edit Tags Command ....................................................................................................... 337

8 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Delete Tags Command.................................................................................................... 340 Find Tags Command....................................................................................................... 341 Find Tags Results Command .......................................................................................... 344 Next Tag Command........................................................................................................ 344 Previous Tag Command.................................................................................................. 345 Go to Tag Command....................................................................................................... 346 Activate Tag Display Command..................................................................................... 347 Active Only Tag Display Command............................................................................... 348 Display All Tags Command............................................................................................ 349 Display No Tags Command............................................................................................ 349 Display Tag Action Comments Command ..................................................................... 350 Import Tags Command ................................................................................................... 351 Export Tags Command ................................................................................................... 355

Placing Data Annotations: An Overview .................................................................357
Create a Data Annotation................................................................................................ 357 Edit Data Annotation Command..................................................................................... 357 Display Data Annotation Command ............................................................................... 361 Delete One Data Annotation Command ......................................................................... 362 Delete All Data Annotations Command ......................................................................... 362

Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview ............................................................363
Display Volume Annotations Command ........................................................................ 365 Place Volume Annotation Command ............................................................................. 365 Edit Volume Annotations Command.............................................................................. 370 Adjust Volume Annotation Command ........................................................................... 375 Delete Volume Annotation Command............................................................................ 380 Delete All Volume Annotations Command .................................................................... 381 Import Volume Annotations Command.......................................................................... 382 Export Volume Annotations Command.......................................................................... 383 Activate Clipping Volume Command ............................................................................ 385

Attaching External Data: An Overview....................................................................387
Open Database Command............................................................................................... 387 Edit Attachments Command ........................................................................................... 391 Edit Types Command ..................................................................................................... 395

Assigning Material Properties: An Overview .............................................................401 Assign Materials Command .....................................................................................402
About the Default Material Palette ................................................................................. 403 Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box...................................................................... 405 Assign Materials to Elements ......................................................................................... 407

Unassign Materials Command..................................................................................408
Unassign Materials ......................................................................................................... 408 Unassign Materials Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 409

Edit Materials Command..........................................................................................410
Edit Materials Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 411 Adjust Pattern Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 415 Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 416

Create Materials Command ......................................................................................417
Create Materials Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 418 Create Materials from Color Table ................................................................................. 419

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 9

Table of Contents Edit Search Path Commands ....................................................................................420
Define Search Path for Material Files............................................................................. 421

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview ......................................................423 About OpenGL Lighting...........................................................................................424 Photo-Realism Settings Command ...........................................................................426
Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................... 426

Global Lighting Settings Command .........................................................................437
Global Lighting Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 437 Set Global Lighting......................................................................................................... 445

Placing Lights: An Overview ...................................................................................446
New Point Light Command ............................................................................................ 447 New Distant Light Command ......................................................................................... 447 New Spot Light Command ............................................................................................. 447 New Light Dialog Box.................................................................................................... 448 Place a Light ................................................................................................................... 454 Edit Source Light Command .......................................................................................... 455 Delete Source Light Command....................................................................................... 458

Raytracing: An Overview .........................................................................................460
Raytrace Command......................................................................................................... 460 Raytrace Range Command ............................................................................................. 461 Edit Raytracing Options.................................................................................................. 462

Detecting Collisions: An Overview...............................................................................463 Collision Detection Command .................................................................................465
Collision Detection Dialog Box...................................................................................... 466 Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box ............................................................. 474 Select Filters for Collision Types ................................................................................... 475 Select Graphic Element Types........................................................................................ 476 Select Objects and Range................................................................................................ 477 Select Collision Display Colors ...................................................................................... 478 Select Collision Sounds .................................................................................................. 479 Run Collision Detection.................................................................................................. 480 Run Collision Detection Against Point Cloud Data........................................................ 481 View Collision Reports................................................................................................... 483

Collaborating with Others: An Overview....................................................................485 NetMeeting Command..............................................................................................488 Collaboration Run Command ...................................................................................489
Establish a Collaboration Session ................................................................................... 490 Rejoin a Collaboration Session....................................................................................... 491

Collaboration Edit Command ...................................................................................492
Collaboration Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................. 493 Edit Collaboration Settings ............................................................................................. 494

Using ScheduleReview: An Overview ..........................................................................495 ScheduleReview Settings Command ........................................................................496
ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................ 496

10 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Set ScheduleReview Project Settings ............................................................................. 503 Specify ScheduleReview Task Symbology .................................................................... 503 Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings........................................................................ 504 Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings .......................................................................... 504 Set Review Control Settings ........................................................................................... 505 Edit a ScheduleReview Project in Project Manager ....................................................... 505

New ScheduleReview Query Command ..................................................................506
New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box....................................................................... 507 Create a ScheduleReview Query .................................................................................... 509

Import ScheduleReview Projects Command ............................................................510
Import a ScheduleReview Project................................................................................... 510

Export ScheduleReview Projects Command ............................................................511
Export a ScheduleReview Project................................................................................... 511

Edit ScheduleReview Query Command ...................................................................512
Edit ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box........................................................................ 513 Edit a ScheduleReview Query ........................................................................................ 515

Task Symbology Command .....................................................................................516
Task Symbology Dialog Box.......................................................................................... 516

Auto-Association Command ....................................................................................517
Auto-Association Dialog Box......................................................................................... 517 ScheduleReview Auto Association................................................................................. 518

Add Association Command......................................................................................519
Add Association Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 519 Add a ScheduleReview Association ............................................................................... 519

Remove Association Command ...............................................................................520
Remove a ScheduleReview Association......................................................................... 520

New Project Command.............................................................................................521
New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box ..................................................................... 521 Create a New ScheduleReview Project........................................................................... 521 Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager ................................. 522

Delete Project Command..........................................................................................523
Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box................................................................. 523 Delete a ScheduleReview Project ................................................................................... 523

Set Active Project Command....................................................................................524
Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box.................................................................. 524

Refresh Active Project Command ............................................................................524 Review Controls .......................................................................................................525
Play Command................................................................................................................ 525 Pause Command ............................................................................................................. 526 Stop Command ............................................................................................................... 526 Forward Command ......................................................................................................... 526 Back Command............................................................................................................... 527 Go to Start Command ..................................................................................................... 527 Go to End Command ...................................................................................................... 527 Go to Date Command ..................................................................................................... 527 Record Command ........................................................................................................... 528

Printing: An Overview ..................................................................................................529 Page Setup Command...............................................................................................529

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 11

556 Move and Rotate Display Sets................................................................568 Glossary ................................ 534 Quick Print the Main View ............................................. 535 Quick Print the Full View ...........................................................................................537 Load Accessories Command ................................................................................................538 Modifying the Accessories Menu .................................................................................... 538 Starting Programs Automatically...........................................................................................553 Set Window Size Command ............................................. 532 Print Preview Command..................................................................................................................................... 530 Change Page Setup Options......................................................................................................................563 Performance Tips...........567 Customer Support and Documentation Comments ............................................................................... 533 Print Command................541 Paint Command ................................................................534 Print Dialog Box ....................................................564 Additional Documentation.....................................562 Annotations........................555 Move Display Set Command .............................................................................................................. 546 Deleting One or More Text Annotations: An Overview................... 536 Print the Main View at a High Resolution................................................................ 552 Setting Window Size: An Overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 550 Displaying Text Annotations: An Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................567 SmartPlant Review Utilities ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................Table of Contents Page Setup Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 540 View Point Cloud Data..............................................................................................................................................569 Index............................................................................................................................573 12 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide ..................................................................................................................................................................................................559 General Viewing Issues .........................542 Placing One or More Text Annotations: An Overview ..................................................................................559 Motion.......................................................................... 558 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................................... 536 Using Accessories: An Overview ......532 Print Preview Dialog Box .............. 553 Creating Display Set Movement: An Overview.. 556 Move Display Set Dialog Box ...................................................................................................561 Animation and Lighting................................................................................................................................. 542 Moving or Editing Text Annotations: An Overview .......................541 Manipulating Text Annotations: An Overview ........

but not necessary. This user's guide explains various procedures and commands needed to review a complex model and is intended for users who are experienced with computer fundamentals. Knowledge of 3D design systems is helpful. Send documentation comments or suggestions to PPMdoc@intergraph. Intergraph® gives you permission to print as many copies of this document that you need for non-commercial use at your company.com. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 13 . You cannot print this document for resale or redistribution outside your company. The content is the same as the online Help delivered inside the product.Preface Preface This document is the user's guide for SmartPlant® Review.

Preface 14 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

complex 3D models for in-depth analysis of process and power plants and marine structures. as well as an API for complete customization.mdb2 label database. For more information. To view this new data in SmartPlant Review. mouse. you must use the publishing process in SmartPlant Review Publisher to add the data from the FrameWorks Plus binary label files to the . Point Cloud Integrator Module . MicroStation®. process plant models can now remain live throughout the life cycle of the facility from conceptual design studies to de-commissioning. or keyboard control. Advanced features include construction simulation. easy-to-use Microsoft Windows interface allows you to navigate through the three dimensional models with a joystick. Providing a robust set of review-oriented tools for the clear and concise communication of spatial design well beyond low-end viewer capabilities. This module provides an interface to products like those offered by Leica Geosystems HDS and BitWyse Solutions.mdb2 database. With SmartPlant Review walk-through and interrogation features.Offers vendor-neutral point cloud data integration with the modeling software environment. and ACIS® SAT files without translation and is specifically designed to meet the process and power industry's requirements to dynamically visualize computer-generated three dimensional plant models.Allows FrameWorks Plus binary label data to be passed to SmartPlant Review through the publishing process. What's New in SmartPlant Review? This version of SmartPlant Review contains the following new functionality and changes. The new label data is ignored if you open the project in SmartPlant Review to directly create the . and sophisticated image generation using textures. The familiar. SmartPlant Review displays and manipulates PDS® three dimensional models as well as AutoCAD®. tagging. allowing you to manage existing-condition data by enabling the display of lasergrammetry point cloud data within SmartPlant Review. and lighting. You must publish the project using SmartPlant Review Publisher to access this binary label data. see Point Cloud Integrator Module. and model queries.Introducing SmartPlant Review Introducing SmartPlant Review Intergraph® SmartPlant® Review is the complete Microsoft® Windows® visualization environment for interactively reviewing large. FrameWorks® Plus Binary Label Data Support . SmartPlant Review provides tools for visual analysis and simulation (dynamic walk-through). SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 15 . reflection maps. page 22. stereo viewing.

Introducing SmartPlant Review Raytrace to File . including being dockable. you can now raytrace large pictures directly to an image file and specify exact height (Y) and the exact width (X) of the output image independent of the current Main window size aspect ratio. including color by object for multi-color VHL mode. page 74.Extended to include 34 available view settings.Updated to be more Windows-like. page 82. see Outline Toggle. page 77.Allows you to switch between Large Plant Monument and MicroStation coordinate readout without having to rebuild the project database. displaying information in tree and list views rather than drawers. For more information. page 277. Save View Partial Recall . The new Show Membership command allows you to show display set membership in the Text view for an auto-highlighted element. Large Plant Monument Coordinate Readout Switch . page 70. page 292 or Snapshot Key Frame Command. Outline Command. page 213. see Large Plant Monument Command. For more information. For more information. The Immediate Update Mode option allows you to control when changes made in Project Manager are rendered in the view. Additional Display Set Functionality . Updated Project Manager Interface .Display set folders can now be imported and exported. For more information. see Snapshot Command.Offers additional view display capabilities. and supporting standard Windows CTRL and SHIFT selection functions in the list view. Shaded. For more information. page 303. page 61 and Common View Tools Toolbar. For more information.Built into the Snapshot and Snapshot Key Frame animation commands. see Using Project Manager: An Overview. Outline Command. For more information. see Set Up Partial View Recall Dialog Box. see Working with Display Sets: An Overview. page 72. see Common Views Control. and Wireframe. Outline Display Mode . 16 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Updated Common Views Control and Common View Tools Toolbar Standardized functionality to match other 3D modeling software products. and options for specifying line width and color. allowing you to create libraries of specific definition information for display sets. page 207. edge-enhancement in shaded display modes.

Snapshot . click the Modules list on the About SmartPlant Review dialog box available on the Help menu.jpg. This does not include the ability to create . page 291 • Using Accessories: An Overview.VUE File.Creates an image file of the Main view. This module includes support for standard output types like . Key Features: • API Library . page 45 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview. that can be linked into your application programs to control SmartPlant Review functions. Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution.vue files in a batch mode. page 537 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 17 . The API module is not a requirement to run the custom programs. DRAPIX. • • Related Topics • Additional Documentation.Creates a . application window. only to create custom programs for SmartPlant Review. the original DRAPI C library function interface and a newer ActiveX control interface. These functions give your applications direct control over the working of SmartPlant Review instead of just sending commands that a user would enter.vue file while inside SmartPlant Review. This gives your application more control and flexibility.Introducing SmartPlant Review Using SmartPlant Review Modules: An Overview The following add-in modules further enhance the functionality found in SmartPlant Review. page 567 • Save As a . Your Visual Basic® programs may also be linked in a similar fashion using the ActiveX control interface. Tip • To see which modules are currently installed on your computer.Provides two libraries. or entire screen.vue file . API Module The Application Programming Interface (API) module includes programming libraries that allow developers to create custom programs that run with SmartPlant Review.bmp and . Save . Your Visual C® or Visual C++® programs may use either interface.

network neighborhood. This feature allows the Collaboration module to support dynamic navigation with the mouse or joystick at all passenger computers. Snapshot includes support for standard output types like . Reduces administration and training costs as an add-on feature to NetMeeting. cursor tracking.Lets all team members join efforts by working together in a single design review session. The NetMeeting toolkit allows customization of NetMeeting to accommodate SmartPlant Review and the extensive data requirements of the process industry.bmp and . and passenger and driver controls. The software updates the view immediately when a small set of instructions reach the passenger computer. The basic capabilities of NetMeeting include security. Everyone sees the latest version of the model and everyone sees the same thing. The result is excellent response times and allows collaboration even to remote locations that have less than ideal network connections. All participants see the entire collection of data with no waiting. application window.Creates an image file of the Main view. This improvement occurs because only small sets of instructions transmit to each passenger computer.not the network. chat. Processing occurs at each passenger computer so performance depends on each computer . Snapshot . Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Customization provides improved performance and reduced network traffic. Improves performance with no waiting for a large set of pixels to distribute through the network each time that the view changes. or entire screen. Key features: • Collaboration . white boarding. page 490 18 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . You can analyze the three-dimensional model and data as the driver or become a passenger by passing control to someone at another location.jpg.Introducing SmartPlant Review Collaboration Module The SmartPlant Review Collaboration module allows multiple users in different locations to view and interrogate the model simultaneously. Reduces network traffic. • Benefits of Collaboration module: • • • Related Topics • Establish a Collaboration Session. This feature reduces travel time and expenses. The collaboration module extends the use of NetMeeting by reducing network traffic and improving performance during the session. The Collaboration module allows enterprise-wide coordination of design reviews for more effective communication and improved efficiency. This module serves to enhance both SmartPlant Review and NetMeeting® as an addon service to both products.

Batch processes are not available.by day. including scaffolds (boxes).jpg. such as construction tolerances. ScheduleReview supports two popular planning programs: Primavera Project Planner versions 2. Hear sounds and see objects highlight as collisions occur. collision detection does not replace the PDS clash reporting detection capabilities. or entire screen. ScheduleReview turns data from your project planning software into a visual display of the construction or demolition progress.0B and 3. Related Topics • Detecting Collisions: An Overview. page 463 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview. This component also allows you to visualize the construction or demolition cycle in a single step .or continuously. • Collision Detection . and Microsoft Project 98. For these reasons. or fly through the model while displaying the construction sequence. Colliding objects can be highlighted in a user-definable color. Collision detection runs only in an interactive mode. including scaffolds. page 291 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview. • Snapshot . Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Volume annotations allow you to place three basic types of geometry which SmartPlant Review saves only in the project database. and lay down yards. Snapshot includes support for standard output types like . Collision information is written to a log file for review. Use ScheduleReview together with the collision detection functionality to plan safe and timely equipment installation. construction parking lots.Introducing SmartPlant Review Construction Module The Construction module extends SmartPlant Review's capabilities with integrated project scheduling and collision detection functionality.Provides a very powerful planning and tracking tool. or soft boundaries. field welds.Includes static and dynamic collision detection. Review collisions as equipment moves dynamically through the plant. work areas. Collisions can be recorded as an object (or group) is driven through the model with precision controls or moved freely with a mouse or joystick. ScheduleReview supports two popular planning programs: Primavera Project Planner® and Microsoft® Project. cylinders. Users can play a sound file each time objects collide. week. You can use volume annotations to represent many types of objects and areas in the model. For project scheduling. welds (cylinders). and spheres. such as pipe insulation. You can display the project as it should appear on a specified day. or month .bmp and . SmartPlant Review also provides several specialty types of volume annotations. page 495 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 19 .Helps analyze and visualize the process by showing objects in the context of the overall project schedule. • Volume Annotations .Used for creating an image file of the Main view. Collision detection does not take into account nonmodel tolerances. You can place boxes.0. application window. Key features: • ScheduleReview . security areas. and clipping volumes (boxes).

bmp and . symbols. • Drawing Package . by reducing the time required to process and display outline removal from hours to a fraction of a second. page 291 • Using Annotations: An Overview. intelligent outline display capability your drawing maintains intelligence even when displayed in hidden-line mode.Introducing SmartPlant Review On-Site Drawing Generation Module The SmartPlant Review On-Site Drawing Generation module is a powerful.Creates an image file of the Main view.Includes a full copy of SmartSketch with each module for adding notes. This module features fast. Snapshot includes support for standard output types like . page 331 20 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . the On-Site Drawing Generation module saves time and money. comments. Key features: Outline Mode .jpg. application window. The module also improves communication. text annotation.Assign identifying phrases to objects in the outline view with tags. Benefits of the On-Site Drawing Generation module: • • • • Saves time by eliminating the wait for the outline display to finish Improves communication by presenting your designs in a clear and understandable way as you control the display of the objects in the view and their display method on the drawing Easy to use because casual users can navigate the three-dimensional model and quickly produce a outline drawing that is ready for printing Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview. In SmartSketch. versatile product that allows you to bring design and drawing capabilities from the office to your project site. page 66 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview. or entire screen. Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. You can use the wizard to easily and quickly produce drawings for the engineering design office or the construction site. and measurements. because you control the way the drawing will appear to others. you can update the drawing in several ways: • Add notes to drawing borders • Insert overlay comments • Quickly print a drawing at a scale that you define • Add symbols You can combine the On-Site Drawing Generation module with the Simulation and Visual Effects module to create outline animations to improve the quality of your presentations. and drawing borders • Snapshot . Additionally. mouse. or keypad • Labels . This module includes a wizard that places the outline view on a drawing border inside the SmartSketch® product.Provides capabilities of a display model to navigate the model by using the joystick.

application window. Snapshot includes support for standard output types like .Includes several pre-defined material definitions. patterns. bump maps.Creates more realistic 3D effects by adding reflections and shadows to images. Stereo Viewing . background images. Raytracing . Key features: • Display Textures .jpg.bmp and . page 291 • Viewing in Stereo: An Overview. and raytraced lighting. Snapshot . page 139 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 21 . rendered using textures. flashbulb.Supports global (ambient. solar. environment boxes. photo-quality images from a 3D model. and point lights. Patterns Plus CD . page 407 • Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview. • • • • • • • Related Topics • Assign Materials to Elements. Lighting .Introducing SmartPlant Review Photo-Realism Module The SmartPlant Review Photo-Realism module provides features for creating realistic.Creates a more realistic display by assigning textures to a materials and then applying them to objects. Material Editor . High resolution . distance. Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. and fog).Creates an image file of the Main view. helps you to visualize designs during each stage of the development process and to create powerful presentations that communicate and sell your ideas to clients and managers. A realistic image.Captures the image at high resolution to produce near photo-quality plots of the model. spot.Provides complete material editor functionality for creating new material definitions and palettes.Adds dramatic depth perception to models. page 423 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview. or entire screen.

Detects collisions between point cloud elements and a graphic element.Introducing SmartPlant Review Point Cloud Integrator Module The SmartPlant Review Point Cloud Integrator module offers vendor-neutral point cloud data integration with the modeling software environment. Provides surface measurement between the point cloud vector points and any graphic object. and cost of process retrofit engineering and construction projects. This module provides an interface to products like those offered by Leica Geosystems HDS and BitWyse Solutions. effort. Helps in the planning of existing site remodeling by coupling existing configuration data provided by point cloud scans with 3D model displays. page 541 22 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Extends the use of 3D CAD to more projects. Integration of point cloud data within SmartPlant Review helps lower the time. allowing you to manage existing-condition data by enabling the display of lasergrammetry point cloud data within SmartPlant Review. Supports normal SmartPlant Review navigation features. • • • • Benefits: • • • Related Topics • Run Collision Detection Against Point Cloud Data. Key features: • Displays point cloud data when external software product is installed in conjunction with the Point Cloud Integrator module. Point clouds rendered in true color or laser intensity return color mapping. including walkthrough. page 309 • View Point Cloud Data. page 481 • Surface Measurement.

or video. .Create dynamic and original graphics. and . Snapshot can be used to create high quality anti-aliased images of any resolution. Can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. clear images. page 261 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview.tga. page 291 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 23 . . moving along the animation path for an impressive flythrough. Start with an aerial view of your facility. and developing complex motion scenarios. You can download ViZfx Web Pro with your SmartPlant Review serial number from http://www. Key features: • Animation . Snapshot Animation .jpg.jpg.bmp and .through your models by defining key frames. for example. .Introducing SmartPlant Review Simulation and Visual Effects Module SmartPlant Review's Simulation and Visual Effects module brings life to your three dimensional model by simulating the placement or removal of equipment. and then dive into it.pict. Output file types include . provided with this module. and video with a non-linear digital video editing product that includes a collection of high-end special effects.tiff.one or many . This module works with the Construction module to visually simulate the construction process where you can review the simulation on-screen or create animations for output to video.jpg.avi.com/visualization/vizfx. Import animation frames into the non-linear digital video editor product VizFx Web Pro.Used for creating an image file of the Main view. Snapshot . application window. VizFx Web Pro . The module includes support for standard output types like . Related Topics • Construction Module. page 297 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. .asp.bmp.bmp and . or entire screen. Save your animation at the resolution and size that you need. animation.Used to create high quality animation sequences. and apply anti-aliasing to produce sharp.Create animation paths . special web projects. Includes support for standard output types like . .intergraph. reviewing physical clearances. Snapshot is compatible with the Construction module for SmartPlant Review to record the simulation of the construction process. Note • • • • You can use ViZfx Web Pro to apply sophisticated special effects to your animations. page 19 • Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview.gif. performing motion studies.

page 29. page 27 • Position Control Changes. page 83. page 27 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview. Related Topics • Display Set Changes. This guide is delivered on the SmartPlant Review CD. These databases contain view settings and all other data associated with your project. see Understanding Project Databases: An Overview. There is no backward compatibility between SmartPlant Review and DesignReview. click the Search tab in the SmartPlant Review Help and enter the name of the command. with an . for you. page 27 24 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . When you open an existing model document. New Naming Convention for Label Files Label files generated by DesignReview Integrator must be in a name:value format. see Using Key-In Commands. For more information.Introducing SmartPlant Review Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview Although SmartPlant Review has been redesigned to make commands much easier to use by making them accessible from the regular menus and toolbars. and available using the Help > Printable Guides command. you cannot go back and open the project in DesignReview.mdb extension. page 26 • Measurement Changes. For more information about any SmartPlant Review command. the software also creates an additional database. Backward Compatibility After you open your project in SmartPlant Review. If your project contains label data. For more information about how to get started with SmartPlant Review. These databases have the same name as your project. . Project Databases SmartPlant Review no longer uses the various text files that DesignReview used. page 25 • Function Key Changes. you can use only those entries in the name:value format. Each project has at least one database. installed on your computer during typical and minimal set up. you can read the SmartPlant Review Installation Guide (SPRInstall. SmartPlant Review creates a new project database.pdf). page 29 • VUE File Changes. Although you can output any string from DesignReview Integrator. SmartPlant Review continues to support the Key-In commands found in DesignReview®. for your project. For more information.mdb2.

start display set numbers at a high number to allow manipulation at a future date. Lowest user ID number determines controlling display set In DesignReview. API interface issues recommend using user ID numbers greater than 512 Reserve user IDs 1 . In SmartPlant Review. the display set with the lowest user ID number is the controlling display set. SmartPlant Review lets you determine the numbering for the display sets so that it can assign display set ids with meaningful criteria based upon their particular discipline. If there are no plans for API programming. Restrictions removed regarding display set user assigned ids In DesignReview. The project length will need to be taken into consideration when the start number is determined. SmartPlant Review removes these restrictions by supporting an unlimited number of user-defined display sets and creating a memory management scheme that allocates memory only for those display sets that exist. the display set with the highest user ID number takes precedence.dst file. if needed. Do not start at 1 because a display set with a user ID number = 1 has the highest priority and would prevent you from creating a controlling display set in the future.500. then those numbers can be used. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 25 . In other words. Do not assign display set user id numbers starting at 1 When assigning display set user id numbers in SmartPlant Review. The existing SmartPlant Review API interface does not handle unlimited display sets. The display set ids are usually the key in a foreign database table. Important • Please note that this suggestion does not mean the first 512 display sets created.Introducing SmartPlant Review Display Set Changes SmartPlant Review contains the following display set behavioral changes.512 for SmartPlant Review API custom interface programming. you cannot assign a display set ID outside the range of 1 . The user ID number is no longer restricted to 1-500. A number of 1000 or greater is recommended. Unlimited number of user-defined display sets DesignReview is limited to 500 user-defined display sets per . In DesignReview. the memory for these display sets is allocated during each DesignReview session even if no display sets are defined.dst files. the controlling display set would not be able to take priority because the lowest number is already in use. but display sets with user IDs between 1 and 512. A project can have multiple .

vue and .mdb database along with other project information. page 214 • Working with Display Sets: An Overview.mdb files. Key F2 Ctrl + F3 F4 F5 Ctrl + F5 F6 F8 Ctrl + F8 F11 F12 Old Command Full Screen Toggle Manipulation Display Sets Assign Materials to Elements Main view Settings Save and Recall Views Hide Object Motion Settings Measurement New Command Assign Materials to Elements Move Display Set Hide Level (Object) Refresh Refresh All View Settings Snaplock Measurement Surface Measurement Arrange All Collision Detection Copy Main view to Clipboard Full Screen Toggle Print Main view Ctrl + F11 Copy Full View to Clipboard Related Topics • Function Keys. page 171 26 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . This convention forces you to insure that all files are delivered with a particular project. Related Topics • Defining Display Sets: An Overview. SmartPlant Review stores display set information in the . All that is needed to publish a project is the .Introducing SmartPlant Review Display set information stored in a database table DesignReview stores display set information in ASCII . page 213 Function Key Changes The following table lists the changes from function keys in DesignReview to function keys in SmartPlant Review.dst files.

you can measure the distance between two highlighted snaplock points. those edits are not permanently saved to the existing file. and you could only measure between two objects in the current view.Introducing SmartPlant Review Measurement Changes In DesignReview.vue file and use the new . SmartPlant Review requires you to start the measurement command and then select the element to measure. DesignReview would not allow you to move to another location in between measurement point selection. You can edit materials while running from a .vue file to see the new material assignments in subsequent sessions of the software. One Click Measurement Mode allows you to use a single click to select the next element to measure. and shows you the two points that you selected. Related Topics • Save As a . The . The edits are displayed as long as the . or a surface point and a snaplock point.vue file is running. One Click Measurement Mode allows you to stay in these two measurement commands after you start them. SmartPlant Review users will not be able to freely move around in the model when in One Click Measurement Mode.vue file. Related Topics Placing Measurements: An Overview. page 307 • VUE File Changes If you make new material assignments while running from a . you could only measure the distance between two snaplock points or two surface measurement points. and the distance between the points. Like DesignReview.vue file to retain those new assignments. However. a line between the two points.VUE File.vue file saves the materials that it had when it was created. You must save a new . One Click Measurement Mode has been added to SmartPlant Review for use with the Snaplock Measurement and Surface Measurement commands. SmartPlant Review allows you to move to another location between the selection of measurement points.vue file. One Click Measurement Mode makes SmartPlant Review behave like DesignReview with respect to selecting the next element to measure. two surface points. When you are not using One Click Measurement Mode. you must save a new . In SmartPlant Review. page 45 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 27 .

Old Position Control Command Motion Modes New Commands Motion > Positioning Modes Motion > Directional Modes Motion toolbar Project Manager Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position View > Place > Center Point Only View > Toolbars > Encircle Radius Motion > Move > Single Step Motion toolbar Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent Motion Motion toolbar Set motion reference angles on the Position Control > Motion tab Select Display Sets and Reference Points Encircle Point Encircle Radius Step Motion View Independent Motion Rotate about the When using any of the encircle positioning modes. To rotate around the eye point. eye point Rotating around the center point is the default. page 150. see Position Control Toolbar. The Position Control toolbar appears undocked by default. but can be docked if you prefer. For more information. Related Topics • Position Control Toolbar. Several commands from the DesignReview Position Control have been moved to other menus and toolbars. page 150 28 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . press Ctrl while using these controls. which you can display by clicking View > Toolbars > Position Control.Introducing SmartPlant Review Position Control Changes The DesignReview Position Control dialog box is now the Position Control toolbar. you can use center point or the the Bearing and Elevation buttons on the Position Control dialog box to rotate around either the center point or eye point.

project settings. saved views.mdb and . and ignore_construction_text. Important • You should back up the project databases regularly. It contains information regarding on-going modifications to tags and measurements. allowing you to set several options for the project database. display sets. you will need to know the location of your model file. For more information.mdb2 database files contain all the project data for each project and if the database files are lost or corrupted. Understanding Project Databases: An Overview The project database is crucial to any SmartPlant Review session. it creates two project database files: The first. and so on) will be lost. If you do not have a .set file are read in and used in database creation upon initial read-in to SmartPlant Review. The .dri file again. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 29 .mdb2. you must re-open your model file and let SmartPlant Review re-create the database files. However. display sets and saved views. page 42. you can define it during the initial read-in of the initial database creation by selecting the Options tab on the Create Project dialog box.mdb contains all non-graphical project information. Not only will load time be impacted. see Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box). project load time can be affected. the second. as well as any other projectcritical data. You can. These settings include ignore_dri_old_new_origin. ignore_dri_transform. material assignments. Because this data must be read into these databases during the initial entry. When SmartPlant Review opens a new three dimensional model for the first time. this is a one-time occurrence and load time should not be impacted after both the project and label database files exist. re-create these database files by deleting the existing . project name. then opening the . contains all PDS label data information linked to the . Before opening your model.set file defining the large plant monument settings or construction text settings.mdb and . measurements. Settings for large plant monument and construction text that exist in the .drv file. you are ready to start the application and open your model. pattern. or bump map files. the Create Project dialog box opens. and the materials search path for any associated palette. but all data previously written to ASCII text support files (tags.mdb2 files. projectname. however.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Getting Started with SmartPlant Review After installing SmartPlant Review. the project search path. When you open your model document for the first time.

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review

When you review MicroStation or PDS projects (especially those containing Large Plant Monument settings), setting options when the Create Project dialog box opens is especially important because these options appear only on the Create Project > Options tab. If you do not set these options when you first open the model files in SmartPlant Review project, you must delete the newly created databases and re-open the model files to access the Create Project dialog box again.

Supported Database Types SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft Access 2000 database engine by default to create the project databases, which are also compatible with Access XP and Access 2003 since they all use the same database file format. SmartPlant Review also supports Access 97 and provides an option to create the project databases in the Access 97 database format when you open your model for the first time. Caution

If you open an Access 97 database in Access 2000, do not convert the database to Access 2000 format within Access 2000. Such a conversion renders the database unreadable by Access 97. However, SmartPlant Review can read either format. Because Access 2000 databases are much faster than Access 97 databases, use the Access 2000 format databases instead of the Access 97 format. However, Access 2000 is in Unicode, which makes the database file size up to twice as large as Access 97 because the Unicode format doubles the size of text fields. The actual Access 2000 database size depends on the amount of text data in the database. This change means that if you have a database in the 250-300MB range, the size could increase up to the 500700MB range with Access 2000. Therefore, if you have the space and need the speed, use the Access 2000 format. Because of the coordinate differences between the two formats, data such as display sets, tags, and saved views are not guaranteed to be valid if you switch from large plant monument format to regular format.

30 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review

Label Database Format Change
Users upgrading from SmartPlant Review 4.2.1 or 5.0.1 must delete their existing label database (.mdb2) and allow SmartPlant Review to create a new one. To do this, go to your project folder and delete the .mdb2 file, then open the original .dri file to allow SmartPlant Review to re-create the .mdb2 label database file. The changes to the label database do not impact existing project database file (.mdb) or .vue files. However, to reconstruct the label data for an existing .vue file, simply rebuild the label database as described above, then recreate the .vue file.

Working with Large Datasets
When you work with large datasets, you can improve the performance of your computer by adjusting the Index allocation. Use the following command-line modifiers to adjust the Index allocation:

-r specifies that the initial index allocation is in pages of 4096 bytes-perpage. -q specifies that the subsequent index allocation is in pages of 4096 bytesper-page.

The initial -r allocation is executed when the master index is created just before the design data is read in. Any additional allocations will use the -q argument for additional indexes to allocate (for example: SPR.exe -r 15000 -q 20). The previous example command sets up 15,000 pages for indexes. Additional indexes are available in 20-page increments. Recommendations
• •

Estimate 50 pages (r and q units) per MB of SmartPlant Review data. Set the -r allocation up much higher than the -q allocation. Use this feature cautiously as you do not want to waste memory. The default values are -r 75, -q 20 if these options are not used on the command line. This size should accommodate smaller models like the Example model delivered with SmartPlant Review.

Related Topics • Sharing the Project Database Over the Network, page 32 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 29

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 31

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review

Sharing the Project Database Over the Network
SmartPlant Review supports sharing a common project database on a server among multiple users so that all users can share data. Although, by default, the project databases and the graphics are kept in the same folder, you can share a remotely located database among multiple users. To do this, make sure each user has a .vue file (or any project data set) on their own computers. This way they can share and create tags in a common database and still use .vue files. The .vue file is limited to a single user at a time due to the nature of the file, thus, for best performance, each user should have his own copy of a .vue file. The SmartPlant Review Publisher product is a convenient tool for distributing .vue files to users. For more information about .vue files and how to create them, see Save As Command, page 44. To open your .vue file with a remote database, use the command line functionality. For example:
SPR.exe "C:\ProjectData\abc\abc.vue" -i "\\LIGHTNING\Database\abc.mdb"

This allows you to use a database on any accessible share or folder. Multiple users can easily have a .vue file on their own computers and a share to a project database so they can have communal tags. This approach works for all supported file types. For more information, see Open Model from Command Line, page 37. Notes

For other users to be able to share your project databases, you must give those users read/write permissions to the folder where the databases are stored, read/write permissions to the databases themselves, and read/write permissions to any necessary palette and material files. If performance appears sluggish while sharing a database over the network, modify the registry entry for the Microsoft Jet database PageTimeout setting to a value less than the default 5 seconds (for example, 1/2 second). Some users have found that this default value adversely impacts performance for frequent database accesses. Reducing this value may improve performance. Any changes to the registry are at your own risk. For more information, see Performance Tips, page 564.

32 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review

Opening a Model File: An Overview
When you open your model for the first time in SmartPlant Review, SmartPlant Review creates a new project database if a database does not already exist. All of the data concerning your project is stored in this database. An additional database with an .mdb2 extension is created if the project contains label data. For more information about project databases, see Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 29. SmartPlant Review requires writeable databases to run. If you try to use a database that is write protected or in a write protected folder or share, SmartPlant Review will look for a temporary folder to copy the databases to so that they are writeable and SmartPlant Review can run. If you have defined the environment variable SPRTEMP, SmartPlant Review uses that environment variable's specified folder path for the copied database. If SPRTEMP is not defined, then the system defined temporary folder will be used instead. SmartPlant Review attempts the following locations: 1. The path specified by the TMP environment variable. 2. The path specified by the TEMP environment variable, if TMP is not defined. 3. The Windows folder, if neither TMP nor TEMP are defined. To define a user environment variable, do the following: 1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel > System. 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. Click Environment Variables 4. Under User variables click New. 5. Type SPRTEMP in the Variable Name field. 6. Type the full path to the temporary folder that you want SmartPlant Review to use in the Variable Value field.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 33

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review

Open Command
File > Open Allows you to select the model that you want to view using SmartPlant Review. If there is already an open model, SmartPlant Review closes that model and then opens the new one. SmartPlant Review automatically upgrades any databases in previous versions to the current version the first time you open the project. You can open a model from a command line prompt. See Open Model from Command Line, page 37 for more information. The model must exist in a format that SmartPlant Review can interpret. This format usually has a .dri extension and consists of ASCII text. However, you can select .pvi files, .vue files, or any model file (such as, .dgn, .dwg, .sat, .dxf, or .prp files). The .dri, .pvi and .vue files display automatically in the Files of Type field. AutoCAD and SAT files do not include intelligent data. Therefore, label files are not available for use with these types of files. These files generally have .dwg, .dxf, and .sat extensions. SmartPlant Review supports AutoCAD files through version 14 and AutoCAD 2002. SAT files are supported through ACIS. Warning

If you stop loading a model when it was initially being read into SmartPlant Review, you may invalidate display set definitions or manipulations because all the elements in the display sets were not loaded.

Related Topics • Exit Command, page 49 • Save As Command, page 44 • Save Command, page 44

34 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review

Open a Model File
1. Start the software by clicking Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant Review. 2. Click File > Open. Important If you are opening a model that already has project databases associated with it (that is, you have opened the model in a previous version of SmartPlant Review), we recommend that you allow SmartPlant Review to re-create these databases when you first open your model in this version of the product. 3. In the Open dialog box, browse to the model file that you want to open.

4. In the file list, select the model file, and then click Open. The Create Project dialog box appears if the model is being opened in SmartPlant Review for the first time or if the project and/or label databases have been deleted. 5. On the Database tab of the Create Project dialog box, browse to or type a location for the Project Schema and Label Schema files. Database Tab (Create Project Dialog Box), page 40 6. Type a name and ID in the Site Name and Site ID boxes. Tip The site name and site ID provide identification information for the project. This information is stored in the project database. Defining specific site names and IDs can help your administrator identify where the data in the project database comes from. 7. Check the Access 2000 database format option if you want to create the project databases in Microsoft Access 2000 format. If left unchecked, the databases are created in Access 97 format.

8. On the Options tab, specify the DRI parameters for large plant monuments options for opening PDS documents in SmartPlant Review. Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box), page 42 9. On the Options tab, specify the DGN file elements options for opening MicroStation documents and PDS projects containing MicroStation .dgn files. Caution

Be sure to choose the options that you want. The only way to set these options again is to delete the project database files (.mdb and .mdb2) and then re-open the model file to create a new project database files. You also can change the name of the model file to start over with a new name.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 35

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Because of the coordinate differences between the two formats, data such as display sets, tags, and saved views are not guaranteed to be valid if you switch from large plant monument format to regular format. 10. Click OK to save the project settings.

Notes

You can change the path (folder location) to the project databases, but you cannot change the names of the databases. The names are based on the name of the model document. If SmartPlant Review encounters a bad element, a message appears in the text view indicating that the software found an element of a particular geometric type. The message also gives the block and byte location of the element in the .dgn file. You can use a tool such as MicroStation EDG to repair many bad elements. If you do not have a .set file defining the large plant monument settings or construction text settings, you can define it during the initial read-in of the initial database creation by selecting the Options tab on the Create Project dialog box. SmartPlant Review does extensive range validation on geometric elements in .dgn files. Elements that are off the design plane are considered bad elements. To accommodate large plant monument data, the current validation range is the large plant monument point, if one exists, plus or minus 4294967294 units of resolution (UOR). SmartPlant Review alerts you to the problem element with a message in the Text view. You can log Text view messages to a text file for later review. Settings for large plant monument and construction text that exist in the .set file are read in and used in database creation upon initial read-in to SmartPlant Review. These settings include ignore_dri_old_new_origin, ignore_dri_transform, and ignore_construction_text. In the standard SmartPlant Review product, there is no longer a limit on the large plant monument range. However, if you use the API to recall saved views, the maximum new origin is the range -2147483647 to +2147483648. You can bypass this limitation with the API by getting the eye and center point information directly from the database after you save any changes to views in the current session.

Related Topics • Create Project Dialog Box, page 40 • Large Plant Monument Command, page 70 • Open Command, page 34

36 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review

Open Model from Command Line
You can start SmartPlant Review from a command line prompt. Syntax:
SPR.exe [input file] [-a] [-c (y|n)] [-d] [-e (y|n)] [-f (y|n)] [-g (y|n)] [-h (y|n)] [-i database file name] [-j database schema file name] [-k database site name] [-l log file name] [-n database site id] [-o] [-p label schema file name] [-q value] [-r value] [-s] [-t] [-v]

Where: -a -c (y|n) -d -e (y|n) -f (y|n) -g (y|n) Uses PDS area corner clip coordinates from the .dri file. Keeps construction text. Specifies that design file is being input. Uses .dri file transform. Uses .dri file old and new origin. Turns on (y) or off (n) the use of Software GL. This option allows you to use the Microsoft generic software OpenGL implementation instead of a specialized hardware video driver. Use this option only as a last resort if there are problems with the hardware video accelerator. This option should be necessary only for video accelerators that do not allow you to turn off hardware acceleration. Most video accelerators allow you to control this option from Control Panel > Display program. Keeps lines and line strings. Project database file name.

-h (y|n) -i [database full path file name] -j [database schema file name] -k [database site name] -l [log file name] -n [database site id] -o -p [label schema file name]

Project database schema file name.

Project database site name field. Writes text window data to a log file using [log file name]. Project database site id field, limited to field size in schema. Turns range rejection off. This option will be overridden by .set file or database settings. Specifies the file name for the label schema.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 37

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review -q [integer value] -r [integer value] -s -t -v -? Specifies the subsequent index allocation in pages. We recommend a value of -q 20. Specifies the initial index allocation in pages. We recommend 50 pages per MB of design data. Uses default settings (not the options currently in .set file). Skips loading of textures for this session. If you use this flag, you cannot view textures for the entire session. Uses the Access 97 database format to create the project database. Displays this usage statement.

Search Path
The Search Path defines where the related .dgn files are stored for your project. This feature allows you to store model files and label data files in a folder other than where the project files are stored. Multiple users sharing the same design data will find this feature useful. The Search Path is defined in the SmartPlant Review interface (.dri) file. To use the Search Path feature with your own projects, edit the .dri file with a text editor such as Notepad. SmartPlant Review looks for design and label files in the folders defined in the .dri file dgn_search_path entry. Use a semicolon (;) to separate multiple paths. For example:
dgn_search_path{d:\samples\dgndata\example;e:\projects\example;c: \dgnfiles}

SmartPlant Review first searches for the file name as specified in the .dri file. If the file name is not found, it then looks for the file in the project folder (where the .dri file resides), and then searches in the list of folders in the order given in the path entry. SmartPlant Review reads the first file found and stops the search. SmartPlant Review assumes that the label file is in the same folder as the project file. Note

Defining the Search Path is not the same as defining the search paths to the pattern, palette, or bump map files associated with your project. To define the search paths to these files, use the Search Path dialog box. For more information, see Search Path Dialog Box, page 39.

38 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review

Search Path Dialog Box
Allows you to specify the paths to the palette, pattern, or bump map files associated with your project. The Search Path dialog box appears while SmartPlant Review is opening your project file for the first time if it cannot find, in the Search Path, the patterns or bump maps assigned to the model.

Directory - Allows you to specify a folder containing the pattern or bump map file that you are assigning to the current object. Browse - Allows you to specify a different folder. Search Path - Displays the folders currently in the search path and allows you to add and remove folders, and to re-order the list of folders. Add - Adds the current folder to the bottom of the search path list of folders to use for searching for pattern or bump map files. Delete - Removes the selected folder from the search path list of folders to use for searching for pattern or bump map files. Move Up - Moves the selected folder up one level in the search path list of folders. SmartPlant Review searches first for folders listed closer to the top. You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list. Move Down - Moves the selected folder down one level in the search path list of folders. SmartPlant Review searches last for folders listed closer to the bottom. You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 39

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review

Create Project Dialog Box
Displays when you open a model for the first time, allowing you to set several options for the project databases. After setting the options on the Create Project dialog box, you cannot change these options unless you delete the existing project databases and re-open the original .dri file. Important

When you review MicroStation or PDS projects (especially those containing Large Plant Monument settings), it is especially important to set these options when the Create Project dialog box opens because these options appear only on the Create Project > Options tab. If you do not set these options when you first open the model files in SmartPlant Review, you must delete the newly created databases (.mdb and .mdb2) and re-open the model files to access the Create Project dialog box again.

Database Tab (Create Project Dialog Box)
Allows you to specify database information for the project that you are creating. The following options apply to all model files being opened for review.

Name - Displays the name of the database associated with the project. The name is based on the .dri, .dgn, .dwg, .dxf, or .sat document name. This box is read-only. When using the use interface to create a project database, the path and base file name of the database are always the same as the path and base file name of the project file. From the user interface, you cannot change the name of the database unless you change the base name of the project file. If you change the name of the .dri, .dgn,

40 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

1 or earlier versions. You can type a maximum of four letters or numbers in this box. The label schema file defines the table layout in the label database.2 cannot use Access 2000 format. you should not edit it. If left unchecked. Although you can open and review the project and label databases in Access 2000. Click Browse to select another label schema file.dxf or .Displays the name of the label schema file. you may want to create your project databases in the default Access 97 format. If disk space is limited and other project parameters do not require the use of Access 2000. Such a conversion renders the database unreadable by SmartPlant Review versions 4. Project schema . the project database will be created in Access 97 format. you should not edit it. The site name is stored in the site table and helps you to identify the database or its origin. see Sharing the Project Database Over the Network. Click Browse to select another project schema file. page 32. .Sets the site name. The schema file defines the layout of tables in the database. Although the label schema file is a text file. However. Site ID . Notes • • SmartPlant Review versions prior to 4. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 41 . This fact is helpful if you want information from different sites for activities. Access 2000 database format .1 and earlier. the Create Project dialog box appears again.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review . creating the databases in Access 2000 enhances performance.Displays the name of the project schema file. Doing so will render your databases unreadable by SmartPlant Review. If you open a SmartPlant Review Access 97 database in Access 2000 and you want to use the database with SmartPlant Review 4. Although the schema file is a text file.dwg. such as merging tables or tags.Creates the project database in Microsoft Access 2000 format. Site Name . do not edit or alter these files using Access 2000. To create or use a database in a remote location.Sets an abbreviation for the site name identifier.sat document. do not convert the database to Access 2000 format. You will notice a significant file size increase in the Access 2000 files because Access 2000 uses Unicode rather than ANSI format. Label schema . allowing you to create a new database.

42 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . To ignore the large plant monument and keep the coordinate readouts the same as the MicroStation coordinate readouts. DRI file parameters for PDS large plant monument options . select both the Use transform and Use old and new origin options. To use the new_origin and transform settings in the . if any.0). Use old and new origin . The transformation may be an identity matrix.Large plant monuments are translated from PDS to SmartPlant Review in the . Either origin may be defined as (0. including the transformation and range of the geometry when a Large Plant Monument point is present in the . The new origin translates the model coordinates post rotation. impacting Fit and other SmartPlant Review operations for MicroStation and PDS projects. implying no translation.dri file. With these settings. The old origin is the reference point for the rotation and is used to translate coordinates prior to rotation.0. coordinate readouts will be translated as specified by the large plant monument point in the .Uses the old and new origin for PDS projects if the PDS project contains a defined large plant monument.dri. These options also can affect the range of the model. clear both the Use transform and Use old and new origin boxes. The translation point shifts the model coordinates by the specified large plant monument delta.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) Allows you to specify project-level options for the project that you are creating.dri file. Use transform .Uses the 3x3 transform (rotation) matrix if the PDS project contains a defined transformation.dri file using the old_origin and new_origin entries. which implies that no transformation occurs.

Keep named views . a coordinate point will be modified as follows when you select this option: 1. point = transform * point (if a transform matrix is defined and is not an identity matrix) 3. Turn on this option to use the newer brighter colors. Use bright default colors .dgn files. Keep lines and line strings . The model display rate is slower when this option is used.old origin (in other words. do not check this option if you have placed construction text at extreme points in the MicroStation model or PDS project. • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 43 . Now. point = point . Turn this option off to use the darker colors as in previous versions of the software. and ignore_construction_text. If there is not an available group. tags. If you turn on this option.Uses the lines and lines strings in the MicroStation model or PDS project. the old origin is the reference point for the rotation or simply the coordinate about which the model is rotated) 2. If you do not have a . Settings for large plant monument and construction text that exist in the . and saved views are not guaranteed to be valid if you switch from large plant monument format to regular format. you can choose the traditional darker colors or use a non-gamma corrected color table. you can read the named views automatically as Save/Recall views in SmartPlant Review. The software saves named views from .Getting Started with SmartPlant Review For example.set file defining the large plant monument settings or construction text settings. The non-gamma corrected color table is typically much brighter and looks more like MicroStation colors.dgn file named view. MicroStation can save named views to . Notes • Because of the coordinate differences between the two formats. For better view manipulation.dgn files the first time that they are encountered. the software creates a new group called Named views from dgn files in which to save the .Uses the construction text in the model.set file are read in and used in database creation upon initial read-in to SmartPlant Review.Keeps any named views found in the MicroStation design file. These settings include ignore_dri_old_new_origin. you can define it during the initial read-in of the initial database creation by selecting the Options tab on the Create Project dialog box. If the named view exists. Traditionally SmartPlant Review darkened the file color table with a gamma correction. Because of this. data such as display sets. ignore_dri_transform. point = point + new origin (results in a translation point) Keep construction text . it is not overwritten during subsequent sessions.Uses a non-gamma corrected color table. any edits that you make in SmartPlant Review to the views are preserved. depending on the number of lines or line strings in the model.

This format dramatically decreases the required time to read in large models.mdb file. page 261 Save As Command File > Save As Saves the project in . you can take a snapshot of that area of the model. This command is similar to the standard Save As command in the Windows environment. 44 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .vue format. Related Topics • Save As a . A . Important • To use this functionality. Note • The software does not save text annotations when you exit SmartPlant Review unless you turn on the Persist option when you place the annotation. and all of the data associated with the model.VUE File. Related Topics • Exit Command.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Close Command File > Close Allows you to close the current project without exiting SmartPlant Review.vue file is a container file that allows you to quickly read and change data.vue format. you must install the Application Programming Interface (API) module. the only use for this command in SmartPlant Review is saving a file in . page 45 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. However. The Save command reads all the project information in the current session and writes it to the . page 49 Save Command File > Save Allows you to record information that you have updated in the model. The software posts the changed material to the database. If you need a record of the text annotations that were not placed with the Persist option turned on.

A . page 44. This action confirms that all of the new data related to the .dri file is the primary method for opening SmartPlant Review. you must install the Application Programming Interface (API) module. • • Related Topics • Save Command.dri file information.vue) is recommended.dri file is a text file that Plant Design Integrator creates and uses to reference all related.vue file to avoid confusion. assigning the same name to the .vue file to retain those new material assignments. Notes • The Save As command only allows you to save a file in . in less time. see Save As Command.dri file.vue file to save the correct information. If you modify your . you have to save a new .vue file. which allows the .dri and .dri file is properly read in. you must save a new .dri file again.vue format. Select a destination folder. • • Save As a . page 44 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 45 . Click File > Save As. and all of the data associated with the model.vue file.dri and mymodel. 2. 4.dri file and . • 5. For more information. If you make new material assignments while running in a . If you make new material assignments while running in a . Type a file name.dri file by adding or removing files. Click Save. To use this functionality. you need to start over with this workflow by reading in the .dri file by adding or removing files. If you modify your . This action confirms that the software properly reads in all new data related to the . you need to reopen the .VUE File 1.vue files (for example. Open the model that you want to save as a .vue file can read in large models. Tip To avoid confusion.vue file. design label data.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Notes • We recommend that you assign the same name to both the . mymodel. 3.vue file to retain those new material assignments. The . The .

page 172 Redo Command Edit > Redo Re-applies the previously undone view manipulation. Related Topics • Standard Control Keys. page 172 Cut Command Edit > Cut Removes the selected text from the Text view or text fields on dialog boxes and places it on the Clipboard. and then clicking Cut from the shortcut menu or by pressing Ctrl + X. Related Topics • Standard Control Keys. page 281 46 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Undo Command Edit > Undo Reverses up to the last 10 view manipulations that you completed. right-clicking in a text field. page 280 • Delete a View Group. Related Topics • Copy a Saved View. Note • You can also access the Undo command by pressing Ctrl + Z on your keyboard. Note • You can also access the Cut functionality dialog boxes by selecting the text. Note • You can also access the Redo command by pressing Ctrl + Y on your keyboard. page 282 • Move a Saved View.

page 79 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 47 . Related Topics • Edit a Display Set Definition. and replaces any selection. Related Topics • Copy a Saved View.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Copy Command Edit > Copy Copies the contents of the active view to the Clipboard. page 280 Paste Command Edit > Paste Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point. page 172 • Standard Toolbar. and then clicking Copy from the shortcut menu or by pressing Ctrl + C. Note • You can also access the Copy command by selecting the text. You can use this command to place text saved to the Clipboard into text fields on dialog boxes. You can hide the menu bar to provide more space to view the model. page 232 • Edit Display Set Definition Dialog Box. Note • You can also access the Paste command by selecting the text. page 221 • Standard Control Keys. rightclicking in a text field. page 91 Menu Bar Command View > Menu Bar Displays or hides the Menu Bar. Note • Press ALT V + ALT E to redisplay the menu bar when it is hidden. rightclicking in a text field. You cannot paste text into the Text view. and then clicking Paste from the shortcut menu or by pressing Ctrl + V. Related Topics • Toolbars: An Overview.

The status bar. appears for each listed file name. the software closes the current project and then opens the new project. and display sets. The files appear at the bottom of the File menu just above the Exit command. Refresh Data Command Tools > Refresh Data Updates views with changed data. The software refreshes information such as measurements. page 34 48 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . tags. This list remains on the menu after you open a project. which provides text that describes the current state of the data that you are viewing in the window and any other contextual information. located at the bottom of the window.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Status Bar Command View > Status Bar Displays the Status Bar. provides brief messages that state the actions of the software during the refresh operation. You can open another project without exiting SmartPlant Review. Recently Used Files Command File > Recently Used Files Provides a list of files that you recently opened during editing sessions. When you select another project. The list is a handy reference when you want to return to files that you have been reviewing or editing. You can open any of the listed files by clicking the file name. Related Topics • Open Command. including drive letter. Note • The complete path.

such as the eye point. This file. page 44 • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 49 .Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Exit Command File > Exit Exits SmartPlant Review. lighting.mdb file is updated. page 44 • Save Command. Related Topics Save As a . page 45 • Save As Command. When you exit SmartPlant Review.VUE File. and perspective. the project's . clipping planes. which has the same name as your project. SmartPlant Review displays a dialog box detailing the exit process. contains all the parameters that you have set up for the model.

• Image/raster files or wipe out images • Paper space entities • Special classes or proxy objects • Shape files • Layer names or number of layers greater than 63.01. but are not limited to. SmartPlant Review displays MicroStation/J SmartSolids in shaded mode if you change the display setting to Surfaces using the MicroStation/J Change SmartSolid Display tool on the 3D Utilities tool bar prior to opening the project in SmartPlant Review. SAT Files • SmartPlant Review supports SAT files ACIS® version 11.57 files.sat file) solids. If the number of layers is greater than 63.01.0 service pack 11 or earlier. AutoCAD • SmartPlant Review supports AutoCAD® files through version 14 and AutoCAD 2002.14 and MicroStation/J 07. databases. Items not supported include. the following: Hatch lines • Arrowheads on leader lines • Dimensions • Line styles • True type fonts • Arc aligned text • Attribute definitions. there are some limitations. and software. Support also includes AutoCAD solids in .dwg files created as ACIS (. and the geometry will still be displayed. Most common geometry types are now supported. • • • While most common geometry types are now supported.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Supporting Other Software: An Overview SmartPlant Review supports the following file types.01. the layer number is computed modulo 63. 50 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .07. Single line and multi-line text are now supported using SmartPlant Reviews standard wireframe font. MicroStation SmartPlant Review supports MicroStation® SE 05.

reduction of network traffic. MicroStation Design File Working Units When MicroStation 3-D-based design files are first created. in a plant with the following: MU : feet SU : inches PU : . These coordinates appear in the status bar as you work in SmartPlant Review. Planning Software ScheduleReview supports the following planning software: Microsoft Project 98. Working units include master units (the largest unit in use in a design). sub-units (a portion of a master unit). Version 3. NetMeeting You can establish an online conference among computer users by using Microsoft NetMeeting®. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 51 . and Primavera Project Planner 3. For example. you can conduct a review session simultaneously with multiple users in different locations. and at the same time fit in the design plane. There are a fixed number of points on each axis of a design file. and thousandths of an inch as positional units.0. inches or millimeters as sub-units. SmartPlant Review offers a Collaboration module that extends the power of a conference by performance improvement. working units are defined. projects can be created using either format. Access 97 is also supported. Working units are usually referred to as MU:SU:PU. With NetMeeting. The idea in establishing working units is to make sure that the objects that you want to draw can be entered with adequate precision. Positional units are the smallest degree of accuracy possible in your design. Primavera Project Planner® 2. and positional units (a portion of a sub-unit).Getting Started with SmartPlant Review Databases Microsoft Jet Access 2000 is the engine used by default for creating the SmartPlant Review databases. You can change your working units at any time through using MicroStation. SmartSketch SmartPlant Review Online Drawing Generation module supports Intergraph SmartSketch® 5.0B. Therefore.0.001 inch (one thousandth) An 8 3/4-foot pipe would be measured as 8:9:0.01. and decrease in response time. Most models in SmartPlant Review use feet or meters as master units. Working units are coordinate units that correspond to the position and definition of a point in a design file.

SAT Design File Working Units The SATACIS. and so forth are converted to their equivalent values in meters for measurement.dxf. angstroms. The ACIS . The AutoCAD 2000 unit less type is displayed as inches. SmartPlant Review uses one line (Read Default Units=61) in this file to set the read units. . In versions prior to AutoCAD 2000. Working with . and . a more extensive set of units became available and are supported.sat Files: An Overview SmartPlant Review now has the ability to open and load . • The . The . you do not need to convert the files to another format. SmartPlant Review reads 3-D . • • 52 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .dxf. you do not need to convert the files to another format. Starting with AutoCAD 2000.dxf format is the standard Drawing Exchange Format file that many three dimensional design systems use.dwg. it is important to scale them. . However. Because the SAT coordinates are very small.dwg format files directly. The following is a brief description of each of these new file types.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review AutoCAD Design File Working Units The AutoCAD translator looks for units saved in the AutoCAD file. You may manipulate these file types in the same way that you manipulate standard SmartPlant Review files (such as . SmartPlant Review can read one SATACIS. If no units are found in the AutoCAD file.dwg format is the standard file type for AutoCAD. then meters are assumed. engineering and architectural English units could be saved in AutoCAD design files.dwg.INI file (delivered to the C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\Review folder during installation) contains the working units for SAT files.dxf format files directly. and .sat format allows you to exchange intelligent 3-D objects and related data between applications.sat file formats. SmartPlant Review reads 3-D .dgn).INI file at a time. some of the more rare units such as parsecs.

SmartPlant Review looks first in the folder specified by the DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. . You create this file.mat Text files that contain the material assignments to objects in the corresponding design file. An example palette file might be metal.txt An ASCII text file SmartPlant Review uses to establish the pre-defined template used by the Place Tag command. 40eqp01.txt. Several design files are referenced by one SmartPlant Review interface (.mat file corresponds to a design file with material assignments. They can have any name.pal.Getting Started with SmartPlant Review SmartPlant Review Files SmartPlant Review accesses and creates several different files that are associated with a model. The material file is given the design file name with a . You must use a . An example material file might be sarea38. 40eqp01. For example. The .dri label data tagseed. This palette file would contain all the material definitions for items such as bronze. model. and any extension or no extension. iron. (A . Label files are text files that contain database information. . and others. There is a one-to-one correspondence with the design file. label data files.dgn. and sarea39.dri) file.dgn.drv. and sarea39. Text files that contain database information about elements in the design file.pvi files.dgn The MicroStation-based design files that you open in SmartPlant Review.drv.dri file references all the design files.dgn. respectively.mat. 40eqp01.) Each design file can have a label file associated with it. and other files that are associated with a model. in the example model (model.prp are named 40pipe01. For example. Palette files that contain material definitions. (See the SmartPlant Review Programmers online help for more information on file formats.dri extension. This file would contain the object level and color numbers. This is an ASCII text files and the primary way that you enter SmartPlant Review.pal SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 53 . If it is not there. You can create a . For example.dri references 40pipe01. Each . along with the material assigned to them. Label files are given the design file name with a three-character extension. SmartPlant Review searches your home folder and then C:\ before assuming that the file does not exist. aluminum.prp file is another type of design file created by plant design applications.dri).mat extension. and it should be called tagseed.) This file is given the model name with a .prp. the label files for 40pipe01.drv. The descriptions of these files are below: .dgn.dri file from scratch or by converting old . sarea39. A palette file can be used with a number of models.dri file to indicate which label files go with which design files. and so on. . all elements in the file on level 8 with color number 12 might be assigned to bronze. Any file with elements using these materials will reference this palette file.

and other files that are associated with a model. page 51 • SAT Design File Working Units. The .dwg.vue files from the Save As option within SmartPlant Review.dgn files.dxf . you must install the API module. green. .sat Files: An Overview. label files are not available for use with .Getting Started with SmartPlant Review . page 52 • MicroStation Design File Working Units. Because AutoCAD design files do not contain intelligent data with the graphics.dwg . such as eye point. page 52 54 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . .vue . This is an old file type that was created by plant design applications and is in a proprietary non-text format.dxf.pvi file references all the . File created in SmartPlant Review. label files are not available for use with . and blue (rgb) data values of a screen image in a single file. Contain the view parameters set up for the model. These files allow you to exchange intelligent 3-D objects and related data between applications. page 50 • Working with . and . lighting.pvi Intergraph image files with a color file format that stores the red.sat Related Topics • AutoCAD Design File Working Units. Files that you can access when you enter SmartPlant Review.dwg files. and perspective. A container file called . This file is used by the Intergraph ModelView™ software. The file is given the design file name with a .vfa extension. label data files. You can create .dxf files.rgb . Because AutoCAD design files do not contain intelligent data with the graphics. page 52 • Supporting Other Software: An Overview.vue rapidly reads in and manipulates data. AutoCAD design file. To use this functionality. AutoCAD design file.vfa .

Elevation View .Displays an overview of the area or location in which you are working. The elevation view displays the front view of the model and appears only in wireframe. and a view cone. The Main view can be displayed in either shaded or wireframe form. unless the Single View Layout option is turned on and the view is switched from the Main view. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 55 .Serves as the primary working view and is always displayed. see Changing View Settings: An Overview. Most of the review and positioning changes that you make appear here. your position. Plan View . The Plan view displays the top view (how the model appears when you look down on it from directly above) and appears only in wireframe form. Main view .Working with Views: An Overview Working with Views: An Overview The primary SmartPlant Review user interface consists of a set of image displays. which appear within views.Displays an overview of the area or location in which you are working. and a view cone. page 101. your position. Images and information appear in the following view types. For more information on changing what and how objects display in the Main view.

such as. three. The Copy command is also available in the graphical views for copying the view image to the Clipboard. Cascade Command Window > Cascade Arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that you can see part of each window. Arrange All Command Window > Arrange All Returns all toolbars and views back to the default configuration.Displays information appropriate to the current command context. This selective updating improves productivity by avoiding unnecessary image updates. There are times when all the views are updated. or all four views. the text for the active tag. and other times when some of the views are not updated. 56 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Notes: • You can resize each view. measurement data. You can use the Window > View Layout commands to display or cycle through one. • • Arranging the View Commands: An Overview SmartPlant Review provides various commands for displaying. The Copy command is available for copying text from the Text view. label search data. Views are updated according to the action that you are performing in the views. arranging. You can copy text from the Text view to the Clipboard for pasting into another field or application. and updating the different view windows. but not limited to.Working with Views: An Overview Text View . and component attribute data. Arrange Icons Command Window > Arrange Icons Arranges the collapsed window icons within SmartPlant Review so that you can see each icon.

and Text views are not resized unless they are maximized to occupy the entire application window.Working with Views: An Overview Elevation Command Window > Elevation Turns on or off the Elevation view. You can also activate Full Screen mode by clicking the Views toolbar or by pressing F11. the toolbars. Plan. Note • You can also access the Four command by clicking the Four View Layout button on the Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 4 on your keyboard. Project Manager remains displayed if active. You can use the Alt + V then Alt + E key sequence to display or hide the menu bar in full screen mode. Turning Full Screen off causes SmartPlant Review to display only on the left monitor of dual monitor systems. Main. This command is very useful for stereo viewing. The Main. Notes • Full Screen mode expands the application window to occupy the entire monitor screen. Full Screen Command View > Full Screen Increases the current view layout on the screen. If you have a dual monitor system. Four View Layout Command Window > View Layout > Four Opens the Plan. Elevation. because window borders can impair the stereo visual cues. Full Screen uses both monitors. and Project Manager are hidden when Full Screen mode is activated. This command retains the show/hide and window positioning information of the Full Screen toolbar. Elevation. Full Screen mode is particularly useful to enhance stereo viewing. but placing the mouse at the top of the screen does not display the menu bar. button on the • • • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 57 . The menu bar. and Text views.

Any item. Refresh Command Window > Refresh Redraws the current view to update the current window contents. or toolbar. Plan. Therefore. you should use caution when placing these items. Any item. Plan Command Window > Plan Turns on or off the Plan view. Refresh All Command Window > Refresh All Redraws all of the views to update the current window contents. to improve system performance and to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image.Working with Views: An Overview Main Command Window > Main Turns on or off the Main view. or toolbar. 58 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . or Elevation view during a refresh is included in the saved (backing store) image. Plan. Notes • • Press Esc to stop a view update in progress. to improve system performance and to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image. that overlaps the Main. such as a window. you should use caution when placing these items. dialog box. Therefore. such as a window. dialog box. that overlaps the Main. Notes • • Press Esc to stop a view update in progress. or Elevation view during a refresh is included in the saved (backing store) image.

The step arrows pan by the motion rates set in the Motion > Settings command. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 59 . • Text Command Window > Text Turns on or off the Text view. Elevation. Snapshot. Plan. and Raytrace Render commands are disabled. page 184 • Single View Layout Command Window > View Layout > Single Closes the Plan. Scroll Bars Command Window > Scroll Bars Turns on or off the scroll bars for the Main. Related Topics Motion Settings Command. If the Main view is not visible. The Single View Layout is useful if you are viewing the model using Full Screen mode. Notes • You can also access the Single command by clicking the Single View Layout button on the Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 1 on your keyboard. these scroll bars let you pan around the current view plane of the view. Project Manager remains displayed if active. When displayed. The default sizes are set to the view sizes that you were using when you exited the application. the Print. and Text views leaving only the Main view active.Working with Views: An Overview Restore All Command Window > Restore All Resets the size of all open views to the current default sizes. and Elevation views.

Working with Views: An Overview

Three View Layout Command
Window > View Layout > Three Displays the Plan, Elevation, and Main views while hiding the Text view if active. Project Manager remains displayed if active. Note

You can also access the Three command by clicking the Three View Layout button on the Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 3 on your keyboard.

Tile Horizontally Command
Window > Tile Horizontally Arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each window is completely visible.

Tile Vertically Command
Window > Tile Vertically Arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each window is completely visible.

60 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Common View Commands: An Overview
SmartPlant Review provides predefined view orientations for moving around in the model in either linear (about eye) or encircle (about center) mode. These common view commands are available on the View > Common menu, the View > Toolbars > Common Views Tools toolbar, and the Common Views control. Related Topics • Common View Tools Toolbar, page 82

Common Views Control
View > Toolbars > Common Views Displays the Common Views control, which provides a graphical display used to select the angle from which you view the model. The control is a three-dimensional wireframe box that consists of white circles on each corner and three white arrows that point to the faces. Each corner circle, arrow, or face of the box highlights in yellow as you pause the pointer over it. You can select one of the six faces of the 3D box to change your view to a 2D view, or you can select one of the eight corner circles to change your view to an isometric view.

Use the Rotate with Model Fit between the common views.

button to update and fit the view when you switch

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 61

Working with Views: An Overview Notes

You can dock the Common Views control at the edge of the window, or you can let it float like a dialog box. The docking areas for this control are automatically restricted to help reduce the possibility of the docking area obscuring the client area of the application window. If you are unable to dock this control where you want it, try resizing the control to be smaller or resizing the application window to be larger. The views available on this control are also available on the View > Toolbars > Common View Tools toolbar and from the View > Common menu.

Related Topics • Common View Tools Toolbar, page 82 • Rotate with Model Fit Command, page 65

Looking Plan (Top) Command
View > Common > Looking Plan (Top) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking down at the top of the model.

Looking North (Front) Command
View > Common > Looking North (Front) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking toward the north direction of the model.

Looking West (Right) Command
View > Common > Looking West (Right) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking toward the west direction of the model.

Looking Up (Bottom) Command
View > Common > Looking Up (Bottom) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking up at the bottom of the model.

62 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Looking South (Back) Command
View > Common > Looking South (Back) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking toward the south direction of the model.

Looking East (Left) Command
View > Common > Looking East (Left) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking toward the east direction of the model.

Isometric (Top Front Right) Command
View > Common > Isometric (Top Front Right) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top front right (north west).

Isometric (Top Front Left) Command
View > Common > Isometric (Top Front Left) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top front left (north east).

Isometric (Top Back Right) Command
View > Common > Isometric (Top Back Right) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top back right (south west).

Isometric (Top Back Left) Command
View > Common > Isometric (Top Back Left) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top back left (south east).

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 63

Working with Views: An Overview

Isometric (Bottom Front Right) Command
View > Common > Isometric (Bottom Front Right) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom front right (north west).

Isometric (Bottom Front Left) Command
View > Common > Isometric (Bottom Front Left) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom front left (north east).

Isometric (Bottom Back Right) Command
View > Common > Isometric (Bottom Back Right) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom back right (south west).

Isometric (Bottom Back Left) Command
View > Common > Isometric (Bottom Back Left) Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom back left (south east).

64 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Rotate with Model Fit Command
View > Common > Rotate with Model Fit Determines if SmartPlant Review updates the eye point in the Main view when you use the common view commands to rotate the model. If this command is on, SmartPlant Review fits the Main view to the model after you rotate the model. If this command is off, SmartPlant Review does not fit the model in the Main view when you rotate the model. Note

If you want to use the common view commands to rotate about an object, turn this option off and use the encircle mode to move around the object. For more information, see Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview, page 193.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 65

Working with Views: An Overview

Display Commands: An Overview
The Display commands available on the View > Display menu provide access to various display settings that control how the model displays in the various view windows.

Annotations Command
View > Display > Annotations Switches the display of text, volume, and data annotations on or off in the model. Related Topics • Display Data Annotations, page 361 • Display Text Annotations, page 552

Activate Axis Command
View > Display > Axis > Activate Switches the display of the x-, y-, and z-axes on or off. When Axis is on, a small coordinate displays in the top right corner of the view. The coordinate triad shows which direction is E (x axis), N (y axis), and El (z axis). The N arrow always points in the direction of plant north in the model relative to the current view.

XYZ Label Axis Command
View > Display > Axis > XYZ Label Axis Changes the axis labels from N, E, El to X, Y, Z. The coordinate triad shows which direction is X (east), Y (north), and Z (elevation). The Y arrow always points in the direction of plant north in the model relative to the current view.

66 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Backfaces Command
View > Display > Backfaces Draws the backsides of certain elements, such as pipes, elbows, reducers, and valves. For faster display of your model, we recommend that you turn off Backfaces. Note

Backfaces and End caps view settings are temporarily forced on during dynamic display set moves and for all Collision Detection displays. Only the display set that is in motion is affected.

Related Topics • Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box), page 103 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 102

Buffer Updates Command
View > Advanced > Buffer Updates Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays the entire view at once. When this option is on, you will see the model being drawn during updates. Related Topics • Advanced Tab (View Settings Dialog Box), page 110 • Set View Options, page 118 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 102

Coarse Facets Command
View > Display > Coarse Facets Turns off the smooth shading. Surfaces are still shaded, but the display of circular objects is very faceted. For example, pipes look like they are composed of flat sides. Related Topics • Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box), page 186 • Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box), page 103 • Maintain Render Settings, page 113

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 67

Working with Views: An Overview

Dashed View Cone Command
View > Display > Dashed View Cone Displays the view cone as a dashed line for faster wireframe updates. This option is especially useful if you are displaying animations on a computer with a slow graphic card. Related Topics • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • View Cone Tab (View Settings Dialog Box), page 106

Display Order Command
View > Advanced > Display Order Defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time the Main view updates. This is especially useful when you use the motion controls. If you are interested in particular elements or if you are working in a specific area, you can define those elements to display first. Notes

Only one display order list can exist at a time. Each time that you select this command, you are prompted to either create a new list or add to the existing list. This command is also available on the View > Toolbars > Tools toolbar.

Related Topics • Define Display Order, page 113

Dot Box Command
View > Display > Dot Box Draws distant GShape and GProjected line string elements less precisely for improved update speed. At a distance, just a few pixels (i.e., a dot box) is drawn, reducing the amount of data to update (especially in large projects with a large number of structural elements like I-beams, footings and supports). Use the Dot Box setting much like you would the Backfaces and End Caps settings on the View > Display menu. For example, turn Dot Box on and turn both Backfaces and End Caps off to increase performance at a small cost of display quality. Related Topics • Outline Tab (View Settings Dialog Box), page 105

68 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

End Caps Command
View > Display > End Caps Switches the display of pipes, valves, and reducers on or off. Important

Turn End Caps off for faster display of your model.

Related Topics • Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box), page 103 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 102

Far to Near Clip Ratio Command
View > Advanced > Far to Near Clip Ratio Displays the Set Far to Near Clip Ratio dialog box, which allows you to adjust the display quality produced by some video cards. In most cases, reducing the far to near clip ratio value improves the display quality. Tip

If some of your elements have a poor display quality, such as appearing cracked, lower the Far to near clip ratio value on the View Settings > Advanced tab. Reducing the values by a power of 2 works best. For example, reduce 1024 to 512, reduce 512 to 256, and so on until the display quality is acceptable.

Flat Shading Command
View > Display > Flat Shading Switches the display of the model to flat shading. Flat Shading displays a single color for all pixels on the surface instead of a range of slightly different colors. The Flat Shading mode is the quickest mode to update. Notes
• •

You cannot shade an image in the Plan or Elevation views. You can control the amount of time it takes for an image to appear shaded by defining a shading quality on the Display tab of the Edit Motion Settings dialog box. The Quality field defaults to Full Shading, however, you can also choose No Specular, Coarse Facets, or Flat Shading.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 69

Working with Views: An Overview

Full Shading Command
View > Display > Full Shading Provides the highest rendering mode available. This command produces a more curved appearance because various shades of the selected color are produced across the surface of the elements. Therefore, the Full Shading mode is the slowest to update.

Note

You cannot shade an image in the Plan or Elevation views.

Related Topics • Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box), page 186 • Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box), page 103 • Maintain Render Settings, page 113 • Views Toolbar, page 94

Large Plant Monument Command
View > Advanced > Large Plant Monument Allows you to switch between large plant monument translated coordinates and MicroStation coordinate readout without rebuilding the project database. To use this command, you must have used large plant monument coordinates (checked the Use transform option) when you created the project database. Note

Available only for translated models. If used on a rotated large plant monument model, rotated file coordinates are used when this flag is unchecked.

Related Topics • Create Project Dialog Box, page 40 • Open a Model File, page 35 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 29

70 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview Measurements Command View > Display > Measurements Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view. To use this functionality. This command is faster than Full Shading because the sun does not reflect bright spots on the element surface. page 186 • Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box). page 113 • Set Textures. Related Topics • Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box). page 186 • Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box). Note • Only those measurement collections for which the Tools > Measure > Edit Collections > Edit Tab > Display option is checked are displayed. Important • Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the display. Using no specular for animations can reduce some of the flickering and hot spots caused by the use of the specular component of materials. Related Topics • Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box). • Related Topics • Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box). page 103 No Specular Command View > Display > No Specular Provides smooth shading. page 103 • Maintain Render Settings. page 113 Object Textures Command View > Display > Object Textures Displays a textured shading view of the model. page 117 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 71 . page 103 • Maintain Render Settings. you must install the Photo-Realism module.

Outline Related Topics • Shaded/Wireframe Toggle.Working with Views: An Overview Outline Toggle View > Toolbars > Views > Outline Toggles the display of the model between Wireframe. This toggle works in conjunction with the Shaded/Wireframe toggle such that you can cycle through all four display modes. Related Topics • Perspective Angle Toolbar. Outline Shaded. page 75 Perspective Command View > Display > Perspective Specifies whether the model is rendered using the Perspective mode. Outline and Shaded. page 87 72 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Outline display modes. Toggle Resulting Display Full Shading Wireframe Wireframe.

such as a window. If Redraw on Refresh is off. the software automatically redraws whenever a refresh is needed or if the backing store is invalid. SPR uses a bitmap image backing store to refresh the view whenever possible. Notes • • For large models. which causes a full redraw. Any item.Working with Views: An Overview Perspective Angle Command View > Display > Perspective Angle Displays the Set Perspective Angle dialog box. Plan. which allows you to specify the perspective angle for rendering the view. Plan. Therefore. the software "captures" the graphic view in its backing store. If your saved image contains overlapping images that you do not want. Redraw on Refresh Command View > Advanced > Redraw on Refresh Sets the software to redraw everything in the selected view on refresh. You can then press Ctrl+F5 to completely redraw the saved image using Redraw on Refresh. dialog box. to improve system performance and to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image. or Elevation) updates or is overlapped by another window. then the backing store is used for all future updates unless you manually refresh the view. dialog boxes. If the view point has not changed or the window size has not changed. then when any graphic view (Main. and toolbars. such as windows. that displays over the Main. page 118 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 73 . make sure items. • Related Topics • Set View Options. turn this option off for better performance. are not overlapping the view. or Elevation view during a refresh is included in the saved (backing store) image. For performance reasons. or toolbar. you should use caution when placing these items. When Redraw on Refresh is on.

with a standard black background. page 105 74 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . you get black lines suitable for printing. Outline Switches the display of the model to shaded outline to better show the edges of objects. Tips • The default outline color is white on dark backgrounds and black on light backgrounds. However. You can specify the thickness and color of the outline using the Outline tab on the View Settings dialog box. if you change to a white or light background.Working with Views: An Overview Shaded. The outline commands automatically switch between white and black based on the current combined RGB color intensity of the background color. In other words. This command is available on if you install the On-Site Drawing Generation module. • Related Topics • Outline Tab (View Settings Dialog Box). you get white lines. Outline Command View > Display > Shaded.

page 72 Show/Hide for Main View Command View > Display > Options > Show/Hide for Main view Switches the Project Manager-associated show/hide commands for levels and display sets as applied to the Main view. page 76 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 75 . Outline Shaded. Toggle Resulting Display Full Shading Wireframe Wireframe. this command is available only if a view other than the Main view is set to honor the show/hide commands. Related Topics • Show/Hide for Elevation View Command. Outline Related Topics • Outline Toggle. Because of this. This toggle works in conjunction with the Outline toggle such that you can cycle through all four display modes. You cannot turn off the show/hide effect in all the views at the same time. page 76 • Show/Hide for Plan View Command.Working with Views: An Overview Shaded/Wireframe Toggle View > Toolbars > Views > Shaded/Wireframe Toggles the display of the model between wireframe and full shading display modes.

this command is available only if a view other than the Plan view is set to honor the show/hide commands. the better the display quality. Related Topics • Show/Hide for Elevation View Command.Working with Views: An Overview Show/Hide for Plan View Command View > Display > Options > Show/Hide for Plan View Switches the Project Manager-associated show/hide commands for levels and display sets as applied to the Plan view. large tolerance values increase the view update time. Note • Stroking Tolerance affects how the round surfaces of pipes. Because of this. page 76 Stroking Tolerance Command View > Display > Stroking Tolerance Displays the Set Stroking Tolerance dialog box. valves. The larger the tolerance. page 116 76 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . You cannot turn off the show/hide effect in all the views at the same time. Because of this. Related Topics • Show/Hide for Main View Command. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100. Related Topics • Set Stroking Tolerance. which specifies the number of facets to render on cylindrical objects. and elbows are rendered. page 76 • Show/Hide for Main View Command. page 75 Show/Hide for Elevation View Command View > Display > Options > Show/Hide for Elevation View Switches the Project Manager-associated show/hide commands for levels and display sets as applied to the elevation view. reducers. However. page 75 • Show/Hide for Plan View Command. You cannot turn off the show/hide effect in all the views at the same time. this command is available only if a view other than the Elevation view is set to honor the show/hide commands.

which is the default rendering mode. Wireframe. Outline mode. if you change to a white or light background. you get black lines suitable for printing. In other words. You can specify the thickness and color of the outline using the Outline tab on the View Settings dialog box. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 77 . Tips • The default outline color is white on dark backgrounds and black on light backgrounds. Outline Command View > Display > Wireframe. For example.Working with Views: An Overview Wireframe Command View > Display > Wireframe Switches the display of the model to wireframe. However. This command is available on if you install the On-Site Drawing Generation module. Wireframe. Outline Switches the display of the model to outline wireframe. you get white lines. you have a view in Wireframe. When you recall the saved view manually or by playing a key frame animation. with a standard black background. You can recall all other settings in the normal manner. the view remains in outline mode. Outline mode remains active even when you recall a saved view. The outline commands automatically switch between white and black based on the current combined RGB color intensity of the background color.

which allows you to change the values of the wireframe background color. Related Topics Set Background Color. page 114 • 78 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Working with Views: An Overview Wireframe Background Color Command View > Display > Wireframe Background Color Displays the Color dialog box.

see Delete One Data Annotation Command. Data Annotations turns on or off the display of data annotations. Delete All Volume Annotations removes all of the volume annotations. see Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview. For more information. see Edit Volume Annotations Command. see Displaying Text Annotations: An Overview. page 381. page 357. page 385. Edit Volume Annotation allows you to review. see Delete Volume Annotation Command. see Place Volume Annotation Command. page 375. For more information. see Activate Clipping Volume Command. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 79 . For more information. For more information. certain functions of the application are activated. see Display Volume Annotations Command. Edit Data Annotation edits the selected data annotation. edit. Delete All Data Annotation deletes all of the data annotations in the model. page 552. When you click these buttons or icons. dimensions. see Edit Data Annotation Command. Text Annotations turns on or off the display of text annotations. Activate Clipping Volume turns on or off the view of the clipping volume. page 362. see Delete All Data Annotations Command. page 380. Display Annotations turns on or off the display of annotations.Working with Views: An Overview Toolbars: An Overview A toolbar is a row of buttons or icons displayed on the screen. page 357. Place Volume Annotation allows you to place a new volume annotation. For more information. For more information. Delete Data Annotation deletes the selected data annotation. page 365. Adjust Volume Annotation allows you to change the location. page 363. For more information. see Placing Data Annotations: An Overview. Annotation Toolbar The Annotation toolbar provides easy access to some of SmartPlant Review's most commonly used annotation commands. see Adjust Volume Annotation Command. Volume Annotations turns on or off the display of volume annotations. For more information. page 365. or orientation of the selected volume annotation. page 370. For more information. For more information. Delete Volume Annotation removes the selected volume annotation. For more information. Toolbars can be customized and usually can be moved around on the screen according to your preference. page 362. For more information. see Delete All Volume Annotations Command. or create volume annotations. For more information.

see Rotate Command. For more information. see Auto-Highlight Command. Lock Elevation locks the elevation of the Main view so that it does not change during navigation or motion commands. page 204. see Lock Elevation Command. allowing you to edit motion settings. Pan moves the viewpoint of the model up. Fit View to Model adjusts the view in the window so that the entire model appears. For more information. Rotate moves the display set in incremental steps. Level View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to the direction and angle indicated by the elevation and bearing. left or right without changing the viewpoint depth. Left/Right moves the depth of the view point forward or back by moving the cursor up or down and left or right by moving the cursor left or right. Lateral moves through the model laterally. down. see Lateral Command. see Lock Center Point Command. View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to the direction in which you are looking. page 120. page 203. For more information. see Motion Settings Command. For more information. Left/Right Command. For more information. see View Dependent. see Pan Command. page 166. The eye point encircles the model on this track. For more information. page 167. page 163. Fit View to Object fits an object that you select in the active view. Auto-Highlight displays object label data in the Text window. page 184. Forward/Back. Motion Settings displays the Edit Motion Settings dialog box. see View Dependent Command. see Forward/Back. page 194. Lock Center Point locks the center point of the Main view so that it does not change during navigation or motion commands. Level Command. 80 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . see Fit View to Model Command. For more information. For more information. see Horizontal Encircle Command. For more information. For more information.Working with Views: An Overview Common Toolbar Use the Common toolbar commands to set motion parameters. page 170. page 61. For more information. page 120. page 165. For more information. page 170. For more information. For more information. Horizontal Encircle places a horizontal track around the sphere. see Common Views Control. page 195. see Fit View to Object Command. Views Control lets you select any common view by selecting the face or point from which you want to view the model.

page 102. or Simulation and Visual Effects. For more information. see View by Center Point Command. page 123. page 261. see Place Center Point Only Command. allowing you to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view or screen. page 291. For more information. Zoom In zooms into the model by the current zoom factor times the distance from the current eye and center points. page 124. Snapshot View displays the Snapshot View dialog box. see Taking Snapshots: An Overview. page 153. see Zoom In Command. This functionality is available only if you have installed one of the following SmartPlant Review modules: API. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 81 . It also allows you to recall existing views. For more information. page 151. Zoom Out zooms out of the model by the current zoom factor times the distance from the current eye and center points. see Zoom Out Command. see Fit View to Volume Command. Place Eye places the selected point as the eye point position of a new location. Collaboration. View Settings displays the View Settings dialog box. see View Settings Dialog Box. which allows you to edit the view display options. see Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. PhotoRealism. For more information. For more information. page 152. page 121. which allows you to save any display in the view window. Center View centers the model on a defined point in a specified view.Working with Views: An Overview Fit View to Volume zooms on the selected volume. which you may want to recall later. For more information. For more information. Center Point Only allows you to view the model from the center of the current view. For more information. Save and Recall Views displays the Save and Recall Views dialog box. Construction. For more information. see Place Eye Point Only Command.

page 62. For more information. Isometric (Top Front Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top front right (north west). Common Views opens the Common Views control. Isometric (Top Front Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top front left (north east). see Looking West (Right) Command. page 63. page 63. Isometric (Top Back Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top back left (south east). Rotate with Model Fit determines if SmartPlant Review updates the eye point in the Main view when you use the common view commands to rotate the model. see Common Views Control. page 63. see Looking South (Back) Command. page 62. see Isometric (Top Back Right) Command. For more information. page 63. For more information. page 62. For more information. Looking Up (Bottom) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking up at the bottom of the model. see Looking East (Left) Command. For more information. Looking West (Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking at the north elevation of the model. see Isometric (Top Front Left) Command. page 63. For more information. see Isometric (Top Front Right) Command. For more information.Working with Views: An Overview Common View Tools Toolbar Use the Common View Tools toolbar commands to display any of the common view orientations in the current window. 82 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . see Looking Up (Bottom) Command. Isometric (Top Back Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top back right (south west). page 62. For more information. page 63. Looking East (Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking at the east elevation of the model. For more information. page 61. Looking South (Back) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking at the south elevation of the model. For more information. For more information. Looking Plan (Top) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking down at the top of the model. Looking North (Front) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking at the north elevation of the model. page 65. For more information. see Isometric (Top Back Left) Command. see Rotate with Model Fit Command. see Looking North (Front) Command. see Looking Plan (Top) Command.

2. Isometric (Bottom Back Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom back right (south west). or you can let it float like a dialog box. page 197 Using Key-In Commands Although SmartPlant Review has been redesigned to make commands easier to use. page 64. A larger radius gives the effect of standing farther away from the center point. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 83 . Vertical Encircle. page 199 • Vertical Encircle Command. Isometric (Bottom Back Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom back left (south east). Press Enter. Isometric (Bottom Front Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom front left (north east). click the Search tab in the SmartPlant Review Help and enter the name of the command.Working with Views: An Overview Isometric (Bottom Front Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom front right (north west). For more information. For more information. and Surface Encircle positioning modes. see Isometric (Bottom Back Right) Command. Click View > Toolbars > Key-in to display the Key-in toolbar. Related Topics • Horizontal Encircle Command. Using Key-In Commands 1. page 64. see Isometric (Bottom Back Left) Command. page 195 • Surface Encircle Command. SmartPlant Review continues to support the Key-in commands found in DesignReview. 3. see Isometric (Bottom Front Left) Command. Note • You can dock the Encircle Radius toolbar at the edge of the window. see Isometric (Bottom Front Right) Command. Select the Key-in command from the drop down box. page 64. For more information. page 64. Tip • For more information about any SmartPlant Review command. For more information. Encircle Radius Toolbar The Encircle Radius toolbar increases or decreases the radius of the green sphere used in the Horizontal Encircle.

For more information. Snaplock Measurement measures the distance between two points. For more information. see Snaplock Measurement Command. Delete All Collections removes all measurement collections and any associated measurements. Delete Active Collection Measurements removes all of the measurements in the active collection. see Delete All Measurement Collections Command. New Collection automatically generates a new measurement collection and sets it to be the active collection. Edit Collections allows you to create or edit basic information for an existing measurement collection. Delete All Measurements removes all of the measurements in each of the measurement collections. Shortest Distance measures the shortest distance between any two objects. page 309. page 329.Working with Views: An Overview Measure Toolbar Use the Measure toolbar to access the measurement commands and other functionality. Display Measurements turns on or off the display of measurements. page 311. page 308. Surface Measurement measures from any surface point. page 328. page 310. Move Measurement relocates a measurement label. see Surface Measurement Command. You do not need to delete the measurements before deleting all of collections. For more information. see Delete All Measurements Command. For more information. 84 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . see New Measurement Collection Command. For more information. see Measure Shortest Distance between Objects Command. For more information. see Edit Measurement Collections Command. For more information. page 312. For more information. For more information. Delete Last Measurement removes the last measurement in the current active collection. For more information. For more information. see Delete Last Measurement Command. page 313. page 318. but does not delete the collections themselves. page 314. page 317. One Click Measurement turns on or off the one click measurement mode. see One Click Measurement Mode Command. see Measurements Command. page 315. see Restore Measurement Position Command. see Delete Active Collection Measurements Command. Restore Position returns to its original position the last measurement label that you moved. For more information. but does not delete the collection itself. page 71. see Move Measurement Command. For more information.

page 182. For more information. For more information. see Stop Key Frame Command. page 183. Pause Key Frames pauses the current playing key frame animation and/or resumes the current paused key frame motion animation. Play Key Frames plays the current key frame animation from its current starting frame or from its current paused frame. see Motion Settings Command. Step moves the eye point or display set through the model one step at a time in a constant direction. see Play Key Frame Command. Continuous Step moves the eye point or display set through the model at a constant rate and in a constant direction. see Display Set Motion Command. page 184. see Move Continuous Command. see Display Key Frame Command. Toggle Step Direction switches step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise. page 301. page 181. see Eye Point Command.Working with Views: An Overview Motion Toolbar Use the Motion toolbar commands to control the movement of the view cone eye point while moving laterally and circularly through the three dimensional model and viewing various points of interest. the shading mode. For more information. page 297. For more information. For more information. For more information. page 179. For more information. For more information. page 180. Move Display Set allows motion commands to affect display sets. Move Eye Point allows motion commands to affect the graphic views. page 302. For more information. the keyboard motion. For more information. page 300. Stop Key Frames stops the current playing or paused key frame motion animation. see Move Toggle Step Direction Command. Motion Settings defines the time for screen updates. see Move Single Step Command. see Pause Key Frame Command. Display Key Frames displays the Display Key Framesdialog box to set movie definition items. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 85 . using the keypad to steer. the clipping planes. using the keypad to steer. and allows you to set up the joystick.

For more information. For more information. page 205. Pan moves the viewpoint of the model up. View Cube displays the model in three dimensions. For more information. page 197. For more information. For more information. page 166. like a sectional cut. page 170. see Rotate Command. For more information. Surface Encircle places a track on the surface of the sphere. Vertical Encircle places a vertical track around the sphere. page 170. For more information. For more information. see Auto-Highlight Command. Lateral moves through the model laterally. see View Dependent. see View Dependent Command. page 165. For more information. Horizontal Encircle places a horizontal track around the sphere. see View Independent Command. see Surface Encircle Command. For more information. page 194. page 204. For more information. Level View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to the direction and angle indicated by the elevation and bearing. left or right without changing the viewpoint depth. page 167. page 195. For more information. View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to the direction in which you are looking. Left/Right moves the depth of the view point forward or back by moving the cursor up or down and left or right by moving the cursor left or right. see Lock Center Point Command. The eye point encircles the model on this track. page 163. see View Cube Command. see Pan Command. View Independent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement without relation to the direction or angle indicated by the elevation and bearing. Left/Right Command. 86 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 168. For more information. down. see Lock Elevation Command. Level Command. page 199. For more information. see Plant North Command. Lock Center Point keeps the center point of the Main view constant during navigation commands. Lock Elevation keeps the eye point elevation constant during navigation commands. see Horizontal Encircle Command. see Lateral Command. The eye point encircles the model on this track. page 203. see Forward/Back. Forward/Back. For more information. Rotate Tilts the view cone up and down when you move the mouse up or back. see Vertical Encircle Command. Plant North Motion moves the object (or display set) in relation to the plant north. Auto-Highlight displays object label data in the Text window. page 206.Working with Views: An Overview Navigation Toolbar Use the Navigation toolbar commands to move through the model and view various points of interest.

Working with Views: An Overview Perspective Angle Toolbar The Perspective Angle toolbar allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of the view cone. Increasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom Out command. Notes • You can dock the Perspective Angle toolbar at the edge of the window. page 149 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 87 . Move the slider anywhere from two degrees (to decrease area) to 160 degrees (to increase area). try resizing the toolbar to be smaller or resizing the application window to be larger. or you can let it float like a dialog box. Decreasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom In command. The docking areas for this toolbar are automatically restricted to help reduce the possibility of the docking area obscuring the client area of the application window. If you are unable to dock this toolbar where you want it. but the eye point or center point positions do not change. Everything within the viewing area appears smaller. but the eye point or center point positions do not change. Everything within the viewing area appears larger. • Related Topics • Using the View Cone: An Overview.

For more information. you must install the Photo-Realism module. see Edit Source Light Command. Point Light allows you to place a new point light in the model. see New Spot Light Command. see Object Textures Command. For more information. see Photo-Realism Settings Command. and define and edit Photo-Realism settings. page 437. For more information. Object Textures turns on or off texture display. allowing you to edit the raytracing options before actually raytracing the model. page 458. see Raytrace Command. Edit Light allows you to select a light in the model and adjust its properties. page 71. allowing you to edit options for controlling the lighting in the model. page 461. page 447. see New Distant Light Command. For more information. For more information. light settings. see Global Lighting Settings Command. Raytrace Range allows you to raytrace a portion of the Main view. To use this functionality. see New Point Light Command. For more information. Raytrace executes a raytrace on the Main view and displays the output in the Main view. Global Lighting displays the Global Lighting dialog box. page 426. Delete Light allows you to select a light in the model and delete it. For more information.Working with Views: An Overview Photo-Realism Toolbar Allow you to place and delete source lights. For more information. For more information. Spot Light allows you to place a new spot light in the model. page 447. page 447. page 460. see Delete Source Light Command. page 455. Photo-Realism Settings displays the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box. Distant Light allows you to place a new distant light in the model. see Raytrace Range Command. and raytrace options. For more information. 88 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

page 150 • Using the View Cone: An Overview.Working with Views: An Overview Position Control Toolbar View > Toolbars > Position Control The Position Control toolbar dynamically displays the location of the view cone eye point and center point and the bearing and elevation settings for movement. page 24 • Position Control Toolbar. Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview. If you are unable to dock this toolbar where you want it. page 202 • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview. try resizing the toolbar to be smaller or resizing the application window to be larger. page 149 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 89 . page 193 • Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview. Note • The docking areas for this toolbar are automatically restricted to help reduce the possibility of the docking area obscuring the client area of the application window.

see Record Command. you must install the Construction module. page 525. page 526. see Back Command. see Stop Command. page 527. For more information. For more information. Go to Start moves the display back to the start date. stop and move around in a ScheduleReview file. then U and use the Customize dialog box to turn on the ScheduleReview toolbar. For more information. For more information. see Go to Start Command. • 90 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 526. Record records a new review. Forward moves the display forward. use any of the following commands to display the ScheduleReview toolbar: • • Press ALT + T. For more information. right-click on the docking area. then H. then V. Dock the Full Screen toolbar. see Go to Date Command. page 527. Percent Complete displays the percentage of the review that is complete. page 526. Press ALT + T. For more information. see ScheduleReview Settings Command. Pause pauses the current review process. Schedule Review Settings command displays the Schedule Review Settings dialog box. see Pause Command. Go to End moves the display to the end date. To use this functionality. then V. pause. page 526. page 528. Go to Date moves the display to the date that you specify. Play starts the review process using the parameters that you define in the Review dialog box. page 527. see View a ScheduleReview Project at a Specific Percent Complete. see Go to End Command. For more information. page 496. Back moves the display back. Stop stops the current review process. For more information. see Play Command. For more information. page 527.Working with Views: An Overview ScheduleReview Toolbar Use the ScheduleReview toolbar commands to play. For more information. The review process starts on the Start Date that you defined and stops on the End Date. see Forward Command. For more information. then select ScheduleReview from the menu. While in Full Screen mode.

Working with Views: An Overview Standard Toolbar Open allows you to select the model that you want to view using SmartPlant Review. Print allows you to print the active drawing. For more information. Find Tags searches for matching criteria for specified data. Paste inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point. Copy places a copy of the selected text on the Clipboard. page 47. page 46. For more information. For more information. see Save Command. page 345. For more information. see Next Tag Command. page 337. page 333. For more information. page 44. For more information. Edit Tag edits the text of the active tag (the tag that appears in the text window). Cut removes the selected text from the Text view or text fields on dialog boxes and places it on the Clipboard. page 341. see Paste Command. page 340. For more information. Go to Tag displays a tag number that you specify. and replaces any selection. see Delete Tags Command. If there is already an open model. SmartPlant Review closes that model and then opens the new one. see Cut Command. For more information. see Printing: An Overview. page 47. Place Tag With Leader places a new tag in the model with a leader line.mdb file. For more information. see Previous Tag Command. Tags Toolbar The Tags toolbar provides access to the most commonly used tags commands. page 34. see Open Command. For more information. For more information. Help displays the SmartPlant Review Help file. see Find Tags Command. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 91 . page 344. For more information. For more information. Next Tag displays the tag number following the active tag. see Place Leader Command. page 346. Delete Tag deletes a display set tag by specifying the tag number. page 335. see Copy Command. see Go to Tag Command. Place Tag Without Leader places a new tag in the model without attaching a leader line. see Edit Tags Command. Save writes all project information in the current session to the . For more information. page 529. Go to Previous Tag displays the tag number preceding the active tag. see Place No Leader Command.

page 408. Edit Materials changes the properties of the assigned material properties for model elements. see Display Order Command. and material for the display set definition. Unassign Materials removes the assigned material properties from model elements. Display Order defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time the Main view updates. For more information. page 410. page 402. Level Settings selects the categories (or levels) that you want to display for one or more project files. For more information. see Find Object Command. see Edit Materials Command. Assign Materials To Elements assigns material properties to model elements and sets various rendering parameters. page 68. For more information. For more information. Edit Display Set allows you to edit the description. page 220. page 132. see Unassign Materials Command.Working with Views: An Overview Tools Toolbar Find Object locates objects in the model that match criteria that you specify. page 240. see Assign Materials Command. name. 92 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . For more information. see Edit Display Set Definition Command. For more information. see Level Settings Command. For more information. ID.

For more information. see Measure Shortest Distance between Objects Command. Place Tag With Leader places a new tag in the model with a leader line. page 240. Edit Tag edits the text of the active tag (the tag that appears in the text window). Delete Last Measurement removes the last measurement that you placed from the project. page 308. see Find Tags Command. see Delete Last Measurement Command. Next Tag displays the tag number following the active tag. page 337. page 314. For more information. For more information. page 310. For more information. page 340. For more information. see Snaplock Measurement Command. page 333. see Delete Tags Command. For more information. For more information. page 345. Go to Previous Tag displays the tag number preceding the active tag. Delete Tag deletes a display set tag by specifying the tag number. For more information. see Edit Tags Command. Find Object locates objects that match criteria that you specify. page 344.Working with Views: An Overview Tools MiniBar Provides access to some of the most commonly used commands in SmartPlant Review. Shortest distance measures the shortest distance between two objects. see Level Settings Command. For more information. page 341. page 132. For more information. see Find Object Command. Find Tags searches for matching criteria for specified data. see Previous Tag Command. For more information. Level Settings selects the categories (or levels) that you want to display for one or more project files. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 93 . see Place Leader Command. see Next Tag Command. Snaplock Measurement measures the distance between two points.

Eye Point Only places the selected point as the eye point position of a new location. page 291. For more information. For more information. For more information. page 102. For more information. For more information. Plan. For more information. which causes everything within the view to appear larger. 94 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Center Point Only displays the model from the center of the current view. page 155. For more information. page 121. Fit View to Model displays the entire model. see Outline Toggle. see Zoom Out Command. View Settings modifies settings in the Main view. see Place Center Point Only Command. Zoom In decreases the viewing area by the current zoom factor. see Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. see Place Eye Point Only Command. page 155. Fit View to Object adjusts the view to fit an object that you select. For more information. and Elevation views. page 120. see Place Near Clipping Plane Command. page 123. see View Settings Dialog Box. For more information. Outline toggles the Main view display between wireframe outline and shaded outline display modes. Zoom Out increases the viewing area by the current zoom factor. see Fit View to Object. For more information. which causes everything within the view to appear smaller.Working with Views: An Overview Views Toolbar Use the Views toolbar commands to resize and update the image displays that appear within the various model views. page 57. see View by Center Point Command. Full Screen increases the current view layout on the screen. Shaded/Wireframe toggles the Main view display between shaded or wireframe display modes. see Taking Snapshots: An Overview. Save and Recall Views defines the animation path for a movie or saves the current view displayed in the Main. For more information. page 120. Snapshot View creates an image file (or snapshot file) of the current Main view or screen. page 261. see Shaded/Wireframe Toggle. page 75. see Place Far Clipping Plane Command. see Zoom In Command. For more information. For more information. see Full Screen Command. Fit View to Volume adjusts the view by volume. page 152. page 72. Center View repositions the model in a view. see Fit View to Volume. page 153. Far Clipping Plane changes the location of the far clipping plane of the view cone. For more information. For more information. For more information. page 124. page 151. see Fit View to Model. Near Clipping Plane changes the location of the near clipping plane of the view cone.

page 60. Four Views displays the Main view. For more information. For more information. see Restore All Command. Plan view. For more information. Arrange All arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review. For more information. and Elevation view. page 60. For more information. and Text view. Single View displays the Main view only. see Four View Layout Command. see Refresh Command. For more information. For more information. Refresh Active View redraws the selected view to update its contents. page 56. Restore All allows you to return the view layouts to their original default configurations. page 59. page 59. see Single View Layout Command. Tile Vertically arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each window is completely visible. Three Views displays the Main view. Plan view. For more information. see Cascade Command.Working with Views: An Overview Window Toolbar Cascade Windows arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that you can see part of each window. see Tile Vertically Command. Elevation view. For more information. page 60. see Arrange All Command. see Tile Horizontally Command. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 95 . page 56. see Three View Layout Command. Tile Horizontally arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each window is completely visible. page 58. page 57.

Related Topics • Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box). • To show or hide a toolbar. click View > Toolbars > Customize then drag the command off the toolbar and release it anywhere in the model viewing area (except on another toolbar). click that command and drag it to the toolbar in your workspace. To add a command to a toolbar from another toolbar. and then. page 100 Customize Dialog Box Allows you to show or hide toolbars. in the Commands list. add or remove commands from toolbars. click the name of the toolbar to clear the check mark. In the Categories list. To add a command to a toolbar. These toolbars can be customized as follows. such as the PhotoRealism toolbar.Working with Views: An Overview Customize Toolbars Command Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in SmartPlant Review. page 98 • Create a Toolbar. press CTRL and drag the command onto the new toolbar. or create a new toolbar. page 99 • Reset a Toolbar. move them to any location within the application. page 99 • Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box). To hide a toolbar. click the toolbar's title bar and drag the toolbar to the new location. A check mark next to a toolbar name means that the toolbar will be displayed. select the toolbar from the View > Toolbars menu. If you add commands to one of the default toolbars. click the group that contains the command that you want to add. you can reset the toolbar to its original state. page 97 96 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . click View > Toolbars > Customize and then click the Commands tab. • • • • • Related Topics • Create a Toolbar. To remove a command from a toolbar. To move a toolbar to a different location.

Custom name . allowing you to create a new. Flat Look . ToolTips help you find toolbar command names. Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in SmartPlant Review. Toolbars in use . ToolTips . reset a toolbar. empty toolbar to which you can add buttons or menus. Delete .Deletes the selected toolbar. a yellow tool tip label displays the command name. create a new toolbar. or change the toolbar button display. To hide a toolbar. Large Buttons . When you point to a command button on the toolbar.Increases the size of toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see. clear the check box. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 97 .Working with Views: An Overview Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Allows you to display toolbars. To display a toolbar.Lists the available toolbars. select the check box next to the name. New .Allows you to type a new name for the selected toolbar.Changes the toolbar button display from three-dimensional buttons to flat buttons.Displays on-screen descriptions of toolbar buttons when the pointer pauses on them.Displays the New Toolbar dialog box.

Working with Views: An Overview Reset . Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Allows you to view commands and command descriptions.Removes any changes that you made to any of the toolbars and restores the original settings. 98 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Buttons . Description .Displays text explaining what the selected button does.Displays categories of commands.Displays a list of buttons from the category that you select in the Categories box. You also can drag buttons to a toolbar or change menu options. Reset All . if you add commands to one of the default toolbars. Category . you can press Reset to change the toolbar back to its original state. You can click a category to change the list of commands in the Buttons box. For example. You can drag the button that you want from the Buttons box onto a toolbar. such as the Photo-Realism toolbar. organized by menu name or by type.Removes any changes that you made to the selected toolbar and restores the original settings.

To rename a custom toolbar. type a new name for the toolbar. • • Related Topics • Reset a Toolbar. Click New. click View > Toolbars > Customize. Custom toolbar name . 4. page 100 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 99 . select the custom toolbar that you want to rename. and then drag the command onto the new toolbar displayed in your workspace.Working with Views: An Overview New Toolbar Dialog Box Allows you to create a new. and then click the Toolbars tab. In the commands list. and then click the Toolbars tab. Related Topics • Customize Dialog Box. In the Toolbar name box. To delete a custom toolbar. empty toolbar to which you can add buttons or menus. select the custom toolbar that you want to delete. click View > Toolbars > Customize. In the Toolbars list. 5. and then in the Categories list. click the command that you want to put on the new toolbar. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have added all the commands that you want on the new toolbar. click the group that contains the command that you want to put on the new toolbar.Allows you to type a name for the new toolbar. 2. Click the Commands tab. and then click Delete. Click View > Toolbars > Customize. Tips • You also can add a command to a toolbar by pressing CTRL and dragging the command from an existing toolbar. page 97 Create a Toolbar 1. page 96 • Customize Toolbars Command. In the Toolbars list. 6. page 96 • Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box). 3. type a new name. In the Toolbar name box.

3. Related Topics • Create a Toolbar. page 99 100 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Click Reset. On the View menu. 2. 4. and then click Customize.Working with Views: An Overview Reset a Toolbar 1. select the toolbar that you want to reset. point to Toolbars. In the Toolbars box. Click the Toolbars tab.

the graphics are drawn directly to the front buffer and you can watch each element as it is drawn.Working with Views: An Overview Changing View Settings: An Overview SmartPlant Review offers full customization of the Main. you will not see the graphics drawing. If SmartPlant Review draws to the front buffer. To repair the hole. If double-buffering is on. Dialog boxes and other application windows that have been on top of SmartPlant Review graphics displays will leave a white hole in the display when dismissed. If SmartPlant Review draws to the back buffer. The software also provides range rejection options for reducing the number of small graphical elements that SmartPlant Review draws. Double-buffering affects how SmartPlant Review draws the graphics. page 118 View Updates: Backing Store vs. thus improving display time. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 101 . you can watch it draw each element. Buffered updates (also known as double-buffering) control where the graphics are drawn. Related Topics • Set View Options. OpenGL supports a front buffer and a back buffer. Double-buffering makes animations and motion look smoother because you do not see the individual elements draw. Buffered Updates The backing store and buffered updates are completely independent of each other. as well as more complex settings such as the amount of non-directional light that displays in the model. When using double buffering. You can specify different range rejection criteria for each view. View settings allow you to define simple details. SmartPlant Review draws to the hidden back buffer. The front buffer is what you see. and Elevation views. If doublebuffering is off. All display settings are stored to the project database and are maintained when exiting and entering the project. Plan. The backing store is a picture of the current display. SmartPlant Review draws to the back buffer and "swaps" the buffers when the picture is complete. such as the shaded or wireframe background color in the model. The back buffer is always hidden. The backing store is used to quickly repair holes in the display. In this case. This picture is updated at the end of any command that updates the data (except during Motion commands). you will not see the new graphics until the entire display is complete. SmartPlant Review wallpapers over it with the backing store. Think of the backing store as a piece of wallpaper.

On the Range Reject tab. All display settings are stored to the project database and are maintained when exiting and entering the project. reducers and elbows. This situation occurs most commonly when the moved display set has been rotated or moved at an angle to its original position. This choice is similar to that offered on printers with draft quality and letter quality printing. selecting Backfaces and End caps on the View Settings > Display tab gives you a slower update with a higher display quality for views that include pipes. Important • Turning off the Backfaces option can cause some special elements to display partially or completely disappear. On the Advanced tab. the View Settings dialog box contains several tabs that offer options that affect speed and display quality. • 102 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . check Backfaces and End caps. However. • On the Advanced tab. View Settings Dialog Box Allows you to fully customize the Main. use the following settings: • On the Display tab.Working with Views: An Overview View Settings Command View > Settings Displays the View Settings dialog box. On the other hand. • Check Activate on the Range Reject tab. valves. and Elevation views. For the highest quality updates. • Select the Single layout on the Window > View Layout menu to save rendering time for the other panes. leave Activate unchecked. For faster updates. You can use these options to choose between a more rapid update with a lower display quality and a slower update with a higher display quality. This dialog box displays when you click View > Settings. which allows you to edit the view display options. Plan. leaving Backfaces and End caps unchecked increases the display quality but decreases the update time. use the following settings: • • On the Display tab. enter 16 in the Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 box. leave Backfaces and End caps unchecked. enter 100 in the Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 box. For example. The default settings allow for a rapid display at a lower stroking resolution.

Coarse Facets. Quality .Working with Views: An Overview Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) Allows you to modify view rendering and display options. No Specular .Specifies whether or not only the active tag appears. These modes are in the order of slowest update to fastest update. Object textures . which allows you to change the Shaded color.Turns off the smooth shading. Shaded. not wireframe . • • • All tags . When checked.Produces a more curved appearance by producing various shades of the selected color across the surface of the element." This type of shading is the slowest to update.Determines whether textures appear while you are manipulating the model. To use this functionality. This type of shading is also known as "smooth shading using the Gouraud Shading algorithm. Click Edit to display the Color dialog box. Surfaces are still shaded.Specifies whether or not the view displays as shaded or wireframe.Specifies the color used to display wireframe rendering.Provides smooth shading. but is faster than Full Shading because the sun does not reflect bright spots on the element surface. For example. You can choose from Full Shading. Coarse Facets .Displays a single color for all pixels on the surface instead of a range of slightly different colors. No Specular. the view displays in shaded mode. Active tag only . Wireframe Background Color .Displays the shaded background color.Specifies whether or not the tags appear. pipes look like they are composed of flat sides. Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the display. This is the fastest to update. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 103 .Specifies the quality of the shading in the Main view. Using no specular for animations can reduce some of the flickering and hot spots caused by the use of the specular component of materials. you must install the Photo-Realism module. Flat Shading . and Flat Shading. Shaded Background Color . but the display of circular objects is very faceted. • Full shading .

pipes. All annotations . Update performance is faster if the Backfaces and End caps options are turned off.Specifies whether or not to display volume annotations in the view.Specifies whether or not to display annotations in the view. Only measurement collections that are turned on can be displayed. Volume annotations . Only the display set that is in motion is affected. Text annotations . turn Dot Box on and turn both Backfaces and End caps off to increase performance at a small cost of display quality. For example. elbows. Axis .Specifies whether or not to display backfaces on valves.Specifies whether or not to display data annotations in the view.Specifies whether or not to display end caps on pipes and other round shapes. turning the Backfaces option off may cause special elements to display partially or completely disappear.Displays the Level Settings dialog box.Specifies whether or not to display text annotations in the view.Working with Views: An Overview Backfaces . Use this setting much like you would the Backfaces and End caps view settings. Related Topics • Level Settings Dialog Box. Dot box . However. and reducers in the view. page 307 • View Settings Command.Draws distant GShape and GProjected line string elements less precisely for improved update speed. page 133 • Placing Measurements: An Overview. End caps . Measurements . Note • Backfaces and End caps view settings are temporarily forced on during dynamic display set moves and for all Collision Detection displays.Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view. Levels . This condition occurs most commonly when the moved display set has been rotated or moved at an angle to its original position.Specifies whether or not to display a small coordinate triad in the top right corner of the view showing which direction is East. and Elevation. North. Also. any temporary change to the Backfaces and End caps view settings does not affect normal updates or eye movement. Data annotations . All other elements are updated according to the active view settings. page 102 104 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

but enhances the edges of objects. Select 1 for a subtle rimming effect.Toggles the display of outline mode. Draw outline of objects . allowing you to select or create a color. Edit . Use a single default outline color . This option makes the outline less obvious. Use the colors of the objects . The outline commands automatically switch between white and black based on the current combined RGB color intensity of the background color. Select 3 for the thickest outline. Related Topics • Level Settings Dialog Box.Displays the standard Colors dialog box.Displays outlines in the color you select. Width . which is white on dark backgrounds and black on light backgrounds. page 102 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 105 .Outlines each object using their own colors.Specifies the width of the outline drawn around display objects. page 133 • View Settings Command.Displays outlines using the default outline color. Use a single specified outline color .Working with Views: An Overview Outline Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) Allows you to modify the outline rendering mode options. This tab appears only if you have installed the On-Site Drawing Generation module.

Specifies the height of the center point of the view cone in relation to the model (Z coordinate). Eye Point Elevation .Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation to the east direction (X coordinate). 106 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Eye Point North . You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new east coordinate. Center Point North . The view cone changes as you change the viewing angle. Center Point Elevation .Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation to the north direction (Y coordinate). You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new east coordinate. You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new north coordinate. eye point. Eye Point East . and as you define motion using the motion/orientation controls. viewing direction.Specifies the height of the eye point of the view cone in relation to the model (Z coordinate). You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new elevation.Working with Views: An Overview View Cone Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) Defines the boundaries of the view displayed in the Main window. You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new elevation.Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to the north direction (Y coordinate).Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to the east direction (X coordinate). You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new north coordinate. Center Point East .

When you select North. SmartPlant Review automatically calculates the correct clipping distance from the eye to the near clipping plane as 185 feet. or Elevation). Perspective in degrees from 2 to 160 .Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of the near clipping plane (when Reference is set to Eye) or the location of the center point of the near clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North.Working with Views: An Overview Clipping Plane Near . -500 feet East.Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of the far clipping plane (when Reference is set to Eye) or the location of the center point of the far clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North.Displays the view cone in the Plan and Elevation views using dashed lines instead of solid lines. Dashed . East. you would select Elevation for the Reference and set Near to 15.Allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of the view cone without changing the locations of the clipping planes or the eye and center points. the clipping plane fields display the location on that Reference coordinate of the center point of the respective clipping plane. Clipping Plane Far . Move the slider anywhere from 2 degrees (to decrease area) to 160 degrees (to increase area). or Elevation). East. East. For example. When you select Eye from the Reference list. The dashed view cone allows faster updates on slow graphic cards and some notebook computers. A 0 in both boxes displays the entire model. East. You do not want to see anything above 15 feet high in the model. When Reference is set to Eye. 200 feet Elevation and is looking straight down. Clipping Plane Reference . or Elevation from the Reference list. the eye point is at 100 feet North. or Elevation) for the values displayed in the Far and Near boxes. a value of 0 in the Near or Far boxes specifies no clipping for that plane. page 152 • Set View Cone Perspective. the Near and Far boxes display the absolute distance from the eye point to the center point of the respective clipping plane. page 154 • Set Clipping Planes. page 149 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 107 . To accomplish this. page 155 • Set Eye Point. Related Topics • Set Center Point. page 117 • Using the View Cone: An Overview.Displays the reference point (if set to Eye) or the reference axis (if set to North.

page 116 108 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .0 and +180. page 115 • Set Sun Bearing Angles.Specifies whether the horizontal and vertical angles of light are relative to Plant North or relative to the direction of the Main view. Ambient from 0 to 100 Specifies the light that surrounds everything in your display. Two-sided lighting .0. Related Topics • Set Lighting Intensity. The values for this field are between -180. A common value of ambient light is 25.Defines the horizontal angle of the sunlight coming into the model.0 and +180.0. Relative to plant north . Brightness from 0 to 10 Specifies the exposure of light on the model that changes the intensity of the colors in the image. Lighting settings allow you to determine the exposure of light on the model. Using this option requires more processing resources and may result in decreased performance. Horizontal from -180 to 180 . The value for this field is between 0 and 10. produces a major reduction in thin-volume coincident surface flashing during animations (especially on thin I-beams).When checked. This is similar to setting the aperture and shutter speed of a camera. The values for this field are between -180.Defines the vertical angle of light coming into the model. Positive values are counterclockwise along a horizontal plane. which changes the intensity of the image's colors. Vertical from -180 to 180 . which will vary by video driver and graphics card.Working with Views: An Overview Lighting Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) Allows you to set the light intensity and sun bearing angles to control lighting for the shaded model.

Elevation view X . X approximate pixel ranges. it is on for all views.Specifies the approximate maximum delta X pixel size for objects to reject in the Main view. Y and Y.Specifies the approximate maximum delta X pixel size for objects to reject for display in the Plan view. Objects smaller than the range (less than or equal to the dimensions specified) are not drawn. You can activate range rejection without changing the settings.Enables range rejection in any view with non-zero X. Notes • The objects are rejected both on X. Main view X . In other words. if you reject X=20 by Y=100.Specifies the approximate maximum delta Y size for objects to reject for display in the Plan view. You can turn range rejection off for specific views by setting the X. The pixel ranges given are approximate. Main view Y . You specify the range in X. Elevation view Y .Working with Views: An Overview Range Reject Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) Allows you to disregard very small graphical elements. Plan view Y . Y pixels for each view. you still can highlight these small objects. page 115 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 109 .Specifies the approximate maximum delta Y pixel size for objects to reject for display in the Main view. 0. This change improves display time by reducing the number of elements that SmartPlant Review draws. If range rejection is on. You can specify different range rejection criteria for each view.Specifies the approximate maximum delta Y size for objects to reject for display in the Elevation view. • Related Topics • Set Range Reject. you are also rejecting X=100 by Y=20. Y pixels for that view to 0. However. Plan view X .Specifies the approximate maximum delta X size for objects to reject for display in the Elevation view. Y range rejection settings. Activate .

6:00 if MU is meters). For more information. When this option is on. 110 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .6 centimeters (00:2. Buffered updates . page 101. Focal .2:00 if MU is feet. If this option is off and you have dialog boxes or toolbars placed over a view.Working with Views: An Overview Advanced Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) Provides options for more sophisticated scenarios of SmartPlant Review. This option only effects stereo viewing. you may see ghost images of the floating item. turn off this option for better performance.Specifies the distance to the selected object. you will not see the model "re-drawn" during updates.Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays the entire view at once. see View Updates: Backing Store vs. For large models. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception. For example.2 inches or 5.Redraws everything in the selected view on refresh. Press F5 to refresh the view and remove the ghost image.Specifies the actual distance between your eyes in model units. When this option is off. such as fine tuning stereo glasses. while a smaller value reduces the effect. 00:5. Between Eyes . You must convert your actual distance values to the proper MU:SU:PU values for the model. closer objects appear to be coming out of the screen and objects that are further away appear to be behind the screen. Redraw on refresh . Buffered Updates. The Focal distance is the point at which objects are level with the screen. the backing store is used to repair the display until you click Window > Refresh. Typically. A larger value exaggerates the effect. This option only effects stereo viewing. this value is about 2.

SmartPlant Review automatically switches to regular mode when you select a menu command or dialog box. are not overlapping the view. Select the checkbox only if your computer has a high-end graphics card and only when you use NetMeeting directly in Application Sharing mode instead of the embedded collaboration software. or toolbar. • • • • NetMeeting . to improve system performance and to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image. you should use caution when placing these items. Set your video driver to Stereo interlaced mode before you run SmartPlant Review. such as a window. Therefore. that overlaps the Main. If your saved image contains overlapping images that you do not want.Specifies whether to enable the NetMeeting display capability for highend graphics cards like Intergraph RealiZm and Wildcat cards that have private client video drives instead of standard low-end video drivers. • • Stereo . the entire view is. See the SmartPlant Review Installation Guide for system requirement and supported hardware for using this option.Working with Views: An Overview Notes • While each option can be used independently. or Elevation view during a refresh is included in the saved (backing store) image. You do not have to remove stereo glasses when switching between stereo mode and regular mode. dialog box. Plan. the backing store is used to repair the view and updates are drawn to the window. If neither option is turned on. and toolbars. such as windows. on refresh. clear the NetMeeting check box after you complete a NetMeeting Application Sharing session. dialog boxes. even when the stereo is not enabled on the driver. Any item.Activates stereo viewing. if both Redraw on refresh and Buffered updates options are turned on. If the Stereo option on the Advanced tab is not available. For best performance. make sure your video driver is set to stereo. the menu selection may be available. If the Stereo option is disabled. In some driver versions/configurations. You can then press Ctrl+F5 to completely redraw the saved image using Redraw on Refresh. Notes • Stereo viewing is available in the full product and the Photo-Realism module. verify that Stereo Display is selected in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box in the Video Configuration application in Control Panel. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 111 . make sure items. redrawn to the buffer and then displayed all at once.

Related Topics • Save and Recall Views Command. and elbows. The update time appears in the Text View. with some video cards. 128. the aspect ratio is that of the current view.Working with Views: An Overview Time display . Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 .Adjusts the display quality produced by some video cards (for example. 512. However. the recommended tolerance is 100. The larger the tolerance. 64. 32. However. and so on until the display quality is acceptable. the better the display quality. Aspect . If some of your elements have a poor display quality. Perspective . such as a cracked appearance. valves. lower the Far to near clip ratio value on the View Settings > Advanced tab. Reducing the values by a power of 2 works best. 16) will improve the display quality. The aspect ratio is not saved or restored. 1024. large tolerance values increase the view update time. page 261 112 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . In most cases. reducing this value using powers of 2 (such as.Displays the value for the ratio of the Main view window width to height (X to Y value) at the time that the view was saved. reduce 1024 to 512.Toggle on to display the time that it takes to update the Main view. the recommended tolerance is 16. reduce 512 to 256. reducers.Defines the stroking tolerance for the round surfaces of pipes. 256.Specifies whether to display the perspective information. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100. For example. Far to near clip ratio . For faster updates. some elements may appear cracked or pieces of elements may be missing). when the view is recalled. For the highest quality update.

4. Notes • • You can also select Display Order on the Tools toolbar. Click View > Advanced > Display Order. Select the object that you want to display first. Only one list can exist at a time. Click View > Settings. until the entire list is complete. you can define those elements to display first. If you are interested in particular elements or if you are working in a specific area. Click the Display tab. Select Shaded to display the model as shaded in the active display. 4. Each time that you select this command. in order. 2. Select the quality of shading: Full Shading. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 113 . Right-click to save the list. Tip • You also can also switch between shaded or wireframe modes by clicking Tools > Display Sets > Shade. • Related Topics • Set View Options.Working with Views: An Overview Define Display Order 1. 3. No Specular. Click the Display tab. This is especially useful when you use the motion controls. 2. 2. Coarse Facets. Continue selecting objects that you want to display. Maintain Render Settings 1. or Flat Shading. Select the Options to display. 3. page 118 Maintain Display Options 1. Click View > Settings. 3. you are prompted to either create a new list or add to the existing list. Defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time the Main view updates.

4. Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview. page 101 Set Display Tag 1. 8. Click Edit in the Background color > Shaded box. Click OK on the Color dialog box. Click View > Settings. 3. page 349 • Display Only Active Tag. Note • The Display Tag command allows you to display the actual tags in the model. 2. page 113 114 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 5. Click the Display tab. Click a color. Related Topics • Display All Tags. 2. 7. page 348 • Maintain Display Options. Click a color. 9. page 349 • Display No Tags. Click OK on the View Settings dialog box. Click Edit in the Background color > Wireframe box. Click View > Settings. Click OK on the Color dialog box. 3. Click the Display tab. 6.Working with Views: An Overview Set Background Color 1. Select Tags from Options. Note • You can also change the wireframe background color by clicking View > Display > Wireframe Background Color.

2. Type the Plan view Y coordinate. if you reject X=20 by Y=100 you are also rejecting X=100 by Y=20. You can also access the range rejection commands by clicking View > Display > Range Rejection. Type the Main view X coordinate. Select the Lighting tab. You can set the ambient light from low (0). 4.Working with Views: An Overview Set Lighting Intensity 1. the colors become darker. You also can set the lighting intensity by clicking View > Display > Lighting. 7. which changes the intensity of the image's colors. Click View > Settings. Select Activate to use range rejection. which displays a darker image. 3. 2. Type the Plan view X coordinate. Y and Y. The brightness setting determines the exposure of light on the model. 4. If you select a high brightness. If you select a low brightness (exposure). while a low ambient light level creates darker shadows. X approximate pixel ranges. Move the Brightness from 0 to 10 slider to change the brightness level. Move the Ambient from 0 to 100 slider to change the ambient lighting level. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 115 . 5. A high ambient light level creates lighter shadows. 9. which displays a whiter image. • • Related Topics • Set Sun Bearing Angles. to high (100). Notes • The objects are rejected both on X. In other words. Type the Elevation view X coordinate. page 116 Set Range Reject 1. Notes • The ambient light is the light that surrounds everything and does not appear to come from a single source in the display. The pixel ranges given are approximate. 6. Click View > Settings. 3. 8. Type the Main view Y coordinate. Click the Range Reject tab. Type the Elevation view Y coordinate. the colors become brighter.

Click View > Settings. 3. However. Notes • The stroking tolerance affects how the round surfaces of pipes. page 115 116 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . and elbows are rendered. 4. Move the Vertical from -180 to 180 slider to change the setting. Select the Advanced tab. • Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview. Type a Stroking tolerance. reducers. page 101 • Set Lighting Intensity. Notes • Sun bearing angles allow you to determine the horizontal and vertical light angles in degrees. You can also set the sun bearing angle by clicking View > Display > Lighting > Direction. 5. Move the Horizontal from -180 to 180 slider to change the setting. Select Relative to plant north to align light from the plant north setting. The larger the tolerance. the better the display quality. page 118 Set Sun Bearing Angles 1. Click View > Settings. Select the Lighting tab. 3. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100. 2. You also can set the stroking tolerance by clicking View > Display > Stroking Tolerance.Working with Views: An Overview Set Stroking Tolerance 1. valves. page 101 • Set View Options. 2. large tolerance values increase the view update time. • Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview.

you must install the Photo-Realism module. 3. 4. Related Topics • Assign Materials Command. Click the Display tab. Any changes to the perspective angle made in this manner can be reversed using the Edit > Undo command.Working with Views: An Overview Set Textures 1. page 155 • Set Eye Point. Click View > Settings. page 401 Set View Cone Perspective 1. You can also display the view cone as dashed lines by clicking View > Display > Dashed View Cone. 2. Click the View Cone tab. Notes • You also can set the view cone perspective by typing a value in the box next to the slider on the view cone tab or by clicking View > Display > Perspective Angle. The textures defined in Material Editor display in the Main view. Select Dashed to display the view cone as dashed lines. page 402 • Assigning Material Properties: An Overview. page 152 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 117 . • • Related Topics • Set Center Point. You also can set the perspective angle interactively by dragging the view cone sides with the mouse toward or away from the view cone eye point. You can right-click or press ESC to cancel the perspective angle adjustment without saving the changes. Click Object textures. If you started SmartPlant Review from a command line using the -t option. page 154 • Set Clipping Planes. Move the slider to set the Perspective in degrees from 2 to 160. 3. 2. you cannot view textures until you restart SmartPlant Review without using the -t option. Notes • • • To use this functionality. Click View > Settings.

or toolbar. you must install the Photo-Realism module. 2. 5. 4. dialog box. You can then press Ctrl+F5 to completely redraw the saved image using Redraw on Refresh. Notes • To activate stereo viewing. page 21 • Set Stroking Tolerance. Tip For best performance. Important • To use this functionality. Click Buffered updates to turn this option on or off. If your saved image contains overlapping images that you do not want. page 116 118 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . that overlaps the Main. Click View > Settings. you should use caution when placing these items. clear the NetMeeting check box after you complete a NetMeeting Application Sharing session.Working with Views: An Overview Set View Options 1. and toolbars. • • • Related Topics • Photo-Realism Module. you must have installed the display driver for your graphics card and you must have the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter turned on. Select the NetMeeting option only if your computer has a high-end graphics card and only when you use NetMeeting directly in Application Sharing mode instead of the embedded collaboration software. If the Stereo command is grayed. are not overlapping the view. make sure items. to improve system performance and to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image. ensure that Stereo Display is selected in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box on the Video Configuration Control Panel in Windows Program Manager. Click Time display to turn this option on or off. Click the Advanced tab. dialog boxes. Click Redraw on refresh to turn this option on or off. Click NetMeeting to turn this option on or off. 6. 3. such as windows. or Elevation view during a refresh will be included in the saved (backing store) image. Any item. • 7. Therefore. such as a window. Plan. Click Perspective to turn this option on or off.

Related Topics • Fit All Views to Model. page 122 • Fit View to Model. or adjust the active window to display a selected object or display set. Fit All Views to Model 1. Click All to Model. page 124 Fit All to Model Command View > Fit > All to Model Displays the entire model in all views. In most cases. page 120 • Fit View to Volume. page 119 • Fit View to Display Set. adjust only the active window to display the entire model. Click View on the Menu bar. SmartPlant Review moves the center point toward the true center of the fit volume. For example.Working with Views: An Overview Fitting Views: An Overview SmartPlant Review provides several options for manipulating a view. while increasing causes everything within the window to appear smaller. click Fit. From the drop down menu. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 119 . 3. page 121 • Zoom In. You also can increase or decrease the viewing area. such as Zoom and Fit. affect the active window only. view manipulation commands. you can adjust all the windows to display the entire model. Therefore. page 120 • Fit View to Object. 2. page 123 • Zoom Out. Decreasing causes everything within the window to appear larger. the active window must be selected prior to using any of the view related commands.

and click View to Object. 120 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Left-click again to accept or right-click to reject the object and select the next object (if any) behind the currently selected object. The pointer changes to crosshairs. The view cone in the Plan and Elevation views adjusts accordingly. The view cone in the Plan and Elevation views adjusts accordingly. Fit View to Model Fit the view to your model using one of the following methods: • • Click View > Fit > View to Model. Fit View to Object 1. 3. Fit View to Object Command View > Fit > View to Object Adjusts the display in the Main view so that the view is zoomed in on the selected object. Move the crosshairs pointer over the object and click on the object. point to Fit. • The Fit View to Model command adjusts the view window so the entire model appears. 2.Working with Views: An Overview Fit View to Model Command View > Fit > View to Model Adjusts the display in the Main view so that the entire model is visible. The software prompts you to select an object in the model. The view cone in the Plan and Elevation views adjusts accordingly. Click Fit View to Model Note on the Common toolbar. Click View.

the Fit View to Volume command adjusts the view window to display the volume selected. The view cone in the plan and elevation views adjusts accordingly. Fit View to Volume 1. SmartPlant Review displays a tracking rectangle from your first point to your second point. Related Topics • Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview.Working with Views: An Overview Fit View to Volume Command View > Fit > View to Volume Zooms in on the selected volume. Click View > Fit > View to Volume. Note • The Fit View to Volume command adjusts the view window to display the volume selected. Tip You also can click Fit View to Volume on the Common toolbar. The view cone in the Plan and Elevation views adjusts accordingly. After you place your second point. The current model coordinates of your mouse position display in the status bar. Place the first point to select the first corner of the volume to which the view will be fit. 2. • 3. Place the second point to select the second opposite corner of the volume to which the view will be fit. page 156 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 121 .

Project Manager does not display any items. Notes • SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of display sets. While clicking. • • Fit View to Display Set 1. Double-clicking a display set in Project Manager displays the Edit Display Set Definition dialog box. However.Working with Views: An Overview Fit View to Display Set Command View > Fit > View to Display Set Prompts you to select one or multiple display sets that you need to fit to the active view. A display set must contain one or more graphic objects or at least one or more display sets. Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or other display sets to any level of nesting that you need. • 122 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Click View > Fit > View to Display Set. Select one or more display sets in Project Manager to fit to the current view. Notes • Project Manager displays items associated with the model when you open a document. use the Shift or Control keys to select multiple display sets. Then. If a model document is not open. matches the view to the selected display set. the capacity of your computer can limit the number of display sets that are available. 2.

you increase the detail by the current zoom factor. page 125. the detail will increase by 1. For more information.5. but note that if you use the Main view. page 125 • Zoom Amount Command. if the zoom factor is 1. Each time that you zoom in. page 125 • Zoom Amount Command. see Zoom Amount Command. Each time that you zoom in. if the zoom factor is 1. For more information. 2. Notes • Use this command in any view. • • Related Topics • Zoom About Point Command. For example. SmartPlant Review zooms multiplies the zoom factor that you specify by the distance between the current eye and center points. page 124 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 123 . You can change the perspective angle of the Main view to produce zoom effects without changing the eye point position. page 125. see Zoom Amount Command. the eye point and center point positions are affected.5 each time that you zoom in. page 125 • Zoom Out Command. the detail will increase by 1. the eye point and center point positions are affected. Notes • Use this command in any view. page 124 • Zoom Out.5. page 124 Zoom In 1.5 each time that you zoom in. you increase the detail by the current zoom factor.Working with Views: An Overview Zoom In Command View > Zoom > In Zooms into the model by a zoom factor that you specify. page 125 • Zoom Out Command. Click View > Zoom > In. Click in the view that you want to zoom in (if that view is not already active). You can change the perspective angle of the Main view to produce zoom effects without changing the eye point position. but note that if you use the Main view. • • Related Topics • Zoom About Point Command. page 124 • Zoom Out. For example.

You also can produce zoom effects without changing the eye point position simply by changing the perspective angle of the Main view. providing an overview of that portion of the model. This command operates in the same way as all zoom commands in Windows products. page 123 • Zoom In. You specify the zoom factor by using the View > Zoom > Amount command. Related Topics • Zoom About Point Command. page 123 • Zoom In.Working with Views: An Overview Zoom Out Command View > Zoom > Out Zooms out of the model by a zoom factor that you specify. if you use the command in the Main view. page 123 Zoom Out 1. You can use this command in any view. page 125 • Zoom Amount Command. the eye point and center point positions are affected. 2. you increase the viewing area by the current zoom factor. providing an overview of that portion of the model. page 125 • Zoom Amount Command. except that each time that you zoom out. page 125 • Zoom In Command. Note • Zooming out increases the viewing area. Click in the view that you want to zoom out of (if that view is not already active). page 125 • Zoom In Command. which causes everything within the window to appear smaller. • • Related Topics • Zoom About Point Command. You specify the zoom factor by using the View > Zoom > Amount command. Click View > Zoom > Out. you increase the viewing area by the current zoom factor. which causes everything within the window to appear smaller. SmartPlant Review multiplies the zoom factor that you specify by the distance between the current eye and center points to determine the distance for each zoom. Notes • Zooming out increases the viewing area. except that each time that you zoom out. This command operates in the same way as all zoom commands in Windows products. page 123 124 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . However.

page 123 • Zoom Out Command. page 124 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 125 . If this command is off. Note • You can specify the point anywhere in the model. SmartPlant Review zooms about the current eye point position. page 123 • Zoom In. you select the point in the model each time that you zoom. it is possible to create the illusion that you are zooming in the opposite direction from that which you would expect. See Zoom Amount Command. Depending on the location of the point that you select and the current eye point location. Related Topics • Zoom In Command. • Related Topics • Zoom In Command.Working with Views: An Overview Zoom About Point Command View > Zoom > About Point Lets you specify a point in the model about which to zoom. You specify the zoom factor by using the View > Zoom > Amount command. SmartPlant Review zooms multiplies the zoom factor that you specify by the distance between the current eye and center points. page 124 Zoom Amount Command View > Zoom > Amount Lets you specify the zoom factor for zoom commands. page 123 • Zoom Out Command. page 124 • Zoom Out. page 124 • Zoom Out. page 123 • Zoom In. If this command is on. page 125 for more information.

Working with Views: An Overview

Lighting Views: An Overview
SmartPlant Review provides various commands for controlling the general lighting in a view, including lighting direction and ambient and brightness levels.

Direction Command
View > Display > Lighting > Direction

Displays the Set Light Direction dialog box, which allows you to specify the direction of light in the model.

Set Light Direction Dialog Box
Specifies the horizontal or vertical direction of light in the model in degrees. The light angle can range from -180 to +180.

Angle - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the direction of light in the model. Next - Accepts the current horizontal value and prompts you for the vertical value. Back - Allows you to change a previously entered value when specifying multiple values. Related Topics • Perspective Angle Command, page 73 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 149

126 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Ambient Command
View > Display > Lighting > Ambient

Displays the Set Ambient Light Level dialog box, which specifies the amount of ambient light to be used in the model. The ambient light values can range from 0 to 100.

Set Ambient Light Level Dialog Box
Specifies the amount of ambient light to be used in the model. The ambient light values can range from 0 to 100.

Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for rendering the ambient or ground light in the model. Related Topics • Ambient Command, page 127 • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 101 • Set Lighting Intensity, page 115

Brightness Command
View > Display > Lighting > Brightness

Displays the Set Brightness Level dialog box, which specifies the brightness of the light in the model.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 127

Working with Views: An Overview

Set Brightness Level Dialog Box
Specifies the amount of brightness in the model. The ambient light values can range from 0.0 to 10.0.

Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for rendering the brightness in the model. Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 101 • Set Lighting Intensity, page 115

Stationary Light Positions Command
View > Advanced > Stationary Light Positions

When selected, the lights in a model are not affected by the current model rotation. The effect is to hold each light in one stationary position as defined relative to the universe in which the model resides, rather than to allow the light to move with the current model rotation. Using this command may make the model look somewhat darker when viewed from some angles. Models will look more uniformly illuminated from different angles with this command turned off. Stationary lights positions may be useful in making animations where you want the light to remain in a constant position or direction. In some cases, models may flicker less with this setting checked.
Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 485

128 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Applying Range Rejection: An Overview
The Range Rejection commands allow you to disregard very small graphical elements, which improves display time by reducing the number of elements that SmartPlant Review draws. You can specify different range rejection criteria for each view.

Activate Range Rejection Command
View > Display > Range Rejection > Activate

Defines a range around very small graphical elements that you do not want to display. Then, the Activate command turns on range rejection so that the elements do not display in the model.
Note

Reducing the number of elements that SmartPlant Review draws improves display time.

Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 101 • Set Range Reject, page 115 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 102

All Range Rejection Command
View > Display > Range Rejection > All

Displays the Set All Range Rejection Values dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display rejection criteria for each view.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 129

Working with Views: An Overview

Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box
Displays a series of Set All Range Rejection Values dialog boxes, prompting you to specify display rejection criteria for each view.

Main x value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Main view X coordinate. Main y value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Main view Y coordinate. Plan x value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Plan view X coordinate. Plan y value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Plan view Y coordinate. Elevation x value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Elevation view X coordinate. Elevation y value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Elevation view Y coordinate. Next - Accepts the current values and prompts you for the next requested value. Back - Allows you to change a previously entered value when specifying multiple values. Notes

The objects are rejected both on X, Y and Y, X approximate pixel ranges. In other words, if you reject X=20 by Y=100 you are also rejecting X=100 by Y=20. The pixel ranges given are approximate.

Related Topics • All Range Rejection Command, page 129 • Set Range Reject, page 115 • Troubleshooting, page 559

130 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Main Range Rejection Command
View > Display > Range Rejection > Main

Displays the Set Main Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display rejection criteria for the Main view.
Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 101 • Set Range Reject, page 115

Plan Range Rejection Command
View > Display > Range Rejection > Plan

Displays the Set Plan Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display rejection criteria for the Plan view.
Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 101 • Set Range Reject, page 115

Elevation Range Rejection Command
View > Display > Range Rejection > Elevation

Displays the Set Elevation Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display rejection criteria for the Elevation view.
Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 101 • Set Range Reject, page 115

Show Range Rejection Settings Command
View > Display > Range Rejection > Show Settings

Displays the range rejection on or off status and pixel ranges for each view.
Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 101 • Set Range Reject, page 115

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 131

Working with Views: An Overview

Selecting Level Settings: An Overview
The Level Settings command selects the categories (or levels) that you want to display for one or more design files. You can turn on a level by selecting a category; or, if you already know the level of a category, you can turn it on by selecting the level number. You also can read the current level settings in the Plan, Elevation, or Main views and change the level settings for designated views. The design area is composed of 63 identically sized, overlay planes. These overlays or levels, can be thought of as stacked panes of glass, with a group or category of drawings on each pane. For example, SPRdemo.dri is designed with the handrails on one level, the platforms on another, ladders on another, and so on. You can view each level of the stacked drawings by turning on the individual level or you can view a complete model by turning on all the levels. You can also view any combination of these levels.
Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 134 • Hide Levels, page 138 • Match Items Dialog Box, page 135 • View Current Level Settings, page 134

Level Settings Command
Tools > Level Settings

Displays the Level Settings dialog box, which allows you to select the categories (or levels) that you want to display for one or more design files. You can turn on a level by selecting a category; or, if you already know the level of a category, you can turn it on by selecting the level number. You also can read the current level settings in the Plan, Elevation, or Main views and change the level settings for designated views.
Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 134 • Level Settings Dialog Box, page 133 • View Current Level Settings, page 134

132 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Level Settings Dialog Box
Allows you to select the levels that you want to display for one or more design files.

Views - Allows you to select the views for which you want to view or change level settings. Names - Allows you to select the project files in which to change the level settings. Select All - Allows you to select all of the listed project files in which to change the level settings. Clear All - Allows you to unselect all of the listed project files. Match - Displays the Match Items dialog box, allowing you to select files matching the given pattern or selected object. Levels - Shows which levels are selected. Each button represents an available level, and an indented button indicates that the level is displayed. All On - Allows you to turn on all the levels at once for the selected views and project files. All Off - Allows you to turn off all the levels at once for the selected views and project files. Current - Displays the current levels for the selected views and project files. Category or Level Name - A multi-column table that displays all the level names and numbers for the selected files. Click a column header to sort the column either ascending or descending.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 133

Working with Views: An Overview

View Current Level Settings
1. Click Tools > Level Settings. 2. Select the view for which you want to see the current level settings. 3. Select the file for which you want to see the current level settings. 4. Click the Current button.
Note

If conflicting level settings exist, the Resolve Current Level dialog box will display. You then can reduce level selections or select one of the level combination buttons.

Edit Levels
1. Click Tools > Level Settings. 2. Select the view for which you want to edit levels. 3. Select the files for which you want to edit levels. 4. Click Current to see the currently defined level settings. 5. Select the levels that you want on or off. 6. Click Apply.
Notes

The design area is composed of 63 identically sized, overlay planes. These overlays or levels are similar to stacked panes of glass, with a group or category of drawings on each pane. For example, model.dri is designed with the handrails on one level, the platforms on another, ladders on another. You can view each level of the stacked drawings by turning on the individual levels. You can view a complete model by turning on all the levels. You also can view any combination of the levels.

134 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Match Items Dialog Box
Allows you to narrow your item (file, level, color, or lights) selection by searching for and selecting items (model files, levels, colors, or lights) based on their names or name groupings. You can work in this dialog box while also working in the Level Settings, Find Object's and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights dialog boxes.
Matching item name - Allows you to narrow your item selection by defining matching criteria for item names listed on the Level Settings, Find Object's and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights dialog boxes. For example, you can select all files whose file names contain the word "pipe" by typing *pipe* in this field. Pick Object - Allows you match an item (file, level, or color) by selecting an object from that file. For example, you can click an object in one of the views to select the associated model file. Select - Highlights the matched items in the Files/Levels/Colors/Lights list on the Level Settings, Find Object's and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights dialog boxes. Clear - Clears the selection of the matched file items listed on the Level Settings, Find Object's and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights dialog boxes. Matched - Displays the number of items in the Files/Levels/Colors/Lights list that were matched using the Matching item name criteria. Related Topics • Edit Display Set Definition Dialog Box, page 221 • Edit Source Lights Dialog Box, page 455 • Find Object Dialog Box, page 240 • Level Settings Dialog Box, page 133 • Match Files, page 136

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 135

Working with Views: An Overview

Match Files
1. Click Tools > Level Settings. 2. Click Match. 3. Type the matching criteria in the Matching file name field.
Tip

You do not have to know the design file name to find a specific file. You can click Pick Object to select an item in a view, and the design file name containing the selected object is returned. 4. Click Select to highlight the matched files in the Files list on the Level Settings dialog box.

Note

The Clear button allows you to unselect all selected files in the Files list on the Level Settings dialog box.

Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 134 • Hide Levels, page 138 • View Current Level Settings, page 134

136 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Allows you to select the Main. Clear All . page 134 • Hide Levels.Selects all files for which you want to change or view level settings. Note • This dialog box displays automatically when conflicting level settings exist within the selected views and project files in the Level Settings dialog box. Any . or Elevation view in which to change or view level settings. Select All .Resolves the level setting conflicts by selecting only those levels that are turned on in any of the selected items.Contains the file names with level settings to use for resolving conflicts. which allows you to choose objects in a view to select the file. Related Topics • Edit Levels. page 138 • View Current Level Settings.Displays the Match Files dialog box. You can also use the options on this dialog box to combine or intersect level settings that are turned on in any of the selected items. Related Topics • Hide Level Dialog Box. All . Note • You can also access this command by pressing F + 4 on your keyboard. Names . page 134 Hide Level Command Tools > Hide Level Allows you to select an object to hide and then determine the views in which to hide the item. page 138 • Hide Levels.Resolves the level setting conflicts by selecting only those levels that are turned on in all of the selected items. Match .Working with Views: An Overview Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box Displays the current levels and any conflicting level settings for the selected views and project files. Plan.Clears all files selections. Views . page 138 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 137 .

Indicates the level on which the current selection object exists. Number . Select the object whose level you want to hide. 3. page 134 138 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 137 Hide Levels 1. or Elevation view in which to change or view level settings.Allows you to select an object with a level that you want to hide. 4.Working with Views: An Overview Hide Level Dialog Box Allows you to determine the views in which to hide a selected object.Allows you to select the files for which you want to view or change level settings. Plan. Select the views in which you want to turn off the levels. Related Topics • Hide Level Command. Click Tools > Hide Level. Notes • You can select another object by clicking Pick Object. Pick Object . Category or level name . Views .Allows you to select the Main.Displays all the level names and numbers for the selected files. Related Topics • Edit Levels. Click Apply. File . 2.

Also. • • • • • Related Topics • Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview. You can adjust stereo settings to achieve realistic or exaggerated depth perception. The following Stereo Viewing hardware is required for this option: • 3DLabs Wildcat VP or Wildcat graphics card with 3-pin mini-DIN stereo sync output StereoGraphics CrystalEyes® interlaced glasses (model CrystalEyes Workstation) CrystalEyes infrared transmitter (model E-2) Notes • • • Stereo Viewing is available in the full product and the Photo-Realism module. The Stereo feature takes SmartPlant Review to a new level of realism and gives presentations or walkthroughs exceptional impact. You must have the correct display driver for stereo capabilities to function properly. This increases the current view layout on the screen and may prevent window borders from disrupting the stereo visual cues. page 21 • Set Stereo Settings. SmartPlant Review automatically switches to regular mode when you select a menu command or dialog box.Working with Views: An Overview Viewing in Stereo: An Overview Add dramatic depth perception to models with the stereo viewing capability of SmartPlant Review. verify that Stereo Display is selected in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box in the Video Configuration application in Control Panel. Stereo Viewing is available only in the full product and the Photo-Realism module. page 140 • Troubleshooting. Stereo mode supports all display operations. page 297 • Photo-Realism Module. page 559 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 139 . click View > Full Screen or press F11. You do not have to remove the StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses when switching between stereo mode and regular mode. Set the video driver to Stereo interlaced mode before you run SmartPlant Review. including the Display Key Frame Motion command. If the Stereo option is disabled. To enhance depth perception. Ensure that you have properly installed the correct display driver for your Intergraph GLI or GLZ graphics card and that you have turned on the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter.

You will need to convert your actual distance values to the proper MU:SU:PU values for the model. Note • The Between Eyes is the actual distance between your eyes in model units. In addition. Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings Interactively. Typically. Type a value for Between eyes. A larger value exaggerates the effect. To view in stereo. page 143 • Viewing in Stereo: An Overview.6:00 if MU is meters). Important • • To use this functionality.6 centimeters (00:2. you must install the Photo-Realism module. Set the video driver to stereo interlaced mode before you run SmartPlant Review. 3. • • Set Stereo Settings 1. Electrohome has some projection systems that support stereo using StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses or polarized glasses. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception. Click View > Settings. The following stereo viewing hardware is required for this option: • • • • RealiZm or Wildcat graphics card and display driver. Type a value for Focal. Click the Advanced tab. If the Stereo option is disabled. while a smaller value reduces the effect. 4.2:00 if MU is feet.Working with Views: An Overview Activate Stereo Command View > Advanced > Stereo > Activate Turns on stereo viewing. CrystalEyes infrared transmitter (model E-1). this value is about 2. 2.2 inches or 5. verify that Stereo Display is selected in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box in the Video Configuration application in Control Panel. page 139 140 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . you must have the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter turned on. StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes® interlaced glasses (model CE-PC or CE-1). 00:5.

Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings Interactively. page 142 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 141 . page 143 • Troubleshooting. you must install the Photo-Realism module. you must install the Photo-Realism module. Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings Interactively. Important • To use this functionality.Working with Views: An Overview Left View Stereo Command View > Advanced > Stereo > Left View Displays the left eye image of the stereo view. page 559 Right View Stereo Command View > Advanced > Stereo > Right View Displays the right eye image of the stereo view. page 559 Stereo Distances Command View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances Displays the Stereo Distances dialog box. which allows you to adjust the stereo distances to create realistic depth perception. you must install the Photo-Realism module. page 143 • Stereo Distances Dialog Box. Important • To use this functionality. Important • To use this functionality. Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings Interactively. page 143 • Troubleshooting.

Pick Focal Point . Between Eyes . To use this functionality. page 143 • Stereo Distances Command. while a smaller value reduces the effect. Typically.Working with Views: An Overview Stereo Distances Dialog Box Allows you to create realistic depth perception by adjusting the stereo distances. page 141 142 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Specifies the actual distance between your eyes in model units. Focal distance . this value is about 2. You will need to convert your actual distance values to the proper MU:SU:PU values for the model. A larger value exaggerates the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception. For example.Specifies the distance to the selected object.Allows you to specify the focal point by selecting a point in the model using the mouse rather than typing specific coordinate values. closer objects will appear to be coming out of the screen and objects that are further away will appear to be behind the screen.2:00 if MU is feet. The Focal distance is the point at which objects are level with the screen. 00:5.6:00 if MU is meters). you must install the Photo-Realism module.2 inches or 5. Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings Interactively.6 centimeters (00:2.

2 inches or 5.6 centimeters (00:2. 4. Adjust the Between Eyes value as needed to achieve the most realistic depth perception. 10. 9. After setting the Focal Distance. Notes • • To use this functionality. elements behind the focal point appear to recede into the distance. page 140 • Viewing in Stereo: An Overview.2:00 if MU is feet. When you finish adjusting stereo effects. 6. Click an object in the Main view that is approximately halfway between the eye point and the backmost object displayed. View a model in Stereo mode while wearing the interlaced glasses. Click Apply. Click Pick Focal Point. this value is about 2. Click again to accept the object. Click View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances. page 139 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 143 . The Focal Distance field displays the location of the selected object. you must install the Photo-Realism module. while elements in front of the focal point appear to be in front of the monitor. Edit the default Between Eyes value to equal the approximate distance between your eyes. 8. 2. 00:5. • Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings. 5. while a smaller value reduces the effect. 3.Working with Views: An Overview Set Stereo Settings Interactively 1. click OK. Click Apply. Typically. A larger value exaggerates the effect.6:00 if MU is meters). 7. Screen updates may take slightly longer than normal because SmartPlant Review is actually drawing two images on screen. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception.

Working with Views: An Overview

Working with Elumens: An Overview
SmartPlant Review supports the Elumens VisionStation® single projector hemispherical display system. Rather than viewing a two dimensional take of a three dimensional model on the computer screen, VisionStation places you in the model with a full color, 180-degree field of vision, while allowing you access to the project data linked to the model. With VisionStation, you can perform real time walkthroughs, collaborate with the design team, or execute a full construction review dayby-day or month-by-month. You also can select a specific day in the construction cycle to view what the progress would be at that point. VisionStation supports all capabilities found in SmartPlant Review, including dynamic motion, measurement, construction simulation, collaborative review, tagging, annotation, external data linking, and animation. Using a joystick, mouse, or keyboard, you can navigate, review, and manipulate engineering design, construction, retrofit, and maintenance displays as large as 300MB. Not only can you perform walk-throughs, you also can perform fly-throughs, fly-arounds, and any other paths- or dynamics-based motions, as well as zoom in or zoom out to display any level of detail in full-shaded or wireframe mode. As with SmartPlant Review, the Material Editor allows you to assign materials, colors, reflections, patterns, textures, and transparency to your model. These options enhance and add realism to your VisionStation view.

SmartPlant Review Commands Available in Elumens Mode
The following SmartPlant Review commands have been certified to work when the Elumens display mode is turned ON.
Collaboration Display Settings Display Sets and all related display modes Full Screen Mode Key Frame Animation Keypad Motion Main View Motion Settings Mouse Motion Photo-Realism Shaded Mode

144 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview Notes

SmartPlant Review sets the view cone to 90 degrees automatically when entering Elumens mode. Your animation will look best if you set the view cone to 90 degrees when building the animation outside Elumens mode.

The following commands are NOT certified to work when the Elumens display mode is turned ON. The work around is to exit Elumens mode, do whatever placements are necessary, and then re-enter Elumens display mode.
Auto-Highlight Background Images Display Set Destination Display Set Reference Origin High-Resolution Snapshots with Scale or Anti-alias Move Measurement Place Annotation Place Center Point Place Eye Point Place Measurement Place Tag Raytracing Tags

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 145

Working with Views: An Overview

Activate Elumens Command
View > Advanced > Elumens > Activate

Toggles the Elumens display mode on or off. The perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on.
Note

See the Elumens' User Manual - Software Installation and Assembly Instructions for more information about setting up and using your VisionStation dish.

Toggle the Elumens Display Mode On or Off
Click View > Advanced > Elumens > Activate.
Notes
• •

The perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on. See the Elumens' User Manual - Software Installation and Assembly Instructions for more information about setting up and using your VisionStation dish.

Elumens Settings Command
View > Advanced > Elumens > Settings

Displays the Elumens Settings dialog box, which allows you to edit the Elumens display mode settings.
Note

See the Elumens' User Manual - Software Installation and Assembly Instructions for more information about setting up and using your VisionStation dish.

Related Topics • Elumens Settings Dialog Box, page 147

146 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Working with Views: An Overview

Elumens Settings Dialog Box
Allows you to edit the Elumens display mode settings.

Eye x - Defines the x eye point coordinate in the dome space. Changing the eye point shifts the location of the view on the dome. Eye y - Defines the y eye point coordinate in the dome space. Changing the eye point shifts the location of the view on the dome. Eye z - Defines the z eye point coordinate in the dome space. Changing the eye point shifts the location of the view on the dome. Lens x - Defines the x coordinate for the lens in the dome space. Changing the lens modifies the shape of the view on the dome from being more rounded to more pointed. Lens y - Defines the y coordinate for the lens in the dome space. Changing the lens modifies the shape of the view on the dome from being more rounded to more pointed. Lens z - Defines the z coordinate for the lens in the dome space. Changing the lens modifies the shape of the view on the dome from being more rounded to more pointed. 1.5 - Sets the eye point and lens positions to the recommended default values for the 1.5 meter Elumens dish. 3 - Sets the eye point and lens positions to the recommended default values for the 3.0 meter Elumens dish.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 147

Working with Views: An Overview 5 - Sets the eye point and lens positions to the recommended default values for the 5.0 meter Elumens dish. Custom - Allows you to define custom values for the eye point and lens positions. Use the Custom option to set and keep non-standard default sizes. For example, to modify the 3.0 meter settings, select the 3.0 meter option to populate the settings with those values, then select the Custom option and modify the values. Size - Sets the texture size for each image. Using a larger texture size will result in sharper picture quality. The maximum size is equal to the smallest power of 2 less than or equal to the size of the smallest dimension of the Main window. For 1024 x 768 resolution, the maximum texture size is 512. Origin Left x - Displays the internal left x origin position. This value is read-only. Origin Left y - Displays the internal left y origin position. This value is read-only. Origin Right x - Displays the internal right x origin position. This value is read-only. Origin Right y - Displays the internal right y origin position. This value is read-only. Origin Top x - Displays the internal top x origin position. This value is read-only. Origin Top y - Displays the internal top y origin position. This value is read-only. Note

See the Elumens' User Manual - Software Installation and Assembly Instructions for more information about setting up and using your VisionStation dish.

Edit Elumens Display Mode Settings
1. Click View > Advanced > Elumens > Settings. 2. Select the appropriate Elumens settings. 3. Click Apply to apply the selected options to the folder, file, or control.
Notes
• •

The perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on. See the Elumens' User Manual - Software Installation and Assembly Instructions for more information about setting up and using your VisionStation dish.

148 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Using the View Cone: An Overview

Using the View Cone: An Overview
The view cone defines the boundaries of the area being displayed in the Main view. The view cone updates as you change the viewing angle, viewing direction, eye point, and as you define motion with the mouse or keypad. The view cone appears in the Plan and Elevation views. Assume that you, the viewer, are in the eye point position (A). You are looking toward the center point of the view cone (D). The limits of your view are defined by the farclipping plane (C) and the nearclipping plane (B). You see whatever lies between the two planes. You can set the eye point and center point positions by dragging them with the mouse, or using either the View > Settings > View Cone tab or the Position Control toolbar. You can set the near and far clipping planes by dragging them with the mouse, or using the Place Far Clipping Plane command, or the Place Near Clipping Plane command. The upper right side of the view cone is red, and the upper left side is green. The angle between the red and green lines is the view perspective. You can set the view perspective by dragging the edges of the view cone with the mouse, or by using either the View > Settings > View Cone tab or the Perspective Toolbar.
Note

If you are using the mouse to change the view cone, and any of the regions overlap, SmartPlant Review resolves the conflict in the following order: 1. Eye Point Crosshair 2. Center Point Crosshair 3. Near Clipping Plane 4. Far Clipping Plane 5. View Cone Sides

Related Topics • Set Clipping Planes, page 155

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 149

Using the View Cone: An Overview

Position Control Toolbar
The Position Control toolbar dynamically displays the location of the view cone eye point and center point and the bearing and elevation settings for movement.

View - Displays the bearing and elevation information for the View Dependent and View Dependent Level Directional modes. The View Bearing Pointer displays the current bearing direction of the view cone. The View Elevation Pointer displays the current elevation direction of the view cone. You can change the direction of the View Bearing Pointer or the View Elevation Pointer by dragging the left mouse button in either the Bearing or the Elevation compass or by typing new bearing and elevation values. Motion - Displays the bearing and elevation information for the View Independent Direction Mode. The View Independent Bearing Pointer displays the forward direction in regards to bearing. The View Independent Elevation Pointer displays the forward direction in regards to elevation. Moving forward using View Independent mode moves you in the direction defined by these two pointers. You use the cursor directional keys (up, down, left, and right arrow keys) or the right mouse button to define the direction of the pointers. You also can type new bearing and elevation values.

When using the View Independent Direction Mode, the View Bearing Pointer and View Elevation Pointer define the view cone direction (the direction in which you are looking).
Eye Point - Displays the current location of the view cone eye point. You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation fields. You also can change the eye point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab. Center Point - Displays the current location of the view cone center point. You can change the location of the center point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation fields. You also can change the center point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.

150 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Using the View Cone: An Overview

View by Eye Point Command
View > Place > View by Eye Point

Places the current active view at the selected point in the model, moving the eye point and adjusting the center point in the corresponding manner. The model coordinates of the mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and elevation views while you position it.
Tips

The eye point setting motion is relative to the direction in which you are looking. You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation boxes on the View tab of the Position Control toolbar. Also, you can change the eye point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.

Related Topics • Set Eye Point, page 152

View by Center Point Command
View > Place > View by Center Point

Centers the model on a defined point in the specified view. The model coordinates of the mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and elevation views while you position it.
Notes
• •

You can also click the Center View command on the Common toolbar. You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation boxes on the View tab of the Position Control toolbar. Also, you can change the eye point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.

Related Topics • Set Center Point, page 154

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 151

Using the View Cone: An Overview

Place Eye Point Only Command
View > Place > Eye Point Only

Places the selected point as the eye point position of a new location. You can place the eye point by locating a three dimensional point using one or more of the graphic views. The model coordinates of the mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and elevation views while you position it.
Note

If the eye and center points get too close, some viewing operations will cease to function properly.

Related Topics • Set Motion Control to Eye Point, page 179

Set Eye Point
1. Click View > Settings. 2. Select the View Cone tab. 3. Verify the North eye point setting. 4. Verify the East eye point setting. 5. Verify the Elevation eye point setting. 6. If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing operations will cease to function properly. To correct this problem, do one of the following:

Place a new center point. For more information, see Set Center Point, page 154. On the View > Settings > View Cone tab, enter new values for the eye and/or center points, as well as the viewing angles. Use the Position Control toolbar to adjust the eye point, center point, and viewing angles. For more information, see Position Control Toolbar, page 150.

Notes

You also can place the eye point by clicking View > Place > Eye Point Only, which allows you to place the eye point by locating a three dimensional point using one or more of the graphic views. For more information, see Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview, page 156.

152 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Using the View Cone: An Overview

You also can place the eye point by clicking View > Place > View by Eye Point, which allows you to place a view based on eye point, which involves the perspective that you have when viewing the file. You also can set the eye point interactively by using the mouse to drag the eye point of the view cone in the plan or elevation views. You must hold the left mouse button down for at least 1 second or drag it at least 8 pixels before the eye point adjustment mode allows the eye point to change. See the README.txt file for information about changing these defaults. You can right-click or press Esc to cancel the eye point adjustment without saving the changes. Any changes to the eye point made in this manner can be reversed using the Edit > Undo command.

Related Topics • Set Clipping Planes, page 155 • Set Motion Control to Eye Point, page 179 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117

Place Center Point Only Command
View > Place > Center Point Only

Allows you to view the model from the center of the current view. The model coordinates of the mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and elevation views while you position it.
Note

If the eye and center points get too close, some viewing operations will cease to function properly. To correct this problem, place a new center point, enter new values for the eye and/or center points and viewing angles on the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or use the Position Control toolbar to adjust the eye point, center point, and viewing angles.

Related Topics • Position Control Toolbar, page 150 • Set Center Point, page 154 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • Troubleshooting, page 559 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 149

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 153

Using the View Cone: An Overview

Set Center Point
1. Click View > Settings.
Tip

You also can click the Center View command toolbar. 2. Click the View Cone tab.

on the Common

3. Verify the North center point setting. 4. Verify the East center point setting. 5. Verify the Elevation center point setting.
Notes

You also can place the center point by clicking View > Place > Center Point Only, which allows you to place the center point by locating a three dimensional point using one or more of the graphic views. For more information, see Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview, page 156. You also can place the enter point by clicking View > Place > View by Center Point, which repositions the model in a view and is useful for seeing different portions of the model. You also can set the center point interactively by using the mouse to drag the center point of the view cone in the plan or elevation views. You must hold the left mouse button down for at least 1 second or drag it at least 8 pixels before the eye point adjustment mode allows the center point to change. See the README file for information about changing these defaults. You can right-click or press Esc to cancel the center point adjustment without saving the changes. Any changes to the center point made in this manner can be reversed using the Edit > Undo command. If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing operations will cease to function properly. To correct this problem, place a new center point, enter new values for the eye and/or center points and viewing angles on the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or use the Position Control toolbar to adjust the eye point, center point, and viewing angles.

Related Topics • Position Control Toolbar, page 150 • Set Clipping Planes, page 155 • Set Eye Point, page 152 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • Troubleshooting, page 559 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 149

154 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

The view cone displays in the plan and elevation views while you position it. Notes • The limits of your view are defined by the far-clipping plane and the nearclipping plane.Using the View Cone: An Overview Place Far Clipping Plane Command View > Place > Far Clipping Plane Changes the location of the far clipping plane of the view cone. 2. You can right-click or press Esc to cancel the clipping plane adjustment without saving the changes. • • • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 155 . Place Near Clipping Plane Command View > Place > Near Clipping Plane Changes the location of the near clipping plane of the view cone. You see whatever lies between the two planes. The model coordinates of the mouse position display in the status bar. Click View > Settings. or Elevation for the reference point. Verify the Near clipping plane setting. The model coordinates of the mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and elevation views while you position it. You can also set the clipping planes interactively by dragging the plane with the mouse. East. Set Clipping Planes 1. Verify the Far clipping plane setting. 3. You can maintain your current encircle clipping plane settings when you switch from any of the encircle positioning modes back to the lateral positioning mode by turning On the Motion > Positioning Modes > Maintain Encircle Clipping command. Any changes to the clipping planes made in this manner can be reversed using the Edit > Undo command. Click the View Cone tab. You can maintain your current lateral clipping plane settings when you switch from the lateral positioning mode to any of the encircle positioning modes by turning Off the Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere command. 5. North. Verify the Reference clipping plane setting. 4. The Reference clipping plane setting allows you to choose Eye point.

page 156. For example. Place a Data Point 1. see Define a Bore Sight. You can place a data point in any view. page 156 Place a Data Point. 2. when you place tags with leader lines. the coordinates appear in the Status bar. use the bore sight method. These data points also do not maintain their exact location during view manipulations (for example. Begin the three dimensional point placement process by clicking a Place command from the View menu or Pick Point button found on certain dialog boxes. or window in on an area. take measurements. Place the cursor where you want to place the data point (usually in the Main or Plan views) and left-click once. page 156 Snap to an Element. 2. For more information. Notes • When the three dimensional point is selected. • • 156 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . position the cursor on the bore sight and leftclick once. A solid yellow line (called a bore sight) passes through that point in the other views. you can place three dimensional points for more precision control. Place the cursor where you want to place the point (usually in the Main or Plan views) and right-click twice (quickly) to place the point. To define the depth of the point.Using the View Cone: An Overview Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview Many SmartPlant Review commands prompt you to place three dimensional points. page 157 Define a Bore Sight 1. zooming in or out in a view). You can place three-dimensional points in one of three ways: • • • Define a Bore Sight. To precisely place three dimensional data points. Data points selected using this quick two dimensional method get their missing depth-of-view coordinate information from the current view's center point. 3. Begin the three dimensional point placement process by clicking a Place command from the View menu or Pick Point button found on certain dialog boxes.

2. In the Main view. Click to accept the highlighted element. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 157 . You can reject the highlighted element and tentatively select another element by clicking. place a tentative point (quick left double-click) on an element in the model. The next element highlights. the coordinates appear in the message field.Using the View Cone: An Overview Snap to an Element 1. Notes • When the three dimensional point is placed.

Using the View Cone: An Overview 158 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

such as Forward/Back. page 193 • Navigate using a Mouse. Left/Right. page 171 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 159 . You can use the lateral mode to move freely about the model. This mode stays in affect until you select a data point in the Main view. In addition to moving around in the model. Mouse Drag Modes You can use the mouse to navigate around the model to view items of interest. you can use the mouse to display the label data for an object in the Text view. the eye point to the center point in the view cone. The different modes provide different types of motion. page 192 • Using the Keyboard: An Overview. the direction that you are looking. For example. View Dependent Motion Level also moves the eye point in the direction that you are looking. When using mouse drag motion. you can release the data button while the cursor is outside the Main. Plan. Positioning Modes Positioning modes are used to define how the eye point moves. Each mode causes the mouse to move in a different direction. page 162 • Set Motion Rates. Directional Modes Directional Modes define how you want to navigate around the model. when in View Dependent Motion mode. Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview. or you can use one of the encircle modes to lock the eye point to a circular track. but the elevation of the view cone does not change. page 202 • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview. and directional modes. Mouse motion then continues to operate without the need for you to hold down the mouse button. is the direction that you move.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Navigating Through the Model: An Overview SmartPlant Review allows you to move laterally and in a circular motion through a model and view various points of interest using three different types of modes: mouse drag modes. positioning modes. or Elevation views.

or Shift + a letter. shortcut. control. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion. Options for a standard mouse. The mouse allows you to move forward and back. display dialog boxes. it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. Alt. Function key equivalents and modifier keys. while others invoke forms. and rotate in the model. pan left and right. if any. You can access these options by pressing Ctrl. to execute functions. independent of update speed. SmartPlant Review also supports standard Microsoft control key and shortcut functions. Related Topics • Function Keys. However. You can perform any of these options in any of the views. pan up and down. Some of these options execute functions. You also can use a joystick to move around in your model. as well as a Microsoft IntelliMouse® pointing device are also provided with the software.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Using Motion Devices: An Overview SmartPlant Review provides three different options for moving around in the model: mouse. You can view the control keys or shortcuts and their corresponding functions on the standard control key table or the SmartPlant Review shortcut key table. page 172 160 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . You also can use the function keys table to view F-keys and their corresponding functions. page 173 • SmartPlant Review Shortcut Keys. You can only use the mouse to rotate in the Main view. and keypad keys on your keyboard. display next to commands on menus. and joystick. according to Microsoft Windows conventions. with the exception of rotate. You can use the keypad keys to navigate around the model or to move a selected display set. You can use the function keys. A list of keypad keys and their corresponding functions is provided. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting. page 172 • Standard Control Keys. invoke dialog boxes. keypad. You can perform many common SmartPlant Review tasks quickly and easily with the function. the F-keys across the top of your keyboard. The joystick shares the same basic speed control settings as the mouse and keypad. page 171 • Keypad Keys. or modify functions. or modify window layouts of the three dimensional model.

This mode is similar to standing in one place and tilting your head up and down and looking left and right. see Auto-Highlight Command. page 163. watch the eye point and view cone in the Plan and Elevation views as you move. Each mode enables the mouse to move the view in a different direction. Changing these and other settings on this dialog box affects not only speed but display quality as well.Points the view cone in a direction that you define interactively. If you move the mouse a short distance. For more information. you can see the effect of mouse drag and modifier key combinations. The speed of movement is relative to how far you move the mouse. Remember the following tips and techniques when you are moving with the mouse: • When you are familiarizing yourself with mouse drag. • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 161 . If you move the mouse a long distance. see Pan Command. Left/Right Command.Increases and decreases the view cone elevation when you move the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to move in a line parallel to the far clipping plane. speed is faster. page 165. you can release the data button while the cursor is outside the Main. see Forward/Back. As the Plan and Elevation views change. see View Cube Command. page 166. The view cone eye point does not move using this mode.Displays object label data instantly in the Text view.Tilts the view cone up and down when you move the mouse up or back. For more information. Pan . For more information. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to rotate about the eye point left or right.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview You can use the mouse to navigate around the model to view items of interest. see Rotate Command. The speed of movement depends on the settings in the Motion > Settings > Rates tab. Rotate . Left/Right. View Cube . speed is slow.Moves the view cone forwards or backwards toward the object that you are looking at in the model when moving the mouse up or back. Auto-Highlight . The view cone eye point does not move using this mode. When using mouse drag motion. For more information. Forward/Back. Plan or Elevation views. Think of the left or right motion as taking a step side-ways. This mode is similar to standing in one place and looking in any direction. page 168. such as Forward/Back. For more information. Left/Right . page 167. Mouse motion then continues to operate without the need for you to hold down the mouse button. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to rotate left and right. This mode stays in effect until you select a data point in the Main view.

Move the mouse a longer distance to move faster. and move the mouse in the direction that you want to move. page 165 • Pan in the View. The cursor indicates direction of movement. or Elevation view. Move the mouse a short distance to move slowly. When you drag the mouse. page 167 • Set Center Mode. page 169 • Set Priority Mode. 2. Stop moving the mouse and release the mouse button and modifier keys to stop movement. Press and hold another modifier key while dragging to change direction mode. If you drag a very small distance and remain within the null region. Left/Right. You can click on the position in any view. page 169 162 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 5. Ctrl or Alt then click and hold down the left mouse button. the pointer changes to a special cursor that indicates the direction of movement. A crosshair displays to indicate this point. Hold Shift. page 168 • Move Forward/Back. 6. 3. no movement occurs.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview • The origin point from which you begin movement is the position where you first click in the Main. • Navigate using a Mouse 1. Click the mouse on the position from which you want to start moving. page 166 • Rotate the View. 4. A null region surrounds the crosshair. Related Topics • Manipulate the View Cube. Plan.

The label data displays in a pop-up window. If you are in Single View Layout (you do not have the Text view open). The Ctrl key activates the Forward/Backward. If no object is currently under the mouse.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Auto-Highlight Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Displays object label data instantly in the Text view. you can click and accept an object to view the label data. you can click and accept an object to view the label data. • • You can also click the Auto-Highlight command on the View toolbar. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 163 . then the point is on the view plane at the center point location. Alt. Notes • Auto-Highlight displays object label data instantly in the Text view. The Alt key activates the Rotate mode. If no object is currently under the mouse. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight. Auto-Highlight also displays the corresponding object surface point location in the status bar while you drag the mouse over an object. Auto-Highlight also displays the corresponding object surface point location in the status bar while you drag the mouse over an object. and Shift keys to temporarily shift into the other mouse modes to move. The Shift key activates the Pan mode. then the point is on the view plane at the center point location. you can see label data by clicking and accepting the object. Auto-Highlight 1. Left/Right mode. If you are in Single View Layout. If you are in Single View Layout (you do not have the Text view open). 2. but press the Ctrl. Click an object in the model. When navigating around in the model. Auto-Highlight Elements Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Element Allows you to display object label data for single elements of geometry instantly in the Text view. you can stay in Auto-Highlight Element mode to view object label data when you are stopped.

The Ctrl key activates the Forward/Backward. If you are in Single View Layout. you can see label data by clicking and accepting the object. Left/Right mode. The Alt key activates the Rotate mode. The Shift key activates the Pan mode. The label data displays in a pop-up window. page 161 164 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . The label data displays in a pop-up window. but press the Ctrl. If you are in Single View Layout. Auto-Highlight Components Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Components Allows you to display object label data for components (elements grouped by DRMS linkage) instantly in the Text view.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Auto-Highlight Complex Elements Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Complex Element Allows you to display object label data for complex elements of geometry (such as cells) instantly in the Text view. you can stay in Auto-Highlight Complex Element mode to view object label data when you are stopped. and Shift keys to temporarily shift into the other mouse modes to move. When navigating around in the model. page 163 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview. and Shift keys to temporarily shift into the other mouse modes to move. page 164 • Auto-Highlight Elements Command. When navigating around in the model. but press the Ctrl. you can see label data by clicking and accepting the object. Alt. you can stay in Auto-Highlight Component mode to view object label data when you are stopped. Related Topics • Auto-Highlight Complex Elements Command. Alt. The Shift key activates the Pan mode. The Ctrl key activates the Forward/Backward. The Alt key activates the Rotate mode. Left/Right mode.

consider that you. 3. Left/Right Moves the view cone forwards or backwards in reference to the object that you are looking at in the model when moving the mouse up or back. are the eye point of the view cone. clicking the command on the View toolbar. When using any of the motion commands. Left-click in the model. Move Forward/Back.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Forward/Back. Note • You can also click the Forward/Back. Left/Right 1. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to rotate about the eye point left or right. 2. on the SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 165 . Note • The positioning and directional modes that you select affects this mouse drag mode. Left/Right command View toolbar. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back. Left/Right. Left/Right Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back. You can activate this mode by pressing the Ctrl key. or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back. Left/Right. the viewer. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse.

the viewer. Left-click in the model. 3.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Pan Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan Increases and decreases the view cone elevation when you move the mouse up or back. consider that you. Note • The positioning and directional modes that you select affects this mouse drag mode. You can activate this mode by pressing the Shift key. are the eye point of the view cone. Think of the left or right motion as taking a step side-ways. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse. 2. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to move in a line parallel to the far clipping plane. 166 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Notes • You can also click Pan on the View toolbar. clicking the command on the View toolbar. When using any of the motion commands. Pan in the View 1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan. or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan.

Left-click in the model. are the eye point of the view cone. consider that you. Rotate mode is similar to standing in one place and tilting your head up and down and looking left and right. You can activate this mode by pressing the Alt key. Notes • You can also click Rotate on the View toolbar. page 161 Rotate the View 1. The view cone eye point does not move using this mode. Related Topics • Rotate the View.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Rotate Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate Tilts the view cone up and down when you move the mouse up or back. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate. page 167 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to rotate left and right. the viewer. Note • The positioning and directional modes that you select affects this mouse drag mode. 3. 2. clicking the command on the View toolbar. When using any of the motion commands. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 167 . or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate.

are the eye point of the view cone. 2. consider that you. page 168 168 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 85 • View Cube Command. 3. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse. When using any of the motion commands. the viewer. The view cone eye point does not move using this mode. Related Topics • Motion Toolbar.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview View Cube Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes >View Cube Points the view cone in a direction that you define interactively. Manipulate the View Cube 1. Left-click in the model. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > View Cube. You can activate this mode by clicking the command on the View toolbar or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > View Cube. View Cube mode is similar to standing in one place and looking in any direction. Note • You can also click View Cube on the View Menu.

Turning the Priority Mode on gives priority to the axis with the greatest move amount (thus only non-diagonal movements are possible). Notes • Turning the Priority Mode off allows a combination between north and east axis translation (thus diagonal movements are possible). Turning the Priority Mode on gives priority to the axis with the greatest move amount (thus only non-diagonal movements are possible). Click on an object in the model. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Center Mode. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Priority Mode. Set Center Mode 1. 2. 2. page 169 Set Priority Mode 1. The Center Mode command allows you to use motion with a selected object based at the center. Notes • Turning the Priority Mode off allows a combination between north and east axis translation (thus diagonal movements are possible). Note • Center Mode changes the mouse drag motion to always be relative to the center of the window instead of where the mouse drag began in that window.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Priority Mode Command Motion > Mouse Drag Mode > Priority Mode Sets the mouse drag motion to allow a combination between north and east axis translation. Click on an object in the model. • Center Mode Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Center Mode Sets the mouse drag origin to always be the center of the view instead of the point where the mouse drag began. • Related Topics • Set Priority Mode. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 169 .

commands that only affect the elevation of the view are not available. commands that only affect the center point of the view are not available. When this option is turned on. 170 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . When this option is turned on.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Lock Center Point Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Lock Center Point Locks the center point of the Main view so that it does not change during navigation or motion commands. Lock Elevation Command Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Lock Elevation Locks the elevation of the Main view so that it does not change during navigation or motion commands.

Function key equivalents and modifier keys. if any.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Using the Keyboard: An Overview You can use the following keyboard function keys. display next to commands on menus. according to standard Microsoft Windows conventions. and keypad keys to activate commands and move around in the model. shortcuts. F1 F2 Ctrl+F2 F3 Ctrl+F3 F4 Ctrl+F4 F5 Ctrl+F5 Shift+F5 F6 Ctrl+F6 Shift+F6 F7 Ctrl+F7 Shift+F7 F8 Ctrl+F8 Shift+F8 Ctrl + Shift+F8 F9 Ctrl+F9 F10 Ctrl+F10 F11 Ctrl+F11 F12 Help Assign Materials to Elements Assign Materials to Display Set Define Display Set Move Display Set Hide Level (Object) Level Settings Refresh Refresh All Raytrace View Settings Save and Recall (View Operations) Photo-Realism Settings Frame Show Motion Motion Settings Global Lighting Settings Snaplock Measurement Surface Measurement Edit Measurement Collections New Measurement Collections Place Tag with leader line Place Tag without leader line Next Tag Previous Tag Full Screen Toggle Arrange All Collision Detection SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 171 . Function Keys The following table lists F-keys and their corresponding functions. Some keys execute functions while others invoke dialog boxes. Press Ctrl or Shift + function key to modify the functions.

Toggle display of the Text window. Toggle display of the Elevation window. Switch to three view layout. or Shift + a letter. View Encircle Radius toolbar. key frame motion. Pause a Schedule Review session. View Position Control toolbar. Stop the current view update. Pause key frame motion. Stop a Schedule Review session. Delete all measurements.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Standard Control Keys The following table lists the standard Microsoft shortcuts supported by SmartPlant Review. or raytrace. Switch to single view layout. Play a Schedule Review session. Delete last measurement. Toggle display of the Plan window. Ctrl+C Ctrl+F Ctrl+O Ctrl+P Ctrl+S Ctrl+V Ctrl+X Ctrl+Y Ctrl+Z Copy Text Find Object Open Print Save Paste Text Cut Text Redo Undo SmartPlant Review Shortcut Keys The following table lists commands that you can access by pressing a combination of either Ctrl. 172 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Some of these options execute functions while others display dialog boxes or modify window layouts of the model. Switch to four view layout. Toggle display of the Main window. View Perspective Angle toolbar. Display Common Views control. Alt+0 Alt+1 Alt+2 Alt+3 Alt+4 Ctrl+D Ctrl+Alt + D Ctrl+M Ctrl+Shift + M Ctrl+R Ctrl+Space Ctrl+Alt+R Ctrl+Alt+Space Ctrl+Alt+S Shift+1 Shift+3 Shift+4 Ctrl + 1 Ctrl + 2 Ctrl + 3 Ctrl + 4 ESC View Project Manager. Delete measurements in the active collection. You can access these commands by pressing Ctrl + a letter. Play key frame motion. Delete all measurement collections. Alt.

To use the keypad keys to manipulate the position of a display set. you must first select a display set in the Project Manager tree. and then enable the Display Set motion toggle (click Motion > Display Set). The Delete key decreases the movement and rotation rates. When enabled. you must first enable the eye point motion toggle (click Motion > Eye Point). The Insert key increases the movement and rotation rates by the amount specified on the Motion > Settings > Rates tab. For these large models. The minus key (-) on the numeric keypad tilts down the view cone/Display Set. By default. Elevation Keys . The asterisk or multiply key (*) on the numeric keypad rotates the view cone or display set to the right.The Esc key cancels the current screen update. Tilt Keys . Special Keys . discrete. The SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 173 . You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long.The forward backslash or divide key (/) on the numeric keypad rotates the view cone/Display Set to the left. This will decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point. independent of update speed. and keypad) share the same basic speed/control settings. you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn.The Page Up key to the left of the numeric keypad raises the view cone or display set to an upper level of the model. By using this setting. The Page Down key to the left of the numeric keypad moves the view cone/Display Set to a lower level of the model. dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion. However. Important • To use the keypad keys to manipulate the position of the view cone.The plus key (+) on the numeric keypad tilts up the view cone or display set. you must set the speed setting for the model to the proper MU:SU:PU value on the Motion Settings dialog box. this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick. Rotation Keys . Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Keypad Keys You can use the keypad keys to navigate around the model or to move a selected display set.

Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Home key cycles through the four Positioning modes. see Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview. Num Lock must be on. The keypad is reserved for motion and orientation control and sometimes does not let you use the keypad to key in numbers.) repeats the last direction one step. Press and hold these keys to cause continuous motion. The period key (. use the number keys at the top row of the keyboard to enter numbers. • • • • • • 174 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . For more information. For example. All directions and angles of motion are in relation to the selected positioning and directions modes. To use the numeric keypad for navigation.9 to move through the model. Notes • If you press more than one key at a time. if you press keys 7 and 8 at the same time. Number Keys . The Up/Down Arrows increase/decrease the View Independent Motion Bearing Angle by the current rotation adjustment rate. page 202. page 193 and Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview. The 5 key toggles the step direction. the motion directions of each key are averaged. The End key cycles through the four Directional modes. the motion direction is forward and a little to the left. As you move through the model using the keypad. To avoid any problems. The 0 key toggles the Continuous Motion option. the Position Control toolbar and the view cone continually update.Use keys 1 . The Left/Right Arrows decrease/increase the View Independent Motion Elevation Angle by the current rotation adjustment rate.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 175 . Click Calibrate and follow the directions. Click Motion > Settings. 3. then click Add. Click the General tab. 3. Activate the joystick in SmartPlant Review. it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. 7. Type a value for Move Threshold. 4. On the Add Game Controller dialog box. 2. 4. 2. Activate a Joystick in SmartPlant Review 1. Select a Movement Type. 3. Click the Joystick tab. 2. independent of update speed. click Add Other and select the driver supplied for your joystick. Install the joystick and its driver. When you have your joystick working with the operating system. 5. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion. set the MU:SU:PU movement and rotation settings to small values to ensure the joystick moves properly with your movement. On the Motion > Settings > Rates tab. 5. 8. 7. Click Allow Joystick. Configure and calibrate the joystick. 6. However. 6. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting. Install the Microsoft DirectX API interface if you are using Windows 2000. you can use a joystick to navigate in the model after completing the following steps: 1. Install a Joystick 1. Click the Test tab and verify that the calibration process completed properly. Wait for the driver status to show OK. Note • The joystick shares the same basic speed control settings as the mouse and keypad. open a very small SmartPlant Review project. Click OK if the calibration test verified correctly. Click Properties and then click the Settings tab. Click OK on the Games Controllers dialog box.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Using the Joystick: An Overview No matter which add-in modules you have installed. Open the Control Panel and double-click Game Controllers. 4.

You can arrange them in any order that you choose. this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting).Rotate • Button 3 . For these large models. the first 3 buttons (1. decreasing the update time while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point. By using this setting. SmartPlant Review saves any change in the button mapping to the registry.Allows movement without a button press. • Button 2: Pan mode. Notes By default. Joystick Motion Types Discrete Motion . Left/Right • Button 2 . much like movement using the keypad. 2. 3) are assigned the following commands: Button 1 .Works similarly to the mouse drag modes in that the joystick does not engage a motion mode until a button is pressed. Left. By default. • 176 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Button 3: Pan mode. • • • • • Button 1: Forward. Backward.Pan You must assign the remainder of the buttons available for your particular joystick before you can start any of the other available commands from the joystick. you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. Right mode Button 1: Rotate mode. No buttons pushed: Forward. Backward.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Joystick Command Mapping You can map joystick command buttons to start selected SmartPlant Review commands. Relative Motion . dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. in relative mode. Right mode Button 2: Rotate mode. Left. the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful. a joystick provides 8 available locations on the POV switch to which you can assign a command. When enabled. Typically. • You can assign any or all of these buttons to a different command. You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. Entries in the button list that contain the letters POV are associated with the point of view switch (POV switch) on a joystick.Forward/Back. POV 1 refers to the 12 o'clock position on the switch and the numbers are incremental for each additional 45 degrees moving around the switch clockwise.

You can set the global settings for texture display on the Display tab of the View Settings dialog box.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview • For best performance. When you are using relative joystick mode. If the cursor remains on the Main view. position the cursor outside the Main view. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 177 . enable textures only on computers that have hardware texturing support. When enabled. which may cause unexpectedly jumpy behavior. SmartPlant Review will receive input as if the mouse were driving the motion. this option allows textures to display during dynamics if Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Motion Settings > Display tab.

Motion continues even if you provide no input. The keypad 0 movement repeats the last keypad motion key up to the rate specified by the Maximum moves per second option on the Motion Settings > Rates tab. using the keypad to steer. then select Continuous. You can toggle the step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and back again. You also can press the period (. Continuous motion does not reverse direction if the last keypad motion before you toggled the step direction was not a step. Toggle Step Direction reverses the direction you are currently traveling. However. page 181 • Set Single Step Motion. Single Step repeats the last direction or rotation one step. page 183 178 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . You also can press 0 on the keypad to toggle continuous motion. You also can press 5 on the keypad to toggle the step direction. and then toggle the step direction. When Continuous Step is off.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Exploring Motion Types: An Overview Continuous Step moves the eye point or display set through the model at a constant rate and in a constant direction. keypad.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move in MU:SU:PU on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box. Continuous motion reverses direction after you complete a single step. Related Topics • Set Continuous Motion. Continuous motion mode allows you to use other commands while in motion. you move through the model only by command from the mouse. or joystick. page 182 • Set Toggle Step Direction.

Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview. Note • The eye point setting motion is relative to the current directional mode. page 180 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 179 .Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Eye Point Command Motion > Eye Point Allows motion commands to affect the graphic views. Set Motion Control to Eye Point Click Motion > Eye Point. Note • The eye point setting motion is relative to the current directional mode. page 202 • Set Motion Control to Display Set.

the temporary change to the Backfaces and End caps view settings does not affect normal updates or eye motion movement. the temporary change to the Backfaces and End caps view settings does not affect normal updates or eye motion movement. select the display set that you want to put in motion. Also. Click Motion > "display set name" Display Set. In Project Manager. Only the display set that is in motion is affected. page 207 180 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 185 • Set Display Options. Also. This command allows you to dynamically move the selected displays set in the model. Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box. rather than static moves using the Tools > Display Sets > Move command. page 179 • Using Project Manager: An Overview. 2. Only the display set that is in motion is affected. page 207 Set Motion Control to Display Set 1. All other elements are updated according to the active view settings. Note • Backfaces and End caps view settings are temporarily switched on during dynamic display set motion and all Collision Detection displays.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Display Set Motion Command Motion > Display Set Allows motion commands to affect the selected display set. All other elements are updated according to the active view settings. page 192 • Using Project Manager: An Overview. User settings are maintained and honored for all other updates. User settings are maintained and honored for all other updates. Related Topics • Set Motion Control to Eye Point. Note • Backfaces and End caps view settings are temporarily switched on during dynamic display set motion and all Collision Detection displays.

For example. Press Esc or 0 on the keypad to stop the motion. Click in the model. using the keypad to steer. Continuous will repeat the Toggle Step Direction motions. Motion continues even if you provide no input. using the keypad to steer. if you press 5 on the keypad for Toggle Step Direction and then press 0. If you press 0 on your keypad to start Continuous motion. page 178 Set Continuous Motion 1. • • Related Topics • Exploring Motion Types: An Overview. or joystick. 2. For example. Notes • You can also click Continuous on the Motion toolbar or press 0 on the keypad to start Continuous motion. • • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 181 . Continuous motion reverses direction after you complete a single step. you move through the model at a constant rate and in a constant direction. Continuous motion mode also allows you to use other commands while in motion. However. Click Motion > Move > Continuous. the last keypad motion command is repeated up to the rate specified by Maximum moves per second on the Motion Settings > Rates tab. Continuous motion does not reverse direction if the last keypad motion before you toggled the step direction was not a step. Continuous will repeat the Toggle Step Direction motions. You can also click Continuous on the View toolbar or press 0 on the keypad to start Continuous motion.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Move Continuous Command Motion > Move > Continuous Moves the eye point or display set through the model at a constant rate and in a constant direction. and then toggle the step direction. keypad. then select Continuous. you move through the model only by command from the mouse. When Continuous Step is off. If you press 0 on your keypad to start Continuous motion. Motion continues even if you provide no input. the last keypad motion command is repeated up to the rate specified by Maximum moves per second on the Motion Settings > Rates tab. if you press 5 on the keypad for Toggle Step Direction and then press 0. Notes • In continuous motion.

Notes • • You can use the Motion Settings dialog box to specify the step size. You can also click Step on the Motion toolbar or press period (. using the keypad to steer. Notes • Single step motion moves you through the model only one step at a time by repeating the last movement command.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move in MU:SU:PU on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box. page 178 • Set Continuous Motion. You can also click Single Step on the View toolbar or press period (. • Related Topics • Exploring Motion Types: An Overview. page 178 Set Single Step Motion Click Motion > Move > Single Step.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move in MU:SU:PU on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box. page 181 • Set Toggle Step Direction. page 183 182 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Related Topics • Exploring Motion Types: An Overview.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Move Single Step Command Motion > Move > Single Step Moves the eye point or display set through the model one step at a time in a constant direction.

Related Topics • Exploring Motion Types: An Overview. page 178 Set Toggle Step Direction Click Motion > Move > Toggle Step Direction. page 182 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 183 . page 181 • Set Single Step Motion. on the View toolbar or press • Related Topics • Set Continuous Motion.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Move Toggle Step Direction Command Motion > Move > Toggle Step Direction Switches step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and back again. You can also click Toggle Step Direction 5 on the keypad. Note • You can also click Toggle Step Direction on the Motion toolbar or press 5 on the keypad. Notes • Toggle step direction reverses the single step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and back again.

The Motion Settings dialog box tabs also allow you to set up a joystick. independent of update speed. discrete. this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). Leave Update View Cone unchecked. page 192 • Set Motion Rates. you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting. By default. dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful. Change the motion rates to move the largest acceptable amount. page 185 • Set Bearing Angles. allowing you to specify the time for screen updates. it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. the keyboard motion. the shading mode. By using this setting. Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box. When enabled. For best performance during motion. and keypad) share the same basic speed/control settings. page 192 • Set Display Options. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion. For these large models. page 192 184 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . and the clipping planes. This will decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Motion Settings Command Motion > Settings Displays the Motion Settings dialog box. All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick. You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. use the lowest acceptable display quality and the following settings on the Display tab on the Motion Settings dialog box: • • • • Leave Allow all texturing unchecked. However. Leave Update position status unchecked.

6 inches each step. For example. Rotate in degrees -Allows you to specify the rotation amount to move the view cone in one step. For example.Allows you to specify in working units incremental adjustments to the motion rate. 6 inches each step. 1:6:0 would move 1 meter. a value of 1:6:0 would move 1 foot.Allows you to specify in working units the distance to move in one step. The Motion Settings dialog box tabs also allow you to set up a joystick. 1:6:0 would move 1 meter. This value is unit independent. Move in MU:SU:PU . a value of 1:6:0 would move 1 foot. if the model's master unit is feet and the sub unit is inches. Rotate in degrees . However. This value is unit independent.Allows you to specify incremental adjustments to the motion angle. 6 centimeters each step. This distance is specified in master unit : sub units : positional units (MU:SU:PU) for the model. 6 centimeters each step. However. if the model's master unit is meters and the sub unit is centimeters. Amounts • Move in MU:SU:PU . • Increment/Decrement adjustments • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 185 . the keyboard motion. Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Use this tab to change the default movement and adjustment rates. if the model's master unit is meters and the sub unit is centimeters. if the model's master unit is feet and the sub unit is inches. and the clipping planes. This distance is specified in master unit : sub units : positional units (MU:SU:PU) for the model.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Motion Settings Dialog Box Provides options for defining the time for screen updates. the shading mode.

You can choose from Full Shading. Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box. This is the slowest to update.Allows you to specify the maximum number of moves to perform during any keypad motion (continuous or otherwise). • Full Shading is the highest quality for a shaded display produces a more curved appearance by producing various shades of color selected across the surface of the element. Coarse Facets.Specifies the Main view shading display quality during motion. page 298 • Motion Settings Dialog Box. No Specular. page 192 • Using the View Cone: An Overview. Changing one value automatically changes the other value. • 186 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Pressing the Delete key will decrease the rates by the specified values. page 149 Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Each time that you manipulate the Main view with a shaded image. These modes are in the order of slowest update to fastest update. especially for large designs. This can be time-consuming. and Flat Shading.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Maximum moves per second . Note • Pressing the Insert key will increase the movement and rotation rates using the values that you specified on the Rates Tab. This value is the same value used for the Frames per second option in the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box. No Specular also provides smooth shading. Quality . page 185 • Set Motion Rates. This is also known as smooth shading the Gouraud Shading algorithm. but is faster than Full Shading because the sun does not reflect bright spots on the element surface. You can speed up the process for motion and static (no motion) updates of a shaded image by changing options on this tab. the image updates.

Sets the distance of the optional far clipping plane used during motion. Then select this option.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview • Coarse Facets turns off the smooth shading. Notes • To use the texturing functionality. resulting in decreased update time while allowing you to see all graphics near the eye point. If you want textures to display in the model. clear this option. pipes look like they are composed of flat sides. page 192 • Set Textures. you must first activate the Textures command. but the display of circular objects is very faceted. page 149 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 187 . If you display textures while manipulating models. Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box.Updates the view cone and related overlay graphics during motion. • Allow all texturing . Surfaces are still shaded. This is the fastest to update. page 185 • Set Display Options. you must install the Photo-Realism module. Update position status . For example. it may slow down the display.Sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). Clear the Allow all texturing option to hide the textures and speed up the display.Specifies whether to update the position status during motion. • Update View Cone . Flat Shading displays a single color for all pixels on the surface instead of a range of slightly different colors.Determines whether textures display while you are manipulating the model. If you already have the Allow all texturing option on and decide that you do not want textures to display while manipulating the model. page 117 • Using the View Cone: An Overview. Clip far . Clip far distance in MU:SU:PU . Use this option with some large models to reduce the amount of graphics being drawn.

Allows you to select the View directional mode forward elevation or encircle angle elevation. page 185 • Position Control Toolbar. page 192 188 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Allows you to select the View directional mode forward bearing or encircle bearing angle.9 . Direction from 0 to 359. Elevation from -90 to 90 . page 150 • Set Bearing Angles.Allows you to select the directional elevation of forward motion when in non-view dependent direction mode. Elevation from -90 to 90 . Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box.Allows you to select the directional bearing of forward motion when in non-view dependent direction mode.9 . Direction from 0 to 359.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Bearing Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Defines the default or starting position for the view cone and motion direction indicators on the Position Control toolbar.

page 180 • Using Project Manager: An Overview. page 180 • Set Motion Control to Display Set. The Display Set Motion control mode command is enabled only when a valid display set is selected in Project Manager. Detect collisions on move . Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview. you can use mouse drag and directional modes to move the selected display set to another location in the model. open Project Manager and rightclick on the display set that was moved.Starts the collision set during the movement of the selected display set. Edit . Current display set to move . To return a display set back to its original position. page 202 • Display Set Motion Command. Then clear the Move option. which can be used to view or change position settings for the selected display set. page 207 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 189 .Displays the Edit Display Set Position dialog box. Collision set .Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Display Set Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Defines which display set that you want to move. You must set the motion relative to display sets using the Motion > Display Set command to move a display set.Lists all defined display sets and allows you to choose a display set to move.Selects the existing collision set during the movement of the display set. After selecting a display set to move.

• Button 3: Pan mode. independent of update speed.Allows movement to respond incrementally to a given direction without a button press.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Joystick Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Activates input from a joystick and specifies whether the joystick movement should use keypad-defined (discrete) or mouse-defined (relative) movement. Discrete (keypad like) . No buttons pushed: Forward. it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. and discrete) share the same basic speed/control settings.Allows you to activate joystick input. All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick. However. Right mode. Backward. Relative (mouse like) .Describes the amount of joystick movement before the movement is registered.Allows the joystick to respond relative to a point on the screen. Left. page 185. You can set the proper MU:SU:PU speed values on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box. Backward. Button 2: Rotate mode. keypad. 190 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . • • Button Mapping . Right mode • Button 1: Rotate mode. Left. • Button 1: Forward. Allow joystick input . much like movement using the keypad. This option works similarly to the mouse drag modes in that the joystick does not engage a motion mode until a button is pressed.Maps commands to joystick buttons. For more information. see Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box). Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion. • Button 2: Pan mode. Move threshold in percent .

it sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). This will decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point. Texturing is available in the full version of SmartPlant Review and the Photo-Realism module. For best performance. • • Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box. this option allows textures to display during dynamics if Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog box. the Clip far option on the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog box can be very useful.Displays the buttons available for mapping. page 161 Joystick Button Mapping Dialog Box Provides options for defining the commands mapped to the buttons on your joystick. enable textures only on computers that have hardware texturing support. When enabled. dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Notes • By default.Displays the command SmartPlant Review has mapped to the selected button. When enabled. you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. For these large models. Related Topics • Using the Joystick: An Overview. page 185 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview. Button . You can set the global settings for texture display on the Display tab of the View Settings dialog box. page 175 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 191 . By using this setting. Command . You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long.

6. 7.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Set Motion Rates 1. Select the Rates tab. 4. Related Topics • Common Toolbar. 5. Note • You also can click Motion Settings on the Common toolbar. Note • You also can click Motion Settings on the Common toolbar. Move the slider to set the View/encircle bearing angles in degrees Direction from 0 to 359. 3. 2. Click Motion > Settings. Click Motion > Settings. Type the increment or decrement adjustment to Move in MU:SU:PU. Click Motion > Settings. 5. 6. Set Display Options 1. Specify the display settings that you want to use. Type the amount to Move in MU:SU:PU. Move the slider to set the Non-view motion bearing angles in degrees Direction from 0 to 359. page 116 192 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Set Bearing Angles 1. Select the Display tab. Move the slider to set the Non-view motion bearing angles in degrees Elevation from -90 to 90. Type the Maximum moves per second. Type the amount to Rotate in degrees. Move the slider to set the View/encircle bearing angles in degrees Elevation from -90 to 90. Note • You also can click Motion Settings on the Motion toolbar. Type the increment or decrement adjustment to Rotate in degrees. 3. 2. 3. Select the Bearing tab. page 80 • Set Sun Bearing Angles.9.9. 4. 2.

Lateral . The circular track is parallel to the Plan view. Horizontal Encircle .The eye point is free to move in any direction in the model. Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview. page 202 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview. Surface Encircle . page 149 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 193 . The circular track is perpendicular to the Plan view. You can move the center point in any direction. You can move the center point in any direction.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview Positioning modes control the movement of the view cone eye point.Eye point movement is restricted to a circular track. The circular track can be moved in any orientation. Vertical Encircle .Eye point movement is restricted to a circular track. page 161 • Using the View Cone: An Overview. You can move the center point in any direction.Eye point movement is restricted to a circular track.

page 153 3. page 194 • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion. Set Eye Point. The End key cycles through the four Directional modes. page 193 • Using Lateral Motion. • on the View Menu. page 152 4. Set or adjust the center point. the View > Settings > View Cone tab. page 196 • Set Surface Encircle Motion. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu. Exploring Motion Types: An Overview. Set Center Point. Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Lateral. page 152 Place Eye Point Only Command. page 194 Using Lateral Motion 1. Tip You can also click Lateral 2. Related Topics • Lateral Command. You can define the current eye point location using the Position Control toolbar. use the Home key on your keyboard to cycle through the four Positioning modes.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Lateral Command Motion > Positioning Modes >Lateral Allows you to move through the model in any direction that you choose using any combination of mouse drag and directional modes. Adjust the eye point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views). page 154 Place Center Point Only Command. or the View > Place > Eye Point Only command. page 178 Note • To switch between encircle motion settings without losing your clipping plane settings. page 198 194 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 200 • Set Vertical Encircle Motion.

the green cross. the View > Settings > View Cone tab. press Ctrl while using these controls. The End key cycles through the directional modes. page 150 • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion. or the View > Place > Center Point Only command. • • • Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview. You can define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar. page 149 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 195 . The eye point always looks toward the center point. Notes • You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye point. the blue track is always parallel to the Plan view and perpendicular to the Elevation view. You also can use the Home key to cycle through the encircle modes without losing your clipping plane settings.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Horizontal Encircle Command Motion > Positioning Modes > Horizontal Encircle Restricts the movement of the view cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the Plan and Elevation views. You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the green sphere. Rotating around the center point is the default. You can maintain your current encircle clipping plane settings when you switch from any of the encircle positioning modes back to the lateral positioning mode by turning On the Motion > Positioning Modes > Maintain Encircle Clipping command. page 83 • Position Control Toolbar. The track is placed in a green sphere that also displays in the two views. The Rotate mouse drag mode is useful when using this positioning mode because you can control both the rotation of the eye point around the track and elevation of the track. page 193 • Encircle Radius Toolbar. In the Horizontal Encircle mode. Changing the elevation of the track in the Elevation view changes the direction of the view cone. To rotate around the eye point. of the sphere. page 196 • Using the View Cone: An Overview. You can maintain your current lateral clipping plane settings when you switch from the lateral positioning mode to any of the encircle positioning modes by turning Off the Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere command.

Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Horizontal Encircle. Adjust the eye point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views). Tip You can also click Horizontal Encircle 2. • on the View Menu. • • • Related Topics • Common Toolbar. page 152 Place Eye Point Only Command. press Ctrl while using these controls. You can also use the Home key to cycle through the encircle modes without losing your clipping plane settings. Rotating around the center point is the default. Set Eye Point. page 193 • Horizontal Encircle Command. page 178 Notes • Use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye point. To rotate around the eye point. page 85 196 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 195 • Motion Toolbar. page 154 Place Center Point Only Command. Set Center Point. Exploring Motion Types: An Overview. page 152 4. Turn on the Motion > Positioning Modes > Maintain Encircle Clipping command to maintain your current encircle clipping plane settings when you switch from any of the encircle positioning modes back to the lateral positioning mode. page 80 • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview. Set or adjust the center point. page 153 3.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Set Horizontal Encircle Motion 1. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu. The End key cycles through the directional modes. Turn off the Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere command to maintain your current lateral clipping plane settings when you switch from the lateral positioning mode to any of the encircle positioning modes.

or the View > Place > Center Point Only command. You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the green sphere. The eye point always looks toward the center point. the green cross. • • • Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview. Notes • You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye point. You can maintain your current encircle clipping plane settings when you switch from any of the encircle positioning modes back to the lateral positioning mode by turning On the Motion > Positioning Modes > Maintain Encircle Clipping command. The End key cycles through the directional modes. page 193 • Position Control Toolbar. Changing the location of the track in the Plan view changes the direction of the view cone. page 150 • Set Vertical Encircle Motion. The track is placed in a green sphere that also displays in the two views. Rotating around the center point is the default. page 198 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 197 . You also can use the Home key to cycle through the encircle modes without losing your clipping plane settings. You can define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar or the View > Settings > View Cone tab. You can maintain your current lateral clipping plane settings when you switch from the lateral positioning mode to any of the encircle positioning modes by turning Off the Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere command. In the Vertical Encircle mode.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Vertical Encircle Command Motion > Positioning Modes > Vertical Encircle Restricts the movement of the view cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the Plan and Elevation views. the blue track is locked to the center point of the Plan view. To rotate around the eye point. press Ctrl while using these controls. The track is always perpendicular to the Plan view. of the sphere.

The End key cycles through the directional modes. Rotating around the center point is the default. You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye point. • • • Related Topics • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion. page 178 Notes • • You can also click Vertical Encircle on the View Menu. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Vertical Encircle. You can also use the Home key to cycle through the encircle modes without losing your clipping plane settings. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu. Set or adjust the center point. page 194 198 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Set Vertical Encircle Motion 1. Exploring Motion Types: An Overview. press Ctrl while using these controls. You can maintain your current encircle clipping plane settings when you switch from any of the encircle positioning modes back to the lateral positioning mode by turning On the Motion > Positioning Modes > Maintain Encircle Clipping command. 2. page 152 4. page 196 • Set Surface Encircle Motion. You can maintain your current lateral clipping plane settings when you switch from the lateral positioning mode to any of the encircle positioning modes by turning Off the Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere command. Set Eye Point. page 200 • Using Lateral Motion. Set Center Point. page 154 3. Adjust the eye point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views). To rotate around the eye point.

Notes • You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye point. You also can use the Home key to cycle through the encircle modes without losing your clipping plane settings. press Ctrl while using these controls. page 150 • Set Surface Encircle Motion. In the Surface Encircle mode. You can maintain your current encircle clipping plane settings when you switch from any of the encircle positioning modes back to the lateral positioning mode by turning On the Motion > Positioning Modes > Maintain Encircle Clipping command. You can define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar. The End key cycles through the directional modes. you can reposition the track in either view. The track is placed in a green sphere that also displays in the two views. the View > Settings > View Cone tab. of the sphere. To rotate around the eye point. or the View > Place > Center Point Only command. the green cross. You can maintain your current lateral clipping plane settings when you switch from the lateral positioning mode to any of the encircle positioning modes by turning Off the Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere command. You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the green sphere. The eye point always remains in the center of the track as seen in the Plan view. Rotating around the center point is the default. page 193 • Position Control Toolbar. The eye point always looks toward the center point.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Surface Encircle Command Motion > Positioning Modes > Surface Encircle Locks the view cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the Plan and Elevation views. • • • Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview. page 200 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 199 . Changing the location of the track changes the direction of the view cone.

Set Center Point. press Ctrl while using these controls. page 196 • Set Vertical Encircle Motion. Exploring Motion Types: An Overview. page 154 3. You can maintain your current lateral clipping plane settings when you switch from the lateral positioning mode to any of the encircle positioning modes by turning Off the Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere command. Set or adjust the center point. You can also use the Home key to cycle through the encircle modes without losing your clipping plane settings. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Clip to Encircle Sphere Command Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere Maintains clipping plane settings when exiting the encircle positioning modes. page 178 Notes • • You can also click Surface Encircle on the View Menu. 2. The End key cycles through the directional modes. When toggled On (the default). page 198 Set Surface Encircle Motion 1. • • • 200 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Rotating around the center point is the default. When toggled Off. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Surface Encircle. page 152 4. You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye point. You can maintain your current encircle clipping plane settings when you switch from any of the encircle positioning modes back to the lateral positioning mode by turning On the Motion > Positioning Modes > Maintain Encircle Clipping command. the Far clipping plane will not be reset when entering one of the encircle positioning modes. the Far clipping plane clips to the encircle sphere whenever you enter one of the encircle positioning modes. Adjust the eye point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views). Set Eye Point. Related Topics • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion. To rotate around the eye point.

page 194 • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion. When toggled Off. page 196 • Set Surface Encircle Motion. Related Topics • Lateral Command. all clipping plane values set in any of the encircle positioning modes are maintained when you return to the lateral positioning mode. page 200 • Set Vertical Encircle Motion. when you return to the lateral positioning mode all clipping plane values set in any of the encircle positioning modes are reset to the values they had before entering any of the encircle positioning modes.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Maintain Encircle Clipping Command Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere Maintains clipping plane settings when exiting the encircle positioning modes. page 198 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 201 . When toggled On (the default).

page 206 • Set View Dependent Level Mode. View Independent Motion .Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview Directional modes define how you want to navigate around the model. while moving in another direction. The mouse drag modes. Level View Dependent Motion .Sets the motion direction relative to where the eye is looking (i. but remains level while moving. This mode allows you to move directly toward where you are looking. page 203 • Set View Independent Mode. The different modes provide different types of motion. View Dependent Motion . positioning modes.e. forward is toward view center). This mode allows you to look in one direction. forward is toward Plant North). page 205 202 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . This mode allows you to move toward where you are looking without changing the elevation.Allows you full control in defining the forward direction by using the motion bearing and elevation indicators on the Position Control toolbar. This mode is similar to View Independent mode with the exception that forward is always north. and Position Control toolbar all affect how the directional modes operate. page 193 • Set Plant North Mode. page 204 • Set View Dependent Mode. Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview.Sets the motion direction relative to where the eye is looking.. thus giving you the flexibility to move forward in an arbitrary direction while looking in another arbitrary direction. Plant North .Sets the motion direction relative to Plant North (that is. which the view cone defines.

Navigating Through the Model: An Overview View Dependent Command Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent Defines the forward. Your elevation in the model changes using the View Dependent mode if the view cone is pointed up or down. Using the Forward/Backward. The eye point to center point vector of the view cone defines this direction. page 205 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 203 . back. left. The mouse drag modes. back moves you away. and right motions based on the direction in which you are looking. Left/Right mouse drag mode. and Position Control toolbar all affect how this directional mode operates. positioning modes. Note • You can also click View Dependent on the View toolbar. The View Dependent mode allows you to move directly toward where you are looking. page 204 • Set View Independent Mode. Set View Dependent Mode Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent. page 206 • Set View Dependent Level Mode. forward moves you towards where you are looking. Related Topics • Set Plant North Mode.

page 206 • Set View Dependent Mode. page 204 204 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . However. page 205 • View Dependent. The View Dependent Level mode allows you to move toward where you are looking but keep the same elevation. Set View Dependent Level Mode Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent. level. your elevation in the model does not change if the view cone is pointed up or down. back moves you away.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview View Dependent. positioning modes. forward moves you towards where you are looking. Note • You can also click View Dependent Level on the View toolbar. Using the Forward/Backward. back. The eye point to center point vector of the view cone defines this direction. and Position Control toolbar all affect how the directional modes operate. Level Command Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent. Left/Right mouse drag mode. left. Related Topics • Set Plant North Mode. Level Defines the forward. page 203 • Set View Independent Mode. The mouse drag modes. and right motions based on the direction in which you are looking. Level Command.

page 206 • Set View Dependent Level Mode. while looking northeast. You can define different view bearing and elevation values. Moving forward would cause the eye point to move southeast.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview View Independent Command Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent Gives you full control in defining the forward direction by using the motion bearing and elevation indicators on the Position Control toolbar. The mouse drag modes. page 204 • Set View Dependent Mode. Related Topics • Set Plant North Mode. page 205 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 205 . positioning modes. page 203 • View Independent Command. For example. you could define the motion bearing as 135 degrees and the view bearing as 45 degrees. This gives you the flexibility to move forward in an arbitrary direction while looking in another arbitrary direction. Set View Independent Mode Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent. Note • You can also click View Independent on the View toolbar. and Position Control toolbar all affect how the directional modes operate.

and right motions based on north in the model. and Position Control toolbar all affect how the directional modes operate. North in the model is always the top of the Plan view. Watch the Plan view when using this mode until you become familiar with the mode. page 205 206 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . left. positioning modes.Navigating Through the Model: An Overview Plant North Command Motion > Directional Modes > Plant North Defines the forward. Related Topics • Plant North Command. Note • You can also click Plant North on the View toolbar. Forward moves north. right moves east. This mode is similar to View Independent mode with the exception that forward is always north. page 203 • Set View Independent Mode. The Plant North mode allows you to look in one direction. The mouse drag modes. defined by the view cone. back moves south. page 204 • Set View Dependent Mode. back. Set Plant North Mode Click Motion > Directional Modes > Plant North. while moving in another direction. page 206 • Set View Dependent Level Mode. and left moves west.

such as using CTRL + A to select all items in the list view.prp files. Display Sets . ScheduleReview .Using Project Manager: An Overview Using Project Manager: An Overview Project Manager provides an interactive method for viewing model data. If you have the Construction module installed. available by right-clicking anywhere in Project Manager.Displays the ScheduleReview project associated with the model and allows you to accomplish several ScheduleReview manipulations. you can view parts of the model. Using Project Manager. with the related information displaying in the list view.Organizes the display sets in the model and allows you to accomplish several display set manipulations. and using CTRL to select nonconsecutive items (press and hold down CTRL. associated with the model. and then click the last item). By expanding the nodes. using SHIFT to select consecutive items (click the first item. project files. and the ScheduleReview project. and ScheduleReview projects. Project Manager also supports standard Windows functionality in the list view. and then click each item). including the project files. and review ScheduleReview construction sequences. press and hold down SHIFT. you can also review construction sequences within Project Manager. such as . display sets. Project Files . When you display Project Manager.Displays the graphic files. A shortcut menu. contains many of the commands needed to manipulate display sets. the items comprising the current model's structure display in the Project Manager tree view. you can view all project files associated with the model.dgn and . SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 207 . create and manipulate display sets.

Project Manager displays items associated with the open model. By default. page 211 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview. display sets. Project Manager does not display any items. Project Manager is an undocked window. Project Manager allows you to view all parts of the model. you can click Dockable on the Project Manager right-click menu and drag the window to one of the edges of the SmartPlant Review window. If a model document is not open. By default. SmartPlant Review remembers this setting when you exit the application. and the ScheduleReview project. page 522 Display or Hide Project Manager Click View > Project Manager. • • 208 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . including the project files. Project Manager is a undocked window. Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager. You can display or hide Project Manager at any time. Related Topics • Dockable Command. The new Immediate Update Mode option (available on the Project Manager shortcut menu) allows you to to control when changes made in Project Manager are rendered in the view. Notes • Project Manager automatically opens to the location you placed it during a previous session. to make Project Manager dockable so that you can place it in a fixed location within the SmartPlant Review window. If Project Manager is an undocked dialog box.Using Project Manager: An Overview In addition to hiding or displaying Project Manager using the View > Project Manager command. page 210 • Immediate Update Mode Command. you can use the Dockable command (available on the Project Manager shortcut menu). If you prefer. page 495 • Working with Display Sets: An Overview. page 213 Project Manager Command View > Project Manager Displays the Project Manager window. the Arrange All command does not affect its position.

Use the Show/Hide for Main View. 2. • • Related Topics • Create a Display Set in Project Manager. files. page 76 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 209 . Indicates that the item and its sub-items appear in the view of the model. Show/Hide for Plan View. Open a document in SmartPlant Review. click View > Project Manager. 4. Indicates a mix of shown and hidden sub-items. This shortcut to commands is especially useful when manipulating display sets. Display Sets. page 217 • Show/Hide for Elevation View Command.Using Project Manager: An Overview View Items in the Model with Project Manager 1. If a document is not open. the Project Files node. double-click the Project Files. If Project Manager is not visible. In the Project Manager tree view. you can access commands on the shortcut menu. 2. 3. or levels in the view of the model. In Project Manager. Notes • In Project Manager. Notes • If you right-click in Project Manager. expand the Display Sets node. 3. Clear the check box to hide one or more corresponding display sets. you can also manage and edit display sets and ScheduleReview projects with commands on the shortcut menu. Open a model document in SmartPlant Review. click View > Project Manager. The check box beside each item in the tree indicates whether the item is displayed or not. You also can also show or hide your display sets by clicking Tools > Display Sets > Show. page 75 • Show/Hide for Plan View Command. page 76 • Show/Hide for Main View Command. or ScheduleReview node. • Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager 1. and Show/Hide for Elevation View commands to select the views where the selected items or sub-items are shown or hidden. If Project Manager is not visible. you must install the Construction module. the shortcut menu does not appear in Project Manager. or any of their sub-nodes. To use the ScheduleReview functionality.

2. You cannot resize the window after you have docked it. click the toolbar handle and drag the window to the new location. page 208 Move the Project Manager Window 1. click in the title bar and drag the window to the new location. page 207 210 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Related Topics • Display or Hide Project Manager. If Project Manager is docked. • • Related Topics • Using Project Manager: An Overview. If Project Manager is hidden when you close the software. If you are using Project Manager as an undocked window. SmartPlant Review remembers this setting when you exit the application. You can double-click the title bar (when undocked) or gray bar (when docked) at the top of the Project Manager window to dock and undock it. To display the window. You access this command by right-clicking anywhere in Project Manager and selecting Dockable from the shortcut menu. click View > Project Manager. the Arrange All command does not affect its position.Using Project Manager: An Overview Dockable Command Project Manager > Dockable Acts as a toggle. Project Manager does not appear the next time that you open the software. allowing you to display the Project Manager window as an undocked window (default) or as a docked toolbar. If Project Manager is not docked. Notes • Be sure to size the Project Manager window the way you want it before you dock it.

page 208 • Move the Project Manager Window.Using Project Manager: An Overview Immediate Update Mode Command Project Manager > Immediate Update Mode Acts as a toggle. Important • Be sure to click Update before turning Immediate Update Mode back on. an Update button displays above the project tree and becomes active when you make your first change in Project Manager. allowing you to control when changes made in Project Manager are rendered in the view. You can click this button any time after you make a change to update the view and commit the changes to the database. because view updates can be timeconsuming. all uncommitted changes are lost. When on. However. If you toggle the mode back on while the Update button is active. When the Immediate Update Mode is off. changes (such as turning display sets on and off) are immediately made in the view. page 210 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 211 . Related Topics • Display or Hide Project Manager. turning off the Immediate Update Mode allows you to make multiple changes and then update the view at one time.

Using Project Manager: An Overview 212 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

Allows you to define display sets based on selected label data. Note • If you are familiar with using displays sets in DesignReview and want more information about the differences between display sets in DesignReview vs.You can import and export display sets in their existing folders. For more information. SmartPlant Review. SmartPlant Review automatically creates these display sets for you based on the label data criteria that you select. allowing you to place objects in display sets based on object attributes. or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets. Display set ID numbers determine the order of precedence when you assign conflicting display characteristics to the same elements. page 251. Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or other display sets to any level of nesting that you require. see Import Display Sets Command. SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of display sets you can create. For more information. a display set cannot contain itself (to prevent recursive or looping organization structures). allowing you to more easily contrast members of the display set with other objects in the model. an element that is a member of two different display sets appears with the characteristics of the lower numbered display set. However. Display sets are collections of graphic objects that are grouped together according to specific definition criteria. allowing you to create libraries of specific definition information for display sets.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Working with Display Sets: An Overview Display sets greatly extend the review process by allowing you to isolate and separate objects within huge projects so that you can more easily perform an in-depth review analysis of your model. Import/Export .Decreases the brightness of the selected display set. page 25. The lower the display set number is. multiple selected display sets. Therefore. Dim . or other display sets. For more information. For more information. the higher the precedence. assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on. Show Membership . page 247. However. Additional Features Auto-Define . This setting can be applied to a single display set. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 213 . see Dim Display Sets Command. highlighted objects. see Show Membership Command. see Display Set Changes. model attributes. A display set definition can contain one or more criteria. see Auto-Define Display Set Command. page 245 and Export Display Sets Command. page 252.Allows you to show display set membership in the Text view for an auto-highlighted element. page 218. your hardware capability can limit your number of display sets.

When display set settings are read from the database (for instance. your hardware capability can limit the number of display sets you can have. • Once a display set is defined. when opening a model file or selecting the Tools > Refresh Data command). page 219 • Create a Display Set Definition. page 232 214 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . For instance. The selected elements are lost if the files containing these elements are modified.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Defining Display Sets: An Overview Defining a display set involves creating visual groups of graphic objects based on user-defined criteria. or if the display set definition is loaded using the Import Display Set dialog box. we recommend that you use the Picked Object(s) search criteria only for temporary display sets. or wireframe the HVAC data in a shaded model of a plant. A display set cannot contain itself or any other display set that contains itself. Picked Object(s). Important • SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of display sets you may have. page 215 • Edit a Display Set Definition. the higher the precedence. You can define display sets to contain any group of graphical data according to the following criteria: • Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or other display sets to any level of nesting. The lower the display set ID number. However. assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on. • • Related Topics • Automatically Define Display Sets. you can review different material assignments on a single structure rather than the entire facility. For this reason. This means that an element that is a member of two different display sets will appear with the characteristics of the lower numbered display set. can be lost when the definition is edited in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session. it can be manipulated independent of the model. the display set ID number determines the order of precedence when conflicting display characteristics are assigned to the same elements. Display sets that use the search criteria.

• 4. Click Insert and define the selection criteria for the display set. page 221 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 215 . then the new display set's name is set to "Copy of Find Object". For more information. the display set description is defaulted to "Copy of" and the selected display set name (for example. • Tips • If you have an editable display set selected in the display set tree control in Project Manager. Edit Display Set Definition Dialog Box. then the new display set's description is set to Copy of Find Object. Edit Display Set Dialog Box. "Copy of Reboiler System"). 2.Working with Display Sets: An Overview New Display Set Command Tools > Display Sets > New > Display Set Displays the Edit Display Set dialog box. If you do not have an editable display set selected in Project Manager. 3. Type a name for the display set that you are defining. Important • If you have an editable display set selected in Project Manager. The new display set ID default is the first non-zero and non-used user ID available in the project. Copy of Reboiler System). 5. BUT the current criteria definition in memory for the Find Object command is not empty. page 220. page 220 Tip You can also right-click in Project Manager and select New > Display Set. • Related Topics • Edit Display Set Dialog Box. If you do not have an editable display set selected in the display set tree control in Project Manager. BUT the current criteria definition in memory for the Find Object command is not empty. see Edit Display Set Dialog Box. the display set name defaults to Copy of and the selected display set name (for example. allowing you to create a new display set definition. Type a display set ID number. page 220 Create a Display Set Definition 1. Click Edit in the Definition group. Click Tools > Display Sets > New > Display Set.

even though DisplaySet2 is still on. The loss also can occur if the display set definition is loaded using the Import Display Set dialog box. the higher the precedence. assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on. Tip When you assign a material name to the display set. 7. Type a Description for the display set. The lower the display set number. Once DisplaySet2 is toggled off and then on. if Object 1 is in both DisplaySet1 and DisplaySet2. The selected elements are lost if you modify the files containing these elements. • • Related Topics • Assign Material to a Display Set. This means that an element that is a member of two different display sets will appear with the characteristics of the lower numbered display set. The portion of display sets that use the search criteria Picked Objects can be lost when you edit the definition in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session. page 219 • Display Set Changes. For example. when opening a model file or selecting the Tools > Refresh Data command). assign a default material to the display set by clicking Edit in the Default Material group. Object1 will appear again. Objects can be in more than one display set at a time. page 232 • Import Display Sets. However. • Notes • When display set settings are read from the database (for instance. the display set ID number determines the order of precedence when conflicting display characteristics are assigned to the same elements. The last action performed on the object by corresponding display set manipulations wins. page 25 • Edit a Display Set Definition. then Object 1 is off. and you turn off DisplaySet1. For this reason. use the Picked Objects search criteria only in temporary display sets.Working with Display Sets: An Overview 6. page 244 • Automatically Define Display Sets. overlapping display sets may be the problem. all elements in the set appear in the Main view using those material properties (color. surface characteristics. page 247 216 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Optionally. if your new display set does not seem to display properly. and so on) when applied.

In Project Manager. 5. 6. Notes • Project Manager appears as an undocked window by default. Drag a display set to the new folder. Right-click and select New > Display Set > Definition. 2. The new folder appears under the Display Sets node with the default name highlighted. page 208 3. You can also access this command on the Project Manager shortcut menu by right-clicking on a display set and selecting New > Display Set > Folder. Open a model. 4. Right-click in Project Manager and select New > Display Set > Folder. If a model document is not open. click View > Project Manager. drag the display set to the left of the Display Sets area. Related Topics • Move the Project Manager Window. Create a New Display Set Folder 1. The cursor changes to indicate that you can drop the display set. • Related Topics • Using Project Manager: An Overview. page 210 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 217 . Double-click the folder to see the display set that you dragged. 2. Type a name for the new folder and press Enter. right-click on the folder and select Rename. If a model document is not open. page 207 New Display Set Folder Command Tools > Display Sets > New > Folder Creates a new display set folder in Project Manager. In Project Manager. Note • If you want to remove a display set from a folder. display sets do not appear in Project Manager. 3.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Create a Display Set in Project Manager 1. Project Manager does not display any items. If Project Manager does not appear. The display set now appears in a higher level of the Display Sets tree and is removed from the folder. If the folder name is not selected. Open a document. expand the Display Sets node. Display or Hide Project Manager. expand the Display Sets node.

Label fields for display set creation . The software automatically creates an individual display set for each value of the label data that you select. Related Topics • Auto-Define Display Set Command. page 215 • Defining Display Sets: An Overview. page 214 218 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 218 • Automatically Define Display Sets. page 219 Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box Allows you to pick items to include in a new display set by their PDS label data.Allows you to pick items by label to include in a new display set. SmartPlant Review will stop the process at the next label. You can specify any unused ID.Overwrites existing display sets that have the same names as the new ones being generated. To automatically define display sets. Start ID . • Related Topics • Automatically Define Display Sets. PDS label data must exist. Delete existing display sets with the same name . page 219 • Create a Display Set Definition. Any used IDs encountered after the start ID that you specify are skipped automatically when new display sets are generated.Allows you to type a numerical display set ID to start with. The software automatically creates an individual display set for each value of the label data that you select. Note • You can stop an auto-definition run by pressing the ESC key. allowing you to pick items to include in a new display set by their PDS label data.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Auto-Define Display Set Command Tools > Display Sets > Auto-Define Displays the Auto-Define Display Sets dialog box.

page 232 • Export Display Sets. page 218 2. Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box. Select the labels for which you want to create display sets. press and hold down SHIFT. • 4. (Optional) Check the Delete existing display sets with the same names option if you want the software to delete existing display sets when it automatically generates new ones with the same names. and then click each item). Specify a starting ID. Once the automatic definition process begins. • Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition. page 249 • Import Display Sets. Notes • The labels that you select from are read in from all of the labels files associated with the . skipping any ID already in use. Tip The Auto-Define Display Sets dialog box supports the standard Windows functionality of using SHIFT to select consecutive items (click the first item.dri file that you opened. and then click the last item) and using CTRL to select nonconsecutive items (press and hold down CTRL. 3. page 215 • Edit a Display Set Definition. Click Tools > Display Sets > Auto-Define. page 247 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 219 . The Start ID field defaults to the first unused ID.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Automatically Define Display Sets 1. the Start ID increments once per generated display set.

Clear . which allows you to select a material to assign to the display set and to specify the properties for that material. You can edit these notes to describe the display set definition that you are creating.Removes the text description associated with the display set. Name .Displays the ID of the display set for the definition that you are editing. page 232 Edit Display Set Dialog Box Allows you to create a new or edit an existing display set definition. This ID must be unique. Default Material Name . Edit . Edit .Working with Display Sets: An Overview Edit Display Set Definition Command Tools > Display Sets > Edit Definition Displays the Edit Display Set dialog box. allowing you to specify criteria describing the graphic objects that you want to include in the display set.Displays the Assign Material to Display Set dialog box.Displays the text description associated with the current display set.Displays the Edit Definition dialog box. Text . Related Topics • Edit a Display Set Definition. Clear .Removes the current material assignment for the display set.Displays the name of the display set for the definition that you are creating or editing.Displays the name of the material file to assign to the display set.Displays the defined search criteria for retrieving the graphic objects that you want to include in the display set. ID . Criteria . 220 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . allowing you to edit an existing display set definition.

Criteria . This allows you to select a display set. Delete . The subsequent constructs (discussed below) automatically appear as you step through creating the definition.Pastes the current complete text from the clipboard to replace the current complete criteria definition. then the criteria definition is not changed.Copies the current. then run the Find Object command and find all the objects in that display set without having to manually re-enter its definition. Insert . Paste . then that display set's criteria definition is used as the current criteria definition for the command. complete definition (even if blank) the clipboard.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Edit Display Set Definition Dialog Box Allows you to edit the definition that the software uses to combine the objects that compose the selected display set. click in the blank line below the definition and then click Insert. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 221 .Provides access to the constructs needed to define the search criteria for retrieving the graphic objects that you want to include in the display set. Clear . If you want to add a line below the currently defined lines.Removes the selected line in the definition.Removes all criteria in the definition.Begins a new line in the definition. If there is no text on the clipboard. Selecting a line in the definition and then clicking Insert places a blank line above the selected line in the definition. Copy . Tip • If you select an editable display set in the Project Manager tree view.

Working with Display Sets: An Overview Composing the Definition Defining the search criteria for the objects to include in the display set definition involves several different operators. If a colon exists. For example. File. the line: Equip no G-7708A would yield: data field name = Equip data field data = no G-7708A 222 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . but the main operators are FIND and FIND ALL BUT. and the data in that field matches the match string according to the data operator. Picked Objects. Everything to the right of the first white space is considered the data field data. • After selecting either FIND or FIND ALL BUT.Allows you to search for the definition type by a data field name. Display Set. a data operator. Level. Color.Produces a group consisting of all the elements that do not meet the specified criteria. An element matches data criteria if it has the specified application label data field. An element will not match if it does not have the specified label data field name or if it has no label data at all. Volume Overlap. The data field names are derived from the label data as follows: Each line in the label data is scanned for a colon (:) character. the available data field names appear in a list.Produces a group consisting of all the elements that meet the specified criteria. you are prompted to select the definition type of the criteria: Data. • FIND . After you select the Data criteria type. FIND ALL BUT . then the first white space after the first text is used to delimit the name. or Linkages. then all the text to the left of the colon is considered the data field name. Volume Inside. the line: Equip no: G-7708A would yield: data field name = Equip no: data field data = G-7708A If there is no colon in the line. For example. and a match string. Data .

An element matches if it is located on one of the levels. which allows you to select one or more level numbers to search for the graphic objects.Displays the Levels dialog box. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 223 . which allows you to select the files in which to search for the graphic objects.Working with Display Sets: An Overview File . Level .Displays the Files dialog box.

Display Set . 224 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Allows you to search for graphic objects by selecting one or more display set names. which allows you to select the colors of the graphic objects to search. see Match Items Dialog Box. An element matches if it coincides with one of the chosen color numbers. For more information.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Color . page 135. allowing you to either select files. An element matches if it is in one of the display sets. However. Tip • The Match button on the Files. You can choose one or more color numbers for your definition criteria. Levels. levels. even if the reference is through another display set. and Colors dialog boxes displays the Match Items dialog box. the definition list cannot reference display sets that refer to themselves. or colors matching the given pattern or selected object.Displays the Colors dialog box. because this would create a "circular" definition.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 225 .Displays the Pick Objects dialog box. Note • The portion of display sets created using the Picked Object search criteria can be lost when the definition is edited in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session.Specifies that the data field information equals the match string. The picked objects portion will also be lost if the display set definition is loaded using the Load Display Set form.Allows you to search for graphic objects by specifying a volume definition (a portion of the model) by placing data points. see Find Volume Overlap Dialog Box. An element matches Volume Overlap if it intersects or overlaps the volume (selected area). a list of data operators displays: Equals (=) .Specifies that the first number in the data field data is greater than or equal to the match number.Specifies that the first number in the data field data is greater than the match number. which allows you to select an object by clicking the graphic in the Main view. For more information. or if it lies completely inside the area. For these reasons. Greater Than (>) .Working with Display Sets: An Overview Volume Inside and Volume Overlap . After you select the definition type and object. For more information. Greater Than or Equal To(>= ) . page 231. see Pick Objects Dialog Box. the Picked Objects search criteria should be used only in temporary display sets. page 230.Displays the PDS DRMS linkage associated with the object. An element matches Volume Inside if it lies completely inside the volume (area). or if the files containing these elements are modified. Linkages . Picked Object(s) .

>. the following Find Object definitions will return the same results: Find DATA Construction status = New Find DATA Construction status = new Find DATA Construction status = nEw Find DATA Construction status = NEW 226 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . where * matches any number (even zero) of characters and ? matches exactly one character. 7783line. After you select the operator. this value is treated as a text string to match. Less Than or Equal To (<=) . Note • The "does not equal" data operator (!=) is not provided because the same effect can be accomplished by combining the equals (=) and FIND ALL BUT operators at the beginning of the line. the match string: *77?3*line matches the following cases of data field data: 12347713line. For data operators <.Specifies that the first number in the data field data is less than or equal to the match number.Specifies that the first number in the data field data is less than the match number. For the = data operator. The match string can contain the special characters * and ?. The match string is case insensitive. the Enter Data dialog box appears. >=. For example. if a label value is stored exactly as "New" in the label database. and <=. 1247723 line. this value is simply a number to compare to.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Less Than (<) . For example. and 123477a3 water line.

even if it meets multiple definition criteria.Allows you to create a group that consists of only the elements from the previous results that meet the current criteria.Working with Display Sets: An Overview After you have defined a single criteria line. the following criteria operators become available for additional criteria lines in the definition: • ADD . Thus. KEEP ONLY . plus all the elements that meet the current criteria.Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results. see Sub-definitions. Note • • • • An element is added to a group only once. ADD ALL BUT . SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 227 . excluding all the elements that do not meet the current criteria. minus all the elements that meet the current criteria. This list is followed by a list of criteria for your second line.Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results.Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results. and so on. page 229. you build the definition by selecting from lists. For more information. and these lists vary in content according to each stage. THROW AWAY .

Then an additional search criteria is used to throw away any element that contains at least one character in the Service field. The elements remaining will contain no entry (null) in the Service field.400 N.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Example: Basic Search The following definition defines the search criteria for all pipes that are 10 inches or larger (assuming a Data Diameter field name in inches.15 The first line creates a group of all the elements that have a number greater than or equal to 10 in the Diameter field. In this way. Related Topics • Edit a Display Set Definition. 444 E. page 220 228 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . and are not on level 12 or 15: FIND Data Diameter >= 10 KEEP ONLY Data Line No = *8011* KEEP ONLY Volume Overlap 123 N. the previous group is narrowed down to a new group that includes only the elements that meet both criteria lines. 500 El THROW AWAY Level 12. 377 El . FIND Data Service: = * THROW AWAY Data Service: = ?* The first line creates a group on all elements that contain a Service field. The third criteria line creates a new group by searching the last group that was created for elements that are inside or overlapping the specified volume. in line 8011. Because this is the last line. intersect a certain section of the plant. The second line searches this new group for elements that have the text 8011 somewhere in the Line No field. The fourth line then throws away any elements in the group that are on levels 12 or 15. page 232 • Edit Display Set Definition Command. this final group of elements is the one selected by the Search For Objects Matching Criteria command. 550 E. Example: Search for "Null" Fields The following display set definition is based on a search for any element that has an empty field in the Service category.

444 E. 500 El KEEP ONLY Display Set Firewater THROW AWAY Data Diameter > 12 ADD FIND Volume 375 N. Lines 6. 8. 700 E. The following example definition contains one sub-definition: FIND Volume 123 N. up to the end of the sub-definition. 377 El . Line 5 begins the sub-definition by selecting a volume to start with. Subdefinitions are created by placing an operation on a line by itself.dgn THROW AWAY Color 3 END FIND ADD Picked Objects Lines 1 through 3 define the group of elements in the specified volume that belong to the Firewater display set and are <= 12 inches in diameter.400 N. Definitions can be nested indefinitely and can be nested multiple times. page 240 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 229 . Related Topics • Find an Object. The FIND operator selects a group of elements and then each of the following lines.dgn with color number 3. 550 E. 31 THROW AWAY File steel. The end of a sub-definition results in a group of elements that meet the sub-definition criteria. Line 4 adds the sub-definition to the group. The END FIND operator on line 9 ends the sub-definition. The last line adds some selected elements to the group to yield a final set of elements. 500 El KEEP ONLY Level 7. and then using the FIND operator on the following line. 7. Each line in a sub-definition works similarly to the definition itself. Mark the end of a sub-definition by choosing the END FIND option.500 N. operates on the previous result to create a new group of elements.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Sub-definitions Sub-definitions are sometimes needed to create more complicated definitions. and 8 keep only the elements on certain levels and then throw away anything left that is in file steel. 377 El . 9. which appears on the continuation operator list. 600 E. This sub-definition group is then applied to the search criteria of any previous FIND criteria to produce the completed set of elements. The group that results from this sub-definition is then added to the results from line 3 to yield a new group.

see Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview. page 215 • Edit a Display Set Definition. by placing a 3D point. Pick Point . the object that you want to select.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Find Volume Inside/Overlap Dialog Box Allows you to specify defining points for the volume. and elevation coordinates for the second point in the volume definition. and elevation coordinates for the first point in the volume definition.Displays the name of the display set that you are defining. Elevation . Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition. east. • North .Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the first point in the volume definition. page 156.Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the second point in the volume definition. • North .Allows you to graphically indicate. Elevation . east.Allows you to graphically select the second 3D point for the volume definition. • • • Display set name .Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the first point in the volume definition.Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the second point in the volume definition. Pick Point . page 232 230 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Allows you to enter the elevation for the first point in the volume definition. East .Allows you to specify the north. East . First . For more information. • • • Second .Allows you to enter the elevation for the second point in the volume definition.Allows you to specify the north.

Display set name . If Project Manager does not appear. Open a document.Displays the name of the display set that you are defining.Allows you to graphically indicate. Pick Object . page 135 Edit a Display Set in Project Manager 1. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 231 . If a model document is not open.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Pick Objects Dialog Box Allows you to define a display set by selecting the objects in the Main view. expand the Display Sets node. Picked objects . Related Topics • Edit Display Set Definition Dialog Box. click View > Project Manager. Project Manager does not display any items. The elements comprising the object you clicked are added to the Picked objects list. the object that you want to select.Displays the search criteria for the graphic object that you selected using the Pick Object button. 2. Double-click a display set to edit its settings. Notes • Project Manager appears as an undocked window by default. page 221 • Match Items Dialog Box. Count .Displays the number of graphic objects found to comprise the object you selected. 3. by clicking in the Main view. In Project Manager.

3. page 220 2. Selecting the Copy button in the Edit Definition dialog box will copy the current complete criteria definition (even if blank) into the clipboard. all elements in the set appear in the Main view using those material properties (color. If there is no text on the clipboard. Optionally. and so on). then the criteria definition is not changed. Notes • You also can click Edit Display Sets on the Tools toolbar or rightclick in Project Manager. page 243. Selecting the Paste button in the Edit Definition dialog box will paste the current complete text from the clipboard to replace the current complete criteria definition. Edit Display Set Definition Dialog Box. page 215 232 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . then select Edit Definition. see Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box. • • Related Topics • Automatically Define Display Sets.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Edit a Display Set Definition 1. Click Tools > Display Sets > Edit Definition. For more information. page 221 4. page 219 • Create a Display Set Definition. surface characteristics. Click Edit in the Definition group. Tip • When you assign a material name to the display set. Change the selection criteria to meet your needs. assign a default material to the display set by clicking Edit in the Default Material group. Edit Display Set Dialog Box.

Displays the ID of the display set that you are moving. Reset .Displays the name of the display set that you are moving. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 233 . This functionality is a very useful tool for checking clearances and provides the ability to temporarily move a group of objects around in the model.Sets the Move Destination Delta values and Rotate Angles values to zero. Display Set Name . The Move Reference Origin and the Rotate Reference Origin are not reset. Move . which allows you to change the position of the selected display set. Related Topics • Edit Display Set Position. ID . page 237 Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box Allows you to define the distance or destination path in which to move a selected display set. Information Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) Allows you to select and move a display set. After assigning the distance or destination path. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units : Sub Units : Positional Units).Working with Display Sets: An Overview Edit Display Set Position Command Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position Displays the Edit Display Set Position dialog box. This command works in conjunction with the Tools > Display Sets > Move command to allow you to reposition display sets independent of their default location. the display set will be moved by the specified amount when the dialog box is closed.When checked. use the Move tab on this dialog box to move the display set.

Displays the current maximum east coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the display set. Elevation .Displays the current maximum elevation of a bounding box enclosing the display set. While defining the destination coordinates. North .Working with Display Sets: An Overview Minimum range in MU:SU:PU • North .Specifies the east coordinate for the move reference origin.Allows you to pick a point in the model using the mouse rather than typing specific coordinate values. page 237 Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) Allows you to define the distance or destination path in which the display set will be moved. • • Maximum range in MU:SU:PU • • • Related Topics • Edit Display Set Position Command.Displays the current minimum elevation of a bounding box enclosing the display set. page 233 • Edit Display Set Position. keep in mind that they are relative to the reference origin (where the display set started out). Elevation . East . page 156. 234 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Specifies the elevation coordinate for the move reference origin. North . For more information.Displays the current maximum north coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the display set. The units for the destination coordinates are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units : Sub Units : Positional Units). East . East .Specifies the north coordinate for the move reference origin.Displays the current minimum north coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the display set. see Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview. Pick Point .Displays the current minimum east coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the display set. Elevation .

Switches the move coordinate fields to accept absolute destination values for the new display set position. Related Topics • Move a Display Set. East .Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the north coordinate for the new position. page 256 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 235 . This option allows you to move the display set a specified amount from the original reference point. either a specified amount or a distance and bearing. page 237 • Move Display Sets Command. Elevation . The Delta options allow you to define an offset. from the original reference point.Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the elevation coordinate for the new position.Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the east coordinate for the new position. Delta value . The Delta options allow you to define an offset. Pick Point . Delta direction .Working with Display Sets: An Overview Absolute . North .Switches the move coordinate fields to accept delta offset values for the new display set position.Switches the move coordinate boxes to accept delta directional offset values for the new display set position.Allows you to pick a point in the model for the destination point rather than specifying each coordinate individually. either a specified amount or a distance and bearing. from the original reference point.

Side . Plan . in degrees from 0 to less than 360.Specifies the angle in the side direction to rotate the display set. in MU:SU:PU (Master Units : Sub Units : Positional Units). page 239 236 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Specifies the angle in the front direction to rotate the display set.Specifies the angle in the plan direction to rotate the display set.Specifies the east coordinate for the reference origin point around which the display set rotates. Pick Point . and side angles. Related Topics • Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box). page 234 • Rotate Display Set.Specifies the north coordinate for the reference origin point around which the display set rotates. For more information. for rotating the display set. page 156. Front .Specifies the elevation coordinate for the reference origin point around which the display set rotates.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Rotate Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) Allows you to specify the reference origin coordinates. Elevation . North . This tab also allows you to specify the plan. front. for the point around which the current display set will rotate. see Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview. East .Allows you to pick a three dimensional point in the model for the reference origin rather than specifying each coordinate individually. Note • The Rotate Reference origin in MU:SU:PU is adjusted internally by the move deltas specified on the Move tab before the rotate angles are applied.

or Delta Direction for the Destination. page 234 5. specify the current display set Range. Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box). page 236 Related Topics • Edit Display Set Position Command. and Elevation coordinates for the Reference Origin.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Edit Display Set Position 1. Right-click in Project Manager and select Edit > Display Sets > Edit Position. page 234 4. Display or Hide Project Manager. Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box). Select a display set from the list in Project Manager. On the Move tab. from the original reference point (the Reference Origin). On the Information tab. either by a specified amount (value). Display or Hide Project Manager. Absolute defines the exact destination of the moved display set (not an offset). SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 237 . page 256 Move a Display Set 1. activate/deactivate display set Move (based on current display set positional information). 3. Delta Value. page 233 4. Right-click in Project Manager and select Edit > Display Sets > Edit Position. Select Absolute. page 208 2. On the Rotate tab. specify the rotate amounts for the current display set positional information. Click the Move tab. specify the move amounts for the current display set positional information. or by distance and bearing (direction). 3. Type the coordinates for the North. Information Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box). Select the display set that you want to move from the list in Project Manager. page 208 2. page 233 • Move Display Sets Command. or Reset the Move and Rotate deltas back to zero (effectively returning the moved display set back to its original position). Tip • Click Pick Point to select the point in the model rather than specifying each coordinate individually. Rotate Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box). Delta defines an offset from the current position. East. 5.

Check the Move option to move the display set to the specified destination coordinates. East. You can also use the keypad to manipulate the position of a display set. Moved display sets that contain special elements such as pipes. valves. page 256 • Rotate Display Set. Moving display sets requires special considerations. • • • • Related Topics • Display or Hide Project Manager. At the same time. and elbows.Working with Display Sets: An Overview 6. and Elevation coordinates for the Destination. Although you can select multiple display sets in Project Manager. though. Type the North. If an object is a member of more than one display set with different offsets. page 233 8. page 237 • Move Display Sets Command. 7. reducers. use the Display Sets > Move command to toggle the Move property without having to return to the Information tab on the Edit Display Set Position dialog box. valves. the object is displayed using the offset assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number. page 208 • Edit Display Set Position. You also can dynamically move display sets using the Motion > Display Set control mode command. you can select only one display set at a time for dynamic motion. Click the Information tab. Notes • After the display set destination has been defined in the Edit Position dialog box. Information Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box). and elbows may sometimes not display properly unless the backfaces and end caps flags are turned on. reducers. page 239 238 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . enabling backfaces and end caps makes the display slower for views that contain pipes.

you can select only one display set at a time for dynamic motion. the object is displayed using the offset assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number. Click the Rotate tab. The Rotate Reference Origin is adjusted internally by the move deltas specified on the Move tab before the rotate angles are applied. page 236 4. Right-click in Project Manager and select Edit > Display Sets > Edit Position. Display or Hide Project Manager. Select the display set that you want to rotate from the list in Project Manager. 5. • • Related Topics • Display or Hide Project Manager. Type the coordinates for the North. page 237 • Move a Display Set. Rotate Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box). Specify the Plan. East. page 208 • Edit Display Set Position. page 208 2. Front. Tip Click Pick Point to select the point in the model rather than specifying each coordinate individually. Although you can select multiple display sets in Project Manager. page 234 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 239 . • Notes • If an object is a member of more than one display set with different offsets. and Elevation coordinates for the Reference Origin.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Rotate Display Set 1. page 237 • Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box). and Side angles. 3.

The operation on the second line (if there is one) is performed on this new group of elements. and individual elements. Find an Object 1. resulting in another new group. The operation on the first line is performed on all of the elements in the model. After the last line. Click Edit > Find Object. The language for the definition list criteria consists of operations. 2. types. one criterion per line.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Find Object Command Edit > Find Object Searches for objects in the model that match criteria that you specify. graphic criteria. page 240 Edit Display Set Definition Dialog Box. page 221 240 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . • Find Object Dialog Box. The search options can include a combination of data criteria. Each of the remaining lines in the definition performs another operation on the remaining elements. The result is a group of elements that match the first criteria. Compose the search criteria on the Find Object dialog box. narrowing the group down farther. and data. Tip You can also click Find Object on the Tools MiniBar or press Ctrl+F. the final group consists of the objects that match all the search criteria. graphic volume (area).

Places a blank line above the selected line in the definition. When starting a new definition. Criteria . see the Composing the Definition section in Edit Display Set Definition Dialog Box. Delete .Removes the selected line in the definition. If there is no text on the clipboard.Copies the current. Insert .Provides access to the constructs needed to define the search criteria for retrieving the graphic objects that you want to include in the display set.Removes all criteria in the definition. Related Topics • Edit Display Set Definition Dialog Box. Clear . page 240 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 241 .Pastes the current complete text from the clipboard to replace the current complete criteria definition. page 221 • Find Object Command. complete definition (even if blank) to the clipboard. click Insert and then click the highlighted line to choose the first operator (FIND or FIND ALL BUT). then the criteria definition is not changed. For detailed information about composing the search criteria.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Find Object Dialog Box Allows you to search for graphic objects according to the defined search criteria. page 221. Paste . Copy . The subsequent constructs automatically appear as you step through creating the definition.

that material is applied to every model element that is in that display set. • • • Related Topics • Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box.vue file. Material assignments can be made to individual three dimensional objects if you have installed the Photo-Realism module. If an element is a member of more than one display set with different display properties. The files must be in a folder that you can access from SmartPlant Review.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Assign Material to Display Sets Command Tools > Display Sets > Assign Material Displays the Assign Material to Display Set dialog box. You can select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics before assigning them to the display set. If a material assignment is not made to a display set.mat file. The project database contains references to the material assignments stored in the .vue file to retain the new material assignments. The following conditions must be met to assign materials to a three dimensional model: • The material definitions in palette files that you want to assign to the model must already be created. page 402 • Assign Materials to Elements. page 407 242 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Notes • • • You must select the display set in Project Manager before this command becomes available. page 243 • Assign Materials Command. you must save a new . delete the . the element is displayed using the properties assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number. If you make new material assignments while viewing a . Material assignments are not stored in the project database. SmartPlant Review uses the default material value for that surface or any materials assigned to its elements. allowing you to assign materials in a palette file to elements in a display set. When you assign a material to a model surface.mat file. but are kept in a . The core product is limited to display set material assignments only.mat file of the project. To quickly delete these material assignments.

Name . page 410. page 215 • Edit a Display Set Definition.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box Assigns materials in a palette file to elements in a display set. an existing palette file. Preview . You must select the display set in Project Manager before you can access this command. Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition. see Edit Materials Command.Displays the display set name that you have selected in Project Manager. Browse . Note • You can use the Tools > Materials > Edit Materials command to create or edit a material definition. For more information. You can select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics. Palette File . You can type the name of. or browse to. page 232 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 243 .Allows you to navigate to the palette file location.Displays the name of the active palette file. Display Set .Displays the names of the material definitions in the selected palette file. Select a material from this list to make it the active material.Shows the display properties of the active material definition as it is mapped onto a spherical surface.

Highlight a display set in Project Manager. Related Topics • Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box. Assign Material to Display Sets Command. Click Tools > Display Sets > Assign Material. Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition. The core product is limited to display set material assignments only. page 208 2. the Assign Material dialog box appears for you to specify material for the display set. Select the name of the palette file from the list of available palettes. Display or Hide Project Manager. Important • Material assignments can be made to individual three dimensional objects if you have installed the Photo-Realism module. the element is displayed using the properties assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number. page 242 3.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Assign Material to a Display Set 1. page 243 • Assign Materials Command. page 215 • Edit a Display Set Definition. page 402 244 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Note • If an element is a member of more than one display set with different display properties. If no material is assigned. page 232 Display Material Command Tools > Display Sets > Material Turns on or off the display of the material application assigned to the selected display set.

A display set is a collection of graphic objects that are grouped together according to specific definition criteria. Important • A .dst file can be imported into the active project database for use by SmartPlant Review. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data.dst file is a legacy format that is no longer used by SmartPlant Review. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. page 245 • Import Display Sets. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 245 . Notes • You can use the Select All button to import all of the display sets in the file. a corresponding folder is created in the current project database. If you import a subset of a display set folder. After selecting the data file (.mdb) containing the display sets you want to import. If a corresponding folder already exists. the dialog box displays a list of all the display sets contained in that file.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Import Display Sets Command File > Import > Display Sets Imports display sets and display set folders from another data file into the active project database. allowing you to select the display set(s) that you want to import. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. page 247 Import Display Sets Dialog Box Allows you to import display sets by folder or by selecting individual display sets.dst or . Therefore. then the imported display sets are merged with the folder's existing contents. • Related Topics • Import Display Sets Dialog Box. However. display sets that are saved in a .

Clear All . From a single selected folder . Folder name . Browse . the Folder name list contains the display set folders in the database file.Allows you to select all of the display sets in the list. page 247 246 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Allows you to navigate to the data file containing the display sets you want to import.Allows you to select the display set folder you want to import.Displays the individual display sets by folder.Lists all the display sets that are available for import by name. page 245 • Import Display Sets. This option is available only when the From a single selected folder check box is turned on.Imports the selected display sets without closing the dialog box.Provides a space for you to enter the name of the existing display set file.Lists all the display sets that are available for import by ID. When this option is turned on. Name . Related Topics • Import Display Sets Command. Select All . ID .Allows you to clear the selection of display sets shown in the list. Import .Working with Display Sets: An Overview Database file name .

Working with Display Sets: An Overview Import Display Sets 1. Therefore. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. Click File > Import > Display Sets. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. 3. • • Related Topics • Export Display Sets. This feature allows you to create libraries of specific definition information for display sets. page 249 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 247 . page 249 • Working with Display Sets: An Overview. 2. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. Therefore. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. You can use the Select All button to select all the display sets in the file for exporting. Click each display set or display set folder to be imported into the active project. • • Related Topics • Export Display Sets. Notes • A display set is a collection of graphic objects that are grouped together according to specific definition criteria. page 213 Export Display Sets Command File > Export > Display Sets Exports display sets and display set folders to a database that you have defined or to a different project file. You can use the Select All button to select all the display sets in the file for importing. Notes • A display set is a collection of graphic objects that are grouped together according to specific definition criteria. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. Browse to the database file containing the display sets to be imported. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data.

then the exported display sets are merged with the folder's existing contents. From a single selected folder . When this option is turned on.Lists all the display sets that are available for export by ID. If a corresponding folder already exists. Database file name . Select an existing file or type the name of a new file. the Folder name list contains the display set folders in the database file.Allows you to navigate to a file or folder. if necessary. ID . page 247 248 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Name .Allows you to select the display set folder you want to export. Select All . This option is available only when the From a single selected folder check box is turned on. If you export a subset of a display set folder. a corresponding folder is created in the target external database.mdb file.Lists all the display sets that are available for export by name. Export . Folder name .Allows you to clear all the display sets that are shown in the list.Exports the selected display sets without closing the dialog box. Browse .Displays the file to which the exported display set will be placed.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Export Display Sets Dialog Box Allows you to select a display set from the current project to export to an . Related Topics • Export Display Sets Command.Allows you to select all display sets that are shown in the list. Clear All .Displays the individual display sets by folder.

SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. page 247 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 249 . Notes • • The file you are exporting to must have an . it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Export Display Sets 1.mdb extension. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. 3. Click each display set or display set folder to be exported to from the active project. Type a File name or click Browse to locate the file. Therefore. Related Topics • Import Display Sets. 2. Click File > Export > Display Sets.

Use the Show/Hide for Main View. Show/Hide for Plan View. 250 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 76 View Display Sets 1. This command can be applied to a single display set. This means that an element that is a member of two different display sets will appear with the characteristics of the lower numbered display set. page 208 2. and Show/Hide for Elevation View commands to select the views where the selected display sets are shown or hidden. Check the check box next to the display set(s) that you want to display. Notes • When display set settings are read from the database (for instance. assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on. Open the Display Set node in Project Manager. multiple selected display sets. page 76 • Show/Hide for Main View Command. The lower the display set number. Display or Hide Project Manager.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Manipulating Display Sets: An Overview SmartPlant Review provides several commands that allow you to manipulate how a display set displays in the view. the display set ID number determines the order of precedence when conflicting display characteristics are assigned to the same elements. when opening a model file or selecting the Tools > Refresh Data command). or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets. Notes • You can also access this command from the Project Manager shortcut menu by right-clicking on a display set or folder and selecting Show. the higher the precedence. page 75 • Show/Hide for Plan View Command. • Related Topics • Show/Hide for Elevation View Command. Show Display Sets Command Tools > Display Sets > Show Switches the visible or hidden display of the selected display set. Uncheck the box to hide the display set.

Note • You can also switch between shaded or wireframe by clicking View > Settings.mdb2) as saved when the project was last closed. For example. and you turn off DisplaySet1. multiple selected display sets. If the display set was created or edited during the current session. page 163 • Auto-Highlight. overlapping display sets may be the problem. even though DisplaySet2 is still on.Working with Display Sets: An Overview • Objects can be in more than one display set at a time. its display set membership is not available until you close and reopen the project in SmartPlant Review. The last action performed on the object by corresponding display set manipulations wins. Object1 will appear again. page 209 Show Membership Command Tools > Display Sets > Show Membership Allows you to show display set membership for an auto-highlighted element. View > Display. if Object 1 is in both DisplaySet1 and DisplaySet2. Once DisplaySet2 is toggled off and then on. forcing an update of the label database. or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets. The display set membership is extracted from the label database (. page 214 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 251 . Related Topics • Auto-Highlight Command. then Object 1 is off. However. page 163 Shade Display Sets Command Tools > Display Sets > Shade Switches between shaded or wireframe display of the selected display set. Related Topics • Defining Display Sets: An Overview. or by right-clicking on a display set or folder in Project Manager and selecting Shade. This command can be applied to a single display set. if your new display set does not seem to display properly. Related Topics • Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager.

When checked. page 75 • Show/Hide for Plan View Command. or hidden. or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets. • • • Related Topics • Show/Hide for Elevation View Command. This command can be applied to a single display set. multiple selected display sets.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Dim Display Sets Command Tools > Display Sets > Dim Decreases the brightness of the selected display set. This command can be applied to a single display set. You can switch from a dimmed level to normal brightness. or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets. When a display set is on. multiple selected display sets. or visible. the check mark does not appear. all dimmed display sets are rendered in the Highlight brightness state. allowing you to more easily contrast members of the display set with other objects in the model. Note • You can also access this command by right-clicking on a display set or folder in Project Manager and selecting Dim. You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within Project Manager. Use the Show/Hide for Main View. When a display set is off. all dimmed display sets are rendered in the Dim brightness state. Show Only Command Tools > Display Sets > Show Only Allows you to show all selected display sets and hide all other display sets. page 76 252 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Reverse Dim Display Sets Command Tools > Display Sets > Reverse Dim Allows you to reverse the brightness rendering state for all dimmed display sets. Show/Hide for Plan View. a check mark appears next to the display set item . When un-checked. page 76 • Show/Hide for Main View Command. Notes You can also access this command on the Project Manager shortcut menu by right-clicking on a display set and selecting Show Only. and Show/Hide for Elevation View commands to select the views where the selected display sets are shown or hidden.

Display or Hide Project Manager. page 76 • Show/Hide for Main View Command. and Show/Hide for Elevation View commands on the Project Manager shortcut menu to select the views that are affected by the Show Only command. page 76 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 253 . The command displays only the selected display set(s) in those views that have the Show/Hide command turned on. or visible. You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within Project Manager. page 255 • Show/Hide for Elevation View Command. Expand the Display Sets node in Project Manager. a check mark appears next to the display set item .Working with Display Sets: An Overview Show Selected Display Sets 1. page 75 • Show/Hide for Plan View Command. Show/Hide for Plan View. Click Tools > Display Sets > Show Only. When a display set is on. Notes • The Show Only command is a toggle that can be applied to individual display sets or to parent folders containing display sets. Use the Show/Hide for Main View. • • Related Topics • Hide Selected Display Sets. Tip • You can also access this command from the Project Manager shortcut menu by right-clicking the display set or folder and selecting Show Only. Highlight the display set or folder containing the display sets whose display you want to remain active. The various Show/Hide commands are available on the Project Manager shortcut menu. the check mark does not appear. page 208 2. When a display set is off. or hidden. 3.

Show/Hide for Plan View. page 76 254 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . or hidden. a check mark appears next to the display set item . or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets. multiple selected display sets. When a display set is off. • • • Related Topics • Show/Hide for Elevation View Command. page 76 • Show/Hide for Main View Command. Notes • You can also access this command on the Project Manager shortcut menu by right-clicking on a display set and selecting Hide Only. and verify that there are some display sets already created. Use the Show/Hide for Main view. page 75 • Show/Hide for Plan View Command. Click View > Project Manager to enable Project Manager.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Hide Only Command Tools > Display Sets > Hide Only Allows you to hide all selected display sets and show all other display sets. or visible. and Show/Hide for Elevation View commands to select the views where the selected display sets are shown or hidden. This command can be applied to a single display set. You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within Project Manager. the check mark does not appear. When a display set is on.

Use the Show/Hide for Main View. a check mark appears next to the display set item . Notes • The Hide Only command is a toggle that can be applied to individual display sets or to parent folders containing display sets. page 76 • Show/Hide for Main View Command. or hidden. Click Tools > Display Sets > Hide Only. When a display set is off. Expand the Display Sets node in Project Manager. You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within Project Manager.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Hide Selected Display Sets 1. page 208 2. or visible. page 253 • Show/Hide for Elevation View Command. and Show/Hide for Elevation View commands to select the views where the selected display sets are shown or hidden. Display or Hide Project Manager. 3. the check mark does not appear. page 75 • Show/Hide for Plan View Command. The various Show/Hide commands are available on the Project Manager shortcut menu. Show/Hide for Plan View. Tip • You can also access this command from the Project Manager shortcut menu by right-clicking the display set or folder and selecting Hide Only. page 250 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 255 . Highlight the display set whose display you want to hide. page 257 • Show Selected Display Sets. page 76 • View Display Sets. When a display set is on. • • Related Topics • Delete Display Sets. The command hides (does not display) the selected display set(s) in those views that have the Show/Hide command turned on.

Related Topics • Display or Hide Project Manager. you can move an entire display set of objects rather than moving each object separately. • • Related Topics • Display Set Motion Command. page 180 • Edit Display Set Position. page 239 Rename Display Sets Command Tools > Display Sets > Rename Allows you to change the name of an existing display set or display set folder. page 208 • Using Project Manager: An Overview. Notes • You can also access this command on the Project Manager shortcut menu by right-clicking on a display set or folder and selecting Move. multiple selected display sets. use the Motion > Display Set command. This command can be applied to a single display set. You can access the Edit Display Set Position dialog box by clicking Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position. Note • You can also access this command on the Project Manager shortcut menu by right-clicking on a display set or folder and selecting Rename. or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets. To dynamically move displays sets in the model. page 237 • Rotate Display Set.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Move Display Sets Command Tools > Display Sets > Move Switches the display set position from the static moved position to the unmoved position. page 207 256 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . By using the Move command in conjunction with the Edit Display Set Position dialog box.

page 213 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 257 . Confirm that you want to delete the selected display set. page 215 • Working with Display Sets: An Overview. page 208 2. 4. Highlight the display set or folder containing the display sets you want to delete. Right-click and select Delete > Display Set. multiple selected display sets. Display or Hide Project Manager. Delete Display Sets 1. Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition. This command can be applied to a single display set. 3. Expand the Display Sets node in Project Manager. or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets.Working with Display Sets: An Overview Delete Display Sets Command Tools > Display Sets > Delete Allows you to delete selected display sets.

Working with Display Sets: An Overview 258 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

After generating these raster images. This list of saved views is only the definition of the path (or key frames) for the movie. such as the position of the eye. special web projects.com/visualization/vizfx. The view cone updates as the frames advance. Each saved view (or frame) contains the current view parameters. the more transitional frames that are needed.Making Animations: An Overview Making Animations: An Overview All animations begin with creating an animation path by using the View > Save and Recall Views command to save a series of views displayed in the Main view window. The number of tween frames determines the transition rate from one saved view to the next: the greater the span. and the direction the eye is looking. This command displays those saved views with a frame number greater than zero and the SPR-created transitional frames. you must create output images of each saved view (key frame) using the View > Snapshot or the Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot (available with the Simulation and Visual Effects module) commands. lighting. You can download ViZfx Web Pro with your SmartPlant Review serial number from http://www. page 303 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 259 . and therefore. This frame number determines the order of the saved views and also the number of transitional (tween) frames that SmartPlant Review creates between each saved view. To generate raster images for a movie. Note • You can use ViZfx Web Pro to apply sophisticated special effects to your animations. Use the Motion > Key Frame > Display command to preview the animation path as it would appear in the movie.asp.intergraph. page 297 • Save and Recall Views Command. Related Topics • Display Key Frame Command. page 261 • Snapshot Command. you can use a tool such as Adobe Premiere to create an AVI from the saved images. You save each frame with a name and assign it a number. or video. the longer the transition. page 292 • Snapshot Key Frame Command.

page 303 260 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 3. page 299 Use the Snapshot Key Frames command to capture raster images of the animation. page 128 and Lighting Tab (View Settings Dialog Box). Determine the general path that the animation should take. Using the Stationary Light Positions command and the Two-sided lighting option on the View Settings > Lighting tab when setting up the lighting in your saved views can help reduce flickering in the resulting animation. page 261 • Snapshot Command. 4. Use a tool such as Adobe Premiere to create an AVI from these saved snapshots. 7. Position settings such as eye point and center point are "tweened" between key frames. A good rule of thumb is 30 frames are equal to 1 second of video. 5. For more information. page 108. Save the Current View. noting key points of interest. more accurate the animation path. see Stationary Light Positions Command. Create a view group for your animation. • Related Topics • Display Key Frame Command. page 297 • Save and Recall Views Command.Making Animations: An Overview Sample Animation Workflow 1. 6. and approximately how many frames you will need. Display Key Frame Motion. the smoother. Create a View Group. Tips • The more frames (saved views) you have. page 278 Play the animation and make adjustments to the key frames (such as saving more views) and to the key frame numbers (increasing or decreasing the numbers to alter the number of tween frames generated). 2. page 281 Save a view at each key point of interest along the animation path. page 305 Use a tool such as Adobe Photoshop to add overlays or touch up the images. • Notes • Frame numbers are critical in determining how many tween frames SmartPlant Review generates between each key frame and in determining how fast or slow the animation moves between key frames. Snapshot Key Frames. Each of these saved views becomes a key frame in your animation. page 292 • Snapshot Key Frame Command. Be sure to assign a frame number and to save these views in the view group you created.

page 259. Plan. it cannot be included in an animation. page 281 • Recall a Partial View. This command also allows you to define the animation path for a movie. The model position is restored as if the Zoom and Pan had not occurred within that view. saved views in the Main view groups can then be used as the basis for creating animations (Plan and Elevation saved views cannot be used in animations). Save and Recall Views Command View > Save and Recall Allows you to save the current view displayed in the Main. For more information about creating animations. • • Related Topics • Delete a View Group. Plan. You can later incorporate the saved view in an animation by changing the frame number. Saved views can be transferred from one database to another using the Import Saved Views and Export Saved Views commands. if the view is saved without a frame number (Frame Number = 0). page 262 • Save the Current View. page 280 • Move a Saved View. you can save a Plan or Elevation view. or Elevation view windows. page 279 • Recall a Saved View. page 278 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 261 . or Elevation view windows for later recall. However. Recalling a Plan or Elevation view does not change the current location of the eye or center points. Additionally. see Making Animations: An Overview. and then recall the saved view. it is just a still image. Organizing these saved views into view groups helps you easily find specific saved views to recall. Thus. Notes • Saving a Plan or Elevation view saves only the model position within that view. page 278 • Save and Recall Views Dialog Box. Saving the view does not ever change the Main view's eye or center point. depending on the group.Making Animations: An Overview Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview The Save and Recall command allows you to save the current view (and view settings) displayed in the Main. then Zoom in/out or Pan left/right/up/down the model just within that view. page 282 • Edit a Saved View.

Unselects all of the saved views in the active group. You also can use this dialog box to define the animation path for a movie. For more information.Selects all of the saved views in the active group. Rename . page 273. allowing you to rename the active group. Clear All . Select All . Main. see Create Group Dialog Box. page 276. For more information. The views are organized in view groups that you create. 262 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . allowing you to add a new group of views.Displays the Rename Group dialog box.Removes the active group and all of its views. or Elevation views .Specifies the name of the active group. To use this functionality.Displays the description of the active view group. see Rename Group Dialog Box. Create Group .Displays the Create Group dialog box. Delete .Making Animations: An Overview Save and Recall Views Dialog Box Allows you to save the current view displayed in the Main. Description .Indicates the view type associated with the active view group and displays the saved views in the frame list. Plan. Plan. The Delete Group dialog box appears giving you the opportunity to confirm the deletion. Name . you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. or Elevation view windows.

For more information. page 264. allowing you to copy the selected views from the active view group to another view group within the same project. see Set Up Partial View Recall Dialog Box.Displays the Add Current View dialog box.Displays the Set Up Partial View Recall dialog box. page 277.Displays the Generate ModelView View File dialog box. Add Current View .Recalls the selected view and then closes the Save and Recall Views dialog box.Displays the Edit Views dialog box. For more information. allowing you to save a new view in the ModelView format. see Generate ModelView View File Dialog Box. page 278 • Save and Recall Views Command. Delete . Set Up Partial . For more information. For more information. Description . allowing you to change the frame number of one or more views at a time. see Modify Frame Numbers Dialog Box. Generate ModelView View File . Related Topics • Edit a Saved View. page 276. page 280 • Recall a Saved View. page 274. allowing you to specify the settings to retain when recalling a partial view.Removes the selected saved views. A confirmation box appears.Recalls the selected view based on the configuration specified in the Set Up Partial View Recall dialog box. page 275. see Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box.Displays the description for the selected saved view. Recall View . Modify Frame Numbers .Making Animations: An Overview Edit . page 261 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 263 . For more information. Move . and then closes the Save and Recall Views dialog box.Displays the Copy Selected View dialog box. For more information.Displays the Move Selected View dialog box allowing you to move the selected views from the active view group to another view group within the same project. page 273. see Move Selected Views Dialog Box. page 264. For more information. allowing you to add the current view to the active group. allowing you to make changes to each of the selected saved views. see Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box.Displays the Modify Frame Numbers dialog box. Copy . see Copy Selected View Dialog Box. giving you the opportunity to confirm or cancel the deletion. Recall Partial View .

Edits the name of the selected saved view. Related Topics • Edit a Saved View. Plan. These options apply to view groups of all types (Main. page 261 264 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Making Animations: An Overview Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box Provides options for creating or editing saved views. Frame number . and Elevation) unless otherwise noted. page 280 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. This setting is not available if you have selected more than one view. This setting is not available for views in view groups of type Elevation view or Plan view. and description of the new or saved view.Allows you to edit the frame number of the selected saved views. Description . Name .Edits the description of the selected saved views. name. Description Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) Provides options for editing the frame number.

Surfaces are still shaded. Coarse Facets. For example.Displays a single color for all pixels on the surface instead of a range of slightly different colors.Provides smooth shading. These modes are in the order of slowest update to fastest update. only the Levels button is enabled. This type of shading is also known as "smooth shading using the Gouraud Shading algorithm. but the display of circular objects is very faceted. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 265 . and Flat Shading. • • • • Full shading . For view groups of type Plan view or Elevation view. You can choose from Full Shading. Flat Shading .Turns off the smooth shading. Using no specular for animations can reduce some of the flickering and hot spots caused by the use of the specular component of materials. Render Shaded . Quality . Coarse Facets .Making Animations: An Overview Display Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) Allows you to modify the saved view display options. pipes look like they are composed of flat sides.Specifies the quality of the shading in the Main view." This type of shading is the slowest to update. This is the fastest to update.Specifies whether or not the saved view displays in shaded mode. No Specular . but is faster than Full Shading because the sun does not reflect bright spots on the element surface.Produces a more curved appearance by producing various shades of the selected color across the surface of the element. No Specular.

Text annotations . Levels . page 102 266 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Volume annotations . and reducers in the view. elbows. page 102 • View Settings Dialog Box. To use this functionality. which allows you to change the Shaded color. All annotations . The Edit button is disabled for the Wireframe option. Data annotations .Specifies whether or not to display annotations in the view.Specifies whether or not to display volume annotations in the view. pipes. For example. Update performance is faster if the Backfaces and End caps options are turned off.Making Animations: An Overview Background Color Shaded . turning the Backfaces option off may cause special elements to display partially or completely disappear. and Elevation. Axis .Specifies the color used to display wireframe rendering. Dot box . This condition occurs most commonly when the moved display set has been rotated or moved at an angle to its original position. End caps . Backfaces . Only measurement collections that are turned on can be displayed.Specifies whether or not to display a small coordinate triad in the top right corner of the view showing which direction is East.Specifies whether or not to display data annotations in the view.Determines whether textures appear while you are manipulating the model. Use this setting much like you would the Backfaces and End caps view settings. page 133 • View Settings Command. turn Dot Box on and turn both Backfaces and End caps off to increase performance at a small cost of display quality.Draws distant GShape and GProjected line string elements less precisely for improved update speed. you must install the Photo-Realism module. North. Related Topics • Level Settings Dialog Box. Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the display.Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view. Active tag only . Measurements . However.Specifies whether or not only the active tag appears. Click Edit to display the Color dialog box. Object textures .Specifies whether or not to display backfaces on valves. Options All tags .Specifies whether or not to display text annotations in the view.Displays the shaded background color.Displays the Level Settings dialog box. Wireframe .Specifies whether or not to display end caps on pipes and other round shapes.Specifies whether or not the tags appear.

Use the colors of the objects . page 133 • View Settings Command. allowing you to select or create a color. Select 3 for the thickest outline. page 102 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 267 . page 102 • View Settings Dialog Box.Making Animations: An Overview Outline Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) Allows you to modify the outline rendering mode options for the saved view.Outlines each object using their own colors. Use a single specified outline color . The outline commands automatically switch between white and black based on the current combined RGB color intensity of the background color. This option makes the outline less obvious. Use a single default outline color . Edit .Displays outlines in the color you select.Displays the standard Colors dialog box.Displays outlines using the default outline color. This tab appears only if you have installed the On-Site Drawing Generation module. which is white on dark backgrounds and black on light backgrounds. but enhances the edges of objects. Related Topics • Level Settings Dialog Box. Select 1 for a subtle rimming effect. Width .Specifies the width of the outline drawn around display objects.

Eye Point North . Settings on this tab display the current value only if all of the selected saved views have an identical value for that setting. You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new east coordinate. viewing direction.Making Animations: An Overview View Cone Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) Defines the boundaries of the view displayed in the Main window. Note • For Elevation and Plan view group types. The view cone changes as you change the viewing angle. Calculated at run time.Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to the east direction (X coordinate). the Width value reflects the resulting width in the view if recalled. Eye Point Elevation . and changes to reflect the sizes of the current Plan and Elevation view windows. then change the window size of that view. eye point. but only in a manner that does not change their view orientation. 268 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . the value will have changed to reflect the new window size. Eye Point East . view cone parameters can be adjusted. if you save a view with one width. In other words. and as you define motion using the motion/orientation controls. You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new north coordinate. For these view types. which specifies the horizontal distance across the view and determines the placement of the eye point in the recalled view. You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new elevation.Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to the north direction (Y coordinate). the only available settings are Center Point (defined below) and Width.Specifies the height of the eye point of the view cone in relation to the model (Z coordinate).

-500 feet East. Clipping Plane Reference . To accomplish this. SmartPlant Review automatically calculates the correct clipping distance from the eye to the near clipping plane as 185 feet.Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of the far clipping plane (when Reference is set to Eye) or the location of the center point of the far clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North.Making Animations: An Overview Center Point North . When Reference is set to Eye. East. or Elevation from the Reference list. or Elevation) for the values displayed in the Far and Near boxes. a value of 0 in the Near or Far boxes specifies no clipping for that plane. 200 feet Elevation and is looking straight down. Center Point Elevation . When you select North. you would select Elevation for the Reference and set Near to 15. the clipping plane fields display the location on that Reference coordinate of the center point of the respective clipping plane. You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new north coordinate. East.Displays the reference point (if set to Eye) or the reference axis (if set to North. Clipping Plane Far . the Near and Far boxes display the absolute distance from the eye point to the center point of the respective clipping plane.Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of the near clipping plane (when Reference is set to Eye) or the location of the center point of the near clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North.Specifies the height of the center point of the view cone in relation to the model (Z coordinate). or Elevation).Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation to the north direction (Y coordinate). or Elevation). For example.Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation to the east direction (X coordinate). You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new elevation. Center Point East . East. A 0 in both boxes displays the entire model. You do not want to see anything above 15 feet high in the model. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 269 . When you select Eye from the Reference list. Clipping Plane Near . You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new east coordinate. East. the eye point is at 100 feet North.

Horizontal from -180 to 180 . Related Topics • Set Center Point. Positive values are counterclockwise along a horizontal plane. This is similar to setting the aperture and shutter speed of a camera. page 152 • Set View Cone Perspective. which changes the intensity of the image's colors. Ambient from 0 to 100 Specifies the light that surrounds everything in your display. page 117 • Using the View Cone: An Overview.Making Animations: An Overview Perspective in degrees from 2 to 160 . Brightness from 0 to 10 Specifies the exposure of light on the model that changes the intensity of the colors in the image. The values for this field are between -180. Dashed . Move the slider anywhere from 2 degrees (to decrease area) to 160 degrees (to increase area).0 and +180. A common value of ambient light is 25. Lighting settings allow you to determine the exposure of light on the model. page 155 • Set Eye Point. This tab is not available if the selected saved views are in an Elevation or Plan type of view group. page 154 • Set Clipping Planes.Defines the horizontal angle of the sunlight coming into the model. page 149 Lighting Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) Allows you to set the light intensity and sun bearing angles to control lighting for the shaded model.Allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of the view cone without changing the locations of the clipping planes or the eye and center points. 270 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . The value for this field is between 0 and 10.0.Displays the view cone in the Plan and Elevation views using dashed lines instead of solid lines. The dashed view cone allows faster updates on slow graphic cards and some notebook computers.

You must convert your actual distance values to the proper MU:SU:PU values for the model. 00:5. This option only effects stereo viewing. closer objects appear to be coming out of the screen and objects that are further away appear to be behind the screen.6 centimeters (00:2. page 115 • Set Sun Bearing Angles. Using this option requires more processing resources and may result in decreased performance.2:00 if MU is feet.0. page 116 • View Settings Dialog Box. which will vary by video driver and graphics card. Between Eyes .0 and +180.Making Animations: An Overview Vertical from -180 to 180 . while a smaller value reduces the effect. produces a major reduction in thin-volume coincident surface flashing during animations (especially on thin I-beams). A larger value exaggerates the effect.When checked. such as fine tuning stereo glasses. Related Topics • Set Lighting Intensity.2 inches or 5.Defines the vertical angle of light coming into the model.Specifies the actual distance between your eyes in model units. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception. Two-sided lighting . This option only effects stereo viewing.Specifies the distance to the selected object. Focal . This tab is not available if the selected saved views are in an Elevation or Plan type of view group.Specifies whether the horizontal and vertical angles of light are relative to Plant North or relative to the direction of the Main view.6:00 if MU is meters). The Focal distance is the point at which objects are level with the screen. Relative to plant north . The values for this field are between -180. this value is about 2. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 271 . For example. page 102 Advanced Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) Provides options for more sophisticated scenarios of SmartPlant Review. Typically.

with some video cards. 256. the recommended tolerance is 16. However. The aspect ratio is not saved or restored. You can then press Ctrl+F5 to completely redraw the saved image using Redraw on Refresh. However. • • Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 . that overlaps the Main. such as a window. reduce 512 to 256. or Elevation view during a refresh is included in the saved (backing store) image. When this option is off. 64. 16) will improve the display quality. and elbows. if both Redraw on refresh and Buffered updates options are turned on. Far to near clip ratio . are not overlapping the view. and toolbars. on refresh. you may see ghost images of the floating item.Adjusts the display quality produced by some video cards (for example. to improve system performance and to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image. If this option is off and you have dialog boxes or toolbars placed over a view. the better the display quality. reducers. some elements may appear cracked or pieces of elements may be missing). valves. turn off this option for better performance. For faster updates. Plan. the entire view is. In most cases. Buffered updates .Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays the entire view at once.Redraws everything in the selected view on refresh. you will not see the model "re-drawn" during updates. dialog boxes. such as windows. dialog box. large tolerance values increase the view update time. For example. 32.Defines the stroking tolerance for the round surfaces of pipes. reduce 1024 to 512. If neither option is turned on. Reducing the values by a power of 2 works best. 1024. Any item. 272 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . lower the Far to near clip ratio value on the View Settings > Advanced tab. If some of your elements have a poor display quality. or toolbar. and so on until the display quality is acceptable. For the highest quality update. The larger the tolerance. Aspect . Notes • While each option can be used independently.Displays the value for the ratio of the Main view window width to height (X to Y value) at the time that the view was saved. such as a cracked appearance. when the view is recalled. the aspect ratio is that of the current view. For large models. 128. 512. If your saved image contains overlapping images that you do not want. redrawn to the buffer and then displayed all at once. reducing this value using powers of 2 (such as. the backing store is used to repair the display until you click Window > Refresh.Making Animations: An Overview Redraw on refresh . the recommended tolerance is 100. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100. When this option is on. Therefore. make sure items. you should use caution when placing these items. the backing store is used to repair the view and updates are drawn to the window. Press F5 to refresh the view and remove the ghost image.

Name . This field is not editable. To use this functionality.These settings are available only if you have selected a single view to copy.Displays the selected view name. Type .Allows you to enter an optional description for the new view group. page 282 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 273 .Allows you to specify which view group to copy the selected views. View Group From . page 281 • Delete a View Group. To .Displays the active view group name. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. page 278 Create Group Dialog Box Allows you to create a group of views. View Name . This field is not editable. page 282 • Save the Current View. After you create the group. you can add views to it. From .Allows you to enter the name of the new view group. Related Topics • Copy a Saved View. Description . Only view groups with the same type as the active view group display in the list. To . Related Topics • Create a View Group. page 280 • Delete a View Group.Making Animations: An Overview Copy Selected View Dialog Box Allows you to copy one or more of the saved views to another group.Allows you to specify a new name for the copy of the view.Allows you to choose the type of the new view group.

Use saved view . Related Topics • Generate a ModelView View File.Allows you to navigate to a folder to select an existing ModelView view file to overwrite or to create a new ModelView view file. Saved view group name . Browse .Allows you to select the view group that contains the saved view that you want to use to create the ModelView view file.Selects a view group for the ModelView key frames. Saved view name .Creates the ModelView view file using the current contents of the Main view. ModelView view file (. The file name defaults to the same file name as the project file but with a .Making Animations: An Overview Generate ModelView View File Dialog Box Allows you to create a ModelView view file from a saved view or from the contents of the Main view. Use current view . page 283 274 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Allows you to select the view that you want to use to create the ModelView view file.Creates the ModelView view file using a saved view. View group for ModelView key frames .vfa extension.Allows you to type a name or path for the ModelView file.vfa) file name .

Indicates the stopping frame number of a range using the specified operation and amount. Use range instead of the <number of> selected frames . Amount . multiplication (*). The choices are addition (+). subtraction (-). Stop .Making Animations: An Overview Modify Frame Numbers Dialog Box Allows you to change the frame number of the selected views. Related Topics • Modify Frame Numbers.Determines the type of operation to perform on the frame number for the specified views.Indicates the starting frame number of a range using the specified operation and amount. Start . Note • You can click Apply to save your changes without closing the dialog box.Determines the amount to apply to the frame number of specified views using the current operator. Operator . or division (/). After you have applied your changes. page 283 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 275 .Determines if the selected operation applies to the specified range or to the selected views on the Save and Recall Views dialog box. the Cancel button changes to a Close button.

To . To use this functionality. page 261 276 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 282 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. Related Topics • Rename a View Group. Only view groups with the same type as the active view group display in the list. To . page 281 • Delete a View Group. page 282 • Rename a View Group.Displays the name of the active view group. From . page 282 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview.Select the view group to which you want to move the selected view.Making Animations: An Overview Move Selected Views Dialog Box Allows you to move saved views to another group within the project database. From .Displays the active view group name. Related Topics • Create a View Group.Allows you to enter the new name for the active view group. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. This field is not editable.Allows you to add descriptive text to the active view group. Description . page 261 Rename Group Dialog Box Allows you to rename the active view group.

Settings to apply .Lists available view settings that you can turn on or off when recalling a saved view. page 268 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 277 . page 264 • Display Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box).Making Animations: An Overview Set Up Partial View Recall Dialog Box Allows you to turn on and off certain view settings when recalling a partial view. page 265 • Lighting Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box). page 102. the view setting in the saved view overrides the current view setting when you recall the view. Related Topics • Advanced Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box). if the saved view contains specific eye point and center point values. but you want to keep the current eye point and center point settings. page 270 • Outline Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box). For example. page 279 • View Cone Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box). For more information about the individual view settings listed here. Uncheck the settings that you do not want the saved view to override when the view is recalled. page 261 • Set Up Partial View Recall. page 271 • Description Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box). uncheck those options to prevent the current values from being overwritten when the saved view is recalled. page 267 • Save and Recall Views Command. see View Settings Dialog Box. When checked.

• Related Topics • Copy a Saved View. page 279 278 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 161 Recall a Saved View 1. 3. If the view is a still image. 5. 7. Click Recall View. page 261 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview. All prior changes are saved at the time that you complete these steps. 2. which is the default value. page 119 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. Type a frame number. Verify the view properties. Notes • • The Recall View button recalls the selected view. • Related Topics • Delete a View Group. 4. 6. Type a description for the view. page 280 • Recall a Partial View. 3. Click Add Current View.Making Animations: An Overview Save the Current View 1. the frame number should remain at zero (0). page 280 • Edit a Saved View. Type a view name. page 279 • Set Up Partial View Recall. assign the frame number accordingly. page 282 • Fitting Views: An Overview. Click View > Save and Recall. This setting is not available if you are saving a Plan or Elevation view. If the view is part of an animation. Select a frame number. Set the view to be saved. Recalling a Plan or Elevation view does not change the current location of the eye or center points. Notes • You can modify any of the view properties. Click View > Save and Recall. Recalling a Plan or Elevation view does not change the current location of the eye or center points. 2.

• Related Topics • Copy a Saved View. Select a Frame number. page 278 • Save the Current View. Notes • • The Set Up Partial button configures settings for recalling a partial view. page 282 • Edit a Saved View. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. To use this functionality. page 278 • Save the Current View. page 281 • Recall a Partial View. Click Set Up Partial. page 279 • Recall a Saved View. page 282 • Edit a Saved View. page 279 Set Up Partial View Recall 1. Notes • The Recall Partial View button recalls one or more view parameters of the selected view based on the configuration set up using Set Up Partial View Recall. page 281 • Recall a Saved View. 2. page 278 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 279 . page 280 • Delete a View Group. Select the settings that you want to recall.Making Animations: An Overview Recall a Partial View 1. page 280 • Delete a View Group. Click View > Save and Recall. 3. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. page 280 • Move a Saved View. page 278 • Set Up Partial View Recall. You should complete these steps before selecting Recall Partial View for the first time. 3. • Related Topics • Copy a Saved View. page 280 • Move a Saved View. Click Recall Partial View. 2. To use this functionality. Click View > Save and Recall.

Verify the background settings. Verify the clipping planes settings. Click View > Save and Recall. 6. Type a name. Select a group or view to copy the frame To. Select the frames that you want to copy. Click View > Save and Recall. Verify the center point settings. Click Edit. Type a description. 2. 13. Type a frame number. 9. 3. 6. 4. 280 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Not all of these options are available for saved Plan and Elevation views. Select a View Group Name. Verify the stereo distances settings. Verify the levels settings. 8. Notes • The Copy button allows you to copy one or more saved views to another group. Select the new Group Name to receive the copy. 10.Making Animations: An Overview Copy a Saved View 1. Verify the eye point settings. Tip Hold the Shift key and click on views to select multiple frames. page 278 Edit a Saved View 1. To use this functionality. Click Copy. • 5. Select the view to edit. Verify the perspective settings. 11. • Related Topics • Save the Current View. 7. 4. Note • These steps only apply when editing a saved Main view. 5. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. 3. 2. 12.

Select a group to move the frame view To. Note • To use this functionality. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. page 276 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 281 . Click View > Save and Recall. Type the description for the new group name. Click Move. page 280 • Move a Saved View. Select the frames that you want to move. page 278 Create a View Group 1. 5. page 280 • Recall a Saved View. page 282 • Edit a Saved View. 3. 3. page 281 • Move Selected Views Dialog Box. Click View > Save and Recall.Making Animations: An Overview Move a Saved View 1. page 282 • Edit a Saved View. page 273 • Delete a View Group. To use this functionality. Select which view that you want to save in the new view group by selecting the view name from the Type field. Related Topics • Copy a Saved View. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. Tip Hold the Shift or Ctrl keys and click on views to select multiple frames. 4. 2. 2. page 278 • Save the Current View. • 5. Type a new group name. Related Topics • Copy a Saved View. Select a View Group Name. Notes • • Use groups to categorize saved views for future reference. page 280 • Delete a View Group. Click Create Group. page 280 • Create Group Dialog Box. 4.

Modify the description for the new group name. Select a view group name. Note • To use this functionality. 4. page 261 282 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 5. all of its saved views are deleted as well. Click Delete. Related Topics • Create a View Group. Click Yes to delete the view group. Click Rename. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. 4. 2. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module.Making Animations: An Overview Rename a View Group 1. Select a view group name. Click View > Save and Recall. Type a new group name in the To box. Click View > Save and Recall. Note • To use this functionality. page 282 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. Related Topics • Create a View Group. page 281 • Rename a View Group. You are prompted to verify deletion of the group. 3. page 281 • Rename Group Dialog Box. page 261 Delete a View Group 1. 3. Caution • • If you delete a group. 2. page 276 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview.

Select a saved view group name if you selected the Use saved view option. the Cancel button changes to a Close button. 5. Type the Amount to modify the frame number. *. • • Related Topics • Save the Current View. Click View > Save and Recall.dri file but with a .vfa extension. Select a ModelView default view. Tip The file name defaults to the same file name as the . After you have applied your changes. Type a ModelView file name. Click View > Save and Recall. 7. -. You can click Apply to save your changes without closing the dialog box. Click Modify Frame Numbers. Related Topics • SmartPlant Review Files. • 5. Select the frames that you want to modify. Select a view group for the ModelView key frames. Click Generate ModelView View File. 3. Notes • If you want to modify a range of frame numbers rather than just the selected frames. page 278 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. 3.Making Animations: An Overview Modify Frame Numbers 1. Select the Operator (+. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. /) to modify the frame number. page 53 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 283 . check the Use range instead of the selected frames box and specify a range of frame numbers using the Start and Stop boxes. 4. 2. Select a saved view name if you selected the Use saved view option. To use this functionality. 6. 2. page 261 Generate a ModelView View File 1. 4. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. Note • To use this functionality.

0 or later project database table format before it can be imported. page 286 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. You can use the Select All button to select all of the items in the Name column. page 287 • Import Saved Views. Plan. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. page 285 • Import Saved Views from DesignReview 3. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. If the view groups are of a different type. the resulting view group may contain saved views of both types. When importing or exporting a view group with the same name as one already in the receiving database.Making Animations: An Overview Import Saved Views Command File > Import > Saved Views Imports saved views from other project databases into the current database. possibly causing unintended consequences for the user. the saved views of the two view groups will be merged. Any identically named view in the receiving view group is overwritten by the incoming view. make sure that both view groups are of the same type. • • • • • Related Topics • Import Saved Views Dialog Box. such as Main. This will avoid collisions with existing view group names in the target database.7. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. you can use the Save and Recall Views dialog box to rename view groups. Before you import or export saved views. If the database receiving the new views contains a view group with the same name as the one being imported. page 261 284 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Therefore. Notes • The import database must be in the SmartPlant Review 5. or Elevation. SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on the Save and Recall Views dialog box.

Import .7.Displays a list of the view groups in the project database if Select view group is turned off. This option is available only when the From a single selected view group check box is turned on. Displays the saved views in the selected group if Select view group is turned on. page 284 • Import Saved Views from DesignReview 3. Select All .Imports the selected saved views without closing the dialog box. Database file name .Allows you to select a single view group name. Related Topics • Import Saved Views Command.Displays the individual views in the view group.Unselects all of the names in the list. View group name . When this option is turned on. From a single selected view group .Allows you to navigate to a folder to select a database file containing the saved views that you want to import.Making Animations: An Overview Import Saved Views Dialog Box Allows you to import saved views from other project databases into the active project database. page 287 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 285 . the View group name list contains the view groups in the project database. Clear All . Browse .Specifies the name of the project database from which you want to import saved views. Name .Selects all of the names in the list.

3. Notes • The import database must be in the SmartPlant Review 5. you can use the Save and Recall Views dialog box to rename view groups. Type a file name. possibly causing unintended consequences for the user. make sure that both view groups are of the same type. and select a group name from the list to display the individual views in that group. Any identically named view in the receiving view group is overwritten by the incoming view. the resulting view group may contain saved views of both types. If the database receiving the new views contains a view group with the same name as the one being imported. Before you import or export saved views. page 285 286 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . then you only can select view names.Making Animations: An Overview Import Saved Views 1. If you turn off the Select view group option.0 or later project database table format before it can be imported. This will avoid collisions with existing view group names in the target database. page 284 • Import Saved Views Dialog Box. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. or Elevation. Click each view group or saved view name to import. If the view groups are of a different type. or click Browse to locate the file. Therefore. Optionally. Tip If you turn on the Select view group option. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. click the Select view group option. then you only can select view group names. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. 2. SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on the Save and Recall Views dialog box. • • • • • Related Topics • Import Saved Views Command. Click File > Import > Saved Views. When importing or exporting a view group with the same name as one already in the receiving database. You can use the Select All button to select all of the items in the Name column. • 5. Click Import. the saved views of the two view groups will be merged. such as Main. 4. Plan.

SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. click File > Import > Saved Views. Click Browse to locate the file that you saved in step 2. Click each saved view Name to select. Optionally. click Select view group and select a group name from the list to display the individual views in that group. 5. • • Related Topics • Import Saved Views Command. Then. Click File > Save.Making Animations: An Overview Import Saved Views from DesignReview 3. You can use the Select All button to select all the saved view sets in the file for importing.7 1.dvf file. 2. page 285 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 287 . 4. 3. page 284 • Import Saved Views Dialog Box. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. In SmartPlant Review. Therefore. Start SmartPlant Review and open the project with no database (temporarily). export the Saved Views read in from the DesignReview . 6. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. Notes • You can reduce the number of saved views in the list by selecting a view group name.

or Elevation. SmartPlant Review does not delete the additional target database records. the Import > Saved Views and Export > Saved Views commands overwrite existing records in the database. Plan. Related Topics • Export Saved Views Dialog Box. This will avoid collisions with existing view group names in the target database. The views you created as one type may not behave as expected when you transfer them to a different view type. page 261 288 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . You can import or export a view group with the same name but a different view type. Notes • You can use the Select All button to select all the saved view sets in the file for exporting. such as Main. Therefore. page 290 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview.0 or later project database table format. However. • • • SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. At your request. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. We do not recommend this action unless you are replacing all views in the target database.Making Animations: An Overview Export Saved Views Command File > Export > Saved Views Exports saved views to another project database. The database receiving the saved views must be in SmartPlant Review 5. page 289 • Export Saved Views. you can use the Save and Recall Views dialog box to rename view groups. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. Before you import or export saved views. if you imports or exports less data than currently exists in the target database. SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on the Save and Recall Views dialog box.

Related Topics • Export Saved Views Command. This option is available only when the From a single selected view group check box is turned on. page 290 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 289 . Displays the saved views in the selected group if Select view group is turned on.Allows you to navigate to a folder to select an existing database or to create a new database file. View group name .Unselects all of the names in the list.Exports the selected saved views without closing the dialog box. The name can be an existing database. Browse . or a new one. Select All . Name .Making Animations: An Overview Export Saved Views Dialog Box Allows you to export saved views from the active project database to another database. When this option is turned on.Displays the individual views in the view group.Displays a list of the view groups in the project database if Select view group is turned off. Database file name .Selects all of the names in the list. the View group name list contains the view groups in the project database.Allows you to select a single view group name.Specifies the name of the database to which you want to export saved views. From a single selected view group . Clear All . page 288 • Export Saved Views. Export .

make sure that both view groups are of the same type. Before you import or export saved views. page 289 290 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 3. SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on the Save and Recall Views dialog box. Optionally. If SmartPlant Review does not find the file name. Click File > Export > Saved Views. If the database receiving the new views contains a view group with the same name as the one being imported. click Select view group and select a group name from the list to display the individual views in that group. such as Main. If the view groups are of a different type. When importing or exporting a view group with the same name as one already in the receiving database. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. or click Browse to locate the project database file to which you want to export the saved views. the resulting view group may contain saved views of both types. Under the Name column. Therefore. or Elevation. 4. page 288 • Export Saved Views Dialog Box. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. Any identically named view in the receiving view group is overwritten by the incoming view.Making Animations: An Overview Export Saved Views 1. it creates a new database with that name. • • • • • Related Topics • Export Saved Views Command. possibly causing unintended consequences for the user. Plan. you can use the Save and Recall Views dialog box to rename view groups. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. click each view group (if the Select view group option is not selected) or saved group (if the Select view group option is selected) that you want to export. This will avoid collisions with existing view group names in the target database. You can use the Select All button to select all of the items in the Name column. 2. Notes • The database receiving the saved views must be in the SmartPlant Review 5. the saved views of the two view groups will be merged.0 or later project database table format. Type a database file name.

bmp.pcx. . or Simulation and Visual Effects. then the image is saved as an . The minimum snapshot size is 10 x 10 pixels. or Elevation views) . you can use the standard Windows Clipboard functionality to capture the following views: • Full-Screen (taken by pressing Print Screen) . when using High Resolution snapshot with an anti-alias factor and/or scale factor greater than 1 (which forces tiled view updates). and .tif. Application Window Only (taken by pressing Alt+Print Screen) .Data is captured directly from the application window without an update.jpg. and is copied to the Clipboard. click Single View Layout on the Common toolbar. enlarge the Main view as much as possible before running the Snapshot command.rgb image.Data is captured directly from the screen without an update. Plan. . . but have less than the recommended screen resolution. Construction. see Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box. .Data is captured directed from the graphic view without an update. one of the tiles in the resulting snapshot image may appear brighter than the surrounding tiles. Snapshots can be saved in . The snapshot functionality is available only if you have installed one of the following SmartPlant Review modules: API. blue). Occasionally. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting. Higher Anti-alias settings on large images at low screen resolutions may require that you enlarge the Main view before the snapshot can be taken. green. Graphic View Only (taken by using the Edit > Copy command or by pressing Ctrl+C in the Main. Modifying the color of gray objects may eliminate the problem.rgb (red. page 474.Making Animations: An Overview Taking Snapshots: An Overview The View > Snapshot command allows you to capture scaled and/or partial views in the Main view and save the snapshot directly to a file. • • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 291 . If you do not specify a format. Additionally. For more information. Collaboration. Photo-Realism. If you are trying to get a higher resolution output. Taking snapshots of collision detection results using Wireframe highlight and an Anti-alias set greater than 1 is not supported.tga formats. Shades of gray seem to be sensitive to this tiling. This anomaly may happen because of a conflict between OpenGL lighting and snapshot process in which the eye point moves slightly for each snapshot tile in the output image. and is copied to the Clipboard. Notes • • • To maximize snapshot performance. and is copied to the Clipboard.

Image files can be saved in . rather than off-screen. Capturing the image on-screen. Caution • When you use the Snapshot command for a view. 292 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . green. blue). you must install one of the following modules: Construction. takes full advantage of any hardware acceleration and enables SmartPlant Review to capture the image quickly. If you do not specify a format. any screen saver operations are automatically disabled when the Snapshot command is running. . .tga formats. rather than off-screen.rgb image. which is used to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view or screen. Capturing the image on-screen. Simulation and Visual Effects. Caution • When you use the Snapshot command for a view.tif. and . any screen saver operations are automatically disabled when the Snapshot command is running. API. To use this functionality. takes full advantage of any hardware acceleration and enables SmartPlant Review to capture the image quickly.Making Animations: An Overview Snapshot Command View > Snapshot Displays the Snapshot View dialog box.jpg. or On-site Drawing Generation. . For the same reason. For the same reason. There must be sufficient hard disk space when using high-resolution printing.bmp. rgb (red. Photo-Realism. A general rule of thumb for calculating print file size is: Bytes = Image Height X Image Width X 32. page 291 Snapshot View Dialog Box Allows you to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view.pcx. • Related Topics • Taking Snapshots: An Overview. do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus as they will be captured instead of the image. . then the image is saved as an . do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus as they will be captured instead of the image. Collaboration. The minimum snapshot size is 10 x 10 pixels.

Allows you to raytrace the snapshot and save the raytraced image to a file. • • • Rotate 90 degrees . measurements. but you have less than the recommended screen resolution. which means that no anti-aliasing occurs. Application Window. the end answer is the number of "Main views" of data that SmartPlant Review processes. The Anti-alias value determines how much data is captured and averaged to produce the snapshot size. If the Rotate 90 degrees toggle is on. To use this option. you must install the Photo-Realism module. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 293 . Notes • If you are trying to get a higher resolution output. These features include full screen mode. click Single View Layout on the Common toolbar.Making Animations: An Overview Extent . the output image rotates 90 degrees (clockwise) for plotting purposes. such as Axis. Anti-alias . A general rule of thumb for calculating file size is: Bytes = Image Height X Image Width X 32. and text annotations.Sets the anti-alias value for the snapshot. Example selections include Main View. data annotations. see Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box. The Antialias field defaults to 1. Taking snapshots of collision detection results using Wireframe highlight and an Anti-alias set greater than 1 is not supported. For more information. and Entire Screen. Also. page 474. are not supported in high-resolution printing. Some features are not recommended in high-resolution printing. especially when Anti-alias settings are greater than 1. instead of top-to-bottom. There must be sufficient hard disk space when using high-resolution printing.Allows the rotation of output by 90 degrees. If you capture the image without the capture form. Raytrace image . some settings. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting. If you multiply the Anti-alias value by the Scale value and square the result. If Anti-alias is set to 2.Allows you to select the area to include in the snapshot. SmartPlant Review scans the screen image from left-to-right. then SmartPlant Review captures and averages twice as much data for the width and height.

type the appropriate path and name of the file. You can then change Width and Height fields. Scale . the other fields change accordingly.Specifies the height of the snapshot image in pixels. Width . If you turn the toggle on.Allows you to open the snapshot in SmartSketch as well as save the snapshot to a file. Use SmartSketch . If you do not want to use the default information in the Template file name box.Resets all snapshot properties to preset defaults.Making Animations: An Overview Ignore aspect .Specifies the aspect ratio between the height and width of the snapshot image.Specifies the template which SmartSketch will use to open the snapshot. type the appropriate path and name of the template file for the snapshot. Template file name . Reset All . Related Topics • Snapshot Command. page 291 294 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . So if you change one field. A Browse button is available. Height. the Width. To use this functionality.Specifies whether to ignore the aspect ratio of the selected extent or to stretch the image to fix the specified height and width. you must install the On-Site Drawing Generation module.Specifies the width in pixels of the snapshot image. A Browse button is available for navigating to the correct location. File name . If the Ignore aspect option is off. Height . and Scale in the Dimensions box are limited by the aspect ratio of the Main view. If you do not want to use the default information in the File name box. page 292 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview. the Scale field is disabled and set to its default value.Indicates the path and file name where you want to save the snapshot.

select the type of display view that you want from the Extent list. you can select the Use SmartSketch check box to open the snapshot in SmartSketch. On the Snapshot View dialog box. specify the template SmartSketch should use to open the snapshot. If you do not select Ignore Aspect. 3. If you have installed the On-Site Drawing module. select the Rotate 90 Degrees check box. type any changes to the pixel values in Scale. Set the value for Anti-alias. 5. specify a name for the snapshot file. If you have not installed SmartSketch. The snapshot process stops. and Height. • 7. Then. Then. select the Ignore Aspect check box if you do not want the software to consider the aspect ratio of the view extent.Making Animations: An Overview Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch 1. a message instructs you to load SmartSketch before using the snapshot functionality. Related Topics • Taking Snapshots: An Overview. SmartSketch opens and places the snapshot inside the drawing border specified by the selected template. Move the slider to the right to increase the value or to the left to decrease the value. page 291 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 295 . In the Dimensions box. 4. If you want to rotate the view in the snapshot. In the Output box. Note • If installed. You can continue to create ordinary snapshots using the Snapshot View dialog box. Width. the Scale box is not available. 6. in the Template file name box. the software stretches the image to the specified height and width. Click View > Snapshot. 2. Tip If you select Ignore Aspect.

Calculate the total number of horizontal and vertical tiles which can be blocked per window update. • U(x) = Number of horizontal blocks = Maximum (1. pixels. page 20 • Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch. • • T(x) = Scaled width / 128 T(y) = Scaled height / 128 2. Calculate tile size = 128 * anti-alias factor. Calculate the total number of updates required per snapshot. 3. The general rule of thumb for calculating print file size is: Bytes = Image Height * Image Width * 32. page 291 296 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Be sure that you have sufficient hard disk space for using high-resolution printing. Greatest Integer (T(y) / B(y)) U = Total updates = U(x) * U(y) • • Caution • Do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus during highresolution printing. SmartPlant Review automatically disables your screen saver for this reason. y. Greatest Integer (T(x) / B(x)) U(y) = Number of vertical blocks = Maximum (1. • Related Topics • On-Site Drawing Generation Module. Note Tile size is equal to the minimum Main window size in x. SmartPlant Review will capture those images instead of the intended image.Making Animations: An Overview Calculate a High Resolution Snapshot 1. page 295 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview. • • • B(x) = Main window width / tile size B(y) = Main window height / tile size 4. Calculate the number of horizontal and vertical tiles required based on scaled width and scaled height.

page 305 Display Key Frame Command Motion > Key Frame > Display Displays the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box. page 261 • Simulation and Visual Effects Module. You can press Esc to stop the movie. Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion. page 299 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. Important • To use this functionality. updating all view properties. Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box.Making Animations: An Overview Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview The Display Key Frame Motion command displays the movie definition that you created with the View > Save and Recall command. This command only displays those key frames with a frame number greater than zero. page 298 • Display Key Frame Motion. page 23 • Snapshot Key Frames. After you click OK. This command displays only those key frames with a frame number greater than zero. the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box disappears and the animation sequence begins to play. which allows you to set movie definition items you created with the Save and Recall Views command. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. page 299 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 297 . Important • To use this functionality.

page 277.Skips frames at a specific interval.Displays the Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall dialog box. This dialog box is the same as the Set Up Partial View dialog box available from the Save and Recall Views dialog box. To use this functionality.Allows animation to skip frames during playback to keep up with the Frames per second value that you specify. Frames per second Allows you to place a limit on the animation speed by specifying how many frames you want to allow per second during playback.Enables you to select the frames of a named group. View group . Loop . the partial view settings defined here work only for Main view key frames. which is particularly useful for large models or limited hardware resources.Defines the ending frame of the animation sequence in the specified group. This option provides a smoother display. Frames Stop . Enter the number of frames to be skipped during an animation. However. You can type another frame number to start the animation at that frame. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module.Restarts the animation at the Start frame after reaching the End frame. Click Set Up Partial to define the partial view parameters. Set Up Partial . Skip frames as needed . Frames Start .Making Animations: An Overview Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box Allows you to set movie definition items.Allows the use of partial view settings. see Set Up Partial View Recall Dialog Box. For more information. page 185. For more information about setting up partial views. You can type another frame number at which to stop the animation. Skip frames to interval . 298 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . which allows you to set parameters controlling the part of the views that you want to see. Use partial . see Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box).Defines the starting frame of the animation sequence in the specified group. This grouping is created using the View > Save and Recall Views command. If you change one value. This value is the same value used for the Maximum moves per second option on the Motion Settings Rate tab. the software automatically changes the other.

2. page 297 • Pause Key Frame Motion. • • • Related Topics • Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview. Notes • The Display Key Frame command allows you to display the movie definition that you created with the View > Save and Recall command.Making Animations: An Overview Display Key Frame Motion 1. page 300 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. Type the number of Frames per second to view. Select a Group. Click Motion > Key Frame > Display. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. page 302 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 299 . page 301 • Play Key Frame Motion. To use this functionality. You also can click Display Key Frame on the Motion toolbar. This command only displays those key frames with a frame number greater than zero. page 261 • Snapshot Key Frames. 3. page 305 • Stop Key Frame Motion.

Play Key Frame Motion Click Motion > Key Frame > Play Key Frames. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. Important • To use this functionality. • Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion. page 302 300 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . To use this functionality. or if a key frame motion group has not been selected on the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box.Making Animations: An Overview Play Key Frame Command Motion > Key Frame > Play Plays the selected key frame animation from its current starting frame or from its current paused frame. Notes • You can also click Play Key Frame Ctrl+R on the keyboard. Important • If the current key frame motion group does not have valid key frames. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. and the key frame motion exits. page 301 • Stop Key Frame Motion. a message is displayed. on the Motion toolbar or press • This command only plays the current key frame animation from its current starting frame or from its current paused frame. page 299 • Pause Key Frame Motion.

To use this functionality. page 302 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 301 . Important • To use this functionality. Notes • You can also click Pause Key Frame Ctrl+Space on the keyboard. page 299 • Play Key Frame Motion. on the Motion toolbar or press • This command will pause the current PLAYING key frame motion and/or resume the currently PAUSED key frame motion. • Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion. Related Topics • Pause Key Frame Motion. page 305 • Stop Key Frame Motion. page 301 Pause Key Frame Motion Click Motion > Key Frame > Pause Key Frames. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. page 300 • Snapshot Key Frames. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module.Making Animations: An Overview Pause Key Frame Command Motion > Key Frame > Pause Pauses the current PLAYING key frame motion and/or resumes the currently PAUSED key frame motion.

not the frame at which you stopped. page 305 302 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Clicking Play resumes the key frame animation at the starting frame. Notes • You can also click Stop Key Frame Esc. • Related Topics • Stop Key Frame Motion. page 299 • Pause Key Frame Motion. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. Important • Clicking the Play command will resume the key frame animation at the starting frame. page 302 Stop Key Frame Motion Click Motion > Key Frame > Stop Key Frames. not the frame at which you stopped. Important • To use this functionality. To use this functionality. page 301 • Play Key Frame Motion. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. page 300 • Snapshot Key Frames. on the Motion toolbar or press • This command will stop the current PLAYING or PAUSED key frame animation.Making Animations: An Overview Stop Key Frame Command Motion > Key Frame > Stop Stops the current PLAYING or PAUSED key frame animation. • Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion.

you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module.Sets the start frame of an animation sequence in the specified group. View group . • Related Topics • Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box. Use partial . the partial view settings defined here work only for Main view key frames. Click Set Up Partial to define the partial view parameters. This works in the same manner as the Set Up Partial View dialog box available from the Save and Recall Views dialog box. page 303 • Snapshot Key Frames. This grouping is created using the View > Save and Recall Views command.Selects a named group of frames.Sets the stop frame of an animation. To use this functionality. Set Up Partial . page 305 Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box Allows you to create selected snapshots of key frames. However. which provides options for saving your key frame snapshots. see Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog Box.Allows the use of partial view settings. Important • Press ESC to stop the Snapshot process once it is started. which allows you to set parameters controlling the part of the views that you want to see. For more information about setting up partial views.Making Animations: An Overview Snapshot Key Frame Command Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot Displays the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box. You will be given the option to save the partial snapshot that was being taken at the moment the process stopped. page 306. You can type another frame number to stop the animation at that frame. you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module.Displays the Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall dialog box. Start . You can type another frame number to start the animation at that frame. To use this functionality. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 303 . Stop .

Sets the scale factor of the output frame. Also. Scale . 304 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Allows you to raytrace a snapshot and save the raytraced image to a file.Allows you to select a file or folder.bmp for Windows bitmap. and Entire Screen. Browse . If you select 4. instead of top-to-bottom. or click . SmartPlant Review scans the screen image from left-to-right. the output image rotates 90 degrees clockwise for plotting purposes. and Scale in the Dimensions box are limited by the aspect ratio of the Main view. If you change one field. If you capture the image without the capture form. If the Raytrace image toggle is on. Extent . Files prefix . If the Ignore aspect option is off.Sets the unique portion of the output frame file name.Sets the width of the output frame. Width .Making Animations: An Overview Raytrace image . If you turn the toggle on. the frames are high quality but process very slowly. the current snapshot GUI is used for creating raytrace images and animations.Specifies the view that the software uses when writing frame output. Anti-alias ." Ignore aspect .Allows the rotation of output by 90 degrees.Specifies the type of file format that the software uses when writing frame output. File type . You can then change the Width and Height fields independently. In some scenarios.Sets the height of the output frame. Height. Example selections include Main View. Please resize the view.Specifies that all snapshots go directly to the current default printer instead of to files on the computer disk. Application Window. You can click . To use this functionality.Sets the folder in which the software writes the output frames. the quality is slightly higher but process more slowly. Width. If the Rotate 90 ° toggle is on. If you select 2 or 3. If you select 1. the Scale field is disabled and set to its default value. you must install the Photo-Realism module.Allows width and height to change independently. "The Main view is too small to do a snapshot with an anti-alias level of 4. Print only . some anti-alias settings require that the Main view have a sufficient aspect ratio. Rotate 90 ° . the other fields change accordingly.Sets the anti-alias value for the snapshot.rgb for Intergraph Red Green Blue file format. the frames are the lowest quality but process quickly. Height . Snapshot may fail indicating that . You can choose from 1 through 4. Directory .

8. Type a Files prefix. • Related Topics • Create a View Group. 6. • 4. Select an Output Directory. 3. For more information. increase the size of the Main view before using the higher anti-alias settings. 5. Best performance is achieved when the Main view is as large as possible before running the snapshot functionality. 2. Notes • Press ESC to stop the snapshot process once it is started. Click Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot. Type a number for Height. page 281 • Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview. Tip You must define a view group using the Save and Recall View command before you can snapshot the key frames in that group. 9. • 7. You will be given the option to save the partial snapshot that was being taken at the moment the process stopped. Type a number for Width. 10. Select a View group. Type the frame number to Start. Tip For large bitmaps.Making Animations: An Overview Snapshot Key Frames 1. see Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. page 261 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 305 . you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module. To use this functionality. page 297 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. Select Anti-alias amount. Select a File type. page 261. Type the frame number to Stop.

but you want to keep the current eye point and center point settings. For example. Settings to apply . the view setting in the saved key frame overrides the current view setting when you recall the key frame. For more information about the individual view settings listed here. Select the settings that you want to apply. if the saved key frame contains specific eye point and center point values.Lists available view settings that you can turn on or off when recalling a saved key frame. see View Settings Dialog Box. page 299 Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall 1. Uncheck the settings that you do not want the saved key frame to override when the key frame is recalled. uncheck those options to prevent the current values from being overwritten when the saved key frame is recalled. page 297 • Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box. page 299 306 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 298 • Display Key Frame Motion. page 298 • Display Key Frame Motion. When checked. 3. Click Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot. page 297 • Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box. Related Topics • Display Key Frame Command. Click Set Up Partial on the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box.Making Animations: An Overview Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog Box Allows you to turn on and off certain view settings when recalling a partial key frame. Related Topics • Display Key Frame Command. page 102. 2.

Because each measurement requires two points. You can create your own collections. Related Topics • Create a New Measurement Collection. page 327 • Measure Shortest Distance. page 316 • Edit a Measurement Collection.Placing Measurements: An Overview Placing Measurements: An Overview You can place measurements and create measurement collections in SmartPlant Review. continuous and non-continuous. and available in English and Metric units regardless of the project environment. there is no connection between each pair of points and the next pair. you must select N + 1 number of points. which is useful if you need more than one set of measurements. page 310 • Snaplock Measurement. or use the default collection provided. page 308 • Surface Measurement. two surface points. a line between the two points. page 317 • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview. To create N measurements using non-continuous measurement. the shortest distance between two objects. SmartPlant Review shows you the points you selected. persistent. In non-continuous measurement. for N number of measurements. page 309 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 307 ." with a continuous connection between each selected point. or between a surface point and a snaplock point. In SmartPlant Review. there are now two methods to measure points. and the distance between the points. you can measure the distance between two highlighted snaplock points. Continuous measurements work like a "rolling tape measure. Measurements consist of key-point to key-point precision measuring and are stackable. The points comprising either this "rolling tape measure" or the non-continuous measurements are grouped together in a measurement collection. you must select 2 * N points. For each measurement. Non-continuous measurements consist of measurements between pairs of unique points.

3. A snaplock point is displayed as either a small square or round tag point on a surface. and text. • Notes • • • • • When measuring a distance. page 156 Double right-click to exit the command before selecting the snaplock point. snaplock points. Because measurements occur for every single selection point. Accept the object by left-clicking anywhere in the view. • You also can access this command pressing F8 or by clicking Snaplock Measure on the Tools MiniBar. 308 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 5. as shown in the picture below.Placing Measurements: An Overview Snaplock Measurement Command Tools > Measure > Snaplock Allows you to measure from a repeatable point on a selected piece of geometry. The linear distance and cumulative distance display in the Text view. Tip 2. For more information. making snaplock measurement more precise because it is repeatable. Select an object. Select the snaplock point on the object from which to measure. The location of a given snaplock point is always in the same place for a specific type of geometry. Click Tools > Measure > Snaplock. use the Tools > Measure > Edit Collection command to delete any unnecessary measurements. 4. you can cycle through the snaplock points to select the starting point for the rubber band. page 318. SmartPlant Review generates snaplock points at fixed locations on a given piece of geometry for use during snaplock measurement. see Edit Measurement Collections Command. Snaplock Measurement 1. Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview. Snaplock measurements allow you to define formats for the line. You can use any of the standard motion commands or view manipulation commands to move to a different part of the model between defining snaplock points. you must access the Snaplock command twice because it takes two selection points to define the distance to be measured. Right-click to cycle through the available points. If you have rubber banding turned on.

you must access the Surface command twice because it takes two selection points to define the distance to be measured. 4. Click Tools > Measure > Surface. Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview. Because measurements occur for every single selection point. 2. Surface Measurement 1. surface measurements measure between model points and vector points in the point cloud. formats. Surface points can be any point on any piece of geometry in shaded mode. surface point measurements are difficult to repeat precisely because they can be at any point on a given surface. not including background points. Double right-click to exit the command before selecting the next surface point. page 317 • Measurement Collections Dialog Box. Continue to identify end points. you can use Tools > Measure > Edit Collection to delete any unnecessary measurements. and snaplock points. Surface measurement allows you to select any surface point on any object. 6. Click Tools > Measure > Surface. Click the second point on the model. The measurement is saved in the active collection. You can also use this command to customize all measurement symbology for lines. page 312 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 309 . 5. page 156 3. The linear distance and cumulative distance display in the Text view. text. Click the first point on the model. page 318 • Move Measurement. While they work well for quick measurements between two or more objects. range boxes. • • • • • Related Topics • Create a New Measurement Collection. When working with point cloud data. Notes • When measuring a distance.Placing Measurements: An Overview Surface Measurement Command Tools > Measure > Surface Allows you to measure from any point on a piece of geometry.

You can define formats for the measurement line. Note • The One Click Measurement Mode should not be used with the Measure Shortest Distance between Objects command. Click the second point on the model. points. • • Related Topics • Measure Shortest Distance between Objects Command. Click the first point on the model. The linear distance and cumulative distance display in the Text view. Notes • • The measurement is saved in the active collection. page 156. Click to accept the highlighted element. This command honors the selection of a single element of a complex element when the Auto-highlight elements mode is turned on. 3. see Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview. Click to accept the highlighted element. see Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview. and text. For more information. Related Topics • Auto-Highlight Elements Command. page 310 • Move Measurement. 2. page 163 • Placing Measurements: An Overview. page 316. page 308 310 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . this command assumes that the entire complex element is to be tested for the shortest distance between the two selected objects.Placing Measurements: An Overview Measure Shortest Distance between Objects Command Tools > Measure > Shortest Distance between Objects Allows you to measure the shortest distance between two objects that you select. page 307 Measure Shortest Distance 1. For more information about identifying and placing 3D points. page 312 • Snaplock Measurement. 4. 5. Otherwise. Click Tools > Measure > Shortest Distance between Objects.

Related Topics • Placing Measurements: An Overview. page 307 • Snaplock Measurement. When you are in One Click measurement mode. page 308 • Surface Measurement. You can exit the measurement command. and then return to measurement to select the next point.Placing Measurements: An Overview One Click Measurement Mode Command Tools > Measure > One Click Measurement Mode Allows you to enter into Surface or Snaplock measurement and stay in the command until you right click. modify the view location or settings. One Click mode does not allow you to change the view or move around. page 309 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 311 . you do not have to keep using the mouse or function keys to restart the Snaplock or Surface measurement commands before entering the next measurement point.

The moved measurement is attached to the original connecting line. page 313 312 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . When clicked. • Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview. Click the position marker for the measurement that you want to move and then click where you want the new position to be. Click the position marker for the measurement that you want to move and then click where you want the new position to be. page 316 • Edit a Measurement Collection. the Move Measurement command displays the label position markers (red squares). • The moved measurement is attached to the original connecting line with a line. Click Tools > Measure > Move Measurement. Move Measurement 1. Click any point in the Main view to reposition the lower left corner of the measurement field.Placing Measurements: An Overview Move Measurement Command Tools > Measure > Move Measurement Allows you to reposition measurement labels. page 327 • Restore Measurement Position. Click any square red label position marker. 2. Notes • Move Measurement displays the label position markers (red squares). 3. You can click anywhere on the label to move or restore the measurement.

the Restore Position command displays the label position markers (red squares). Related Topics • Restore Measurement Position. page 313 Restore Measurement Position 1. Click the position marker for the measurement that you want to restore. Click the red label marker of the label that you want to restore. When clicked. Note • The selected label returns to the original position when you click the red label position marker. page 193 • Create a New Measurement Collection. page 317 • Delete Last Measurement. Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview. page 314 • Move Measurement. page 312 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 313 .Placing Measurements: An Overview Restore Measurement Position Command Tools > Measure > Restore Position Allows you to reposition a measurement label. 2. Click Tools > Measure > Restore Position.

page 316 • Delete Active Collection Measurements. page 315 • Edit a Measurement Collection. page 312 314 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Placing Measurements: An Overview Delete Last Measurement Command Tools > Measure > Delete Last Measurement Allows you to remove the last measurement added to the currently active collection. page 314 Delete Last Measurement Click Tools > Measure > Delete Last. Notes • • Delete Last removes the last measurement made in the active collection. Related Topics • Delete Last Measurement. page 327 • Move Measurement. Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview. You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking Delete Last Measurement on the Tools toolbar. page 329 • Delete All Measurements.

page 314 • Edit a Measurement Collection. page 327 • Move Measurement. but does not delete the collections. You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+Alt+D or by clicking Delete All Measurements on the Tools toolbar. page 329 • Delete Last Measurement. Notes • This command removes all measurements in all collections. • Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview. page 312 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 315 . page 315 Delete All Measurements Click Tools > Measure > Delete All Measurements. page 316 • Delete Active Collection Measurements. but does not delete the collections themselves. Related Topics • Delete All Measurements.Placing Measurements: An Overview Delete All Measurements Command Tools > Measure > Delete All Measurements Removes all of the measurements in each of the measurement collections.

page 318 316 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . allowing you to display or hide measurement collections independently in the model. You can create your own Measurement Collections or use the default measurement collection provided. User-defined collections can display measurements in English or Metric units regardless of the project environment. page 314 • Edit Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box). Related Topics • Create a New Measurement Collection.Placing Measurements: An Overview Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview SmartPlant Review groups Measurements together in Measurement Collections. snaplock points. You can delete specific measurements in a collection by using the Point Range options on the Edit tab on the Measurement Collections dialog box. all selection points are placed in the current or active collection. page 315 • Delete Last Measurement. one collection could be named "Footings" and contain a connected series of footings measurements. page 328 • Delete All Measurements. A measurement collection is a named group of measurements that connect together within each collection. The footings measurement collection will not connect to the I-Beam collections of measurements. You can also customize how the measurement symbology (lines. Another collection could be named "I-Beams" and contain a series of I-Beam measurements. You can have any number of named measurement collections. page 317 • Delete Active Collection Measurements. page 329 • Delete All Collections. up to the limit of records allowed in the project database. As you place measurements. All measurement information is stored in the project database. For example. Measurements occur for every single point. and text) appears in your project by using the Tools > Measure > Edit Collection command. One collection is independent of all other collections.

To edit the newly created measurement collection. You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+Shift+F8.Placing Measurements: An Overview New Measurement Collection Command Tools > Measure > New Collection Generates a new measurement collection and automatically sets it to be the active collection. page 317 Create a New Measurement Collection Click Tools > Measure > New Collection or click New Collection toolbar. The default name for the new collection is prefixed with AUTO_COLLECTION followed by the project site name and an incremented integer (for example. Related Topics • Create a New Measurement Collection. This name cannot be edited. Notes • on the Tools This command automatically generates a new measurement collection and sets it to be the active collection. page 308 • Surface Measurement. The default name for the new collection is prefixed with AUTO_COLLECTION followed by the project site name and an incremented integer (for example. page 314 • Edit Measurement Collections Command. click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections. page 318 • Snaplock Measurement. page 329 • Delete All Measurements. AUTO_COLLECTION_mysite_4). • • • Related Topics • Delete Active Collection Measurements. This name cannot be edited. Note • You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl + Shift + F8 or by clicking New Measurement Collection on the Tools toolbar. page 309 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 317 . AUTO_COLLECTION_mysite_4). page 315 • Delete Last Measurement.

For example. page 327 Measurement Collections Dialog Box Allows you to create or edit basic information for existing measurement collections. Also. The footings measurement collection will not connect to the IBeam measurement collection. and so forth) for each measurement collection in your project. range boxes. you also can display each collection independently from the other collections or select a specific range of measurements in a collection to display or delete. allowing you to display or hide measurement collections independently in the model. Notes • The active measurement collection is the last measurement collection selected immediately before exiting the Edit tab.Placing Measurements: An Overview Edit Measurement Collections Command Tools > Measure > Edit Collections Groups Measurements together in Measurement Collections. Edit Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Allows you to create or edit basic information for an existing measurement collection. formats. Another collection could be named "I-Beams" and contain a series of I-Beam measurements. text. and snaplock points. With the Edit tab. One collection is independent of all other collections. snaplock points. one collection could be named "Footings" and contain a connected series of footings measurements. page 316 • Edit a Measurement Collection. You can customize all measurement symbology for lines. The Edit Collections command allows you to customize the measurement symbology (for example. Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview. measurement units. and text. you can display user defined collection measurements in English and/or Metric units regardless of the project environment. • 318 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Measurement collection names cannot contain single tick marks ( ' ). A measurement collection is a named group of measurements that connect together within each collection. lines.

Allows you to enter the required name of the measurement collection. points 1 to 2. On . Delete .Placing Measurements: An Overview Name . SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 319 . The software displays one measurement between each point continuously. For example. points 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 will have measurements but points 2 to 3 would not have a measurement.Removes the selected measurement point range in the active collection. For example. 2 to 3. Description . You will see two measurements displayed if you provide four points.Allows you to enter an optional description of the measurement collection. Turn this option off to display measurements between each two pairs of points but not display measurement between multiple pairs of points. You can turn this option on or off at any time to meet your needs. You will see three measurements if you provide four points.Displays measurements between the points that you select with the rolling measuring tape. Continuous measurement .Displays all or part of a measurement collection using the selected point range. and 3 to 4 will have measurements.

320 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Specifies that you want to use the snaplocks for the range box instead of geometric snaplocks on a graphic element.Placing Measurements: An Overview Dynamic measurement rubberband . Use range box snaplocks .Measures dynamically and interactively from one selected measurement point over any graphic in the model until the next measurement point is selected.

page 318 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 321 . Measurement of graphic range box . From .Displays the rangebox around the measurement points. Display . Related Topics • Edit a Measurement Collection.Displays the range box dimensions of measured graphic elements in the text window. page 327 • Edit Measurement Collections Command.Removes the currently selected point range.Displays the selected measurement point range to assist you in determining which measurement points to delete.Selects the starting measurement point in a collection for display or deletion. Delete . Range box on measurement points .Selects the ending measurement point in a collection for display or deletion.Placing Measurements: An Overview Turn this option off to use the geometric snaplocks on the graphic element instead of those on the range box. To .

Dot-dash . Dash .Allows you to select a dashed line style for connecting line measurements.Allows you to select a dot-dashed line style for the range box. which allows you to select a line color.Placing Measurements: An Overview Line Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Defines the properties for the line that displays to show the distance being measured.Allows you to select a dashed line style for the range box. The Line tab also allows you to control the line color. 322 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Dot .Allows you to select a line width for the range box lines measurements. Edge width .Allows you to select a dotted line style for connecting line measurements. and display pattern.Displays the Color dialog box.Allows you to select a solid line style for the range box.Allows you to select a color for the range box lines. width. Dot . Width . Dash .Allows you to select a solid line style for connecting line measurements. Edit . Range Box Color . Dot-dash . Edit . which allows you to select a line color.Displays the collection name of the currently selected measurement collection.Allows you to select a dotted line style for the range box.Allows you to select a line width for connecting line measurements. Collection . Measurement Color .Allows you to select a color for the measurement leader line.Displays the Color dialog box. Solid . Solid .Allows you to select a dot-dashed line style for connecting line measurements.

States the name of the measurement collection that is currently selected. Supported font types include regular.Displays the font color for the measurement labels that are currently selected.0 to 1. and bold italic. and position along the measure line where the measurement text displays. Font Name . page 318 • Measurement Collections Dialog Box.Displays the currently selected font type for the measurement labels. Edit .Displays the Font dialog box. page 327 • Edit Measurement Collections Command. bold.Displays the name of the currently selected font for the measurement labels. allowing you to change the background color associated with the measurement. Collection . Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview.Allows you to select the position for the measurement label between start and end points for a measurement. Background Color . Background Transparent Allows you to select a transparent background for measurement text.Displays the currently selected font size for the measurement labels. text color. Font Size . Font Edit .Placing Measurements: An Overview Text Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Defines the display properties for the measurement text.0 . You can define different text properties for each measurement collection and change the font. Font Type . allowing you to select font parameters. page 318 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 323 .Displays the Color dialog box. Font Color . background color. italic.Displays the background color for the measurement labels that are currently selected. Position from 0. page 316 • Edit a Measurement Collection.

You can select any order from the list. Related Topics • Edit a Measurement Collection. Collection . Display Elevation .Displays the north measurement. English . Display East . page 327 324 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Display North .States original master (MU) in current original master units (MU). Both master and sub units Allows you to select the display of both master and sub units on the measurement label.Displays measurement in English units.Displays measurements in metric format. Display order for two or more delta distances .Specifies the display order for the delta distances that you have turned on. Metric .States original sub units (SU) for the current master file.Displays the east measurement. Master . Decimal master units only Allows you to select the display of master units only on the measurement label.Displays the elevation for the measurement.States the maximum number of digits to the right of the decimal on measurement labels. Precision . You also can define whether measurements display in metric or imperial units and the amount of precision after the decimal place. Sub .Placing Measurements: An Overview Format Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Allows you to select the display of only master units or both master and sub units on the measurement label.Displays the name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.

These terminators indicate the points between which you are measuring.Displays the Color dialog box.States the color of all alternate.Placing Measurements: An Overview Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Defines the measurement line terminator display properties for the active collection. Edit . Alternate . page 327 • Edit Measurement Collections Command. page 318 • Measurement Collections Dialog Box. Round .States the color of the final displayed snaplock measurement point for a selected piece of geometry. round snaplock measurement points. style. Square . Current .Allows you to specify snaplock point size from 6 to 10 pixels. page 316 • Edit a Measurement Collection. page 318 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 325 . Collection . Final . You also can define the point color. and size using this tab.Allows you to specify small.States the color of the snaplock measurement point that is currently displayed for a selected piece of geometry. Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview.Allows you to specify square snaplock measurement points. Size from 6 to 10 pixels . non-selected snaplock measurement points for a selected piece of geometry. allowing you to select the snaplock point color.Name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.

Groups of points . page 318 326 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 316 • Edit a Measurement Collection. Face midpoints (triangles) . Edge midpoints (rectangles) .Displays the active snaplock points for the range box. Graphically selected Activates the snaplock points that you select on the figure at the bottom of the dialog box. Corner points (circles) Activates the corner snaplock points.Placing Measurements: An Overview Range Box Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Defines which snaplocks are available on the range box. Active points display as yellow.Name of the measurement collection that is currently selected. Graphical point selection .Activates the midpoint snaplock points for each edge of the range box. Inactive points display as white. Group snaplock point selection All points . page 327 • Edit Measurement Collections Command. Collection .Activates all of the snaplock points on the range box.Activates the midpoint snaplock points for each face of the range box.Lets you select logical groups of snaplock points. The active range box snaplocks display on the figure at the bottom of the dialog box. Range box center point (diamond) .Activates the center point snaplock point for the range box. Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview. page 318 • Measurement Collections Dialog Box.

Notes • You also can access this command by pressing Shift+F8 or by clicking Edit Measurement Collections on the Tools toolbar. Select the appropriate settings on the Measurement Collections dialog box. page 315 • Delete Last Measurement. page 329 • Delete All Measurements. page 318 • Snaplock Measurement. Related Topics • Delete Active Collection Measurements. page 314 • Measurement Collections Dialog Box. page 308 • Surface Measurement. page 309 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 327 . Click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections. 2.Placing Measurements: An Overview Edit a Measurement Collection 1.

To see the measurements contained in each collection before deleting them. page 327 • Move Measurement. • • Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview. You do not need to delete the measurements before deleting all of collections. Delete All Collections Click Tools > Measure > Delete All Collections. page 329 • Delete Last Measurement. Notes • This command removes all collections and all of the measurements they contain. You do not need to delete the measurements before deleting the collections. page 314 • Edit a Measurement Collection. You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+D or by clicking Delete All Collections on the Tools toolbar. page 316 • Delete Active Collection Measurements.Placing Measurements: An Overview Delete All Measurement Collections Command Tools > Measure > Delete All Collections Removes all measurement collections and any associated measurements. select a collection Name. click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections. page 312 328 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . then click the Display option to view the measurements in the Main view.

page 314 • Edit a Measurement Collection. Delete Active Collection Measurements Click Tools > Measure > Delete Active Collection Measurements. To see which collection is the active collection. page 312 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 329 . • • Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview.Placing Measurements: An Overview Delete Active Collection Measurements Command Tools > Measure > Delete Active Collection Measurements Allows you to remove all of the measurements in the active collection. but does not delete the collection itself. Notes • This command removes all measurements in the active collection. page 315 • Delete Last Measurement. page 327 • Move Measurement. click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections and note the name highlighted in the Collection Name box. but does not delete the collection. page 316 • Delete All Measurements. You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+Shift+M or by clicking Delete Active Collection Measurements on the Tools toolbar.

Placing Measurements: An Overview 330 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

Using Annotations: An Overview Using Annotations: An Overview From tagging and annotating to finding and attaching data. page 388 • Attaching External Data: An Overview. page 332 • Manipulating Text Annotations: An Overview. page 357 • Placing Measurements: An Overview. Data Annotations allow you to attach external data (spreadsheets. Text Annotations allow you to access and display label data associated with objects in your model. • • • Related Topics • About the External Database. concise visual communication among project team members. such as its name. raster images) to objects in your model. • Tags allow you to attach pertinent information about an object in your model. page 542 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview. Measurement functions provide the capability to data point (snaplock) at the center of a pipe. location. page 307 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 331 . page 387 • Communicating with Tags: An Overview. type or classification. or attach general comments made during a walk-through of the design. SmartPlant Review provides a number of features that ensure clear.

This ASCII file is used in other Intergraph Process. Then. or general comments made during a walk-through of the design. only the active tag. Essentially. You can display all tags. page 357 • Using Annotations: An Overview. you can place tags with leader lines or without leader lines. Tags can provide information such as the name of a piece of equipment. You can import and export tags to an ASCII tag file. You also can display action comments. when you display the tag. You can step through the tag list to view each tag. The user can then import the modified ASCII file to SmartPlant Review and show the comments placed by other products. it is assigned the next available tag number. When you create a new tag. All tag attributes are available for you to use when you query for tags. when you place a new tag. page 357 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview. including levels and clipping planes. or no tags. In SmartPlant Review.Using Annotations: An Overview Communicating with Tags: An Overview Tags provide a means of communication between the people who design a plant and the people who construct a plant. The tag that you are currently at is the active tag. After reviewing the tags. Power and Offshore products to allow users to review tags placed within SmartPlant Review. The software saves the corresponding view. tags are labels that provide additional information about items in a plant. You can import and export tags directly to and from project databases. users can make comments that are written back to the same ASCII file. edit tags. which are additional text fields associated with tags that were placed during project design. You can search for a tag by entering text that appears in the tag label and you can directly go to a tag by entering a tag number. and delete tags. the corresponding view also displays. and the tag becomes the active tag. Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation. its location. its type or classification. page 331 332 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

The new tag becomes the active tag. the associated object appears highlighted. the Tags > Display > None command is active. Important • If the message Tag display is currently off appears. The software automatically assigns the next available tag number to the new tag. 4. Double-click the object at the location where you want the tag leader line to begin. Tips • Double-clicking causes the object to highlight. You then will be able to see the object's attributes in the Text view and accept or reject the placement point. • 5. Notes • You can also access the Leader command by pressing F9 on your keyboard. The leader line will start at the point where you clicked the object. 3. you will not see the leader line until the bubble is placed. • Place Tag With Leader 1. SmartPlant Review saves the link between the tag and the selected object. as well as the starting point for the leader line. When you open the model in PDS and select the tag. However. • Important The first placement point is used to set the target depth for your bubble in the current view. Tag placement prompts display in the status bar.Using Annotations: An Overview Place Leader Command Tags > Place > Leader Places a new tag in the model with a leader line. Single-click at the location where you want to place your bubble. This means that the tags do not appear in the design. When you place the new tag. The new tag is assigned the next available tag number. Click Tags > Place > Leader. the software saves the corresponding view. and the tag becomes the active tag. 2. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 333 . Left-click to accept the placement point for the beginning of the leader line. When you place a tag by first double-clicking on an object in the model. Type your text in the Edit Tags dialog box.

txt. You can establish the pre-defined template used by the Place Tag command by creating an ASCII text file named tagseed. the corresponding view is also displayed. The view settings saved with a tag are the levels. • • • • • Related Topics • Activate Tag Display. page 340 • Go to Tag. However. page 346 • Place Tag Without Leader. Each time that you display a tag. the Tags Off command is active. and the clipping planes. page 335 334 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . SmartPlant Review searches first in the folder specified by the DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. The beginning of the leader line can also be placed using a 3D data point or by simply single-clicking a point in space. the Eye and Center point locations. page 347 • Delete a Tag. If it is not there. SmartPlant Review searches your home folder and then C:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.Using Annotations: An Overview Notes • Tags appear in all three views. the associated object appears highlighted. If the message "Tag display is currently off" appears. This means that the tags do not appear in the design. the corresponding view is also saved. When you open the model in PDS and select the tag. The text and tag number from the active tag appear in the text window. When you place a new tag. When you place a tag by first double-clicking on an object in the model. these methods will not associate the tag with an object in the model. SmartPlant Review saves the link between the tag and the selected object. These view parameters associated with a tag cannot be edited.

SmartPlant Review saves the link between the tag and the selected object. • 4. the horizontal strip at the bottom of the active window. When you place the new tag. the corresponding view is also displayed. The software automatically assigns the next available tag number to the new tag. • Place Tag Without Leader 1. the software saves the corresponding view. When you open the model in PDS and select the tag. The status bar. • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 335 . Each time that you display a tag. the corresponding view is also saved. Double-click the object at the location where you want the tag to be placed.Using Annotations: An Overview Place No Leader Command Tags > Place > No Leader Places a new tag in the model without attaching a leader line. Click Tags > Place > No Leader. Tips • Double-clicking causes the object to highlight. the Eye and Center point locations. displays the tag placement prompts. The software automatically assigns the next available tag number to the new tag. The new tag then becomes the active tag. The new tag becomes the active tag. The view settings saved with a tag are the levels. You then will be able to see the object's attributes in the Text view and accept or reject the placement point. 2. Notes • You can also access the No Leader command by pressing Ctrl + F9 on your keyboard. When you place a tag by first double-clicking on an object in the model. Notes • The Place Tag Without Leader command places a new tag in the model without attaching a leader line. Tags appear in all three views. The text and tag number from the active tag appear in the text window. Tags appear in all three views. 3. Type your text in the Edit Tags dialog box. Left-click to accept the placement point for the tag. the associated object is highlighted. These view parameters associated with a tag cannot be edited. and the clipping planes. When you place a new tag.

SmartPlant Review saves the link between the tag and the selected object. If it is not there. SmartPlant Review searches your home folder and then C:\ before assuming that the file does not exist. The tag can also be placed using a 3D data point or by simply singleclicking a point in space. these methods will not associate the tag with an object in the model. page 333 336 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Using Annotations: An Overview • You can establish the pre-defined template used by the Place Tag command by creating an ASCII text file named tagseed. • • • Related Topics • Activate Tag Display. However. page 340 • Edit Tags. SmartPlant Review searches first in the folder specified by the DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. the associated object appears highlighted. the Tags Off command is active. If the message "Tag display is currently off" appears. page 343 • Place Tag With Leader. This means that the tags do not appear in the design. page 347 • Delete a Tag. When you place a tag by first double-clicking on an object in the model. When you open the model in PDS and select the tag. page 339 • Find a Tag.txt.

use the Tags > Delete command.Removes the tag displaying in the Number field from the model. Caution • If you click Delete. click Tags > Display > All to view tags in the view. You also can use this dialog box to quickly create a new tag with or without a leader. the Eye and Center point locations.Allows you to display a specific tag by selecting its number. Edit Tags Dialog Box Allows you to edit or review the active tag. the selected tag is automatically removed from the model. You also can quickly create a new tag with or without a leader. "Find Tags" results .Using Annotations: An Overview Edit Tags Command Tags > Edit Displays the Edit Tags dialog box. Edit Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box) Allows you to edit or review the text associated with the active tag. Note • If the message Tag display is currently off displays. Delete . SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 337 . If you would prefer a confirmation message prior to the tag deletion. and the clipping plane locations. Number .Fills the Number list with only those tags in the current Find Tags result set. The view settings associated with a tag are the levels. which allows you to view or change the attributes of the active tag. Recall view .Changes the view settings to those associated with the tag number displayed in the Number field.

Allows you to create a new tag with or without a leader. 338 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Category .Displays data associated with a tag.Prevents the display of tags in the view. Restore Defaults .Allows you to enter or pick from a list the category associated with the tag.Using Annotations: An Overview Text .Allows you to enter or pick from a list the name of the computer that generated the tag. Attributes Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box) Allows you to edit or review the attributes of the active tag.Displays the last saved set of defaults. All .Allows you to enter or pick from a list the discipline associated with the tag.Displays all tags in the view.Allows you to enter or pick from a list the creator of the tag. Site ID .Displays the date the tag was placed.Allows you to toggle between the comment text or the tag text. None . Leader .Displays the date the tag was last modified.Allows you to enter or pick from a list the site identification associated with the tag. Discipline .Allows you to place a new tag. Show comments .Displays only the active tags. Place . Active only . Status . Computer name . Last Modified .Allows you to enter or pick from a list the status of the tag. Created . Creator . Save As Defaults .Saves the current set of values for each attribute so that you can use them as a starting point for other tags.

type or select the values for the properties.Using Annotations: An Overview Symbology Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box) Allows you to edit or review the symbology of the active tag. Text . On the Symbology tab. Leader . Related Topics • Find a Tag.Saves the current set of symbology values so that you can use them as a starting point for other tags. Select Active only. All or None for Display option. Restore Defaults . Edit Tags 1. Type the Text for the tag. Background . page 343 • Go to Tag. Click Tags > Edit or click Edit Tag 2. Edit . Edit .Displays the Color dialog box. page 333 • Place Tag Without Leader. . 3. allowing you to select the background color that you want to use for the tag. 5. page 335 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 339 on the Tools MiniBar.Allows you to select the color for the tag's leader line. allowing you to define the text color that you want to use for the tag. Select Show comments to display comments associated with the tag. select color values for parts of the tag. On the Attributes tab.Allows you to select the background color for the tag.Displays the last saved set of symbology values. page 346 • Place Tag With Leader. 6.Displays the Color dialog box allowing you to select the color that you want to use for the tag's leader line. 4. Save As Defaults .Allows you to select the text color for the tag. Select the tag Number to edit. Edit . 7.Displays the Color dialog box.

page 340 Delete Tag Dialog Box Allows you to delete a tag by specifying its tag number. the tag number is removed from use and will not be reassigned to a new tag. You also can delete tags from the Edit Tags dialog box. 2.Using Annotations: An Overview Delete Tags Command Tags > Delete Deletes a single tag by specifying the tag number. Verify . the tag number is removed from use and is not reassigned to a new tag.When this toggle is enabled. • 340 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 332 • Delete a Tag. When you delete a tag. the tag number is removed from use and is not reassigned to a new tag. On the Delete Tag dialog box. Notes • When you delete a tag.Allows you to choose a specific tag number to delete. page 340 Delete a Tag 1. select the tag to delete. Related Topics • Delete a Tag. Click Tags > Delete or select Delete Tag on the Tools MiniBar. When you delete a tag. Number . you will receive a prompt asking you to confirm the deletion of the tag. You can answer Yes to delete the tag number or No to cancel the command and return to the Delete Tag dialog box. Related Topics • Communicating with Tags: An Overview.

which allows you to search for tags that match the criteria you specify on the dialog box. You can use an asterisk to (*) to match multiple characters and a question mark (?) to match exactly one character. click Tags > Displays > All to view tags in the model.Allows you to type a text string representing the text attribute as part of the find tags query. Text . For example.Using Annotations: An Overview Find Tags Command Tags > Find Displays the Find Tags dialog box. The Edit Tags dialog box displays the resulting set of tags. Comment . the text search string *Huntsville* will find all tags containing the text string Huntsville in their text attribute. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 341 . None of the fields are case sensitive. Notes • If the message Tag display is currently off displays.Allows you to type a text string representing the comment attribute as part of a find tags query. Attributes Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box) Specifies attribute criteria for your find tags query. Related Topics • Find a Tag. page 343 Find Tags Dialog Box Allows you to search for tags based on their attributes and symbology. You can use an asterisk to (*) to match multiple characters and a question mark (?) to match exactly one character.

Using Annotations: An Overview Creator . This value must be an exact match. Computer name . You cannot use special characters in this field. You cannot use special characters in this field. which helps you designate a range of values to search for. You cannot use special characters in this field. Select an operator on the left and a number on the right to search for some set of tags in relation to one particular tag. You cannot use special characters in this field. Created . Category . Status .Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the computer name attribute as part of a find tags query.This group of controls lets you query on last modified date. You cannot use special characters in this field. This value must be an exact match. Site ID . This value must be an exact match. Number . SmartPlant Review provides two number-operator pairs. SmartPlant Review provides two number-operator pairs.Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the status attribute as part of a find tags query.Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the category attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an exact match.Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the discipline attribute as part of a find tags query. SmartPlant Review provides two number-operator pairs. This value must be an exact match. which helps you designate a range of values to search for. 342 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Select an operator on the left and a number on the right to search for some set of tags in relation to one particular tag.Allows you to query on creation date. Select an operator on the left and a number on the right to search for some set of tags in relation to one particular tag. This value must be an exact match.Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the site id attribute as part of a find tags query. You cannot use special characters in this field. which helps you designate a range of values to search for.Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the creator attribute as part of a find tags query. Discipline .This group of controls lets you query on tag numbers. Last modified .

2. Leader . Tip • The matching tag displays on the Edit Tags dialog box. and the clipping planes. The view settings saved with a tag are the levels. Notes • You can use an asterisk to (*) to match multiple characters and a question mark (?) to match exactly one character.Allows you to select a text color on which to base your tag search. Type the identifying information for the tag or tags that you want to locate. page 346 • Tags Toolbar. Click Tags > Find or select Find Tag on the Tags toolbar. the view settings associated with that tag become active.Using Annotations: An Overview Symbology Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box) Allows you to search for tags based on the symbology. • • • Related Topics • Activate Tag Display. You can use wildcard search characters in Text or Comment attributes. When you select a tag to display.Allows you to select a leader line color on which to base your tag search. page 337 • Edit Tags. Background .Allows you to select a background color on which to base your tag search. Text . The list of tags generated by a query is emptied if you import a tag or place a new tag. you must regenerate the query to rebuild the tag list. Related Topics • Edit Tags Command. page 347 • Go to Tag. the text search string *Huntsville* will find all tags containing the text string Huntsville in their text attribute. page 339 Find a Tag 1. the Eye and Center point locations. If you perform one of those actions. For example. page 91 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 343 . All other query attributes will search for exact matches.

the the tag list on the Find Tag and Edit Tag dialog boxes displays only those tags that meet the current search criteria. page 341 • Find a Tag. Notes • If the active tag number is the highest-numbered tag in the tag list. • View Next Tag Click Tags > Next. Notes • If the message Tag display is currently off appears. the tag list will consist only of those tags that meet the current search criteria. You can also access the Next command by pressing F10 on your keyboard. the actual tags do not appear in the design. You can also click Next Tag on the Tools MiniBar or press F10. page 343 • Find Tags Dialog Box. When on. click Tag > Display > All. the next tag number is the lowestnumbered tag in the tag list. page 341 • Symbology Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box).Using Annotations: An Overview Find Tags Results Command Tags > Find Tags Results Toggles the display of the Find Tags command. the view settings associated with that tag become active. page 343 Next Tag Command Tags > Next Allows you to move to the tag number following the active tag. When you select a tag to display. the next tag number is the lowest-numbered tag in the tag list. the Eye and Center point locations. and the clipping planes. If the Find Tags toggle is on. To display the tags. Related Topics • Attributes Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box). • • • 344 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . If the active tag number is the highest-numbered tag in the tag list. These view settings saved with a tag are the levels.

You can also access the Previous command by pressing Ctrl + F10 on your keyboard. the previous tag number is the highest-numbered tag in the tag list. If the Find Tags toggle is on. • View Previous Tag Click Tags > Previous. and the clipping planes. Notes • If the message Tag display is currently off appears. the tag list will consist only of those tags that meet the current search criteria. the actual tags do not appear in the design. the Eye and Center point locations. the previous tag number is the highest-numbered tag in the tag list. Notes • If the active tag number is the lowest numbered tag in the tag list. These view settings include the levels. If the active tag number is the lowest-numbered tag in the tag list. click Tags > Display > All.Using Annotations: An Overview Previous Tag Command Tags > Previous Allows you to move to the tag number preceding the active tag. To display the tags. on the Tools MiniBar or press • • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 345 . the view settings associated with that tag become active. When you select a tag to display. You can also click Previous Tag Ctrl+F10.

page 346 • Go to Tag. The tag that you go to becomes the active tag. Related Topics • Go to Tag Dialog Box. click Tags > Display and choose a viewing option from the menu. Select the tag Number. the view settings associated with that tag become active.Using Annotations: An Overview Go to Tag Command Tags > Go To Displays the Go to Tag dialog box. page 346 Go to Tag Dialog Box Allows you to locate a specific tag using the tag number. which allows you to display a specific tag by selecting its number. When you select a tag to display. You also can select Go To Tag on the Tags toolbar. Go to Tag 1. 2.Allows you to specify the number of the tag that you want to view. These view settings include the levels. Notes • • The tag that you go to becomes the active tag. Number . Click Tags > Go To. To display tags in the model. If the Find Tags toggle is on. Note • If the message Tag display is currently off displays. click Tags > Display > Active Only to display the tags in the model. • • 346 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . the Eye and Center point locations. the tag list will consist only of those tags that meet the current search criteria. and the clipping planes.

and the clipping planes. or None). Active Only. Related Topics • Communicating with Tags: An Overview. page 332 Activate Tag Display Click Tags > Display > Activate.Using Annotations: An Overview Activate Tag Display Command Tags > Display > Activate Changes the view settings to those associated with the tag that was last active. page 348 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 347 . page 349 • Display Only Active Tag. Notes • This command changes the view settings to those associated with the tag that was last active. This command does not change the current display setting of the tag itself (that is. The view settings associated with tags are the levels. All. • • Related Topics • Display All Tags. the Eye and Center point locations. The text for the tag displays in the Text view. The text for the tag displays in the Text view. page 349 • Display No Tags.

Note • If you are in a shared environment. clicking both the All tags and Active tag only options. in the Options section on the Display tab. click Tools > Refresh Data to see the tags initiated by other team members using the same session.Using Annotations: An Overview Active Only Tag Display Command Tags > Display > Active Only Changes the view settings to those associated with the tag that was last active. The text for the tag displays in the Text view. If you are in a shared environment. Display Only Active Tag Click Tags > Display > Active Only. click Tools > Refresh Data to see the tags initiated by other team members using the same session. • 348 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Notes • You can also display only the active tag by clicking View > Settings and then.

• SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 349 . unselecting the All tags option. You can turn off the display of tags by clicking View > Settings and then. Display All Tags Click Tags > Display > All. Notes • The Display All Tags command allows you to display all the tags in the view.Using Annotations: An Overview Display All Tags Command Tags > Display > All Allows you to display all the tags in the view. You can also display all tags by clicking View > Settings and then. • • Display No Tags Command Tags > Display > None Allows you to turn off the display of tags in the model. Note • The Display Tags > None command allows you to turn off the display of tags in the model. click Tools > Refresh Data to see the tags initiated by other team members using the same session. If you are in a shared environment. in the Options section on the Display tab. in the Options section on the Display tab. Note • You must have tag display turned on to use the All command. Display No Tags Click Tags > Display > None. clicking the All tags option.

Notes • The Action Comments command allows you to display the action comments for the current tag in the Text view. page 350 Display Tag Action Comments Click Tags > Display > Action Comments. page 352 350 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . • Related Topics • Import Tags.tag files. An action comment is information associated with a tag and is created using a plant design product.Using Annotations: An Overview Display Tag Action Comments Command Tags > Display > Action Comments Allows you to display the action comments for the current tag. Related Topics • Display Tag Action Comments. You can incorporate action comments into a SmartPlant Review project by importing .

You can then import the modified ASCII file into SmartPlant Review and display the comments made using the other products.tag file replaces all of the tag data in the current project with data found in the . Important • The import operation will not succeed if the sending database does not have the SmartPlant Review 5.Using Annotations: An Overview Import Tags Command File > Import > Tags Allows you to import tags from an ASCII . • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 351 . Therefore.tag file. Notes • Importing tags from a database file (.mdb) allows you to optionally overwrite like-numbered tags or append tags to the current project data.mdb). it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. Importing from a . SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases.0 or later format.tag file or a database file (. The ASCII file allows you to use other Intergraph products to review and comment on tags placed in SmartPlant Review files. The sending database must be upgraded to this format prior to importing from it. Any comments you make using these other products are written back to the same ASCII file.

The sending database must be upgraded to this format prior to importing from it.Using Annotations: An Overview Import Tags Click File > Import > Tags. Importing from a .tag file replaces all of the tag data in the current project with data found in the . You can then import the modified ASCII file into SmartPlant Review and display the comments made using the other products.mdb). The ASCII file allows you to use other Intergraph products to review and comment on tags placed in SmartPlant Review files. Therefore.tag file. • • 352 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Any comments you make using these other products are written back to the same ASCII file. Notes • You can import tags from an ASCII . Important • The import operation will not succeed if the sending database does not have the SmartPlant Review 5. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases.mdb) allows you to optionally overwrite like-numbered tags or append tags to the current project data.tag file or a database file (. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. Importing tags from a database file (.0 or later format.

Save and copy the project database to a different folder so that you can edit it later to simulate parallel edit sessions. you might copy the project to two different locations for parallel reviewing and editing. For the purposes of this example. 4. 8. and importing tags. • Notes • In a real world scenario. 6. Save all the tag Attributes and Symbology values as defaults by clicking the Save as Defaults button on their respective tabs.Using Annotations: An Overview Importing Tags with Attributes and Symbology This workflow describes two simultaneous edit sessions of the same original project using duplicate databases. Place another tag with the following attributes: Text = Example workflow tag Original 2 5. Save all the tag Attributes and Symbology values as defaults by clicking the Save as Defaults button on their respective tabs. The two edit sessions then combine the edit session data in order to provide a single valid project. Save and copy this project database to a folder different than the one used previously for saving the original project database. 9. Exit the project. leave the database as it is and simulate a separate tag edit session using the attributes of the tags. This example shows a use for tag attributes. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 353 . For the rest of this example. this new project will be referred to as the original project. Create a new project. Place a tag with the following attributes: • • • • Text = Example workflow tag Original 1 Creator = User Discipline = Engineer Background = orange 3. 2. symbology. Place another tag with the following attributes: • • • • Text = Example workflow tag Project 1-1 Discipline = Scheduling Background = blue 7. 1. The current project database can now be thought of as project one.

in its text field. Select the second saved database file that represented project two tags. Open the project. Verify that the tag append and renumbering check box is set in the Import dialog box. Place another tag with the following attributes: • • • Text = Example workflow tag Project 2-1 Discipline = Inspector Background = green 13. 11.Using Annotations: An Overview 10. • 12. Select the tag with &ldquo. Place another tag with the following attributes: Text = Example workflow tag Project 2-2. 354 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Project 1-1&rdquo. Import the following tag: • • • • • Click File > Import > Tags. Save all the tag Attributes and Symbology values as defaults by clicking the Save as Defaults button on their respective tabs. Note • • • The imported tag will become the highest numbered tag during the renumbering import. 15. Click Close. 14. Click Import. Note The project can now be thought of as project two. Replace the current project database with the first database saved after original tags were added.

SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases.tag file.Using Annotations: An Overview Export Tags Command File > Export > Tags Writes the tag information in the current database to another project database or .tag file format has not changed. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings.tag file with data found in the current project. Otherwise.0 project is written during an export to a .0 format. Exporting to a . Therefore. page 332 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 355 . None of the new attribute data supported in a SmartPlant Review 5. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. • • • • Related Topics • Communicating with Tags: An Overview. Notes • When exporting tags to a database file (. the tags from the current database maintain their same numbering. In the instance where likenumbered tags exist in both databases.tag file replaces all of the tag data in the . The target database must be upgraded to this format prior to exporting to it. There is no option to append exported tags to the existing tags in the receiving database. The . the software allows you to optionally overwrite tags in the receiving database. The export operation will not succeed if the target database does not have the SmartPlant Review 5. the tags from the current database are merged with the tags in the receiving database.mdb).tag file.

it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data.0 project is written during an export to a .0 format.Using Annotations: An Overview Export Tags Click File > Export > Tags. the tags from the current database maintain their same numbering.tag file format has not changed. page 332 356 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . None of the new attribute data supported in a SmartPlant Review 5. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. • • • • Related Topics • Communicating with Tags: An Overview. The target database must be upgraded to this format prior to exporting to it.tag file replaces all of the tag data in the .mdb). Exporting to a . There is no option to append exported tags to the existing tags in the receiving database. Otherwise. In the instance where likenumbered tags exist in both databases. the tags from the current database are merged with the tags in the receiving database. Notes • When exporting tags to a database file (.tag file. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. The . Therefore. the software allows you to optionally overwrite tags in the receiving database. The export operation will not succeed if the target database does not have the SmartPlant Review 5.tag file with data found in the current project.

When the cursor changes to a document icon with a plus (+) sign. you can drag and drop a spreadsheet. page 360 Create a Data Annotation 1. The data annotation appears without a leader line. Open Windows Explorer. Double-click the data annotation icon to display the file contents. drop the file on the object that you want to annotate. and drag it onto your model. Drag a file from Explorer to the Main view. a word processing file. page 361 • Edit a Data Annotation File. You also can place a leader line and attach the file to an object. For example. Click to place the annotation. or an HTML document into your model. page 358 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 357 .Using Annotations: An Overview Placing Data Annotations: An Overview Data Annotation allows you to select virtually any data file using Windows Explorer. Move the cursor to the position where you want the data annotation to appear. Related Topics • Display Data Annotations. 3. 4. 2. right-click when prompted to place a leader line. Note • To place a data annotation without a leader line. Click the object to select the anchor point for the leader line. 5. and click again to accept. page 360 • Edit a Data Annotation Position. Edit Data Annotation Command Tools > Data Annotation > Edit Allows you to edit the selected data annotation. Then left-click. Related Topics • Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box.

Displays the name of the optional executable to associate with a data annotation.Using Annotations: An Overview Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box Allows you to change the document properties of the active data annotation. Optional viewer . You also can use the Pick Point feature to define a point in the model and change the position of the data annotation. such as color. If this box has no information. File Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to change the document properties of the active data annotation. Show . You also can toggle the display of the leader lines on or off. Edit . Target . You also can make the data annotation's appearance more apparent by editing the background color. The Position tab on the Data Annotation Properties dialog box allows you to change the location of the data annotation by changing the North.Allows you to type a path or Browse for a folder in which to open the annotation object. location. East.Allows you to type a path or Browse to the file that you want to place as a data annotation in the drawing. rectangular background behind the annotation icon. You also can add and change the background color of the data annotation icon to make its appearance more apparent. Color .Displays the Color dialog box.Allows you to navigate to a file or folder. the software uses the current folder. and arrowheads at the end of leader lines. which allows you to set the optional solid background color for the data annotation icon. This dialog box also enables you to change the leader line attributes. Optional start in . You also can use the Browse button to navigate to the program that you want to use. Browse . such as the target and program that opens the annotation.Displays a solid color. such as the target and program that opens it. and Elevation values.Displays the optional solid background color for the annotation icon. 358 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

Activate . Pick Point . and Elevation values.Sets the north coordinate of the annotation position. Color .Starts or stops the display of the leader line for a selected data annotation.Sets the east coordinate of the annotation position. East . North . East . which allows you to select a color for the leader line.Displays the color for the annotation leader line.Sets the elevation coordinate of the leader line point. Pick Point . and arrowheads at the end of leader lines.Allows you to set the leader line position by placing a three dimensional point in the Main view.Sets the elevation coordinate of the annotation position. East. Elevation .Allows you to use arrowheads with leader lines for the selected data annotation.Displays the Color dialog box. North . You also can reposition the data annotation by manually defining a three dimensional point. Arrowhead .Sets the east coordinate of the leader line point. Elevation . Edit . These attributes include color. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 359 .Using Annotations: An Overview Position Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to change the location of the data annotation by changing the North. the Position tab allows you to change the attributes of a leader line.Allow you to set the annotation position by placing a three dimensional point in the Main view. location. In addition.Sets the north coordinate of the leader line point. You also can toggle the leader line display on and off.

which allows you to select the placement point for the annotation directly in the model. Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Edit. page 360 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview. Click the data annotation in the Main view that you want to edit. 6. 3. Edit the Leader Line options as needed. page 357 • Display Data Annotations. 7. Tip You also can click Pick Point. 2. Select Show Icon background. 2. and Elevation fields. page 357 Edit a Data Annotation Position 1. 5. 5. page 357 360 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 361 • Edit a Data Annotation Position. • Note • Use the Position tab to edit the location of the data annotation icon in the model. Click the Position tab. Edit the annotation location using the North. Identify the data annotation that you want to edit. 4. page 361 • Edit a Data Annotation File. Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation. 3. and to edit the leader line color and other properties. page 360 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview. Edit the Target file. Click to accept the data annotation that you selected. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Edit. Select an Optional start in folder. Click to accept the data annotation that you selected. 6. 4. Select an Optional Viewer. page 357 • Display Data Annotations.Using Annotations: An Overview Edit a Data Annotation File 1. East.

page 357 Display Data Annotations 1. 2. Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation. page 357 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 361 . Note • The View > Display > Annotations command controls the display of all annotations. Note • The View > Display > Annotations command controls the display of all annotations. regardless of the program that created them.Using Annotations: An Overview Display Data Annotation Command Tools > Data Annotation > Display Turns on or turns off the display of data annotations. Do one of the following: • • Click Off to turn off display of all data annotations Click On to turn on display of the data annotations. For data annotations to display. For data annotations to display. regardless of the program that created them. page 360 • Edit a Data Annotation Position. page 360 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview. The Tools > Data Annotation > Display command controls only annotations created by the Data Annotations command. you must turn on both the View > Display > Annotations and the Tools > Data Annotation > Display commands. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Display. you must turn on both the View > Display > Annotations and the Tools > Data Annotation > Display commands. The Tools > Data Annotation > Display command controls only annotations created by the Data Annotation command. page 357 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview. Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation. page 357 • Edit a Data Annotation File.

page 357 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview. page 357 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview. Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation. page 357 362 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation.Using Annotations: An Overview Delete One Data Annotation Command Tools > Data Annotation > Delete One Deletes one selected data annotation from the current project. page 357 Delete All Data Annotations Command Tools > Data Annotation > Delete All Deletes all data annotations from the current project.

You can turn off the clipping volume's geometry while the view clipping display is still active for a cleaner clipped display. knocked down and rebuilt as needed incurring considerable expense for a construction project. Note in the picture on the right below that with the clipping volume loaded and turned on. You can draw the clipping volume itself as a visible piece of geometry for ease in placement and editing. Welds may be used to track field welds. Clipping volumes let you isolate and view portions of a model. With the clipping volume turned off the entire model will display. Cylinders may be used as cylindrical scaffolding or may be used in other ways. The picture on the left is a clipping volume around the pipe rack in SPRDemo. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 363 . You can use SmartPlant Review to track scaffolding and help the planners and workers visualize where the scaffolds are and how and when they can be used.Using Annotations: An Overview Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview The Volume Annotation command allow you to place certain types of geometry in a model.dri with the clipping volume visible. Scaffolds are frequently built. Work areas may be designated and planned using boxes to indicate the size and importance of the work area. Work requiring scaffolds can be planned around the scaffold being present to reduce the need and cost associated with building. The original files are not modified and the Volume Annotation data does not flow back to the PDS database or software. used. Volume annotations can be of three basic geometric types: • • • boxes cylinders spheres SmartPlant Review also provides three additional special types of volume annotations: • • • scaffolds (boxes) field welds (cylinders) clipping volumes (boxes) Volume annotations are saved in the SmartPlant Review project database. just the pipe rack is visible. The picture on the right is the same active clipping volume with the clipping volume geometry display turned off. You can use volume annotations as a very powerful planning and tracking tool. knocking down and rebuilding the same scaffold an excessive number of times. Using volume annotations to plan scaffolding work could result in a considerable cost savings for a project. Spheres may be used to designate work areas or for any other use where a spherical shape would be appropriate. The clipping volume is a box that you can place anywhere inside a model just like the other volume annotation box shapes like scaffold and box.

scaffold. reload and usage as active clipping volumes. page 374 • Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box. However. multiple different clipping volume annotations may be defined and saved in the database for later recall. Field welds may be identified and marked for tracking and testing purposes. edit. page 386 • Place a Volume Annotation. Temporary items like construction scaffolds and construction parking lots may be placed in the model for construction work planning. and sphere volume annotations.Using Annotations: An Overview You can only have one clipping volume loaded and active at a time. Related Topics • Edit a Volume Annotation. Special security areas. Box and weld are just different categories for scaffold (box) and cylinder (weld) types. work areas or construction lay down yards may also be identified using volume annotations. Note • To use this functionality. page 366 364 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . delete and manage different kinds of volume annotations and use them in different ways appropriate to their application. you must first install the Construction module. You can use volume annotations to represent both temporary and permanent areas or objects in the model. The types allow you to place. page 382 • Load and Display a Clipping Volume. The following examples show cylinder.

Notes • Use the Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit command to set the current volume annotation type. page 369 • Edit a Volume Annotation. you must first install the Construction module. To create a new volume annotation after editing an existing volume annotation. page 386 Place Volume Annotation Command Tools > Volume Annotation > Place Allows you to place a new volume annotation. page 375 • Load and Display a Clipping Volume. Related Topics • Create a New Volume Annotation Category. page 369 • Delete a Single Volume Annotation. regardless of the program that created them. page 386 • Place a Volume Annotation. page 380 • Edit a Volume Annotation. you must first install the Construction module. page 380 • Create a New Volume Annotation Category. click Clear first. The Tools > Volume Annotation > Display command controls only annotations created by the Volume Annotation command. page 374 • Find a Volume Annotation. page 383 • Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category. page 369 • Load and Display a Clipping Volume. page 366 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 365 . • • Related Topics • Adjust a Volume Annotation. To use this functionality. The Annotations command on the View > Display menu is a global toggle. page 374 • Find a Volume Annotation. Note • To use this functionality.Using Annotations: An Overview Display Volume Annotations Command Tools > Volume Annotation > Display Starts or stops the display of volume annotations. It controls the display of all annotations. page 369 • Import Volume Annotations.

but also using the Plan and Elevation views provides more visual feedback and extra locate options. The exception to this rule is cylinders. and orientation of that object can determine the volume annotation's position. and view manipulation controls remain available. dimensions. Click the object with which you want to associate the annotation. SmartPlant Review disables the interactive mouse drag motion and accelerator key commands. 2. If you do not select an object. If you selected an object. and orientation. the position of the annotation defaults to the center point of the Main view. for example. Because of this. toolbar commands. If you do not select an object. the command will be Place Scaffold. SmartPlant Review copies all of the attributes of the selected volume to the new volume.Using Annotations: An Overview Place a Volume Annotation 1. if the last volume annotation that you placed was a scaffold. • You may also find it useful to manipulate the Main view throughout the volume annotation placement. The Common Views toolbar can be particularly helpful. You can use only the Main view for placing volume annotations. • 366 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . the orientation defaults to the orientation of the Main view. 3. • • • If you select a volume as the object with which you want to associate the annotation. but all menu commands. • Tips • If you want to place the volume annotation in space. Tips • The specific Place command depends on the last volume annotation type that you placed. press ESC to not locate an object. you should set up the Main view to the appropriate orientation before you place cylindrical volume annotations. click to accept the highlighted object. If you select an object. For cylinders. For example. the position. the orientation defaults to none. dimensions. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Place. Different view orientations can be beneficial for different steps.

select the point that you want to function as the center point of the sphere. SmartPlant Review positions the volume at the intersection of the bore-sight line and the cursor position. Press ESC to complete the placement process with the current default volume position. SmartPlant Review positions the volume at the surface point of the object that you selected. weld. Determine the size of the volume. and orientation. For cylinder. Tips • For box. This radius is at the current model view depth. Select the first point of the volume. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 367 . This defines the height. SmartPlant Review places this point at the current model view depth. width. select an object to position the first corner point of the box volume on the surface point of the object.Using Annotations: An Overview 4. and sphere volume types. select the position of the second corner of the box volume to the current cursor location at the current model view depth. Double right-click in one view (for example. and clipping volume types. • Tips • For box. and clipping volume types. select the position of the radius for the cylinder or sphere. scaffolding. • • Right click to back up one step in the placement process. For cylinder and weld volume types. Plan view) and then click on the bore-site line in an orthogonal view (for example Elevation). 5. Notes • • To indicate placements. If there are multiple objects under your cursor. For sphere volume types. select the point that you want to function as the center of the cylinder. you can do any of the following: • Double-click to locate a surface point on an object. dimensions. Click again to accept the object and its surface point. and depth dimensions of the volume. scaffolding. click to cycle through the available options.

increase the stroking tolerance for the view. the Volume Annotation dialog box will automatically display if the Automatically edit new volume check box on the Volume Annotation Dimensions and Options tab is turned on. For box volumes. width. you must first install the Construction module. If necessary. • 7. 6. click Clear first. place a point to determine the orientation and length of the volume. • • • Related Topics • Adjust Volume Annotation Command. If you are placing cylinder or weld volume types. The current model view depth for the cursor is determined by the volume position. If cylinder volume annotations display as triangles. and height. page 384 • Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box. If this option is turned off. To use this functionality. page 375 • Edit Categories Dialog Box. these dimensions represent depth. page 372 • Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box. page 370 • Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box. If you are creating a new volume. these dimensions represent the radius. Notes • To create a new volume annotation after editing an existing volume annotation. The volume size for the current cursor location displays in the status bar. page 382 • Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview. you can use the Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit command to the volume annotation.Using Annotations: An Overview Notes • A white wireframe representation of the volume tracks the current size. page 363 368 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . select any yellow highlighted part of the volume glyph to enter the adjustment mode. For cylinder or sphere volumes.

2. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit. Note • To use this functionality. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit. Click the Definition tab. Click the Definition tab. page 372 • Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box.Using Annotations: An Overview Create a New Volume Annotation Category 1. Type a name for the new category. Related Topics • Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box). 3. Note • To use this functionality. Related Topics • Edit Categories Dialog Box. 4. Click Edit. Click Add. Click Find. you must first install the Construction module. 4. Tip • SmartPlant Review fits the volume annotation in the Main view. page 382 • Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview. page 372 • Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box. 3. 5. page 363 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 369 . page 382 • Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview. Select the volume annotation that you want to find from the list. 2. page 363 Find a Volume Annotation 1. page 371 • Edit Categories Dialog Box. you must first install the Construction module.

Volume annotations can be of three basic geometric types: boxes. and create volume annotations. page 365 370 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Note • To use this functionality. cylinders. page 370 • Find a Volume Annotation. The Volume Annotation data does not go back to the PDS database or any other software. you must first install the Construction module. page 369 • Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category. Temporary items like construction scaffolds and construction parking lots can be placed in the model for construction work planning. you must first install the Construction module. Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box Allows you to review. and create volume annotations. page 386 • Place a Volume Annotation. The original project files are not modified. page 380 • Delete All Volume Annotations by Type. page 366 • Place Volume Annotation Command. page 381 • Edit a Volume Annotation. page 375 • Create a New Volume Annotation Category. page 374 • Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box. Special security areas.Using Annotations: An Overview Edit Volume Annotations Command Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit Displays the Edit Volume Annotations dialog box. edit. page 380 • Adjust Volume Annotation Command. work areas or construction lay down yards also can be identified using volume annotations. or spheres. Related Topics • Adjust a Volume Annotation. Note • To use this functionality. edit. Three additional special types are also provided: scaffolds (boxes). page 375 • Load and Display a Clipping Volume. which allows you to review. field welds (cylinders) and clipping volumes (boxes). Field welds can be identified and marked for tracking and testing purposes. page 369 • Delete a Single Volume Annotation. The volume annotations are saved in the SmartPlant Review project database. Volume annotations can be used to represent temporary and permanent areas or objects in the model.

Edit .Places the volume annotation in the project.Displays the Edit Categories dialog box so that you can add to or delete from the list of available categories. and Category fields. Place .Removes all volume annotations from the project.Using Annotations: An Overview Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box) Defines the volume annotation. Delete . You can sort the list by one of the categories by clicking that category heading. Name . Status .Displays the category associated with the volume annotation.Displays all the volume annotations of the selected type currently defined in the project. Clear .Displays the name of the volume annotation. Type . Delete All . Status. Description.Loads a clipping volume for the selected volume annotation. Find . SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 371 .Displays the status associated with the volume annotation. Clip Volume .Removes the selected volume annotation from the project.Removes any text from the Name. Description . Volumes . Category .Fits and displays the selected volume annotation in the Main window.Displays the description associated with the volume annotation.Allows you to pick one of the volume annotation types.

Style Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box) Defines the look of the volume annotation.Specifies a dashed line for the wireframe. Transparent when shaded . New Name . Dot .Displays the name of the active volume annotation. Volume name .Sets the shaded volume annotation to be transparent so that you can see the objects within the volume.Specifies the name for the new volume annotation category that you want to add.Displays the volume annotation in the project. Width .Specifies a dot-dash line for the wireframe.Specifies a dotted line for the wireframe. Dot-dash . 372 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Using Annotations: An Overview Edit Categories Dialog Box Allows you to add or remove volume annotation categories. Shaded . Solid .Specifies a solid line for the wireframe. Inactivate . Add .Includes the new category name in the list of available categories. On .Shades the volume annotation.Provides a list of available category names.Specifies the width of the lines for the wireframe. Categories Names .Removes the selected category name from the list. and marks that category name as inactive in the project database. Dash .

East . and placement options for the volume annotation.Displays the default volume annotation file number.Specifies the upper range of levels. Dimensions and Options Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box) Defines the look of the size. Volume name . Elevation . Color index from 0 to .Using Annotations: An Overview Color . Edit . The level index can be from 1 to 63. location.Displays the color associated with the volume annotation. Level index from 1 to .Displays the distance from the project origin in the East (X) direction.Specifies the upper range of colors. When you change the color of a volume annotation. The color index can be from 0 to 255 Note • If you change the color of a volume annotation on a given level and color.Displays the distance from the project origin in the North (Y) direction.Displays the distance from the project origin in the Elevation (Z) direction. select the level and color for the volume annotation first. North . SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 373 . you will change the color of all the volume annotations and optional lights that are assigned to that level and color.Displays the Color dialog box from which you can select a color to associate with the volume annotation.Displays the name of the active volume annotation. File number .

3. page 372 • Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box.Automatically opens the Volume Annotation dialog box when you place a new volume annotation. Depth .Displays the radius of the volume annotation.Displays the master unit associated with the volume annotation. Select the volume annotation that you want to change from the list. page 370 374 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Displays the width (dimension in the X direction) of the volume annotation.Displays the length of the volume annotation. Radius . Click Apply. Place with dialog dimensions . The value in this field depends on whether the Metric units option is turned off or on. Click the Definition tab. Units . Width . Height . Related Topics • Edit Categories Dialog Box. you must first install the Construction module. Length . 4. 2.Using Annotations: An Overview Metric units .Displays the height (dimension in the Z direction) of the volume annotation.Displays the depth (dimension in the Y direction) of the volume annotation.Specifies the unit type for the volume annotation. Note • To use this functionality. the units are English. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit. Edit a Volume Annotation 1. 5. Make the changes to meet your needs.Places new volume annotations using the dimensions on this dialog box rather than calculating dimensions based on data points that you place in the project. If this option is turned off. Automatically edit new volume .

If the Place with dialog dimensions options on the Dimensions and Options tab of the Volume Annotation dialog box is turned on. Click the Definition tab. Notes • SmartPlant Review marks the category inactive in the database but does not be deleted from the database. 4. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 375 . you must first install the Construction module. or you can select a volume in the model and adjust it. page 372 • Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box. dimensions. page 382 • Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview. you must first install the Construction module. You can right click to back up to the last placement step for the volume or to adjust a volume using the following steps. You can adjust the volume at the end of the placement operation. page 363 Adjust Volume Annotation Command Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust Allows you to change the physical location.Using Annotations: An Overview Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category 1. 3. Other records may still be using the inactivated category and require the category record be maintained in the database. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit. 5. Click Inactivate. 2. Select the category that you want to inactivate from the list. or orientation of the selected volume annotation. • Related Topics • Edit Categories Dialog Box. Click Edit. Notes • • To use this functionality. then you can right click to set the volume to the default dimensions. Pres ESC to cancel any placements or adjustments done during the command. To use this functionality.

For cylinder and weld types. click to cycle through the available options and right click when the one that you want to use highlights. The current volume point will be positioned at the surface point of the selected object. the Main view should be in a Top orientation. to locate to the same elevation. Select the starting point. If the Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Lock Elevation command option is on. select any yellow highlighted face of the volume glyph to position the center point of the sphere volume. The model coordinate for the current mouse position is displayed in the status bar N. Double-right-click at the location in one view (for example. Elevation). select the bore-sight line in an orthogonal view (for example. Thus. For sphere types. Press ESC to either complete the placement process when placing a volume or to cancel all adjustments so far when in the Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust command. The current volume point will be positioned precisely at the intersection of the bore-sight line and the cursor position. select any yellow highlighted edge of the volume glyph to position the anchor point of the box volume. • • 2. Double-click to locate an object and its surface point. box and clipping volume types. Plan). • For scaffold. • • • 376 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . select any yellow highlighted straight edge of the volume glyph to position the start center point of the cylinder volume. Right click to back up to the last placement step. The current model view depth for the left mouse click is determined by the volume position. If there are multiple objects under the cursor.Using Annotations: An Overview Position You can adjust the position of a volume using the following steps: 1. Then. E and El panes. Click to place the current volume point at the current model view depth. Click again to accept the selected object and its surface point. then the elevation of the volume cannot be changed using a single click. Do one of the following: • • • • • Notes • A white wire frame representational glyph of the volume will track the current position.

SmartPlant Review places this point at the current model view depth. Right click to cancel the adjustment in progress while staying in the adjustment selection mode. these panes represent the length dimension. The current model view depth for the left mouse click is determined by the center of the current face position. then it may be temporary un-oriented (un-rotated) during the face adjustment process. If you cannot select the face that you want to adjust because it is behind another face. The face adjustment is automatically prevented from allowing a dimension of zero by either snapping back to the starting dimensions or adjusting the opposite face to compensate. • • • • Notes • A white wire frame representational glyph of the volume will track the current face adjustment. select the bore-sight line in an orthogonal view (for example.Using Annotations: An Overview Face You can adjust a face of a scaffold. cylinder and weld volume types using the following steps: 1. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 377 • • • • • . Thus. Double right-click at the location in one view (for example. For box volumes. If the cylinder volume has been reoriented (rotated). Plan). The selected face will highlight in red. box. 2. The sizing for the current mouse position is displayed in the status bar N. The current volume face will be positioned relative to the surface point of the selected object. Double-click to locate an object and its surface point. Do one of the following: • Select the new position for the current face. E and El information panes. Elevation). these panes represent the depth. For cylinder volumes. Select any yellow highlighted face of the volume glyph to select that face for adjustment. width. If there are multiple objects under the cursor. clipping volume. and height dimensions. The current volume face will be positioned relative to the intersection of the bore-sight line and the mouse position. Press ESC key to either complete the placement process when placing a volume or to cancel all adjustments so far when in the Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust command. Then. simply orient the view so the correct face is in front. the Main view should be in a Top orientation. to locate to the same elevation. Click again to accept the selected object and its surface point. click to cycle through the available options and right click when the one that you want to use highlights.

Double right-click at the location in one view (for example. Double-click to locate an object and its surface point. Press ESC to either complete the placement process when placing a volume or to cancel all adjustments so far when in the Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust command • • • • Notes • A white wire frame representational glyph of the volume will track the current sizing.Using Annotations: An Overview Radius You can adjust the radius of the cylinder. the Main view should be in a Top orientation. Then. select the bore-sight line in an orthogonal view (for example. The volume will be sized to the surface point of the selected object. The cross braces will highlight in red. click to cycle through the available options and right click when the one that you want to use highlights. The radius adjustment is automatically prevented from allowing a radius of zero by snapping back to the starting radius. Elevation). The current model view depth for the left mouse click is determined by the volume position. weld and sphere volume types using the following steps: 1. Plan). 2. The volume will be sized precisely to the intersection of the bore-sight line and the mouse position. E and El information panes. If there are multiple objects under the cursor. Click again to accept the selected object and its surface point. Select any yellow highlighted face cross brace of the volume glyph to select the radius value for adjustment. to locate to the same elevation. The radius for the current cursor position is displayed in the status bar N. Do one of the following: • Click to position the radius of the cylinder or sphere volume relative to the current cursor position at the current model view depth. • • • 378 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Right click to cancel the adjustment in progress while staying in the adjustment selection mode. Thus.

The current axis of orientation will orient relative to the surface point of the selected object. The blue axis allows the volume to be rotated around the model's Z (or Elevation) axis. The green axis allows the volume to be rotated around the model's Y (or North) axis. • Right click to cancel the adjustment in progress while staying in the adjustment selection mode. Then. The current model view depth for the click is determined by the center of the volume. and Side). 2. • Press ESC to either complete the placement process when placing a volume or to cancel all adjustments so far when in the Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust command. The red axis allows the volume to be rotated around the model's X (or East) axis. Front.Using Annotations: An Overview Orientation You adjust the orientation (rotation) of the scaffold. the Front view when rotating about the Y axis. • Double-click to locate an object and its surface point. Because orientation is around the model axes. • Double right-click at the location in one view (for example. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 379 . box. The current axis of orientation will orient relative to the intersection of the bore-sight line and the mouse position. All rotation is about the current center point of the volume. Elevation). For example. right click to the last placement step. select the bore-sight line in an orthogonal view (for example. Notes • • • • • • A white wire frame representational glyph of the volume will track the current volume orientation. clipping volume. click to cycle through the available options and right click when the one that you want to use highlights. a view orientation that is perpendicular to the axis of rotation is best suited for visual feedback. Select any yellow highlighted axis of the volume glyph to select the corresponding model axis about which to orientate the volume. Do one of the following: Click to orient the current axis of orientation relative to the current cursor position at the current model view depth. cylinder and weld volume types using the following steps: 1. The selected axis will highlight in yellow. and the Right view when rotating about the X axis. Click again to accept the selected object and its surface point. F and S information panes (Plan. the Top view when rotating about the Z axis. If there are multiple objects under the cursor. Plan). The orientation angles for the current cursor position are displayed in the status bar P. To reset the orientation to an un-oriented position.

you must first install the Construction module. Click Delete. 3. 2. Select any yellow highlighted part of the volume glyph to enter the adjustment mode. page 372 • Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box. Related Topics • Delete a Single Volume Annotation. Note • To use this functionality. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust. Related Topics • Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box).Using Annotations: An Overview Adjust a Volume Annotation 1. Related Topics • Edit Categories Dialog Box. see Adjust Volume Annotation Command. page 381 • Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category. page 372 • Style Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box). Select the volume annotation that you want to change. 2. page 370 Delete Volume Annotation Command Tools > Volume Annotation > Delete Deletes the selected volume annotation from the current project. page 371 • Edit Categories Dialog Box. page 375 Delete a Single Volume Annotation 1. Select the volume annotation that you want to delete from the list. Note • To use this functionality. Click to accept the highlighted volume. page 375. you must first install the Construction module. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit. 4. 4. 3. Click the Definition tab. Note • To use this functionality. you must first install the Construction module. For more information. page 372 380 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 380 • Delete All Volume Annotations by Type.

Related Topics • Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box).Using Annotations: An Overview Delete All Volume Annotations Command Tools > Volume Annotation > Delete All Deletes all volume annotations from the current project. To use this functionality. page 372 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 381 . page 369 Delete All Volume Annotations by Type 1. 3. page 371 • Edit Categories Dialog Box. 2. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit. page 380 • Find a Volume Annotation. Note • To use this functionality. you must first install the Construction module. you must first install the Construction module. Related Topics • Delete a Single Volume Annotation. 4. Select the category of annotation that you want to delete from the list. Click the Definition tab. Click Delete All.

• Related Topics • Import Volume Annotations. page 383 Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box Allows you to import volume annotations from other project databases. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. Therefore. File name . it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data.Imports the selected volume annotations without closing the dialog box. 382 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Import .Selects all of the names in the list.Using Annotations: An Overview Import Volume Annotations Command File > Import > Volume Annotations Imports volume annotations from other project databases. Notes • You can use the Select All button to select all the volume annotation sets in the file for importing. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. Clear All .Allows you to navigate to a file or folder. Select All .Specifies the name of the project database from which you want to import volume annotations.Selects none of the names in the list. Browse .

Click Import. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. page 372 • Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box. Click File > Import > Volume Annotations. you must first install the Construction module. page 363 Export Volume Annotations Command File > Export > Volume Annotations Exports volume annotations to another project database. Notes • You can use the Select All button to select all the volume annotation sets in the file for exporting. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. Select the names of the volume annotations you want to import. 3. 2. • • Related Topics • Edit Categories Dialog Box. • Related Topics • Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box.Using Annotations: An Overview Import Volume Annotations 1. page 384 • Export Volume Annotations. Therefore. Notes • Click the Select All button to select all the volume annotations in the file for importing. page 382 • Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. Click Close. Therefore. page 384 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 383 . 4. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. To use this functionality. Type a File name or click Browse to locate the project file containing the volume annotations you want to import. 5.

SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. • • 384 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data.Using Annotations: An Overview Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box Allows you to export volume annotations to other project databases.Exports the selected volume annotations without closing the dialog box. Clear All . Therefore.Specifies the name of the project database to which you want to export volume annotations. Select All . Click File > Export > Volume Annotations. Export Volume Annotations 1. Browse . File name . SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases.Selects none of the names in the list. Export . Notes • You can use the Select All button to select all the volume annotations in the file for exporting.Selects all of the names in the list. 3. Type a File name or click Browse to locate the file. 2.Allows you to navigate to a file or folder. To use this functionality. you must first install the Construction module. Click each Name to select.

page 366 • Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview. When off. see Load and Display a Clipping Volume. the display shows only the objects inside the clipping volume. You must have a clipping volume loaded before this command is available. the entire model is visible. page 363 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 385 . The following snapshots illustrate how this command affects the model display. page 369 • Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category. When on. page 386 • Place a Volume Annotation. Clipping volume off: Clipping volume off. but shown: Clipping volume activated: Related Topics • Edit a Volume Annotation. For more information. page 375 • Load and Display a Clipping Volume.Using Annotations: An Overview Activate Clipping Volume Command Tools > Volume Annotation > Activate Clipping Volume Toggles the display of a loaded clipping volume. page 374 • Find a Volume Annotation. page 386.

Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit. Notes • Clipping volumes only work in shaded and the wireframe modes. 2. Click the Definition tab. Set the Type to clipping volume. Click Clip Volume.Using Annotations: An Overview Load and Display a Clipping Volume 1. page 382 • Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview. 3. Outline and raytracing do not work with clipping volumes. 4. you must first install the Construction module. page 371 • Edit Categories Dialog Box. To use this functionality. To turn the clipping volume on and off. page 372 • Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box. • • Related Topics • Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box). page 363 386 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . you can click the Activate Clipping Volume button or click View > Advanced > Activate Clipping Volume.

see About the External Database. If your project is already pointing to an external database. edit. The Get External Data feature is similar to Tools > Data Annotation. text files. page 388 • Attaching External Data: An Overview. page 388 • Attaching External Data: An Overview. • Related Topics • About the External Database. page 388. this command shows any updates made to the database by other users in the project since you opened your session. You can add. SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft Jet database engine to store and manage the associations between SmartPlant Review data and the external data. associated Get External Data applications result in entries on the Get External Data menu. The Get External Data commands allow you to create an attachment by associating objects in a project to external information based on PDS label data. page 395 Open Database Command Tools > Get External Data > Open Database Allows you to open or create an external database. Any changes that you make are written to the database file for your project. However. page 387 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box. including documents. Related Topics • About the External Database. Caution • Attaching a file to an attribute value of one element will automatically attach the file to every element with the same attribute value. and animation. or delete these menu entries. Deleting a file that is attached to the attribute value of one element will automatically delete that attachment from every element with the same attribute value. sounds. page 387 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 387 . unlike data annotations that display icons in the Main view. For more information. spreadsheets. MicroStation files.Using Annotations: An Overview Attaching External Data: An Overview SmartPlant Review can display virtually any data attached to an object. page 391 • Edit Types Dialog Box. which allows you to attach data to objects in the model.

Use the Edit Attachments dialog box to add entries to this table. There is a 50 character maximum limit for this field. You must name these tables exactly as shown. The ExecuteStr column in this table uniquely associates these types with the program.Specifies the name and. the location of the executables for each type of data in the FileName column of this table. These program names populate the • • CriteriaList MenuList 388 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . the column names can be changed.txt in the project folder and setting the second line to the path and filename of the database. MenuList.Contains the attributes names.exe. Attribute names must be no longer than 50 characters. FileName . ExecuteStr .Contains a unique number that links the attribute names in the Criteria column of this table to the attribute values in the DataKey column of the DataTable.Using Annotations: An Overview About the External Database The Get External Data functionality queries tables in a Microsoft Access database (. The table must contain the following two columns: ID . These names populate the Match Criteria column on the Edit Attachments dialog box.bat). you can force the software to look for the database by creating a text file named GetData. Changes to the column names will be reflected in the column header names for the Edit Attachments and Edit Types dialogs boxes. and DataTable. .mdb file extension) to manage the files and their associated applications that display as menu entries in the Get External Data menu. Use the Edit Types dialog box to add or edit entries in this table.com. optionally. The table must contain the following four columns: DataType . but must remain in the order specified below. . These types populate the Type column in the Edit Attachment dialog box and appear as entries in the Get External Data popup menu. The path can be a UNC path. See the Microsoft Access User's Guide for details on using the database software.Specifies the type of data that is externally attached to an attribute value. ExecuteStr can contain any executable file type (for example. For each of these tables. If the external database is not recognized by the software. Criteria . Important • Your external database must contain the following three tables: CriteriaList.Contains a unique number that links the FileName column of this table with the FileName column of the DataTable. .

These values populate the Match Criteria column on the Edit Attachments dialog box.Contains the attribute values that have external data attached to them. If ExecuteStr specifies an executable (such as .com). Criteria . DataKey . which finds the association for the extension of FileName in the registry and launches the Open command for that file association. For example: if ExecuteStr contained Default and FileName contained a .Contains a unique number that links the FileName column in this table with the FileName column (containing the data type) of the MenuList table. Project folder 2. Directory . . If the path to the program is not specified. the text file would be opened using Notepad because the registry entry ". DataType . SmartPlant Review calls ShellExecute. These external data files names populate the Filename column on the Edit Attachments dialog box and display on the Get External Data popup menu.Contains a unique number used to index the entries in this table. that executable is launched with FileName as its argument.exe as the executable. All of the paths set in the Path environment variable DefaultDir . Windows folder 4. the software searches using the following sequence: 1.Contains a unique number that links the attribute values in the DataKey column in this table with the attribute names in the Criteria column of the CriteriaList table.txt" is associated with the registry entry "txtfile" that has a shell open command specifying notepad. Current folder 3. This field has a 255 character limit.txt file. or . Windows System folder 5.Specifies the name of the external data file and serves as the argument to the program specified in the ExecuteStr column in the MenuList table. DataTable Use the Edit Attachments dialog box to add or edit entries in this table.exe.bat. The table must contain the following six columns: Id .Using Annotations: An Overview Executable column on the Edit Type dialog box. If ExecuteStr is set to Default (which is an empty string) or does not point to a valid executable.Specifies the location that Get External Data first SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 389 . FileName .(optional) Specifies the folder in which to search for the external data file if there is no folder specified in the Directory column in the Data Table.

Tracks the version of the database schema. the current working folder is used for the search.Tracks the date of the database schema. Related Topics • Edit Attachments Dialog Box. then Get External Data searches the specified folder for that external file's data type in the DefaultDir column in the MenuList table. page 391 • Edit Types Dialog Box.Using Annotations: An Overview searches for the external data file specified in FileName. a message will appear. schema_upgrade_date . If that text box is also empty. It must contain the following columns: schema_upgrade_version . If the file is still not found. page 395 390 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . upgrade_version This table cannot be edited through the SmartPlant Review user interface and should not be edited by the user. If Directory is empty.

edit. page 388 • Attaching External Data: An Overview. You can add or delete attachments using the commands on this dialog box. such as Microsoft Word. Excel. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 391 . ASCII text files from Notepad or from the SmartPlant Review text window. and PowerPoint files. MicroStation files. Caution • Attaching a file to an attribute value of one element will automatically attach the file to every element with the same attribute value. the Edit Attachments button is disabled. or remove files associated with the selected object in the open project. You can attach virtually any file type to an object in the project.Using Annotations: An Overview Edit Attachments Command Tools > Get External Data > Edit Attachments Displays the Edit Attachments dialog box. Deleting a file that is attached to the attribute value of one element will automatically delete that attachment from every element with the same attribute value. The file associations are saved to the Microsoft Access Get External Data database file for the project. Executables and their associated files must exist before you attach them. sound. Related Topics • About the External Database. You can also associate file types with executable programs. and Video Engine files. If you select an object in the project that contains no label data and no attached data. Changes made using this command also alter the entries on the Get External Data menu. which allows you to add. animation. page 387 Edit Attachments Dialog Box Allows you to view a list of the files that are attached to the selected object in the project.

com). page 387 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box.bat.Allows you to add text to the file name to act as an argument.Displays the name of the file attached to the selected object.exe. Related Topics • About the External Database. Argument(s) . page 391 392 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 391 • Edit Types Dialog Box. If the type selection on the Edit Attachments dialog box is Default. page 387 • Edit Attachments Command. Delete . allowing you to select a file name or argument for the new attachment. but does not delete the external data file.Displays the Edit Types dialog box. page 388 • Attaching External Data: An Overview.Allows you to add additional files to the selected object.Allows you to navigate to the file (or attachment) that you want to associate with the object. page 388 • Attaching External Data: An Overview.Removes the link from the attribute value to the external data file. the Edit Filename / Argument dialog box displays. . Edit Types . Press Escape to exit the Insert command at any time. Browse . Related Topics • About the External Database. After selecting the appropriate label data and entering a new or existing type. Double-click a name in the Filename column to to change the file name or arguments associated with an existing attachment type. page 395 Edit Filename / Argument Dialog Box Allows you to browse to the data file that you want to attach to the selected object in the project. the file attached must be an executable (. or .Using Annotations: An Overview Insert . Filename . which allows you to define the application the the Get External Data command uses to open files of the selected type.

Be sure the file that you select is of the same type that you specified in the preceding step. 2. select the label data attribute to which the external data will be attached.Using Annotations: An Overview Attach External Data to a Project 1. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 393 . 4. 5. Click Insert on the Edit Attachments dialog box. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Attachments. browse to the data file that you want to attach. 6. 3. On the Edit Filename / Argument dialog box. Select a graphic object in the model. From the Match Criteria list. From the Type list. select the file type for the attached data file.

page 388 • Attaching External Data: An Overview. then click OK. The Edit Attachments dialog box should now list the new attachment. Caution • Attaching a file to an attribute value of one element will automatically attach the file to every element with the same attribute value. page 387 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box. 8.jpg). • Related Topics • About the External Database. Pumps) will have the same file attached (in this example. The Tools > Get External Data menu should now show the new attachment type: All objects in your drawing that contain the label data attribute that you selected (for example.Using Annotations: An Overview 7. page 395 394 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 391 • Edit Types Dialog Box. Specify any arguments for the data file in the Arguments box. Richfield. Sequence) set to the same value (in this example. Click OK on the Edit Attachments dialog box. Deleting a file that is attached to the attribute value of one element will automatically delete that attachment from every element with the same attribute value.

select the default folder and then enter the new type. page 388 • Attaching External Data: An Overview. page 387 • Edit External Data Types. page 398 Edit Types Dialog Box Allows you to associate file types with executable programs.Allows you to create a new type. Delete .Removes the selected type from use in the model. Related Topics • About the External Database. You must click OK for the delete to be reflected in the database. Any links that were established between an object and its external data via this type will also be broken. You must click OK for the addition to be saved to the database. which allows you to define the application used to open files of a selected type when using the Get External Data command.Using Annotations: An Overview Edit Types Command Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types Displays the Edit Types dialog box. You can also use the Edit Types dialog box to delete associations. Insert . After selecting the executable from the Select Executable dialog box. You can exit the Insert command prior to completion by pressing Escape. You also can use this dialog box to delete associations. page 395 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 395 . page 387 • Edit Types Command. Related Topics • About the External Database. page 388 • Attaching External Data: An Overview.

Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types. Click the Insert button. 2.Using Annotations: An Overview Add External Data Types 1. 396 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

page 395 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 397 .Using Annotations: An Overview 3. Select an executable from the Select Executable dialog box. page 391 • Edit Types Dialog Box. Select a folder from the Default Directory dialog box. Note • The name of the new type cannot be the same as one of the existing types. 4. 5. Related Topics • Attach External Data to a Project. page 393 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box. Select an existing type or select (Edit) and create a new type.

5. 3. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types. Type a new Type name. 2.Using Annotations: An Overview Edit External Data Types 1. In this example the Type name Spreadsheet is changed to Tank. Click OK to accept the changes. The Tools > Get External Data menu should now show the new attachment Type name. Double-click an entry in the Type column to open the entry for editing. 4. 398 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

double-click an entry in the Executable column and select a new executable from the Select Executable dialog box. page 393 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box.Using Annotations: An Overview Tips • To change the executable associated with a type in the Edit Types dialog box. double-click an entry in the Default Directory column on the Edit Types dialog box and select a new folder from the Default Directory dialog box. To change the default folder associated with a particular type. page 391 • Edit Types Dialog Box. • Related Topics • Attach External Data to a Project. page 395 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 399 .

Using Annotations: An Overview 400 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

page 407 • Create Materials from Color Table. Related Topics • Assign Materials to Elements. or you can create your own materials interactively. stone. without having to render an actual image. normal and ambient reflectivity. page 408 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 401 . You also can apply textures to display sets. (For a detailed description of the material table file format see the SmartPlant Review DRAPI Programming with C++ Guide. These parameters are also saved in the material table. The Material Editor features an improved user interface and several new functions. metal. you can create photo-realistic renderings with color and surface characteristics that match the real-world materials of the finished product. In addition. surface characteristics. You can choose a pattern. For example. page 419 • Define Search Path for Material Files. such as transparency. glass. apply it to a material.dgn will have a material table file named xyz. The material table file is given the model filename with a . and texture mapping. pattern matching. patterns. page 421 • Unassign Materials. and refraction.mat. the model file xyz. The Material Editor command allows you to access the extensive set of material palette files provided with SmartPlant Review. As you make material assignments. The material table contains all the information about the colors. including diffuse and specular colors.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Assigning Material Properties: An Overview The Material Editor command allows you to assign material properties to model elements and set various rendering parameters. The Material Editor allows you to assign material definitions to your three dimensional model (such as wood. transmittance. and assign it to an element in the model. By assigning material properties to model elements. and plastic).) The Material Editor is also used to set various image rendering parameters. You can preview the effect of several material properties within Material Editor. and bump maps assigned to model elements. the Material Editor creates a material table file for your three dimensional model. you can preview the effect of pattern maps and bump maps.mat extension.

When you built the three dimensional model. Notes • • • • To use this functionality. If every part of the model is on one level and uses only one color. For more information.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Assign Materials Command Tools > Materials > Assign Materials Displays the Assign Material to Elements dialog box allowing you to assign materials in a palette file to elements in a model file. you must have used different levels and colors to distinguish between the different surfaces in the model.vue file to retain those new material assignments. see About the Default Material Palette. you can assign only one material definition to the entire model. identify the model elements by specifying the color and level numbers used in the model file. You can select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere. you also can select elements by choosing them interactively from the Main view window. SmartPlant Review uses the default material value for that surface. When you assign a material to a model surface. To quickly delete these material assignments. you must save a new . page 403.mat file of the project. page 39.mat file. page 407 402 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . see Create Materials Command. Material assignments are not stored in the project database. If you make new material assignments while running in a .mat file. you must install the Photo-Realism module. page 405 • Assign Materials to Elements. that material is applied to every model element that is on the same level and color as that element. For more information. You also can select model elements by choosing the model filename and identifying the level and color of the element. As you assign materials to the model. page 417 and Search Path Dialog Box. In the SmartPlant Review environment. The following conditions must be met to assign materials to a model: • The material definitions in palette files that you want to assign to the model must already be created and be in a folder in the search path for your project. delete the . but are kept in a . The project database contains references to the material assignments stored in the .vue file. If a material assignment is not made to a surface. • Related Topics • Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box.

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 403 . This hard-coded material has the look of non-reflective shiny plastic. if you edit the SPRDefault.pal file to set the default material properties for all of your projects.pal file. The graphic element's default color is always retained. rename it (or its default material) or remove it from the palette search path. Note • To use this functionality. if the SPRDefault. then its color will override the graphic element's default color. if you assign this default material to graphic elements. If you do not want to use this file.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview About the Default Material Palette Delivered in the SmartPlant Review folder when you install the Photo-Realism module. For more information. You can now have a common SPRDefault.pal file is not found in the current palette search path. are used for the default material. page 39.pal file.pal file in different project folders and each of those projects could have different default materials. It also can be edited using a text editor outside SmartPlant Review or by using the Edit Materials functionality.pal file to your project folder or to a folder in your palette search path before you can use the SPRDefault. Because the SmartPlant Review folder is not included in your default palette search path. then those settings. then the internally hard-coded default material is used for elements without assigned materials. you should not expect to see all the graphic elements without assigned materials to immediately update.pal file contains a material definition named default. If you do not have the Photo-Realism module. You also can place a different SPRDefault. just like when any other material is assigned. you must copy or move the SPRDefault.pal file and its default material during a SmartPlant Review session. The default material in this file can be used to specify the default material properties of elements without assigned materials. Thus. you must install the Photo-Realism module. The delivered default material has the look of non-reflective shiny plastic. The default material for graphic elements without assigned materials is set only when the project is opened or when you remove a material for that element. the SPRDefault. except for color. If you have the SPRDefault. regardless of the color specified in the default material in the SPRDefault.pal file in the current palette search path and it contains a material named default. This palette file is a standard palette file and can be used as such. You must either reopen the project or manually remove materials for each graphic element. or if this file does not contain a material named default. see Search Path Dialog Box. However.

Using this SPRDefault.vue file and change any material settings during that session. This means that raytraces of elements with default materials assigned to them will look like a "smoother" version of a fully shaded view.vue file in order to retain the new settings. • • • Related Topics • Assign Materials to Elements. you will receive a message stating No material assignment exists for this element if you pick a graphic element without an assigned material and then try to view that element's material assignment in the Assign Materials to Elements dialog box. you must create a new . If you open a .Assigning Material Properties: An Overview The Photo-Realism Raytracer uses the same default material properties as the shaded view.vue file. then you must manually remove the default material assignment from the graphic elements that you want to use the modified default material so that those elements' material assignments will be updated before the new .pal file is not found while setting the default material. For example. You will not be prompted to modify your palette search path if the SPRDefault. The default material is not an assigned material.vue file is created.pal file mechanism may add a very slight overhead to the total project load time. If you change the default material definition. Notes • You cannot change the material assignments in an existing . page 410 404 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 407 • Edit Materials Command.

in the SmartPlant Review environment. Preview . Also. Select the folder that contains the palette files that you want to use. If you make new material assignments while running in a . • Palette File .mat file. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 405 .vue file to retain those new material assignments.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box Allows you to select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics.Displays the names of the material definitions in the selected palette file. you must install the Photo-Realism module.Shows the display properties of the active material definition as it is mapped onto a spherical surface. The project database contains references to the material assignments stored in the . but are kept in a . Name .vue file. You also can select model elements by choosing the model filename and identifying the level and color of the element.Displays the name of the active palette file. To quickly delete these material assignments.mat file. Material assignments are not stored in the project database.mat file. you can select elements by choosing them interactively from the Main view window.Determines the pathname to the folder containing the palette files. Select this field and type the name of an existing palette file or select the list button at the end of the field. you must save a new . Select a material to make it the active material. Browse . Notes • • To use this functionality. delete the project's .

level. Pick . page 401 406 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . If an assignment does not exist for the selected file. Show .Unselects all levels. page 402 • Assign Materials to Elements. a message displays stating that there is no assignment.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Levels .Identifies an element by the level number (1-63) on which it was drawn.Hides the Assign Materials to Elements dialog box so that you can identify a model element in the Main view. Select All . and Preview update to display the assigned material definition.Identifies an element by the color number (0-255) at which it was drawn. colors. and color. Identify the model file to which the material definition will be assigned. level.Selects all levels. You must select both a level and color number to identify an element.Displays the material definition assigned to the file. colors. Colors. or files depending on which list is active. or files depending on which list is active. and color selected. Files . Colors . Material Name. After you select an element. page 407 • Assigning Material Properties: An Overview. Related Topics • Assign Materials Command. The Palette. the Levels.Displays a list of model files and folders. and Files information for the selected element displays in the dialog box. Clear All . You can then assign a material definition to that element. You must select both a level and color number to identify an element.

• Related Topics • Assign Materials Command.vue file. level (from the Levels list). To use this functionality. Click Tools > Materials > Assign Materials. use Clear All to clear all the file. Select the Pick command as you need it. Select the material definition that you want to assign. You can click the Select All button to select all the files. Click Apply to save an assignment without exiting the form. • 7. Notes • If you make new material assignments while running in a . Select one of each to identify the surface. 3. level. Click Palette File. 6. levels. Tip • A material table (. Repeat steps 1-5 to make additional assignments. you must install the Photo-Realism module. or color entries. page 402 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 407 . Tip You can identify more than one surface at a time by selecting more than one model file. or. and color combination.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Assign Materials to Elements 1. and color (from the Color list) of that surface. 2. Identify the surface to which you want to assign the material definition by selecting the model file (from the Files list). level.vue file to retain those new material assignments. 4.mat file) is created for each model file that you select. Select the name of the palette file from the list of available palettes. 5. you must save a new . or colors. if necessary.

Notes • • To use this functionality. Repeat these steps to unassign additional materials.mat file of the project. page 408 408 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Tip You can identify more than one surface at a time by selecting more than one model file. If you make new material assignments while running in a . level. Click Tools > Materials > Unassign.mat file. you also can select elements by choosing them interactively from the Main view window. you must save a new . The project database contains references to the material assignments stored in the .mat file. Related Topics • Unassign Materials Command. 3. if necessary. Select the name of the palette file from the list of available palettes. but are kept in a . • Notes • To use this functionality. You can select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere. To quickly delete these material assignments. In the SmartPlant Review environment.vue file to retain those new material assignments. delete the .Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Unassign Materials Command Tools > Materials > Unassign Displays the Unassign Materials dialog box.vue file. and color combination. page 408 Unassign Materials 1. you must install the Photo-Realism module. Click Apply to unassign a material without exiting the form. Material assignments are not stored in the project database. • Related Topics • Unassign Materials Dialog Box. you must install the Photo-Realism module. page 409 • Unassign Materials. You also can select model elements by choosing the model filename and identifying the level and color of the element. 2. allowing you to remove materials in a palette file from elements in a model file.

delete the project's . • Select assignments . levels. the information for the selected element displays in the dialog box. You can then unassign a material definition for that element. Related Topics • Assigning Material Properties: An Overview.Shows the display properties of the active material definition as it is mapped onto a spherical surface. Notes • • To use this functionality.vue file to retain those new material assignments.vue file. materials.Displays the palettes. After you select an element. page 401 • Unassign Materials Command. If you make new material assignments while running in a . page 408 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 409 . Pick object .mat file. Select a material to make it the active material. To quickly delete these material assignments. The project database contains references to the material assignments stored in the .mat file. but are kept in a . you must install the Photo-Realism module. page 408 • Unassign Materials. and color indices. and files of the assigned materials. level.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Unassign Materials Dialog Box Allows you to unassign materials currently assigned to elements by file. you must save a new . Material assignments are not stored in the project database.Hides the Unassign Materials dialog box so that you can identify a model element in the Main view. Preview . colors.mat file.

Related Topics • Assign Materials Command.pal extension. By saving material definitions in palette files. A material definition consists of all the material's display properties: colors and patterns. If you want to assign an existing material to your model. When you create new materials. If you delete or move materials that are used in a model. Palette files contain groupings of materials and are assigned a . page 402 • Edit Materials Dialog Box. You can then save the materials in palette files. you can mix colors. and select patterns and bump maps to create materials. To use this functionality. transmittance. ambient reflectance. finish. use the Tools > Materials > Assign Materials command instead. the software stores them in palette files. page 411 410 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . refraction. SmartPlant Review prompts you to provide folders to search in for the missing files when it opens the model.\review\sample\projects\example folder. you can use them again. and bump maps. you must install the Photo-Realism module. define surface characteristics.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Edit Materials Command Tools > Materials > Edit Creates and edits material definitions. as needed. on many different models.. Using the Edit Material dialog box. Several palette files are supplied with SmartPlant Review and can be found in the . diffuse and specular reflectance.

Copies the material from an object that you select in the model. Copy . see the Assign Materials Command. You also can select Browse to find and open an existing palette file.Allows you to navigate to a file or folder.Specifies the name of the active material definition. To use this functionality. If you want to assign an existing material to your model. Material name . page 402.Displays the name of the active palette file. Type the name of the file to create a new palette file.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Edit Materials Dialog Box Allows you to create and edit material definitions. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 411 . Browse . you must install the Photo-Realism module. Palette . or select one of the materials in the active palette. Type the name of the material to create a new material definition. the selected object's material surface characteristics are loaded and the material displays in the Preview. After you select an object.

Replaces the active material definition with the new values that you have defined. If you rename the material name. and 1 is a high polish.Sets the base color back to the default color. The specular property is the degree to which light reflects from the surface of the geometry of the model. Reflectivity . The diffuse color may be either a solid color or a bitmap file (rgb. allowing you to add the new material definition to the current palette. where 0 is a low polish.Deletes the active material from the active palette file. for example. Finish values range from 0-1.Displays the Color dialog box. scan). where 0 is black and 1 is 100% color saturation.Controls the intensity of the diffuse color of a material. Diffuse values range from 0-1. has a deep tan/orange diffuse color and a pale yellow specular highlight. and 1 is a high specular surface. Diffuse . This property determines how other surfaces in the model will be reflected in the material. A shiny green surface is rendered more realistically.Sets the specular color back to the default color. A high specular value and a low finish value results in a large glaring hot spot that is scattered all over the surface. Finish .Controls the amount of reflectivity that a material exhibits. such as felt. The intensity value is the degree to which the diffuse color or pattern contributes to the final look of the geometry. such as a cue ball. which is proportional to the surface finish. Base color Default .Controls the intensity of the specular features of the material. the finish determines whether it is scattered (a rough surface) or concentrated (a smooth surface). pattern. The finish of a material interacts directly with its specular characteristics. You also can create a new palette by typing a new palette name and then creating new material definitions in that palette. where 0 is a low specular surface. this button changes to an Add button. Delete . such as a tennis ball. which allows you to select a new base color. Edit . Specular . Specular values can range from 0-1. 412 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Controls the degree of polish or smoothness on an object's surface. Specular color Default . The specular color is the color of the glare. A highly diffuse intensity results in a high saturation of the diffuse color or pattern. Specular color is extremely important for the accurate rendering of metallic surfaces.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Replace/Add . when the specular color is tinted toward the diffuse green color. The specular property creates a hot spot or glare. Edit . Gold. When light is reflected off of a surface.Displays the Color dialog box. Specular color can only be a solid color. which allows you to select a new specular color. for example. A high specular value and a high finish value results in a bright concentrated hot spot on the surface. such as glass.

Use a high Reflection slider value to display more reflection on the object than the object's Base Color. The ambient reflectivity value can range from 0-1. As the reflectivity value of a material gets higher. For example.0.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview For example. and a high transmit intensity value (100). a clear drinking glass should have a white diffuse color. and a material has an ambient reflectivity value of 0. The total ambient light value of a surface is calculated by multiplying the ambient reflectivity value by the model ambient light setting. By setting the diffuse color intensity (saturation) lower. The ambient reflectivity of a material is the degree to which the ambient lighting in the overall model will be reflected by the surface of the material. for example. • • Ambient . if you wanted to create a bright. For example. model elements using that material will have an effective ambient lighting value of 10%.10.01). 50 (screen door transparency). where 0 is no reflectivity and 1 is a high reflectivity. The screen door range shades surfaces by omitting every other pixel. uniformly lit ceiling in a room. a very low diffuse intensity value (0. the object becomes more transparent and less opaque when transmittance is used. a pond of water. and less overall contrast in lighting. You can select values of 0 (0% transparent. Turn off the old patterns before applying reflection to objects on which patterns already are applied. A lower ambient light value causes the shadows that fall on the material to be dark. with a high contrast between the directly and indirectly lit areas. As you change the transmittance value of a material. or 100 (100% transparent. opaque).Controls the ambient reflectivity of a material. if the overall ambient light setting for the model is set to 1. Reflectivity values range from 0-1. Note • Remember that the diffuse color should be evaluated when you are using transparent and reflective surfaces. Use the following guidelines to use reflection mapping: • Create a pattern file for the reflection in a raster image editor. Transmittance . the background image behind the Preview becomes visible to illustrate the degree of transparency. Transmittance is the degree of transparency that a surface exhibits. This would be desirable. a mirror. Use a spherize filter (or equivalent) to distort the image slightly. where 0 is no ambient light reflected and 1 is full ambient reflectivity.Controls the transmittance of a material. environment clouds begin to appear in the Preview to display the reflectivity. A high diffuse value can saturate the material with diffuse color and thus override most of the reflectivity or transparency. Use a low Reflection value to display more object Base Color than reflection. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 413 . A higher ambient light value results in a more uniformly lit surface. and highly polished metals are all highly reflective. fainter shadows. or invisible).

such as a soap bubble: the steeper the angle at which you view the surface. The lens of a pair of eyeglasses.Specifies the diffuse color between a solid and a pattern. for example. Related Topics • Assign Materials Command. page 402 • Assign Materials to Elements.0 still equals no refraction.0. would exhibit refraction. midrange values are a mix of both attributes.0. see Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box. For more information. scan). Activate if you want materials to cast shadows in a Phong-shaded mode.Specifies the bump map pattern file. For example. Bump Map . fresnel makes transparent objects more opaque on curved and angular surfaces. page 407 • Edit Materials Command. a Refraction value of 1. Preview . When a material is transparent and refraction is high. page 415. page 416. where 1. Refractive surfaces must also be transparent (have a high transmittance setting).Mixes the percentage of pattern and base color for a material. The effects of this command appear in the Preview. For example. the greater the reflection and opaqueness of the surface. page 410 414 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Values range from 0 (all color) to 1 (all pattern). When you select the bump map. due to refraction.Controls the angle of refraction on a material.Displays the material definition as it is mapped onto a spherical surface. The sphere updates as you modify the material's display properties. the image behind the Preview appears distorted to illustrate the degree of refraction. Fresnel .0 is high refraction.0-2. Use a value less than 1.Activates shadows. Pattern Weight .2 is good for light passing from air into water or glass. water has some refraction (1. Pattern .Activates fresnel characteristics.0 when the eye point is inside water or glass looking into air. The effects of this option appear in the Preview. Refraction values range from 1. The default value of 1. You can define Refraction as less than 1. The diffuse color may be either a solid color or a bitmap image file (rgb. When on. Shadows . You can edit a solid color or choose an image file for the diffuse color. when viewed from certain angles.0 is no refraction and 2.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Refraction . For more information.20) because it causes objects to appear distorted when they are immersed. Refraction is the bending of light as it passes through transparent surfaces. A straw in a clear glass of water also appears to bend. it appears in the Preview. pattern. see Adjust Pattern Dialog Box.

The software then applies the pattern to the surface at the specified scale. The pattern is placed at the specified offset.25 scales the pattern to 1/4 its size. Y Scale . X offset . A positive value rotates the pattern counterclockwise. Units . a value of . This offset is a percentage of the rgb raster file size.Specifies whether the background is visible or transparent. This prevents double gamma correction on the pattern so that it does not appear washed out when applied. A scale factor of .Specifies the angle to rotate the pattern. Transparent background . allowing four patterns to fit on the surface. A common usage is for adding foliage.Specifies a horizontal scale factor to apply to the pattern.5 equals a 50% offset.5 equals a 50% offset.bmp or .Specifies offset from the Y-axis. The effect of a transparent background is displayed in the Preview. You can base pattern size on the model working units so that patterns are not stretched or distorted to fit surfaces. (You also can have a negative (-) value.Allows you to choose Surface.Specifies the gamma correction for a pattern. (You also can have a negative (-) value. whereas a negative value rotates the pattern clockwise. A transparent background is useful for applying decals to surfaces. apply it to a material. You can choose a pattern. For example. Surface mode stretches the pattern to the extent of the element.Specifies offset from the X-axis. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 415 . The software then applies the pattern to the surface at the specified scale. This offset is a percentage of the rgb raster file size.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Adjust Pattern Dialog Box Defines the pattern you want to associate with an object. Browse . Angle .tif) because these types of files were saved with gamma correction.) X scale . and assign it to an element in the model. a value of .Defines the pattern that you want to associate with an object.Specifies whether or not to mirror the pattern about the Y-axis. For example. or Master Units for the pattern. SmartPlant Review also supports texture mapping. For example. This value is necessary in files saved in formats other than .Allows you to navigate to a file or folder.Specifies a vertical scale factor to apply to the pattern.) Y offset . a scale factor of two scales the image pattern to twice its size. Gamma . File name . .rgb (for example. Sub Units. The pattern is placed at the specified offset. Mirror Y .

Specifies a horizontal scale factor to apply to the bump map. page 410 416 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Defines the bump map that you want to associate with an object. The bump map is placed at the specified offset. For example. The software then applies the bump map at the specified scale. a value of . The software then applies the bump map to the surface at the specified scale. or Master Units for the bump map.Specifies offset from the Y-axis.Specifies whether or not to mirror the bump map about the Y-axis. File name . X offset . Y scale .Specifies the height at which to apply the bump map. Related Topics • Assign Materials Command. whereas a negative value rotates the bump map clockwise. A positive value rotates the bump map counterclockwise. Angle . (You also can have a negative (-) value.Allows you to navigate to a file or folder. (You also can have a negative (-) value. Mirror Y .) X scale . Inverted .Specifies a vertical scale factor to apply to the bump map.5 equals a 50% offset. Browse .Inverts the bump map display.Allow you to choose Surface.Specifies the angle to rotate the bump map. This offset is a percentage of the rgb raster file size. The bump map is placed at the specified offset. This offset is a percentage of the rgb raster file size.Specifies offset from the X-axis. page 402 • Assign Materials to Elements. For example. page 407 • Edit Materials Command. a value of .Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box Defines the bump map that you want to associate with an object. Units . Sub Units.) Y offset . Height .5 equals a 50% offset.

along with the material assignments (if any). page 410 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 417 . page 419 • Edit Materials Command.tbl). It offers a quick start to creating a palette and material table.dgn color table.mat) file is created for each model file that you select. you can attach a new color table to a . you must install the Photo-Realism module This command overwrites any existing material table. with material assignments based on the surfaces that you identified. and default values are given to the remaining display properties and rendering parameters. The colors in the . Note • • • To use this functionality. Identify the surfaces in the model to which you want to assign the IGDS or MicroStation color table. You also can edit the resulting palette through the Edit Materials command.pal) and material table (.tbl colors. the VLT color table saved in the database.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Create Materials Command Tools > Materials > Create Creates a palette (. once colors are assigned or a database is created.tbl table to start with.dgn file using the MicroStation Color Table dialog box or the CT= key-in command. The surfaces are specified by the color and level numbers in the model file. Related Topics • Create Materials from Color Table.mat) file from an existing IGDS or MicroStation color table (. To display similar colors in SmartPlant Review and MicroStation. However. The resulting RayTrace/QuickTrace image looks like plastic with the .tbl table are used in the material definition. A palette file is created with material definitions for each color in the IGDS or MicroStation color table. The Create Materials command is most useful if you have a standard . will override the . A material table (.

Clears all the current selections.mat) file from an existing IGDS or MicroStation color table (.mat) file.tbl extension.pal) and material table (.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Create Materials Dialog Box Allows you to create a palette (.Identifies a surface by the level number (1-63) on which it was drawn.Identifies a surface by the color number (0-255) at which it was drawn. Notes • • • To use this functionality. page 401 • Create Materials Command. Select Select All to select all the colors. Color . The colors in the . page 419 • Edit Materials Command. page 410 418 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Specifies the IGDS or MicroStation color table to convert. IGDS color table . Clear All . Files . and default values are given to the remaining display properties and rendering parameters. Select All .Displays a list of model files and folders. The resulting RayTrace/QuickTrace image looks like plastic with the .Allows you to navigate to a file or folder. you must install the Photo-Realism module. Most color table files have a .tbl colors. Select the model file for which to create the material table (. Levels . You can edit the resulting palette by using the Edit Materials command. levels. Related Topics • Assigning Material Properties: An Overview.tbl).tbl table are used in the material definition. A palette file is created with material definitions for each color in the IGDS or MicroStation color table. or colors. page 417 • Create Materials from Color Table.Selects all the files. Browse . Select Select All to select all the levels. This command overwrites any existing material table.

page 417 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 419 . or color entries. levels. You must select one of each to identify that surface. • Related Topics • Create Materials Command. A material table (. or colors. Tip • Identify multiple surfaces at once by selecting more than one model file. Notes • A palette file is created with material definitions for each color in the IGDS or MicroStation color table. and color of the surface. level. Identify the surface to which you want to assign the color table by selecting the model file.mat file) is created for each model file that you select. or. with material assignments based on the colors and levels that you select. level. Select the IGDS or MicroStation color table that you want to use. level.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Create Materials from Color Table 1. Clear All to clear all the file. and color. 2. Use Select All to select all the files.

and to re-order the list of folders. Move Up . The Search Path dialog box appears while SmartPlant Review is opening your project file for the first time if it cannot find.Moves the selected folder down one level in the search path list of folders. Delete . You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list. Move Down .Allows you to specify a folder containing the pattern or bump map file that you are assigning to the current object. Search Path Dialog Box Allows you to specify the paths to the palette. Add . 420 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . SmartPlant Review searches first for folders listed closer to the top. the patterns or bump maps assigned to the model. Browse . in the Search Path. palette. Search Path . and pattern files. Directory . allowing you to change or specify the location in which SmartPlant Review looks for bump map.Allows you to specify a different folder.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Edit Search Path Commands Tools > Materials > Edit Search Path Displays the Edit Search Path dialog box. You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.Removes the selected folder from the search path list of folders to use for searching for pattern or bump map files.Moves the selected folder up one level in the search path list of folders.Adds the current folder to the bottom of the search path list of folders to use for searching for pattern or bump map files.Displays the folders currently in the search path and allows you to add and remove folders. SmartPlant Review searches last for folders listed closer to the bottom. pattern. or bump map files associated with your project.

Click Move Up or Move Down to reorder the Folders list. 2. even if you have already added the parent folder to the Search Path Directories list. You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.Assigning Material Properties: An Overview Define Search Path for Material Files 1. Click Add. • Related Topics • Opening a Model File: An Overview. page 33 • Search Path. Click Browse to select the folder that you want to add to the Search Path. 3. Tips • SmartPlant Review searches last for folders listed closer to the bottom. You must add each folder individually. page 38 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 421 .

Assigning Material Properties: An Overview 422 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

high-quality images. After you assign materials to objects and place lights in the model. or an owner-operator might use visualization to study light placement in maintenance areas of a plant. and raytracing your model to create realistic. Related Topics • Global Lighting Settings Command. Such images are important to communicate and promote a clear understanding of a project. page 437 • Photo-Realism Settings Command. advanced rendering techniques can transform the model into photograph quality art. page 426 • Placing Lights: An Overview. SmartPlant Review uses a raytracing algorithm to build these images. so even very large models can be rendered quickly. EPCs might use in-depth visualizations to sell a final design to an owner-operator. The memoryefficient raytracer is multi-threaded to take advantage of all the available processors on the user's computer.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview SmartPlant Review's Photo-Realism module provides basic features for assigning materials to objects. page 446 • Raytrace Command. page 460 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 423 . For example. placing lighting.

SmartPlant Review's default sun is used in place of OpenGL lights: • • The Photo-Realism module is not installed. Notes • • • There are limitations to using OpenGL lights. The Shaded view check box in the Activate source lights option is selected. it does not know when to stop. the circles represent spotlights. The lights in the model are turned on. Lights have been placed in the model. Usage of OpenGL lighting is controlled using the Activate source lights option on the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box. as illustrated in the following diagrams. unlike the raytracer. There are no lights in the model.any lighting shining in between vertices will not show up on a triangle. and the black circles are spotlights that are not visible. but none of the lights are turned on. Of note are the distinct differences in how each lights a drawing. Although OpenGL does shine light through solid objects. The red circles are spotlights that are visible. There are lights in the model. Important • • When any one of the following conditions exist. • • 424 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . OpenGL lights are used once the following conditions have been met: • • Photo-Realism module is installed. the resulting output of the two methods is not identical. whereas the raytracer lights a drawing on a pixelby-pixel basis. OpenGL lights a triangle only if light hits a vertex on that triangle . Consequently. OpenGL lights are well-suited for providing a quick and approximate preview of what the lighting looks like in the raytracer. The Shaded view check box in the Activate source lights option has not been selected.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview About OpenGL Lighting While not as accurate as the raytracer. OpenGL relies on a geometric vertex-by-vertex basis. In each diagram.

The triangle on the right will not light because the spotlight shines between the vertices. Buffered Updates. page 430 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview. page 453 • Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box). page 37 • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box. The spotlight circle (shown in red) on the upper-left corner will be visible in the plane because it is shining on a vertex. page 427 • Open Model from Command Line. The rectangular plane (shape) is drawn as two large triangles. page 426 • Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab). The spotlight circle (shown in black) in the middle of the plane will not be visible because it does not hit a vertex. page 101 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 425 . page 291 • View Updates: Backing Store vs.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview The triangle on the left will light because the spotlight is shining on at least one vertex. Related Topics • Attenuation Tab (New Light Dialog Box).

page 436 • Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box). page 427 • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box. Related Topics • Advanced Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box).Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Photo-Realism Settings Command View > Photo-Realism > Settings Displays the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box. page 426 • Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box). Control the quality and speed of the raytrace program on a per model/material basis. you must install the Photo-Realism module. which allows you to: • • Specify options for background and environment box images. as well as choose options for improving system performance during raytracing operations. Specify whether SmartPlant Review renders the entire model. 426 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . You can also use this dialog box to control the quality and speed of the raytracing program. Define settings for Reflective or Transmittance Threshold and Bounce. Important • • • • To use this functionality. Enable raytrace generation without shadows. or only the part of the model within the view cone. and Anti-alias level. page 428 Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box Provides features that allow you to load a background image and environment box into the Main view. Gamma.

Instead. MicroStation . Background . including .rgb. None . Environment box . infinite environment map is created before a shade or wireframe update. a correct. regardless of what eye location or view angle that you specify. different sides of the box are visible with different view angles and eye locations.bmp. not just shaded or raytrace. As with background images. You can specify up to six different images. one for each side of the environment box. .Specifies that any MicroStation® source lights (that are on) be displayed in the rendered image. the background image is sized to the view and always appears the same. Although these image settings are available only with the Photo-Realism module.tif.Specifies that you want to surround the three dimensional model space with several images. the background and environment box can appear in any render mode. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 427 . no MicroStation source lights are used when rendering the image. . and so on.Specifies that you do not want any environment displays in the scene. These images can be in any of the image type formats supported by SmartPlant Review.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) Provides options for loading a background image and environment box into the Main view. Like wallpaper on the Windows desktop. The images are not sized to the screen. The environment map is created dynamically during a raytrace.tga. If this option is not selected. .Specifies that you want to display a background image in the Main view.

Lists all of the possible file types and their locations for the background image and environment box. page 424. There are two types of raytracing: forward and backward. Because raytracing gives the effects of shadows. it is significantly better than the smooth texture shading offered by OpenGL. see About OpenGL Lighting. the options on this tab are designed to compensate for the imperfections in the raytracing technology. SmartPlant review uses backward raytracing. However.Specifies that you want to display point. Clear . the software starts from the eye and sends a ray that goes into the scene and looks for light. the software sends rays across the monitor like a scanner.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Shaded view . spot. Forward raytracing looks for light and then sends a ray back to the eye. and then click Modify. in which you can add or modify an image file location. During the raytracing process. Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the quality and speed of the raytracing program. For more information. distance. and area lights in the shaded view of the model.Removes a file name and path from the Location list. In backward raytracing. as well as the rendered image. Modify . 428 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Displays the Modify Location dialog box. reflections. Image files . raytracing is not truly photo realistic. you must click a row in the Image files list box. and transparency. Note • To add or modify the location of an image file.

page 431 Transmittance Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab). page 433 Generate Shadows Option (Raytrace Tab). page 432 Gamma Option (Raytrace Tab). and then attempting to identify what it hit. page 431 Transmittance Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab). page 430 Reflective Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab). page 435 Notes • During raytracing. Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab).Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview For detailed information about each option on the Raytrace tab. page 433 Anti-alias Option (Raytrace Tab). page 435 Raytrace Option (Raytrace Tab). • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 429 . Although forward raytracing is far superior in quality. 95% of the algorithm's time is spent looking in the model to see whether the ray hit anything. page 435 Neutral Gray Background Option (Raytrace Tab). see the following topics. Raytraced reflective surfaces are true reflections of the environment and do not depend upon applied reflective textures. the performance cost is extremely high.

15 (15%). this option should be set to a high value.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab) The Reflective threshold from 0 to 1 option specifies a global threshold that determines whether or not the raytracer should spawn additional rays off of shiny surfaces in the model. the texture will be environment mapped in shaded OpenGL mode. such as a building with large surfaces of mirrored glass. which means only objects greater than 60% reflective will not have additional reflection rays spawned. This prevents the raytracer from computing reflection rays that will have little influence on the overall quality of the image. We recommend that you set this control to 0. you are encouraged to modify these settings and rerun the raytracing command several times to get the effects that you want. In the Material Editor dialog box. such as mirrors. If the Reflectivity setting (found in the Material Editor dialog box) for a texture is greater than or equal to 0. Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and material in the model. if a model contains a reflective object that is very far from the eye point. Notes • Decreasing the number of reflection rays by setting the value closer to 1 can significantly increase performance. the Reflectivity setting of the object's material determines whether or not the object is reflective. For example. additional rays are not fired. However. • • • • • 430 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . if the model contains a large shiny surface that is close to the eye point. you should set this option to a low value to produce multiple reflective rays in the output image. If the object is not reflective.6. Environment mapping gives a curved or mirrored appearance to the texture. The Finish setting of the material (found in the Material Editor dialog box) determines the smoothness of the object surface and controls whether and by what amount the second ray is skewed.

such as a glass milk bottle factory. transparent objects always create at least two additional rays. you are encouraged to modify these settings and rerun the raytracing command several times to get the effects that you want. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 431 . the Reflective bounce from 1 to 16 option allows you to specify the number of additional rays. a high setting like 16 would be necessary only if you were conducting a study in a house of mirrors. If the object is not transparent. you should set this option to a low value in order to produce multiple reflective rays in the output image. Because most objects in nature aren't very reflective. Notes • We recommend setting this control to 2 because.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Reflective Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab) If the raytracer needs to spawn additional reflection rays to determine the color of a reflective object. such as a mirror. the Transmittance setting of the material of the object determines whether or not the object is transparent. Color intensity decreases with each bounce. Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and material in the model. if the model contains many transparent surfaces that are close to the eye point. in most cases. • • • Transmittance Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab) The Transmittance threshold from 0 to 1 option specifies a global stop threshold that determines whether or not the raytracer should spawn additional rays off of transparent surfaces in the model. if the model contains a transparent object that is very far from the eye point. However. such as glass. In the Material Editor dialog box. only two reflections are required to correctly determine the pixel color of a reflective surface. you should set this option to a high value to limit the number of reflection rays the raytracer computes. At a minimum. Reflective bounces are expensive in terms of performance. additional rays are not fired. For example.

Transmittance bounces are expensive in terms of performance. you are encouraged to modify these settings and rerun the raytracing command several times to get the effects that you want. Although the raytracer supports up to 16 transparent bounces for those models that contain many transparent surfaces. which means objects greater than 40% transparent will have additional transmittance rays created. Notes • We recommend setting this control is 5. shiny transparent objects. • • • 432 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and material in the model. spherical. such as a milk bottle factory. We recommend setting this control to 0. a single object can only be hit with 5 transparent bounces.4. Decreasing the number of transmittance rays by setting the value closer to 1 can significantly increase performance.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Notes • Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and material in the model. • • • Transmittance Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab) If the raytracer needs to create additional rays to determine the color of a transparent object. you are encouraged to modify these settings and rerun the raytracing command several times to get the effects that you want. the Transmittance bounce from 1 to 16 option allows you to specify the number of additional rays necessary. This safeguard prevents recursion overflow such as the inside of a Christmas tree ornament or other perfectly. The Refraction setting of the material (defined in the Material Editor dialog box) determines the thickness of the object surface and how much the third ray should bend. Color intensity decreases with each bounce. such as glass or clear plastic.

• • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 433 . the setting should be 0. Otherwise. and blue (RGB) values when the raytracing output goes to video frame buffers that do not have gamma adjustments or to Intergraph RGB file formats. This option does not control image brightness when there are too few or too many lights in the scene. The following illustration shows where all the rays are fired as you increase the number of rays through antialiasing. and that ray goes directly into the center of the pixel. We recommend setting for this control is 1. At a setting of 1. As a result. objects that are only partially displayed in the pixel may be missed. It depends on whether or not the second ray hits an object and has to spawn additional rays. This value is applied to each pixel as an RGB triplet prior to final output. • Anti-alias Option (Raytrace Tab) The Anti-alias from 1 to 13 option specifies the number of rays per pixel that the raytracer should fire to determine the final color. We recommend setting this control to 1. but only if gamma correction is needed. Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and material in the model.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Gamma Option (Raytrace Tab) The Gamma from 0 to 4 option specifies a value for correcting red. Increasing this option slows the performance speed of the raytracer. only a single ray is fired into each pixel. use 3 rays for low and 9 rays for high. Use this option to reduce the jagged edges of surfaces that should appear smooth. increasing anti-aliasing from 1 to 2 does not necessarily double raytracing time. However. Important • Only users who are using a hardware frame buffer should modify the default value for this option. you are encouraged to modify these settings and re-run the raytracing command several times to get the effects that you want. green. Tips • To simulate the ModelView settings of low and high anti-aliasing.

Although the raytracer supports an anti-alias setting of up to 13 rays per pixel.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Notes • Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and material in the model. additional rays are fired only if the primary ray determines that potential additional intersections in the ray cone exist. you are encouraged to modify these settings and rerun the raytracing command several times to get the effects that you want. This method prevents unwanted and time-consuming rays against flat surfaces • 434 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

you are encouraged to modify these settings and rerun the raytracing command several times to get the effects that you want. no shadows are generated in the raytraced image. even if all lights have shadows turned on. Neutral Gray Background Option (Raytrace Tab) The Neutral gray background option allows you to use a neutral gray background instead of the pipes behind the preview globe on the Material Editor and other material dialog boxes.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Generate Shadows Option (Raytrace Tab) The Generate shadows option overrides all other lighting shadow options (global and source) to generate raytraced images without shadows. • Raytrace Option (Raytrace Tab) The Raytrace option enables you to raytrace the preview globe on the Material Editor and other material dialog boxes. especially materials with ambient properties. Note • Raytracing the globe provides a better representation of materials. Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and material in the model. With this setting you can avoid manually turning off shadows for every individual light in the model. Notes • When this option is disabled. this option is selected. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 435 . By default. This option shows the material color a little more clearly.

Specifies the minimum threshold for firing rays into dark areas. this option causes the most performance degradation.Specifies the total number of rays the raytracer spawns to calculate the illumination of a pixel. However. Only within the View Cone .Specifies rays will extend throughout the entire model. all light sources. Illumination threshold from 0 to 1 . Related Topics • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box. The default value is 8. the raytracer does not fire any rays. Notes • As rays bounce around a scene. Select this option if you want to continue working in other programs while the raytracer generates the image. For this reason. For areas that are below the value defined in the Illumination threshold. page 426 436 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . textures. Objects outside of the view cone will also not cast shadows into the view. of the two options available. Use only a single processor for raytraces . The default value is 0. When this option is selected. not just within the view.Specifies that rays will only extend within the volume of the view cone. and other information in the model must be loaded into memory for the raytrace. are considered when rendering the view.Specifies that only one of multiple available processors be used by the raytracer.11. the contribution of light diminishes. Important • Higher values increase the amount of time necessary to raytrace the image.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Advanced Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) Provides options for improving system performance during raytracing operations. all the lights. Spawned rays from 1 to 100 . Everywhere . Setting this option means that objects located outside the view cone have no affect on rays generated in their direction. whether in the view or not. which is almost black.

255). objects in front of a mirror are not brighter than the mirror itself. Ambient Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the light that envelops objects. and it is used to soften shadows and simulated natural light shining through a window. Ambient light simulates light scatter in nature. and light dispersion through fog. A recommended setting for this control is white (RGB 255. Important • To use this functionality. Intensity from 0 to 1 .Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Global Lighting Settings Command View > Photo-Realism > Global Lighting Settings Displays the Global Lighting dialog box. allowing you to choose an alternative color for the ambient light. allowing you to edit options for controlling the light that envelops objects. To use this functionality.15. Color .Controls the color of the ambient light. you must install the Photo-Realism module. ambient light can closely simulate a radiosity solution. Edit . We recommend setting this option is 0.Controls the intensity of the ambient light. When used properly. you must install the Photo-Realism module. Ambient light can also be designed for use with scene lighting. Because ambient light is not cumulative.Allows you to use ambient lighting in the raytraced image. Activate . Objects that have no ambient reflectivity will not reflect light and could appear black if no additional lights are defined in the scene. the light from the sun. Ambient light affects only those objects that have a value for material ambient reflectivity. 255. the light from a camera flash bulb. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 437 .Displays the Color dialog box. Global Lighting Dialog Box Provides features that allow you to control lighting properties globally within the model.

70. Edit . Note • Flashbulb lighting should be used rather than ambient lighting when no lights are present in the model because flashbulb lighting is not affected by material ambient reflectivity. A warning appears in the Text window if no lights have been defined in the current scene. Flashbulb lighting acts as a point light at the camera lens.Allows you to use flashbulb lighting in the raytraced image. Intensity from 0 to 1 . Color . which is controlled by Intensity. We recommend setting this option to white (RGB 255. flash lighting is also useful during material setup to determine the overall color balance of the image. there is light falloff from the camera. and to prevent an un-viewable render.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Flashbulb Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the light from a camera flashbulb. As a result.Displays the Color dialog box. 438 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Controls the color of the flashbulb light. 255. Activate .Controls the intensity of the flashlight bulb. a default flashbulb light is used automatically. 255). This type of lighting is particularly useful for people who want to create "pretty pictures" but do not know how to set the lights properly in their models. As with point lights. allowing you to choose an alternative color for the flashbulb light. We recommend setting this option to 0. Flashbulb lighting does not generate shadows because the flashbulb location is the same as the eye point.

Specifies the difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the time at the model's location. You can type values in these fields or use the Zone.Specifies the East/West position of the model's location in degrees.70. or Cities buttons to pick the model's latitude. Edit .Specifies the North/South position of the model's location in degrees. or Cities buttons to pick the model's longitude. You can type in a value or use the Zone or Cities buttons to pick the correct offset.Allows you to use sunlight in the current scene. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 439 . You can type values in these fields or use the Zone. Map. Longitude . We recommend setting this option to 0. This position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier.Displays the current color of the solar light. Intensity from 0 to 1 .Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the light from the sun. Activate . either North or South. either East or West. 255.Controls the intensity of the solar light.Displays the Color dialog box. We recommend setting this control to white (RGB 255. Cast shadows . Color . allowing you to choose an alternative color for the solar light. GMT offset . Map. This position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier. Latitude .Allows you to generate shadows from the solar light. 255).

You can modify this time by clicking the up and down arrows. When this box is not checked. page 442. Date . However. the date when you first opened the project in SmartPlant Review. For example. from which you can choose the latitude. from which you can choose the latitude. This option effectively mimics the IGDS/MicroStation default sunlight. and GMT offset by picking a city name from a list. see Time Zones Dialog Box. see World Map Dialog Box. the first instance of the current zone is selected. changes made to these coordinates on the Solar Vector dialog box are not reflected in updates to the Latitude and Longitude fields.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Zone . The default time is your computer's time when you first created the project. the values in the longitude and latitude boxes feed the X. which allows you to choose the GMT offset by picking a zone's region or description from a list. Time . 440 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 443. longitude by picking a location from a world map. see Cities Dialog Box. based on a rough distance estimate.Specifies the time of day for calculating how the sun should appear in the model. For more information. By default. Daylight savings . see Solar Vector Dialog Box. Vector . rather than calculate the vector from the latitude and longitude values. which allows you to lock the sun to a certain vector. when you first opened the project in SmartPlant Review.Displays the World Map dialog box.Displays the Time Zones dialog box. the options under location are not available. page 444. When this box is checked. and Z coordinates and angles on the Solar Vector dialog box.Displays the Cities dialog box. The default date is your computer's time when you first created the project database. For more information. Map . page 441.Displays the Solar Vector dialog box. You can change this date by clicking the down arrow and picking a new date from the calendar. for example.Specifies the date for calculating how the sun should appear in the model. For more information. Cities .Specifies whether or not the specified time is daylight savings time. The nearest city to the current latitude and longitude. Use vector . is selected by default. longitude. Y.Allows you to lock the sun's position to a specific vector. For more information.

the first instance of the current zone is selected. By default. You can sort the Select time zone list by clicking any of the columns in the grid. the GMT offset field on the Solar tab displays the appropriate value for the selected time zone. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 441 . Select time zone .Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Time Zones Dialog Box Allows you to choose the GMT offset by picking a zone's region or description from the list of regions. When you click OK.Allows you to set the GMT offset by selecting a zone's region or description from a list. By default the list is sorted alphabetically by Description.

The current latitude and longitude are displayed in a ToolTip when the bull's eye indicator is dragged to a new location. You can type values in these fields or use the bull's eye indicator on the map to specify the longitude. This position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier. either East or West. You can type values in these fields or use the bull's eye indicator on the map to specify the latitude. the latitude and longitude fields automatically update with that location's corresponding north/south and east/west position (in degrees). This position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier. 442 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview World Map Dialog Box Allows you to choose the latitude. is dragged A ToolTip displays the latitude and longitude as the bull's eye indicator across the map. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that position will populate the Latitude and Longitude fields. When the bull's eye is released. Latitude .Specifies the East/West position of the model's location in degrees. and GMT offset by interactively picking a location from a world map. either North or South.Specifies the North/South position of the model's location in degrees. Longitude . Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that position will populate the Latitude and Longitude fields. longitude. The current latitude and longitude are displayed in a ToolTip when the bull's eye indicator is dragged to a new location.

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview GMT offset . the list is sorted alphabetically by city name. If the bull's eye indicator passes over a city listed in the Cities dialog box. Cities Dialog Box Allows you to choose the latitude. Longitude. longitude. City . Note • By default. By default. the list is sorted alphabetically by city name. and GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the appropriate values for the selected location on the map. The OK button on this dialog box populates the Latitude. You can type in a value or use the Zone or Cities buttons on the Solar tab to pick the correct offset.Displays the name of the city selected in the Cities dialog box or with the bull's eye indicator. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 443 . Select city . then the city name displays in the ToolTip beside the latitude and longitude coordinates.Allows you to select a city from the list to set the latitude. you can sort this list by clicking any of the columns in the grid. By default. the nearest city to the current latitude and longitude (based on a rough distance estimate) is selected. and GMT offset by interactively picking a city name from the list. longitude. and GMT offset for the solar lighting. Notes • The OK button on this dialog box populates the Latitude. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that position will populate the city field in addition to the Latitude and Longitude fields on the World Map dialog box. Longitude. However.Specifies the difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the time at the model's location. and GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the values from their respective fields on the dialog box.

This effectively mimics the IGDS/MicroStation default sunlight. the X. 0 degrees being North. Azimuth from 0 to 360 . Altitude from -90 to 90 . and Z coordinates and angles on the Solar Vector dialog box. Y. Y.Controls the angle of the sun above (positive values) and below (negative values) the horizon in degrees ranging from -90 to 90. Z coordinates are adjusted. When the Use Vector option is not selected. X .Defines the Z coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector. Clicking OK sets the sun to the specified vector but does not populate the Latitude. When the Azimuth and Altitude angles are adjusted. However.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Solar Vector Dialog Box Allows you to lock the sun to a certain vector. • • • 444 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Y.Defines the X coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector. Longitude. changes made to these coordinates on the Solar Vector dialog box are not reflected in updates to the Latitude and Longitude fields. and GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the values for the selected vector and angle. Notes • The solar directional vector defines the exact direction of the solar lighting. Z . the Azimuth and Altitude angles are updated to reflect the current values. When the X. Clicking OK sets the sun to the specified vector but does not populate the Latitude.Defines the Y coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector. Y . the values in the longitude and latitude boxes feed the X. and Z coordinates are updated to reflect the current values. and GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the values for the selected vector and angle.Controls the bearing of the solar light in degrees ranging from 0 to 360. Longitude.

2. allowing you to choose an alternative fog color. A value of 1 is extremely foggy. Select the Solar tab to control the light from the sun. Select the Flashbulb tab to control the light from a camera flashbulb.Controls the density of the fog effect. Related Topics • Ambient Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box). 5. Intensity from 0 to 1 . page 445 • Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview. you must install the Photo-Realism module. page 438 • Fog Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box). 3. The current distance between the eye point and center point of the view also effects the density of the fog in the current scene. 4. page 437 • Flashbulb Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box). Note • To use this functionality. Edit .Select to use fog in the current scene. Select the Fog tab to control the computation of fog. page 423 • Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box).Displays the current fog color.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Fog Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the computation of fog. Select the Ambient tab to control the light that envelops objects. page 439 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 445 .Displays the Color dialog box. Activate . Click View > Photo-Realism > Global Lighting Settings. Set Global Lighting 1. Color .

Related Topics • Define a Raytrace Range. and then displays the corresponding light dialog box. you must delete the spot light and then place a new point light. page 461 446 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . the center of the spherical glyph. To change a spot light to a point light. page 454 • Raytrace a View. For spot lights. Point. the neck of the flash light glyph Note • You cannot change the type of light after placement. the neck of the arrow glyph. page 462 • Delete Source Light. Each of the New Light Settings commands prompt you to specify a position (using either standard three dimensional placement or a data point in any graphic view) and size of a new light. For distance lights. for example. page 459 • Edit a Source Light. The physical location for the lights is as follows: • • • For point lights.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Placing Lights: An Overview Three different types of lights can be placed in your model: Spot. page 456 • Place a Light. and Distant.

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview New Point Light Command View > Photo-Realism > New Point Light Allows you to place a new point light. New Spot Light Command View > Photo-Realism > New Spot Light Allows you to place a new spot light. you must install the Photo-Realism module. After specifying a position and size for the new point light. To use this functionality. To change a spot light to a point light. allowing you to adjust the light options. and then place a new point light. To change a spot light to a point light. for example. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 447 . for example. Note • You cannot change the type of light after placement. page 448 • Place a Light. you must delete the spot light. and then place a new point light. After specifying a position and size for the new distant light. the New Distant Light dialog box displays. Note • You cannot change the type of light after placement. and then place a new point light. the New Spot Light dialog box displays. you must delete the spot light. To use this functionality. allowing you to adjust the light options. the New Point Light dialog box displays. page 454 New Distant Light Command View > Photo-Realism > New Distant Light Allows you to place a new distant light. you must install the Photo-Realism module. you must delete the spot light. for example. To change a spot light to a point light. After specifying a position and size for the new spot light. Note • You cannot change the type of light after placement. allowing you to adjust the light options. To use this functionality. you must install the Photo-Realism module. Related Topics • New Light Dialog Box.

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview New Light Dialog Box Provides options for controlling the source light position. apply to all three light source dialog boxes. By default. The light name is limited to 32 characters for .Assigns a specific color level (0-250) to the selected light.Displays the type of light. Note • You cannot change the type of light after placement. and display set functionality in combination with source lights. This allows you more flexibility in using existing level.Specify the light name. this string is "New Light" with numerical increments. and effects. position. and display set functionality in combination with source lights. However. for example.Displays the name of the master file to which the SmartPlant Review source lights are associated. Therefore. Type . you must delete the point light. File . material assignments. 448 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Light names do not have to be unique. The dialog box for each type of source light (point. This box is not editable. such as Spot. or Distance. This allows you more flexibility in using existing level. effects. material assignments. except where indicated.vue support Important • MicroStation lights cannot be named. Level index . and attenuation. and distant) have identical fields. Point. spot. To change a point light to a spot light. the following descriptions. Color index .Assigns the selected light to a specific Level (1-63). Light name . unique names allow you to identify lights more easily. Information Tab (New Light Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the light display. and then place a new spot light.

For distant and spot lights.Provides a place for you to type the size of the light geometry. Position Tab (New Light Dialog Box) Provides options for you to key in precise positions for the light. Location in MU:SU:PU • North . East . Pick Point .Specifies the east coordinate of the new light. Elevation . Shade .Specifies whether or not the light geometry should appear in shaded or wireframe mode in the model. For point and spot lights. By default. the fields on this tab are populated with coordinates that the user selected during light placement. the light geometry will not display. • • • Interest in MU:SU:PU .In source lighting.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Size in MU:SU:PU: .Specifies the elevation coordinate for the new light.Specifies the north coordinate of the new light. the interest point is also the falloff point (where the attenuated intensity of the light is one-half of its original intensity). SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 449 .Works in tandem with the Show option to restrict the display of the light to the Main view only. otherwise. Show in Main View only . this option is selected. Important • The display set containing the specified light must be active. the interest point represents a point on a line from the light location in the direction that the light is cast.Specifies whether or not the light geometry should display in each view of the model. interest is the second point in a twopoint placement that determines where the light is cast and/or its falloff rate.Allows selection of the North/East/Elevation point (using either standard three dimensional placement or a data point in any graphic view) from within the model. By default. Show .

Delta value . Selecting this option changes the offset fields to Distance.Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept the absolute directional values for the new light.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview • Absolute .Allows you to select the interest point (using either standard three dimensional placement or a data point in any view) from within the model. Pick Point . Delta direction . Elevation Angle . the points themselves are not stored. The missing coordinate for the view selected is defaulted to the center point of the Main view. East . Bearing Angle. the mouse move provides only two coordinates. Notes • • • • • • • • • • When placing point fall-off using a data point.Specifies the delta direction elevation angle for the direction of the new light.Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept delta directional offset values for the light.Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept delta offset values for the light direction. This option allows you to define the direction of the light by specifying distances from the origin of the model.Specifies the delta direction distance for the direction of the new light. This option allows you to define the direction of the light by specifying distances from the location of the light. Points picked in the model are used by the software to get the vector. and Elevation Angle. Bearing Angle .Specifies the absolute or delta value for the north coordinate of the direction of the new light. Distance . • 450 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . North . Elevation .Specifies the absolute or delta value for the east coordinate of the direction of the new light.Specifies the absolute or delta value for the elevation coordinate of the direction of the new light. This option allows you to define the direction of the light by specifying a distance and two angles from the location of the light.Specifies the delta direction bearing angle for the direction of the new light.

see Lighten Shadows. you can lighten shadows without adding unwanted amounts of light to the scene. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 451 . Activate . such as under a desk or in dark closet. the shadows will be dark. Affect ambient only Specifies that the light should only affect objects with materials that have ambient light properties. to display an actual light in a scene. Edit . For more information. This option is checked by default whenever a light is placed.Displays the current color of the new light.Specifies whether or not the light should cast shadows. This option can be used in display set animation to simulate effects such as twinkling of stars. you must model the light as geometry and then add lights in the same location to simulate the effect of light. page 457. and shadows. light scatter. However. Ambient light is useful to simulate "scatter". the light affects all objects equally. Tips • If the Affect ambient only option is turned off. Tip • When lighting a scene with a single light that casts shadows. such as the twinkling of stars.Specifies whether or not the light should be used for illumination. With SmartPlant Review.Displays the Color dialog box from which you can alter the color of the new light. • Cast shadows . Ambient light is used to model the normal light scatter that is not solved by the raytracer. This option is selected by default.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Effects Tab (New Light Dialog Box) Allows you to simulate effects. Color . Only radiosity solves for ambient contribution to the scene.

Outer (must be greater than inner) . and a different attenuation for light in the outer cone angle.Specifies the degrees of the outer angle of the spot cone.Specifies the degrees of the inner angle (hot spot) of the spot cone. ranging from 0 to 180. Refer to the following illustration. There is one level of attenuation for light in the inner cone. • 452 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Spot cone angles .Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Intensity from 0 to 1 . ranging from 0 to 180.These options are available only for spot lights.Specifies the intensity of the light. We recommend setting this option to 1. • Inner (must be less than outer) . Refer to the following illustration.

MicroStation .Specifies that the light attenuation effects be styled after ModelView's fast attenuation. This option selected by default. Quadratic component from 0 to 1 . the None option is selected. Slow .Allows you to specify a value for the quadratic attenuation component.Specifies that the light attenuation effects be styled after those found in MicroStation. When this option is selected. the light becomes dimmer more slowly. Constant component from 0 to 10 . and the MicroStation option is selected if the light is attenuated.Specifies that there is no reduction of the intensity of the light based on the distance from the source of the light. this tab is disabled.0 / (c1 + (c2*distance-to-light) + (c3*distanceto-light-squared). Custom .0 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 453 .Specifies an exact attenuation effect based on the three constants in the following fall-off (F) equation: F = 1. When this option is selected. None .0 Linear component from 0 to 1 .Specifies that the light attenuation effects be styled after ModelView's slow attenuation.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Attenuation Tab (New Light Dialog Box) Provides options for defining various attenuation settings for point and spot lights. This option is the default and read-only for MicroStation lights that are attenuated. If the MicroStation light is not attenuated.Allows you to specify a value for the constant attenuation component. For MicroStation lights. The default is value is 1. the light becomes dimmer more quickly. The default value is 1. Fast .Allows you to specify a value for the linear attenuation component. The default value is 1.0.

Enter a second point to indicate the light's interest point. 3. 4. Notes • In Steps 1 and 3. and Slow attenuation effects). When the Custom option is selected. For MicroStation lights. Distant Light . Enter the point where the light should be placed. or Spot Light • • • 454 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . • • • • • Place a Light 1. click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range and identify a small range around the light. Distant. enter a name for the new source light. the light can be specified to exact catalog standards. Fast. OpenGL attenuates positional lights (points and spots) by an attenuation factor composed of the constants listed previously using the following equation: Attenuation factor = 1 / (C+L*d+Q*d*d) Ambient. diffuse. For example. • 5. Tip This second point is used to determine both the lighting direction and also the light's falloff distance (used for the MicroStation. global ambient and emission are not attenuated. and specular are all attenuated. The glyph color of a source light matches the color of the light being cast (as specified on the New Source Light > Effects tab). Modify any other properties as needed. Click View > Photo-Realism > New XX Light 2. . or Spot. Using non-default attenuation does require extra calculations and may slow performance. this tab is disabled. You also can select Point Light on the Photo-Realism toolbar. this option would be used to specify a GE 30 watt frosted bulb. In the New XX Light dialog box. To see the effect of the new light. and the MicroStation option is selected if the light is attenuated. Constant fall off is the slowest and quadratic fall of is the fastest with linear in between constant and quadratic. XX refers to the type of light that you want to place Point.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Notes • Attenuation simulates the fall off of light from a positional light source.

Otherwise. If you select more than one light. Usage).Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Edit Source Light Command View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light Allows you to select a light in the model and adjust its properties.Displays all the lights currently in the model using the format (State. The source light is in a visible display set or if Ungrouped Elements is visible. Related Topics • Edit a Source Light. Lights . For a light to be used by the raytracer. the dialog box cycles through each light individually until all the specified lights have been edited. you must install the Photo-Realism module. the Photo-Realism setting to activate all MicroStation lights must be on. Match .If the source light is used by the raytracer. the following conditions must be met. Type. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 455 . • • • The source light is activated within its own individual settings.Displays the Match Items dialog box to allow you to select lights matching the given pattern or selected object. If the source light is a MicroStation light. it is off. SmartPlant Review will display a message in the Text view stating that a flashbulb will be used to illuminate the scene. page 456 Edit Source Lights Dialog Box Allows you to select a light in the model and then edit all properties of the light. Lights placed using MicroStation cannot be edited. Lights placed using MicroStation cannot be edited. the light state is on. If no light meets all of the conditions. Important • • To use this functionality. Light State . The source light is on a visible level.

SmartPlant Review does not allow you to edit or delete MicroStation lights. Modify any properties as needed. page 455 • Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box). the software cycles through all the selections until there are no more lights to edit. you can place any light. Important • OpenGL supports only a limited number of source lights. This feature allows you to manipulate the use of non-editable lights for raytracing without modifying the original geometry file.If source lighting is activated for the shaded view. depending on the video card and driver implementation. otherwise. • • 456 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . If there is more than one light in the model. the light type displays as Editable. then the indicator displays OpenGL + a slot number indicating which OpenGL hardware slot number is being used for the source light (if any). The OpenGL standard guarantees that a minimum of eight lights is supported. including noneditable MicroStation lights.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Light Type . MicroStation lights) appears "dim" in the model. page 448 Edit a Source Light 1. into a display set. page 427 • Information Tab (New Light Dialog Box). Click View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light 2. This light usage indicator is helpful in determining which source lights (if any) are actually being used in the shaded view. You also can select Edit Light on the Photo-Realism toolbar to open the Edit Source Lights dialog box. The geometry for lights that cannot be edited (that is. see About OpenGL Lighting. Edit Source Lights Dialog Box. The raytracer does not use lights that are in a hidden display set in the rendered image. Like any other piece of geometry. For more information. Related Topics • Edit Source Light Command. If you have selected multiple lights on the Edit Source Light dialog box. If source lighting is not activated for the shaded view.If the source light is a MicroStation type light. 4. page 424. this indicator displays Raytrace. Light Usage . Notes • • Source lights are listed in the order that they were placed. allowing you to select the light that you want to edit. page 455 3. it will display as such. the Edit Source Light dialog box displays. whereas the raytracer can use a virtually unlimited number of lights.

Following this procedure can help you simulate some of the effects of atmospheric scattering observed in the real world without the cost of extra computational time during the raytrace. • • Related Topics • Edit a Source Light. 2. However. 64. page 454 7. • 6. Ensure the Cast shadows option is selected. • Notes • In the above steps. Place a Light. 5. page 456 • Effects Tab (New Light Dialog Box). the shadows are the same percentage lighter as the second light's contribution. When you raytrace. XX refers to the type of light selected: Point. page 451 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 457 . Distant. edit the color of the second light to make up the difference in the percentage of the maximum light when combined with the first light. Tip For example. Click View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light. 4. On the Effects tab. Place a source light of the same type as the one edited in the exact same location with the exact same interest point. the results appear to be the same as if you used a single pure white light.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Lighten Shadows 1. you would use a 75% white (RGB=128. 3. 128. use a 25% white (RGB=64. 8. Disable the Cast shadows option. 128). 255). Tip For the previous example. Select the light that you want to edit. 255. 64). instead of pure white (RGB=255. or Spot. Click the Edit button and change the color to be a lower percentage of its maximum value. Click the Effects tab on the Edit XX Light dialog box.

Therefore. page 459 458 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted. Related Topics • Delete Source Light. page 459 Delete Source Lights Dialog Box Allows you to select a source light in the model and then delete it. Related Topics • Delete Source Light. Deleted lights are permanently removed from the database.Displays all the lights currently in the model. you will be prompted to answer Yes or No to delete the specified light. Lights .Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Delete Source Light Command View > Photo-Realism > Delete Source Light The Delete Source Light command allows you to select a light from the model and delete it. Notes • • • Source lights are listed in the order that they were placed. Deleted lights are permanently removed from the project database. Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted.

page 454 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 459 . Click View > Photo-Realism > Delete Source Light. Select a source light from the Lights list. Related Topics • Edit a Source Light. 3. page 456 • Place a Light. Clicking Yes in the confirmation box permanently removes the light from the project database. 2. You also can select Delete Light from the Photo-Realism toolbar.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Delete Source Light 1. Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted. Notes • • • Source lights are listed in the order that they were placed.

If the Main view is not fully visible when the raytrace completes. refraction. elect to raytrace directly to a file. Related Topics • Define a Raytrace Range. to select a specific region of the view to be processed. The output of the raytrace is displayed in the Main view. you are prompted with an option to reload the raytraced image Notes • • • To stop a raytrace. • Related Topics • Raytrace a View. To modify global light settings. page 462 • Raytrace a View. Important • SmartPlant Review must be the topmost window when the raytraced image is complete. and shadowing. the raytraced image will be lost when you switch back to the application. press Esc. click View > Photo-Realism > Global Light Settings. page 461 Raytrace Command View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace The Raytrace command raytraces the Main view.Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Raytracing: An Overview SmartPlant Review's raytracer process produces quality images that include true light reflection. If rendering parameters or global light settings are modified. you must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace to render the image again. and set up batch raytrace processes. to scale the final image size. otherwise. click View > Photo-Realism > Settings. page 461 460 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . transparency. These images enable you to see the true characteristics of the materials that you selected for your model by accurately mimicking the way actual light reflects off your model surfaces. The Raytrace process allows you to set the anti-alias level. To modify rendering parameters.

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Raytrace a View 1. you must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range to render the image again. 2. click View > Photo-Realism > Global Light Settings. page 462 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 461 . If the Main view is not fully visible when the raytrace completes. 3. To modify global light settings. This allows you to work on other applications while raytracing. To modify global light settings. The rendered image appears in the Main view. To modify rendering parameters. • Tip To stop a raytrace. Notes • • To modify rendering parameters. click View > Photo-Realism > Global Light Settings. Click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace. • • • Related Topics • Define a Raytrace Range. Use SmartPlant Review commands to define the scene in the Main view. Important The SmartPlant Review application window automatically becomes the topmost window on your screen once the raytrace is complete. press Esc. you must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace to render the image again. • Notes • • You can also select Raytrace on the Photo-Realism toolbar. If rendering parameters or global light settings are modified. click View > Photo-Realism > Settings. click View > Photo-Realism > Settings. • Related Topics • Define a Raytrace Range. If you modify any rendering parameters or global light settings. a message indicating this appears in the Text view. page 462 Raytrace Range Command View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range The Raytrace Range command allows you to confine a raytrace to within a set area of the Main view.

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview Define a Raytrace Range 1. 4. Click the starting point for the range. 2. Click View > Photo-Realism > Settings. Select the Advanced tab to control system performance during raytracing operations. press Esc. 2. You also can select Raytrace Range on the Photo-Realism toolbar. Use SmartPlant Review commands to define the scene in the Main view. Select the Environment tab to load a background image and environment box into the Main view. click View > Photo-Realism > Settings. Click the ending point for the range. To modify global light settings. The output appears in the Main view. Select the Raytrace tab to control the quality and speed of the raytracing program. page 426 462 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Related Topics • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box. Click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range. page 462 • Raytrace a View. 3. To modify rendering parameters. 4. If you modify any rendering parameters or global light settings. page 461 Edit Raytracing Options 1. click View > Photo-Realism > Global Light Settings. 3. Notes • • • • To stop a raytrace in progress. • Related Topics • Edit Raytracing Options. you must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range to render the image again.

Highlight . as they are stored in the database. Static collision detection (similar to PDS Clash) is performed by comparing each object in a specified model range to all other objects in the specified range to determine if a touch or overlap condition occurs.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Detecting Collisions: An Overview SmartPlant Review supports two modes of collision detection: static and dynamic. A log file contains a collision ID number. you must install the Construction module. Retain or Eliminate Colliding Movements . A save option is available to save a text file of the collision data on the collision report. SmartPlant Review needs approximately 40MB of free space on the hard drive where your TEMP folder is located to run collision detection. data type of colliding elements. each record stored in the project database can be written to a text file. Dynamic collision detection is performed when you define an object or group of objects to set in motion through the plant. Dynamic collision detection is useful when moving equipment such as a construction crane through a plant to find a safe pathway for the move. Review Collision Data .WAV sound files to collision types. Static collision detection could help find problems such as pipes that are too close together or intersecting. To use the collision detection functionality.You can assign . Note • Due to the type of coordinate system used in SAT and AutoCAD files.Collisions are reviewed in sequential order. Optionally. A snapshot option is available to save an image file of colliding objects while the colliding objects are highlighted. type of collision with file location of colliding elements.The colliding objects are highlighted in an optional user-defined color.A record of each collision run is always stored in the database. adjust the view to get the area of interest and use the Display All command on the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box to view the collisions. the zoom to collision feature may not work well on some files.You can move through the model freely using display set motion while automatically generating collision reports for later review. In these cases. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 463 . Sound . Collision Detection Capabilities Log File . and coordinates of the collision. You can zoom to individual collisions or display all collisions in the current Main view.

The collision information is saved in a Microsoft Access-compatible table. page 477 • View Collision Reports. The collision detection process requires temporary disk space. • Delete temporary files in the system temporary folder stated on the message box. collision detection is run at the end of each motion step. page 476 • Select Objects and Range. Collision detection is run at the end of the single step movement. For collision detection. If you receive a message during collision detection notifying you that there is not enough temporary disk space. You can select a single object for single step collision detection. There are three types of collision detection: • Single step collision . page 475 • Select Graphic Element Types.Run as an option through the display set motion settings. Stationary collision . not continuously during the movement. Display set collision . page 483 • View Point Cloud Data. free more space in one of the following ways. page 480 • Select Collision Display Colors. You can run stationary collision detection from the Run tab on the Collision Detection dialog box. • • Related Topics • Run Collision Detection.Detects collisions between point cloud elements and a graphic element. You must have the Point Cloud Integrator module and a point cloud software package loaded before you can perform collision detection against point cloud data. Delete or move other files on the specified disk.Runs static collision detection on the current model without any additional movements. page 479 • Select Filters for Collision Types.Moves a single graphic element one discrete movement. If you select the collision detection option. page 478 • Select Collision Sounds. the display set is used for movement through the model. Request assistance from your system administrator to change the location of the system TEMP environment variable to point to a local disk with more available space.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Collision Data Management . page 541 464 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . You can run a single step collision detection from the Run tab on the Collision Detection dialog box. not continuously during the movement. • • Point Cloud Intersections .

Static collision detection is performed by comparing each object in a specified model range to all other objects in the specified range to determine if a touch or overlap condition occurs.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Collision Detection Command Tools > Collision Detection Displays the Collision Detection dialog box. page 479 • Select Filters for Collision Types. Backfaces and End caps view settings are temporarily switched on during dynamic display set moves and all Collision Detection displays. the temporary change to the Backfaces and End caps view settings does not affect normal updates or eye motion movement. Dynamic collision detection is useful when moving equipment such as a construction crane through a plant to find a safe pathway for the move. Also. you must install the Construction module. The Collision Detection command supports two modes of collision detection: static and dynamic. page 477 • View Collision Reports. which allows you to select options for running the collision detection program. Static collision detection could help find problems such as pipes that are too close together or intersecting. All other elements are updated according to the active view settings. Important • To use the collision detection functionality. Dynamic collision is performed when you define an object or group of objects to set in motion through the plant. page 478 • Select Collision Sounds. User settings are maintained and honored for all other updates. page 483 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 465 . page 480 • Select Collision Display Colors. SmartPlant Review needs approximately 40MB of free space on the hard drive where your TEMP folder is located to run collision detection. page 475 • Select Graphic Element Types. • Related Topics • Run Collision Detection. page 476 • Select Objects and Range. Only the display set that is in motion is affected.

Collision set name . For example. when creating a new collision set. if you select the Between component elements filter. the default color assigned to an existing collision set will not automatically be applied when creating a new collision set. page 480 • Select Collision Display Colors. All tab settings must be assigned for each individual collision set. you must install the Construction module. You must create or select a collision set name before you can define the collision detection process.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Collision Detection Dialog Box Allows you to select options for running the collision detection program. Related Topics • Run Collision Detection. or only certain types of collisions. page 478 • Select Collision Sounds. For example. To use this functionality. you can choose whether you want collision detection to return all types of collisions. page 476 • Select Objects and Range. Therefore. Click Apply after you type in the name. 466 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . After you select a name. Single tick marks ( ' ) are not allowed in the name. page 541 Type Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to create or select a collision set name. page 479 • Select Filters for Collision Types.Allows you to select or type the name of a collision set. Important • All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set. the collision detection process looks for collisions between elements that are part of a larger component. The default tab settings are applied only to the collision set in which they are created. page 483 • View Point Cloud Data. page 475 • Select Graphic Element Types. you must assign settings for the new set. You must specify a name before you can define additional collision detection properties. page 477 • View Collision Reports.

You must have the Point Cloud Integrator module and a point cloud software package loaded before you can use this option. Selected types .Allows you to search for tangent collisions.Allows you to search for collisions with graphic elements that are contained within other closed graphic elements. • • Point cloud intersections (external data) . You must select a collision set name the first time that you display this dialog box during each session.Allows you to search for collisions with closed graphic elements that contain other graphic elements.Enables you to choose one or more of the following filters for the collision detection process.Allows you to search for intersecting collisions. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a larger component.Allows you to search for all types of collisions. or label key. Delete .Removes the selected collision set from memory and the database. Use Hidden elements . All types .Allows you to track collisions between the specified part of the model and the point cloud data. Embedded within .Honors hidden levels and display sets that you have turned off during collision detection. Between component elements .Returns collisions between graphic elements with the same DMRS linkage. Tangent . • • • Intersecting . SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 467 .Detecting Collisions: An Overview Note • SmartPlant Review remembers the last collision set that you selected during the current SmartPlant Review session. Contains another .

you must install the Construction module. Elevation .Defines the z-axis coordinates.Defines the y-axis coordinates. East .Allows you to select a display set as the type of object to move for collision detection.Allows you to select a stationary collision detection to find existing collisions in the model. You can create a new collision set on the Type Filter tab. Select . Display sets . Stationary collisions in selected range cube . East . Single graphic element . To use this functionality.Allows you to further define which elements to move through a volume. Entire model .States the maximum range for the north (y-axis).States the maximum range for elevation (z-axis). You can select either a single graphic element or a display set. depending on the collision set type that you selected.Defines the x-axis coordinates. Collision set name Displays the current collision set name.States the maximum range for the east (x-axis). 468 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Minimum range in MU:SU:PU North . Elevation .Allows you to specify the range cube unit values for collision detection. Maximum range in MU:SU:PU North . Range cube .Indicates that the selected range for collision detection is the entire model range cube.Indicates that you want to select a single graphic element as the member of a collision set.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Selection Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to select one or more elements to move through a volume during the collision detection process and to define the range cube volume within which the collision detection occurs.

You must select at least one of the listed geometry filters if you check this option. You can select all types of filters. Collision set name . To use this functionality. You can create a new collision set on the Type Filter tab. All types .Includes all types of geometry filters in collision detection.Displays the current collision set name.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Geometry Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to select geometry filters for the collision detection process. Selected types .Includes the selected geometry filters in collision detection. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 469 . you must install the Construction module. or you can select certain types of filters based on different geometrical definitions.

Embedded within . Between component elements .Detecting Collisions: An Overview Color Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to select colors for the collision types.Specifies a color for collisions with elements that are contained within other elements.Specifies a color for collisions with tangent elements.Specifies a color for collisions with elements that are embedded within other elements. which allows you to choose a different color for each Collision color type.Displays the Colors dialog box. To use this functionality. You can create a new collision set on the Type Filter tab. Intersecting . 470 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Specifies a color for collisions with intersecting elements. Collision set name .Specifies a color for graphic elements with the same DMRS linkage.Specifies a default color for all collision types. These colors appear in the graphic view when collisions occur. you must install the Construction module. Contains another . Edit .Displays the current collision set name. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a larger component. Default . This default color is used for any collision type that does not have one of the override colors selected below. Tangent . or label key.

Between component elements . Browse .Assigns a sound to collisions with elements embedded in other elements.Assigns a sound to collisions with elements that have the same DMRS linkage. Embedded within . Contains another . Tangent .Assigns a sound to collisions with elements that contain other elements. You can select one or more types of collisions to match with sounds. Default .Detecting Collisions: An Overview Sound Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to specify sounds that play as collisions occur.Allows you to locate a specific .Assigns a default sound to all collision types. Collision set name Displays the current collision set name.wav file for each collision type.Assigns a sound to collisions with tangent elements. To use this functionality. You can create a new collision set on the Type Filter tab.Assigns a sound to collisions with intersecting elements. you must install the Construction module. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 471 . The default sound is used for any collision type that does not have one of the override sounds selected below. Intersecting . Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a larger component.

You can select a frame and zoom to individual collisions in that frame. You enter north. After you run at least one collision detection session. Use collision limit . the Collision Detection dialog box hides from view and the status bar updates periodically to show the number of collisions and objects compared. East . east. or elevation deltas in MU:SU:PU.Halts the collision detection run after the specified number of collisions in the Collision limit box on the Run tab have occurred. You can create a new collision set on the Type Filter tab. or you can display all collisions at one time.Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the north (y-axis) direction. Sounds play or colors appear if they are defined for the collision set. You can also change the viewing angle of the display.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Run Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to set the delta at which the collision detection process runs for a single step collision.Turns on the active collision detection mode. you can generate a report. and save a copy of the collision report as a text file.Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the elevation (z-axis) direction. and then you can begin a single step collision detection run.Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the east (xaxis) direction.Displays the current collision set name. 472 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Activate collision detection . Each collision detection run is known as a frame. Collision set name . Collision limit . take a snapshot of collisions.Halts the collision detection after the specified number of collisions occurs. While the collision detection runs. Elevation . North .

adjust the view to get the area of interest and use the Display All command on the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box to view the collisions. East. • Due to the type of coordinate system used in SAT and AutoCAD files. Single step allows you to temporarily move an object one step. You can then adjust the move delta values to move the object a different amount and try it again. page 480 • View Collision Reports. or Elevation directions in which you want to move the object. you can make a display set out of the element and use the Move Display Set command. To use this functionality. Report . page 474 • Run Collision Detection. the zoom to collision feature may not work well on some files. page 483 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 473 . display sets.Starts the collision detection process for single step. This movement should not be confused with moving a display set.Displays the collision detection results in the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box. • Related Topics • Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box. or static collisions. Notes • Single step move delta in MU:SU:PU allows you to enter delta values for the North. Single step move allows you to temporarily move an object a certain amount to determine if it collides with anything. you must install the Construction module.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Single Step . In these cases. To move multiple times.

Displays information about the collisions.Allows you to select a collision set name. and then click a collision number in the left column. the zoom to collision feature may not work well on some files. click the list view.Allows you to display all of the collision detection results for the current collision set and frame number. Collision results output .Detecting Collisions: An Overview Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box Displays a report of the detected collisions after performing a collision detection run.Allows you to take a snapshot of the collision detection results. Save . and range points. In these cases. To use this functionality. You can make a snapshot of any collision. You can also use the arrow keys to move through and view the collisions in the List view.Allows you to save the collision detection results to a text file.Specifies that the requested report include wireframe highlights around colliding objects. Frame number . Display All . If the collisions are not clearly visible. and you can save the collision report as a text file. Collision set name . adjust the view to get the area of interest and use the Display All command below to view the collisions. try adjusting the view cone to get a better viewing angle. Wireframe highlight . such as type. Taking snapshots of collision detection results using Wireframe highlight and an Anti-alias set greater than 1 is not supported. Collisions for the selected collision set display in the list view. Note • Due to the type of coordinate system used in SAT and AutoCAD files. objects. page 480 474 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Allows you to select a specific frame in the collision set to view. you must install the Construction module. Related Topics • Run Collision Detection. Snapshot . To zoom in on a collision.

In the Collision set name box. select a name. Click Tools > Collision Detection. 4. select a collision set name in the Collision set name box. you can select specific filters for the collision detection process. You cannot select any other tab until you select a name. when creating a new collision set.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Select Filters for Collision Types 1. 2. select All types or Selected types. To delete a collision set. Notes • Always start on the Type tab to either create or select an existing collision set name. • Related Topics • Run Collision Detection. The software only reports the types of collisions that you specify. page 479 • Select Objects and Range. type a name in the Collision set name box. page 477 • View Collision Reports. • Tip • If you choose Selected types. page 480 • Select Collision Display Colors. 3. Tips • To define a new collision set. and then click Delete. page 483 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 475 . All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set. Single tick marks ( ' ) are not allowed in the name. Therefore. page 478 • Select Collision Sounds. Click the Type Filter tab. Under Collision types. you must assign settings for the new set.

Click the Type Filter tab. In the Collision set name box. page 483 476 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 5.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Select Graphic Element Types 1. select All types or Selected types. 4. Note • All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set. 3. page 480 • Select Collision Display Colors. 2. Under Non-linear graphic elements. Tip • If you choose Selected types. Click the Geometry Filter tab. Related Topics • Run Collision Detection. page 479 • Select Filters for Collision Types. you must assign settings for the new set. you can choose the individual types of geometry to filter. select a name. Click Tools > Collision Detection. Therefore. when creating a new collision set. page 475 • View Collision Reports. page 478 • Select Collision Sounds.

To move a set of objects through space. Click the Type Filter tab. you must assign settings for the new set. Click Select to further refine the object definition. Click Select to further refine the object definition. page 483 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 477 .Detecting Collisions: An Overview Select Objects and Range 1. Under Range cube. If you selected Range cube. select Display sets. In the Collision set name box. Tips • To move a single element through three dimensional space during the collision detection process. Under Object. and Elevation (z-axis) coordinates. select the type of object that you would like to include in the collision detection process. 5. • Tip To define a specific volume for collision detection. page 479 • Select Filters for Collision Types. Units are in MU:SU:PU (Master Units : Sub Units : Positional Units). North (y-axis). page 480 • Select Collision Sounds. 3. select Single graphic element. page 476 • View Collision Reports. page 475 • Select Graphic Element Types. select Stationary collisions in selected range cube. select either Entire model or Range cube. Each range is bounded by East (x-axis). Related Topics • Run Collision Detection. Click Tools > Collision Detection. Click the Selection tab. 4. type coordinates under Minimum range and Maximum range. select Range cube. 7. Therefore. 2. when creating a new collision set. • To locate collisions in a static volume. • Note • All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set. select a name. 6.

select a name. 2. page 483 478 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . • Related Topics • Run Collision Detection. when creating a new collision set. page 480 • Select Filters for Collision Types. Select one or more of the color options to assign colors to collision types. In the Collision set name box. you must assign settings for the new set. Click the Type Filter tab. Therefore. If you assign a color to Default and a color to Intersecting. Click the Color tab. 4. the Intersecting color takes precedence and displays for intersecting collisions. page 475 • View Collision Reports. 3. Under Collision colors. 5. select one or more color filters. All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set. 6.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Select Collision Display Colors 1. Notes • • You can click Edit for each selected option to choose a different color. Click Tools > Collision Detection.

5. click Browse to locate a . 6. Select one or more of the options to assign sounds to collision types. make sure the audio drivers are installed on the computer. page 475 • Select Graphic Element Types. page 476 • Select Objects and Range. the Windows folder. In the Collision set name box. Click Tools > Collision Detection. the software searches for sound files in the following standard locations: the current folder. you must assign settings for the new set. page 478 • Select Filters for Collision Types. folders listed in the PATH environment variable. • • • Related Topics • Run Collision Detection. Click the Sound tab. Click the Type Filter tab. page 480 • Select Collision Display Colors. the Windows system folder. the Intersecting sound takes precedence and plays for intersecting collisions.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Select Collision Sounds 1. Therefore. 4. All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set. 3. page 483 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 479 . select a name. 2.wav sound file. If the sound does not seem to be working. when creating a new collision set. and the list of folders mapped in a network. make sure the file is present on the system in an appropriate folder and adjust the speaker volume. page 477 • View Collision Reports. Notes • If you assign a sound to Default and a sound to Intersecting. During a collision detection run. For each selected option. If there is still no sound.

Optionally. Click Tools > Collision Detection.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Run Collision Detection 1. Tip Units for the North. Under Single step move delta in MU:SU:PU. see Keypad Keys. click Report to review previously-executed frames and create a report of the collisions. For more information. Click Single Step to step through the collisions. 4. in motion collision detection process by pressing the Escape key. Therefore. and Elevation (z-axis) fields. The status bar shows the number of objects compared and number of collisions found. Type a number in the Collision limit box. you must assign settings for the new set. the sound plays only on the first collision of that type. • • • 480 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . type the deltas in the North (yaxis). Select Use collision limit. page 173. All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set. A record of each collision run is always stored in the project database. 9. 3. you can save a text log file of any single collision run that exists in the database. For a more precise means of motion control. For a given collision type assigned to a sound file. 2. Tips • The Collision Detection dialog box hides until the collision detection process is complete. East. select a name. • 7. East (x-axis). This is optional. select Activate collision detection. 5. Under Execution control. Click the Type Filter tab. and Elevation fields are in MU:SU:PU (Master Units : Sub Units : Positional Units). 6. when creating a new collision set. 8. • Notes • You can stop the current. 10. Click the Run tab. After you run at least one collision detection session or frame. use keypad motion to move display sets when checking for collisions. In the Collision set name box. • Sounds and colors display for collisions based on the selections on the Sound and Color tabs.

Click Tools > Collision Detection. East (x-axis). After you run at least one collision detection session or frame. Under Execution control. The status bar shows the number of objects compared and number of collisions found. This is optional. Tips • The Collision Detection dialog box hides until the collision detection process is complete. selecting a display set compares the display set elements against the point cloud data. 9. selecting a single element compares it against the point cloud data. and selecting a static element run compares elements in the chosen range against the point cloud data. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 481 . Under Collision types. Tip Selecting this option runs the elements included in the collision set against the entire point cloud data set rather than running the collision detection set against other model elements. Click the Type Filter tab. Tip Units for the North. 2. select Activate collision detection. 3.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Run Collision Detection Against Point Cloud Data 1. and Elevation fields are in MU:SU:PU (Master Units : Sub Units : Positional Units). East. Type a number in the Collision limit box. Click Single Step to step through the collisions. 7. Under Single step move delta in MU:SU:PU. • Sounds and colors are not available. 10. In other words. 5. click Report to review previously-executed frames and create a report of the collisions. • 8. 11. • 6. select a name. Select Use collision limit. type the deltas in the North (yaxis). 4. In the Collision set name box. and Elevation (z-axis) fields. select Point cloud intersections. Click the Run tab.

page 476 • Select Objects and Range. All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set. page 541 482 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . A record of each collision run is handled by the point cloud software. For a more precise means of motion control. use keypad motion to move display sets when checking for collisions. in motion collision detection process by pressing the Escape key. page 483 • View Point Cloud Data. page 479 • Select Filters for Collision Types. • • • • Related Topics • Keypad Keys. when creating a new collision set.Detecting Collisions: An Overview Notes • You can stop the current. page 173. page 173 • Select Collision Display Colors. For more information. Therefore. page 475 • Select Graphic Element Types. page 478 • Select Collision Sounds. page 477 • View Collision Reports. rather than being stored in the project database like during regular model collision detection. you must assign settings for the new set. see Keypad Keys. You must have the Point Cloud Integrator module and a point cloud software package loaded before you can use point cloud collision detection.

8. try adjusting the view cone to get a better viewing angle. click Report. You can click Report on the Collision Detection dialog box at any time to review a report from any previously-executed collision detection run in the database. select a frame.Detecting Collisions: An Overview View Collision Reports 1. In the Frame number box. In the Collision set name box. If the collisions are not clearly visible. Notes • Click Display All to list all collisions with the current view angle. Collision detection reports show any moved display sets in their current locations. A new frame number will not be added to the collision report data when collisions do not occur during a collision detection run. 5. page 480 • Select Filters for Collision Types. View the collisions. 3. Due to the type of coordinate system used in SAT and AutoCAD files. Click Tools > Collision Detection. Under Execution control. In these cases. After running a collision detection and generating a report. Click the Type Filter tab. move the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box off the Main view window to view the collision results. the zoom to collision feature may not work well on some files. Click Snapshot to take a picture of the view with the current collision colors and view angles. Click the Run tab. To zoom in on a collision. page 477 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 483 . adjust the view to get the area of interest and use the Display All command on the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box to view the collisions. Click Save to store your data in a text file. 4. You also can use the arrow keys to move through and view the collisions in the List view. 6. • • • • • • Related Topics • Run Collision Detection. select a name. The current location of a display set may or may not be the same location of the display set at the time collision detection was run. Then. page 475 • Select Objects and Range. click the collision that you want to view. 2. 7. click the list view.

Detecting Collisions: An Overview 484 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

The Collaboration Settings dialog box allows you to update details for the data sets and participants in the collaboration. Offline mode occurs when the driver is not transmitting. not on the network. Slowing the speed of animation replay and motion updates may also improve operating system performance during a collaboration session. Tips • The collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the collaboration conference. You can change the options for the conference by clicking Tools > Collaboration > Edit. A session can have only one driver at a time. Because memory and performance limitations of some operating systems may cause difficulties for high speed collaboration sessions. and any one passenger can change to driver. Processing occurs at each computer so that performance depends on each computer. All members of the collaboration can see the up-to-date design version. based on the NetMeeting profile of the user. The Driver options box allows you to establish settings for the driver of the conference.01 and SmartPlant Review.Collaborating with Others: An Overview Collaborating with Others: An Overview Collaboration allows you and other users in different locations to view and examine the model simultaneously. Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of Microsoft NetMeeting 3. Collaboration accommodates a joint effort for a design review in a single conference. You also can have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger computers. Multiple passengers can participate in the session. The Conference members list box displays the current participants in a tree format. you should assign the Driver to the slowest computer. During a collaboration. You can identify the data set that is currently open in the Data set name box. The driver can use offline mode to configure the computer and temporarily pause the session. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 485 . you can start the conference by clicking Tools > Collaboration > Run. This will reduce the number of updates that are sent to passengers during a short time interval. A passenger always works online. NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member. After you confirm the options on the Collaboration Settings dialog box. A collaboration passenger is the person that is watching the session. online mode occurs when the driver is transmitting commands to passengers.

When you click Work Offline. One problem encountered in a collaboration session occurs when collaboration users have multiple databases that get out of synchronization on measurement.Collaborating with Others: An Overview • Only the driver. tags and display sets or delete measurements and tags. the software synchronizes the cursor track of each computer. All participants can see the same cursor as it moves over the view and during a zoom. When you click Track Mouse Cursor. Only changes made by a driver working online will be broadcast to keep all active users synchronized. should make changes which impact the project database such as adding or deleting measurements or tags and adding display sets. Drivers working off line do not do not send database changes to other users. In this situation. If running on the same shared copy of the project database. the internal table indices are updated for the new record. the views transmit from the driver computer to all passenger computers. The Refresh button provides an up-to-date list of conference members. transmission stops from the driver. When sharing a common database. This problem can occur when users make offline changes to add measurement. and no longer passenger. passenger A's database will not accept the change because their database already has a tag 5. Collaboration sessions may run on the same shared copy of the project database or on multiple copies of the project database. For example. it is recommended that the same rule for changes be followed. As SmartPlant Review adds a new record to the database. 486 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Passengers receive information but do not send database changes to other users. The Drive button assigns your computer as the driver. depending on the contents of the database. that tag will not be transmitted to the other users. the Refresh Data command can take some time to execute. However. If the driver then adds tag 5. if passenger A adds tag 5. When you click Send Driver's State. it is possible for an individual user to start the Refresh Data command to update their local computer. as shown in the Conference members box. the driver's tag 5 will not appear on passenger A's display or in passenger A's database. working online. tags or display sets. This action is useful when you change drivers or a new participant joins the conference.

whiteboard. the collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the controlling computer. it may be necessary for the passenger to Auto-hide the task bar on their desktop to see the full SmartPlant Review window. The software attempts to make the SmartPlant Review application the same size on all computers. security. • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 487 . A collaboration passenger is the person watching the session. including: • • • • • • • • • • • Movements of the pointer Standard single pane. and deleting) Add measurement and delete last measurement Create display set Display set manipulations Change to the driver control Changes in NetMeeting (for example. The passenger can view several different activities originating at the driver computer. Internet Directory) Regular view updates in all views ScheduleReview Animation Collision Detection with display set movement only • • • Passengers running with a different display resolution than the driver will experience the following behavior: • The collaboration software automatically compensates for different display resolutions between the driver and passenger computers. the collaboration software will adjust the SmartPlant Review application to fit the passenger's display while keeping the window size proportionally the same as the driver's SmartPlant Review window size. three pane and four pane view layouts and toolbars Updates to the view Display modes Auto-Highlight and display of object data in the text window Tags (for creating. If the passenger is running a smaller display than the driver. If the passenger is running at a lower resolution than the driver. sound.Collaborating with Others: An Overview Passenger Settings During a collaboration conference. editing.

If necessary.This is the default behavior for NetMeeting. the passenger can dock or arrange the toolbars as needed on their computer. • • Related Topics • Establish a Collaboration Session. those changes will not display on the passenger computer. This setting allows the user with a high-end graphics card to properly share SmartPlant Review through NetMeeting. • Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview. page 490 • Rejoin a Collaboration Session. The driver can turn on or off the passenger's toolbars. NetMeeting receives all graphics calls and transmits the changes to the display to other users.Collaborating with Others: An Overview Notes • If the driver changes either the active measurement collection or the settings of a measurement collection. and you want to share the SmartPlant Review application with other users. You cannot use NetMeeting in both modes at the same time. the passenger's preferred toolbar arrangement and button size will not be modified. Collaboration Mode . Closing or resizing individual windows on the driver's computer will not display on the passenger's computer. page 491 NetMeeting Command View > Advanced > NetMeeting Enables SmartPlant Review to work with Microsoft NetMeeting software using one of two modes below. • Application Sharing Mode . you should be the user who sets the NetMeeting option on the View > Settings > Options tab in SmartPlant Review. If you have a high-end graphics card with private client drivers. Do not select the View > Settings > Options > NetMeeting check box. regardless of the video card installed on your computer. page 485 488 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . However.Available from SmartPlant Review. The computer that displays the application only needs one copy of SmartPlant Review. Collaboration Mode does not use application sharing from NetMeeting.

This reduces the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval. To avoid difficulties with memory and performance limitations of the individual operating systems. Performance depends on each computer. Have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger computers. assign the Driver to the slowest computer.01 and SmartPlant Review. To reduce the burden on slower passenger computers. slow the speed of animation replay and motion updates. All members of the collaboration can see the up-to-date version. Collaboration allows you and other users in different locations to view and examine the model simultaneously. You must install the Collaboration module before you can use this functionality. Important • Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of Microsoft NetMeeting 3.Collaborating with Others: An Overview Collaboration Run Command Tools > Collaboration > Run Starts the Collaboration module and NetMeeting. A collaboration session accommodates a joint effort for a design review in a single conference. • • • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 489 . not on the network.

Also. 4. The driver can click Work Offline to stop transmission to the passenger computers. To change the driver during a collaboration session. click Tools > Collaboration > Run. On all computers use the same dataset or share a common data set. the passenger who wants to control the session clicks the Drive button. At the computer assigned as driver. host a NetMeeting call. A collaboration passenger is the person that is watching the session.01 and SmartPlant Review. Performance depends on each computer. slow the speed of animation replay and motion updates. The default driver is the meeting host. 5. not on the network. This will reduce the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval. 2.Collaborating with Others: An Overview Establish a Collaboration Session 1. Important • Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of Microsoft NetMeeting 3. Set the security level that you want. This action allows the driver to work without anyone viewing the display on the computer. and any one passenger can become the driver. On each passenger computer. 6. have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger computer. call the driver computer and log in using the conference name and password (if applicable). assign the Driver to the slowest computer. For example. A session can have only one driver at a time. To avoid difficulties with memory and performance limitations of the individual operating systems. In this case the caller is the driver. Type the password. Instead of hosting a meeting. Start SmartPlant Review on each computer. The driver can manually send views and the text window information by clicking the Send State button. • • • • • 490 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . two computers can call each other with a password (optional). Multiple passengers can participate in the session. On each computer. To reduce the burden on slower passenger computers. and use the same database. the driver can work offline to configure the computer. The driver can work online to transmit commands to the passenger computers or work offline to temporarily stop transmitting. • 3. Tip The collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the collaboration conference. A passenger always works online.

If conf. • Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview. click End Task in Task Manager to stop the program.exe program is part of NetMeeting and sometimes does not stop when NetMeeting is closed. 2. Notes • If the above steps do not work. something goes wrong with NetMeeting and you get dropped out of a conference due to network or other outside problems. then re-start both products. Exit Collaboration by toggling off Tools > Collaboration > Run. then use Process tab in the Windows Task Manager to determine if the conf. If you were not the conference Host.exe is still running. 4. If you were not the conference Host. If you were the conference Host. If you were the conference Host. To cleanly rejoin the conference. page 485 • Establish a Collaboration Session. page 490 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 491 . If you were the conference Host. exit both NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review. re-start NetMeeting and rejoin the conference. everyone needs to exit and re-start both NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review.Collaborating with Others: An Overview Rejoin a Collaboration Session Sometimes. or a "Bad Data Channel" message appears.exe program is still running. simply rejoin the existing conference. simply rejoin the existing conference. do the following: 1. 3. everyone needs to exit and re-start both NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review. and then re-start both NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review. The conf. If you still have trouble rejoining the conference. If you were not the conference Host. exit both NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review. Exit NetMeeting. everyone in the conference needs to do steps 1 and 2.

Have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger computers.01 and SmartPlant Review. page 485 • Collaboration Settings Dialog Box. slow the speed of animation replay and motion updates. You can identify the data set that is currently open in the Data set name box. NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member. which allows you to update details for the data sets and participants in the collaboration. To reduce the burden on slower passenger computers. page 490 492 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . This reduces the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval. The Driver options box lets you establish settings for the driver of the conference. based on the NetMeeting profile of the user. The Conference members list box displays the current participants in a tree format. assign the Driver to the slowest computer. You must install the Collaboration module before you can use this functionality. Important • Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of Microsoft NetMeeting 3.Collaborating with Others: An Overview Collaboration Edit Command Tools > Collaboration > Edit Displays the Collaboration Settings dialog box. page 493 • Establish a Collaboration Session. • • • • Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview. not on the network. To avoid difficulties with memory and performance limitations of the individual operating systems. Performance depends on each computer.

Data set name . All participants can see the same cursor as it moves over the view and during a zoom. Have the driver work off-line while positioning the view for the passenger computers.Identifies the data set that is currently open. Track Mouse Cursor .Collaborating with Others: An Overview Collaboration Settings Dialog Box Allows you to specify settings for your Collaboration session. Conference members Displays the current collaboration participants in a tree format. To avoid difficulties with memory and performance limitations of the individual operating systems. To reduce the burden on slower passenger computers. This action is useful when you change drivers or when a new participant joins the conference. Performance depends on each computer. slow the speed of animation replay and motion updates. NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member based on the NetMeeting profile of the user. This action is useful when you need to perform set-up prior to a collaboration session. Drive . This will reduce the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval. Send Driver's State Transmits the views from the driver computer to all passenger computers.Allows you to become the driver in the collaboration session.Synchronizes the cursor track on each computer in the conference. Refresh . Any passenger can become a driver at any time. not on the network. Work Offline . SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 493 .Updates the list of conference members.Stops transmission from the driver computer. assign the Driver to the slowest computer. SmartPlant Review and the SmartPlant Review Collaboration module. Important • • • • Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of Microsoft NetMeeting.

page 490 • Rejoin a Collaboration Session. To avoid difficulties with memory and performance limitations of the individual operating systems. page 485 • Establish a Collaboration Session. You must install the Collaboration module before you can use this functionality. page 491 494 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . • • • • Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview. slow the speed of animation replay and motion updates.Collaborating with Others: An Overview Edit Collaboration Settings Click Tools > Collaboration > Edit. Performance depends on each computer. This reduces the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval. assign the Driver to the slowest computer. To reduce the burden on slower passenger computers. Important • Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of Microsoft NetMeeting 3. Have the driver work off-line while positioning the view for the passenger computers.01 and SmartPlant Review. not on the network.

sri file into the current project database. page 118 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 495 . page 510 • Set View Options. You can also reverse the action. • Related Topics • Export ScheduleReview Projects Command. You can also import a selected ScheduleReview project from a different SmartPlant Review project database into the current project database. For example.0. you see the update after all drawing is complete. or fly through the model while displaying the construction sequence. For consistency. you can use ScheduleReview to help analyze the construction process to avoid problems. You can import an existing . senior management. you see the update as it is drawn. if this option is turned on. ScheduleReview is ideal for presenting a fly through to project staff. You can also move along a predefined path in the model as you continuously step through time. ScheduleReview sessions update the views using the Buffered Update option. week. Notes • ScheduleReview supports the following planning software: Microsoft Project 98. and clients. This imported and manipulated ScheduleReview information can then be exported to a SmartPlant Review project database file. so that you can display the deconstruction sequence. ScheduleReview allows you to use abstract data from your project planning software to display the sequence of construction. or month) or continuously. Primavera Project Planner 2. make sure the Buffered Update option is on. ScheduleReview allows you to visualize the construction cycle in single steps (by day. show the construction of specific units in the context of the overall project schedule.0B (with RA installed). page 511 • Import ScheduleReview Projects Command. display the project as it should appear on a certain day. If this option is turned off. Key Frame Motion animation is always double-buffered.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Available in the Construction module. and Primavera Project Planner 3.

Save animation frames to disk for post-processing with digital video editing software. Execute queries on model elements and display results graphically. You can also reverse the action.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview ScheduleReview Settings Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings Displays the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box. or transparent modes. Display the start and stop of construction tasks in shaded. Associate element groups manually or automatically with specific construction tasks. Important • To use this functionality. wireframe. you must install the Construction module. • • • • 496 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . which allows you to use abstract data from your project planning software to display the sequence of construction. Group model elements manually or automatically for logical manipulation. so that you can display the deconstruction sequence. page 521 ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box Provides features that allow you to: • • Specify the SmartPlant Review model and the project planning software. Related Topics • Create a New ScheduleReview Project.

page 496 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 497 . Refer to the user documentation for the respective program for information on installing and using the software. Prior to using ScheduleReview. • Related Topics • ScheduleReview Settings Command. Notes • • To use this functionality. ScheduleReview project . Browse .Resets the Project file field so that you can browse to another project file. you must install the Construction module. Project file . Reset Fields .Specifies the name and path of the planner file associated with the ScheduleReview project. SmartPlant Review supports Microsoft Project and Primavera project files.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Project Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Defines the brand of scheduling software that you are using and the name of the project file. at least one of the supported project planning programs (for example. Project type . you must first create a new ScheduleReview project. If you are setting up your own model to view with ScheduleReview.Allows you to select the type of planner project to associate with the ScheduleReview project that is currently active. For more information.Allows you to navigate to a new project file. Primavera or Microsoft Project) must be installed on your computer. page 521. see Create a New ScheduleReview Project.Displays the name of the currently active ScheduleReview project file.

Allows you to define the visibility for the symbology that is currently selected. You can choose Shaded. Color . This helps you identify the status of various elements in your project throughout the review process.Specifies the type of object for which you are defining symbology. Related Topics • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview. Visible .Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Symbology Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Provides options for defining the appearance of SmartPlant Review elements when you execute the ScheduleReview command.Displays the color of this symbology. Type . Wireframe. page 495 498 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . For example. allowing you to edit the color for this symbology.Allows you to define the style for the symbology that is currently selected. Edit . you can specify that items display in blue wireframe when tasks start and green shaded when tasks end. or Transparent.Displays the Color dialog box. Style . You can define the appearance of each task individually.

the first frame of the view group is displayed. and all key frame motion animation commands are disabled during the ScheduleReview session. Until this date is reached during playback. Notes • If a ScheduleReview session with its own animation is started. Days per frame . Pause.Specifies the date on which you want the view group animation to start playing. page 297 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview. Start date . View group . subject to the unit selection. all of the current key frame motion animation commands (Display. Frames End . • Related Topics • Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview. Rate . If a ScheduleReview session is started without its own animation (No Animation is selected in the View Group list). Loop . Pause.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Animation Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Links a key frame animation group to ScheduleReview playback. and Stop commands do not affect the key frame motion commands. You can specify the rate in Days per frame or Frames per day. using an animation path that you created in SmartPlant Review with the View > Save and Recall command.Selects the highest frame number to display from the selected key frame animation. the current animation state resets. Frames Start . Play. any key frame animation is stopped.Specifies that key frame animations start over from the beginning automatically if the last frame is reached before the ScheduleReview playback ends. Likewise.Specifies the name of the key frame view group that you want to link to this ScheduleReview playback.Selects the rate for updating key frame animations. page 261 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 499 .Updates key frame animations by one frame per number of days entered in the Rate box.Selects the first frame of the selected animation that displays. Frames per day .Updates frame animations by the number of frames entered in the Rate box for each day of the ScheduleReview playback. and Stop) can be used during the ScheduleReview session. the ScheduleReview Play.

If you select High. Browse . Click . Low. the quality is slightly higher but process more slowly. the frames are high quality but process very slowly. frame size.Display a preview of what the first image will be called. Medium. If you select None. File type .Specifies the width of the image in pixels.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Snapshot Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Defines the settings for the images that are created when you record a ScheduleReview playback. Directory . If you select Low or Medium.rgb for Intergraph Red Green Blue file format.Displays the destination folder path for the saved animation frames. The sample File name (directly below the Files prefix text box) updates to reflect changes. You can choose from None.Sets the prefix to use as the first part of the name of every ScheduleReview snapshot.bmp for Windows bitmap.Specifies the height of the image in pixels. or click . and High. Width . Wait until all frames are written to disk before performing other tasks. the frames are of the lowest quality but process quickly. Start number .Specifies the type of anti-aliasing that you want to apply to the frames. as well as the folder and drive locations for the frames. Height . page 504 500 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . This value is appended to the Files prefix to create the image file names. File name . You can specify the folder by using Browse. antialiasing level.Specifies the frame number to start at when naming image files. Options specify the prefix name for each frame. Files prefix .Allows you to navigate to a folder or file. Caution • The Snapshot Frame window captures the image of the cursor and any dialog box that is positioned over it. Related Topics • Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings.Specifies the graphic file type for the images saved to disk. Anti-alias .

In addition. are accepted.5. This process allows you to closely analyze each step through the construction process and anticipate problems that may arise. Current . if necessary. The latest possible value (and the default value) is the finishing date of the last task of the project.Displays the schedule status in terms of date and percentage of completion. For example.Selects the last date to display in the ScheduleReview animation.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Review Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Displays the date settings for the ScheduleReview playback.Selects the first date to display in the ScheduleReview animation. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 501 . Per seconds . week.Sets the number of seconds in between dynamic updates of the ScheduleReview playback. The earliest possible value (and the default value) is the starting date of the first task of the project. You select a date from the calendar.Selects the current date of the ScheduleReview playback. Start . this command provides several different options such as viewing the model as it appears on a specific day or at a certain percentage of work complete. such as 1. or month. You can use this option to analyze refurbishment plans for the model and analyze procedures for removing or replacing existing pieces of equipment. You select a date from the calendar. you can determine if adding a large piece of equipment at a certain point in the construction process will interfere with the construction of additional items in the model. You can also review the model based on query criteria. Percent complete . You select a date from the calendar. With these command options. Step in days .Selects the number of days to advance the current date during each update of the ScheduleReview playback. You can also step through the deconstruction process. End . Decimal values. you can step through the construction process by day.

Highlight query during review . Snapshot . page 496 502 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Displays query items during a schedule review.Displays a modified Query dialog box.Instructs ScheduleReview that if the animation finishes before the review cycle is complete.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Loop . If Always Display is not selected. To interrupt the review process. You can either select an existing query. • Related Topics • ScheduleReview Settings Command. or use the Query dialog box to define a new query. Notes • Before using this command. Select Query . click Stop on the ScheduleReview toolbar. according to the settings on the Snapshot tab. This option is not selected by default. query results display only when you reach the query's start date. this modified dialog box functions the same as the regular Query dialog box. define groups and associate tasks with the groups. and allows you to change only the Color (Highlight Method) and Always Display (Additional Settings) options.Allows you to specify that the frames ScheduleReview playback generates automatically write to disk. This dialog box has a reduced set of options. the animation starts over from the beginning and runs until the review process is complete. Otherwise.

or Shaded. page 504 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 503 . Click Browse to select a new Project file. • Notes • You can also select Schedule Review Settings ScheduleReview toolbar. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings. 5. page 504 • Set ScheduleReview Project Settings. Select Default for Color or select a specific color. with the Refresh Active Project command) and concurrently opening the same file with an instance of the Microsoft Project application. page 505 • Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings. Select Default for Style or select Wireframe. choose a Project type. Click Apply. you must install the Construction module. Notes • The Task Symbology command allows you to define the symbology of specific tasks at the start and finish of the task. Specify ScheduleReview Task Symbology 1. This command is available only when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you import a file. 3. 4. Select a Type of task. Caution Avoid opening a Microsoft Project planner file using automation through ScheduleReview (specifically. the Review command uses the default symbology. • To use this functionality. • • Related Topics • Set Review Control Settings. page 503 • Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings. 2.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Set ScheduleReview Project Settings 1. On the Project tab. 4. on the • Reset Fields resets the Project file field so that you can browse to another project file. 3. Transparent. 2. Select Visibility for Default or Visible. Click Tools > Schedule Review > Task Symbology. If you do not use this command to assign symbology.

5. Notes • You can also select Schedule Review Settings ScheduleReview toolbar. or video. 2. 8. Select a Rate. 6. Click the Snapshot tab. Select an Anti-alias. on the ScheduleReview • To use this functionality. Type a number for the Dimensions Height. 5. You can use ViZfx Web Pro to apply sophisticated special effects to your animations. Type a Prefix for the files. 7. Browse to the output folder for the ScheduleReview file. 6. 3. 4. you must install the Construction module. You can download ViZfx Web Pro with your SmartPlant Review serial number from http://www. Select Loop to loop animation. Select a View group. Note • You also can select ScheduleReview Settings toolbar. Type a Start Number for the Frame. 9. Type a number for the Dimensions Width.asp. Select a Start date. special web projects. Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings 1.com/visualization/vizfx. 9. 2.intergraph. Select a File type. Select an End frame. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings. 504 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Select Days per frame or Frames per day. on the • • To use this functionality. 3. 4. Click the Animation tab. you must install the Construction module.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings 1. Select a Start frame. 7. 8. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings.

The checkmark by a ScheduleReview project indicates that it is the active ScheduleReview project. Click the Review tab. If Project Manager is not visible. click View > Project Manager. Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager. 7. Notes • • To use this functionality. Click Select Query to select or define a query. Select Snapshot to display as a snapshot. you must install the Construction module. Select a Start date. 10. 5. edit the settings that you want. 8.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Set Review Control Settings 1. 3. Project Manager does not display any items. If a model document is not open. Select Highlight query during review to display query items during a schedule review. Select a Current date. 4. 3. 11. 2. Right-click in the window and then click Edit > ScheduleReview > Settings from the shortcut menu. Open a document in SmartPlant Review. Edit a ScheduleReview Project in Project Manager 1. 9. 6. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings. Select Loop to repeat ScheduleReview play in a loop. 4. Type a number of Seconds for Dynamic updating. In Project Manager. page 207 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 505 . Select an End date. on the ScheduleReview • To use this functionality. page 522 • Using Project Manager: An Overview. 5. 2. expand the ScheduleReview node. On the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box. Note • You can also select ScheduleReview Settings toolbar. you must install the Construction module. Select a Step (in days) for Dynamic updating.

page 509 506 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . you must install the Construction module. For example. To use this functionality. The project planning file that you want to use with this query must already exist.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview New ScheduleReview Query Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > New Searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and displays the elements according to selected options. For example. these items are available as search criteria. Notes • The search criteria reside in your project planning file. and Remaining Work. shaded graphics. % Complete. The groups and tasks associated with the groups must already be defined to use them in the query. • • • Related Topics • Create a ScheduleReview Query. if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost. you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red.

shaded graphics.Deletes the currently selected query. Definition • Criteria . Delete . Edit . For example.Edits the criteria for the currently selected query.Displays the defined criteria for the query that is currently selected. • • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 507 . Name .Clears the query results and restores the display to normal material colors. you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and displays the elements according to selected options.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box Searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file.Allows you to select an existing query name or to enter a new one.Evaluates the query that is currently selected and updates the materials or objects in the Main view accordingly. Restore Display . Execute Query .

page 509 • New ScheduleReview Query Command. these items are available as search criteria. For example.Fits all objects into the Main view when you start the selected query.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Fit • • • None . page 506 508 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . you must install the Construction module.Displays only non-matching elements when you start the currently selected query. All .Displays the Color dialog box. • Related Topics • Create a ScheduleReview Query. Notes Display • • • Highlight method • • • • • To use this functionality.Omits the fit operation when you start the selected query. % Complete. All but query results . allowing you to change the highlight color for the objects that your query finds. if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost. Query results .Defines the style for highlighting objects that your query finds. Color .Displays only matching elements when you start the currently selected query. and Remaining Work. The search criteria resides in your project planning file. The project planning file that you want to use with this query must already exist. Query results .Displays the current highlight color for the objects that your query finds. Style . All . Edit .Displays both matching and non-matching elements when you start the currently selected query.Fits all objects that match the currently selected query into the Main view when you start the query.

and Remaining Work. Fit Query displays only the query result objects in the Main view. 2. % Complete. 3. Fit All displays all graphics. Select an option in the Fit section. Notes • The New ScheduleReview Query command searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file. For example. Select an option in the Display section for viewing the query results. page 515 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 509 . you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red. 4. Display Query results specifies that only the graphics associated with the query results display when you execute a query. Tips • • Fit None does not fit the query results into the Main view. Enter a phrase to identify the query in the Name box. these items are available as search criteria.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Create a ScheduleReview Query 1. The project planning file that you want to use with this query must already exist. 5. Click Execute Query. shaded graphics. click the Edit button to specify the limits of the query in the Criteria box. The search criteria reside in your project planning file. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > New. In the Highlight method section. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and displays the elements according to selected options. select the display format in Style and then specify the color for displaying objects found in the query in Color. For example. 6. if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost. Click the Edit button to display the Color dialog box if you need to change the color. • 7. • Display All but query results specifies that only the graphics not associated with the query results display when you execute a query. In the Definition section. not just the query results. • • Related Topics • Edit a ScheduleReview Query. • Tips • Display All specifies that all SmartPlant Review graphics display when you execute a query. in the Main view.

You can also import a selected ScheduleReview project from a different SmartPlant Review project database into the current project database. On the Open dialog box. open the MS Project Planner file in MS Project 98. ensure that all ScheduleReview settings have a valid option selected. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. Related Topics • Export a ScheduleReview Project.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Import ScheduleReview Projects Command File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects Allows you to import an existing . Therefore. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. • • • 510 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . and click Open. Note • SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. select a file or browse to the file that you want. page 511 Import a ScheduleReview Project 1. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases.sri file created with MS Project Planner. You can see a list of projects by expanding the ScheduleReview node in Project Manager.sri file from a previous ScheduleReview session. To avoid error messages that may occur when you open an existing . SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. Notes • • The project that you import must have a unique name. 2. When you import an existing . it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data.sri file into the current project database. Click File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects. This imported and manipulated ScheduleReview information can then be exported to a SmartPlant Review project database file. Therefore.

Notes • You must set the active ScheduleReview project in Project Manager. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. Therefore.mdb file to which you want to export the active ScheduleReview project. see Set Active Project Command. page 524. SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or export between project databases. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. Note • You must set the active ScheduleReview project in Project Manager before exporting project data. On the Save As dialog box. • Related Topics • Create a New ScheduleReview Project. it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the data. page 523 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 511 . page 524. For more information. 2. For more information. select a file or browse to the file that you want. page 521 • Delete a ScheduleReview Project.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Export ScheduleReview Projects Command File > Export > ScheduleReview Projects Displays the Save As dialog box. you can select the . Click File > Export > ScheduleReview Projects. Therefore. • Export a ScheduleReview Project 1. see Set Active Project Command. and click Save. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. From this dialog box.

if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost. and Remaining Work. page 509 512 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and displays the elements according to the options selected. For example. % Complete. these items are available as search criteria. The project planning file that you want to use with this query must already exist. you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red. • • • Related Topics • Create a ScheduleReview Query. The groups and tasks associated with the groups must already be defined to use them in the query. For example. Notes • The search criteria reside in your project planning file. you must install the Construction module. To use this functionality.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Edit ScheduleReview Query Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > Edit Searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file. shaded graphics.

Execute Query . Edit . None . • • • Fit • • • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 513 .Evaluates the query that is currently selected and updates the materials or objects in the Main view accordingly.Allows you to select an existing query name or to enter a new one.Clears the query results and restores the display to normal material colors. Name . Delete .Omits the fit operation when you start the selected query.Displays the defined criteria for the query that is currently selected.Fits all objects that match the currently selected query into the Main view when you start the query.Fits all objects into the Main view when you start the selected query.Deletes the currently selected query.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Edit ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box Allows you to edit an existing ScheduleReview query. All . Restore Display .Edits the criteria for the currently selected query. Query results . Definition • Criteria .

Displays the current highlight color for the objects that your query finds. you must install the Construction module. % Complete. The search criteria reside in your project planning file. Edit . Style . these items are available as search criteria. allowing you to change the highlight color for the objects that your query finds.Displays only matching elements when you start the currently selected query. For example. All but query results . The project planning file that you want to use with this query must already exist.Displays only non-matching elements when you start the currently selected query.Defines the style for highlighting objects that your query finds.Displays the Color dialog box.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Display • All . Color . page 509 • New ScheduleReview Query Command. if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost. page 506 514 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Query results . Notes • • Highlight method • • • • • To use this functionality.Displays both matching and non-matching elements when you start the currently selected query. and Remaining Work. • Related Topics • Create a ScheduleReview Query.

Tips • • Fit None does not fit the query results into the Main view. you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red. Select an option to Display query results. Select an option to Fit query results. • The search criteria that you use come from your project planning file. Notes • Edit ScheduleReview Query searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Edit a ScheduleReview Query 1. Click Edit to update the query using your project planning program. For example. not just the query results. • 4. if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost. in the Main view. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and displays the elements according to the options selected. Tip To delete a query. • Tips • Display All specifies that all SmartPlant Review graphics display when you execute a query. % Complete. these items are available as search criteria. Fit All displays all graphics. Select a Highlight method Color. shaded graphics. • Display All but query results specifies that only the graphics not associated with the query results display when you execute a query. • 7. 3. The project planning file that you want to use with this query must already exist. Fit Query displays only the query result objects in the Main view. and Remaining Work. Select a Highlight method Style. For example. 2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > Edit. 6. Display Query results specifies that only the graphics associated with the query results display when you execute a query. 5. The groups and tasks associated with the groups must already be defined to use them in the query. select the query and click Delete. Select a query Name. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 515 .

This command is available only when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you import a file. Related Topics • Specify ScheduleReview Task Symbology. Visibility Default . allowing you to select the color for the symbology.Displays the Color dialog box.Allows you to define the style for the symbology.Allows you to specify a color for the symbology.Allows you to select a symbology to edit. page 516 516 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Color Default -Allows you to select the default color for the symbology. Edit . Style Default -Allows you to select the default style for the symbology. Transparent. Notes • • If you do not use this command to assign symbology.Allows you to select the default visibility for the symbology. To use this functionality. Color . the Review command uses the default symbology. You can choose Wireframe. Type .Displays and sets the visibility for the symbology. Style . page 503 Task Symbology Dialog Box Enables you to edit symbology settings for the task that is currently active in the ScheduleReview project tree. Related Topics • Specify ScheduleReview Task Symbology. Visible . page 503 • Task Symbology Command. Task ID -Displays the unique ID of the task to which this symbology applies.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Task Symbology Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Task Symbology Allows you to define the symbology of specific tasks at the start and finish of the task. you must install the Construction module. or Shaded.

Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Auto-Association Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Auto-Association Associates tasks with a group automatically. and inspect steel pipe. if you have a task named steel pipe. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 517 . ScheduleReview can associate all the tasks that contain the text string steel pipe with the group steel pipe. if you have a task called steel pipe. For example. Match substring of group name . page 518 Auto-Association Dialog Box Compares the names of existing groups to the names of existing tasks and automatically associates the tasks with a group. Match whole string . the task can be associated with a group called steel pipe iso15. Related Topics • ScheduleReview Auto Association.Looks for task names with a substring that matches a group name. As a result. Note • Before using this command define all of the groups and tasks that you will use to review the model. For example. you may have a group called steel pipe associated with all the steel pipes in your model. When you use this command. the task can be associated with a group called steel pipe. the task is only associated with a group called steel pipe.Looks for tasks that match a substring of a group name. paint steel pipe. if you have a task named paint steel pipe. You may also have several tasks in your project file named install steel pipe. Match substring of task name. ScheduleReview looks for group names that match task names.Looks for task names that exactly match the group name. The task names listed above have a text string (steel pipe) that match the group name steel pipe. It works by comparing the names of existing groups to the names of existing tasks. For example. For example.

Notes • The Auto Association command automatically associates tasks with a group. If not selected. if you have a task named paint steel pipe.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Match case . For example.Adds the result of the current operation to the existing set of associations. but not steel pipe. For example. page 517 • ScheduleReview Auto Association. Select a method. define all of the groups and tasks that you will use to review the model. • Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Association. page 518 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview. You can use this option in association with any of the three association methods. page 495 ScheduleReview Auto Association 1. ScheduleReview deletes associations before creating new ones. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Auto Association. page 495 518 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . the task can be associated with a group called steel pipe. 2. Related Topics • Auto-Association Command. You can use this option in association with any of the three association methods. Before using this command. Cumulative . page 519 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview. It works by comparing the names of existing groups to the names of existing tasks. Steel Pipe matches Steel Pipe. The Cumulative option also looks for task names with a substring that matches a group name. Tip • The program automatically associates the tasks that match the specified criteria with the appropriate group.Matches tasks with groups using case-sensitivity.

ID . Selected display sets are highlighted. • Related Topics • Remove a ScheduleReview Association. Note • This command is available only when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you import a file.Specifies the display sets to select for completing the type of criteria definition. page 520 • Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings. Add a ScheduleReview Association 1. Name . Notes • Use this command when you want to create an association between a task and one or more display sets. Add Association Dialog Box Allows you to add an association between a task and one or more display sets.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Add Association Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Add Association Allows you to manually create an association between a task and one or more display sets. select the ScheduleReview task to add. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Add Association. This command is available only when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you import a file. page 504 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 519 .Displays the unique ID for the display set. 2. In Project Manager.

page 519 • ScheduleReview Auto Association. • Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Association. You can restore the associations that you just removed by dragging the display set name and dropping it on the recently unassociated display set. Select the ScheduleReview task to remove from Project Manager. Notes • This command is available only when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you import a file. You can restore the associations that you just removed by dragging the display set name and dropping it on the recently unassociated display set. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Remove Association.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Remove Association Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Remove Association Disassociates a task from one or more display sets. Notes • This command is available only when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you import a file. page 518 520 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . • Remove a ScheduleReview Association 1. 2.

Using ScheduleReview: An Overview New Project Command Tools > ScheduleReview > New Project Allows you to enter a unique name for a new ScheduleReview session. 2. page 510 • ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box. Type a Name for the new project. Create a New ScheduleReview Project 1. page 523 • Export a ScheduleReview Project. Related Topics • Delete a ScheduleReview Project. Name .Allows you to enter a unique name for the new ScheduleReview project. New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box Creates a new ScheduleReview project. page 496 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 521 . Note • After creating a project. you must define ScheduleReview Settings. page 511 • Import a ScheduleReview Project. Define settings on the Schedule Review Settings dialog box. 3. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > New Project.

page 208 • Using Project Manager: An Overview. On the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box. enter the name of the project. page 210 • Project Manager Command. Right-click in the window. expand the ScheduleReview node. 4. If you right-click in Project Manager. 6. If Project Manager is not displayed. On the shortcut menu. you must install the Construction module. Open a document. 5. 2. click New Project. you can access commands on the shortcut menu to run or edit ScheduleReview projects. enter the settings that you want. If a document is not open. page 207 522 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 505 • Move the Project Manager Window. On the New ScheduleReview dialog box. Notes • Project Manager displays as an undocked window by default. 3.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager 1. the shortcut menu does not appear. • • Related Topics • Edit a ScheduleReview Project in Project Manager. To use this functionality. click View > Project Manager. In Project Manager.

2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Delete Project. Delete a ScheduleReview Project 1. Note • To use this functionality. page 521 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview. page 495 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 523 . select the ScheduleReview project that you want to delete. In Project Manager. you must install the Construction module.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Delete Project Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Delete Project Allows you to remove a previously defined ScheduleReview project from the session. this action cannot be reversed. Projects . Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box Deletes one or more ScheduleReview projects. Caution • A message is displayed confirming that you want to delete the project. When you delete a project. Caution • When you delete a project. this action cannot be reversed. Related Topics • Create a New ScheduleReview Project.Displays the available ScheduleReview projects.

Using this command ensures that the most recent data is available for the ScheduleReview session.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Set Active Project Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Set Active Project Identifies which ScheduleReview project is used in the current review session. Refresh Active Project Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Refresh Active Project Updates the active project with current data. Note • You must have project planning software such as MS Project or Primavera loaded to use this command.Displays the available ScheduleReview projects. 524 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Projects . Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box Allows you to select the active ScheduleReview project.

2. The Play command starts the review process using the parameters defined on the Review tab of the Settings dialog box. pause. you must install the Construction module. 3. When you click Play. or stop the ScheduleReview process at your convenience. Play a ScheduleReview Project 1. Select a ScheduleReview project to open. the review process starts on the Start Date that you defined and stops on the End Date. Play Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Play Starts the review process using the parameters defined on the Review tab of the Settings dialog box. page 528 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 525 . Click Play Notes • on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start ScheduleReview. You also can play the review process by pressing Ctrl+Alt+R on the keyboard. • Related Topics • Record a ScheduleReview Session. Note • To use this functionality. You can also use more advanced commands. the review process starts on the start date that you defined and stops on the end date.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Review Controls The ScheduleReview controls allow you to view your construction sequences quickly and efficiently. You can play. When you click Play. such as specifying a particular date for viewing. Click File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects.

526 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Forward. Note • You can also stop the review process by pressing Ctrl+Alt+S on the keyboard. Tips • You can also use the Go To Start. You can also pause by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Space on the keyboard. Forward Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Forward Allows you to step forward through the current ScheduleReview session. Go To End or Stop command when Pause is activated. Back. • Stop Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Stop Stops the current ScheduleReview session. Pause Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Pause Interrupts the current ScheduleReview session.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview View a ScheduleReview Project at a Specific Percent Complete Move the slider bar for Percent Complete on the ScheduleReview toolbar to display the review at that percentage of completion. Note • Percent Complete displays the status of the review whenever a review is played. Note • Forward is available only when ScheduleReview is paused.

Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Back Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Back Allows you to step back through the ScheduleReview session in one-day increments. Go to Start Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go to Start Takes you back to the initial start date defined for the ScheduleReview session. Note • Back is available only when ScheduleReview is paused. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 527 . Go to Date Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go to Date Allows you to jump to a specific date within the current ScheduleReview session. Note • Go to Start is available only when ScheduleReview is paused. Note • Go to End is available only when ScheduleReview is paused. Go to End Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go to End Allows you to go directly to the last date defined in the current session.

Tip If the Record button is not active. Record a ScheduleReview Session 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings. Click Record 7. Select the Snapshot tab. Select a folder to write your review. 3. Select a View group to play. you do not have a valid View group selected. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar. • 5. 4. Click the Animation tab. 2. 6. Related Topics • Play a ScheduleReview Project.Using ScheduleReview: An Overview Record Command Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Record Allows you to take snapshots of the ScheduleReview animation during playback. page 525 528 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Related Topics • Change Page Setup Options. If you want to print to a different printer. orientation from portrait to landscape. Print Preview. page 536 • Quick Print the Full View. Some page setup and printing options may be unavailable. change according to the printer that you have selected. You can control dimensions for the printable area and image size. according to which printer and printer driver that you select. and Print commands on the File menu. Some dialog boxes.Printing: An Overview Printing: An Overview SmartPlant Review provides high-resolution printing and other capabilities that give you flexibility and control over printed results. page 532 • Page Setup Dialog Box. use the Page Setup. as selected in the Printer box after you click Start > Settings > Printers. page 530 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 529 . an associated dialog box allows you to select another printer. such as the Advanced Document Properties dialog box. page 536 • Quick Print the Main View. To perform printing operations. Related Topics • Print the Main View at a High Resolution. Notes • The Page Setup dialog box appears with the active printer. and document properties. The orientation option is unavailable for most printers. page 535 Page Setup Command File > Page Setup Allows you to change media sizes.

Width specifies the width of the page. Vertical .Positions the document so that the long edge of the paper is the top of the page. Left .Specifies the left position of the origin point in the image. Some options may be unavailable.Specifies the size of the paper or envelope that you want to use. Different printer models support different paper sources. Height specifies the height of the page.Specifies where the paper that you want to use is located in the printer. Landscape . Portrait .Positions the document so that the short edge of the paper is the top of the page. Top . Height specifies the height of the printable area on the page. Horizontal .Printing: An Overview Page Setup Dialog Box Allows you to tailor a page to your specific requirements. Source .Specifies the vertical size of the image.Specifies the top position of the origin point in the image. and manual feed. envelope feed. Size . Printable Area . such as the upper tray. One page .Specifies the horizontal size of the image.Width specifies the width of the printable area on the page. according to which printer and printer driver that you select. 530 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .

Centers the print horizontally in the dimensions specified for print. Also.Specifies the number of pages horizontally that the image is tiled on multiple pages. The image will be centered across the y-axis in the maximum printable area. Notes • The high-resolution printing options are visible in the Page Setup dialog box in all modules. Resolutions in pixels/inch .Specifies the level to improve images by smoothing the transitions between model edges.Allows you to change printer options. Typical effective values range from 1 to 2. Anti-alias . Print processing times increase as you increase the anti-alias level. The image will be centered across the x-axis in the maximum printable area. You can select one of four levels. click Single View Layout on the Common toolbar. The value in parentheses displays the size of the image in pixels. Tip • If you are trying to get a higher resolution output.Reduces or enlarges the image to fit in the maximum printable area. are not supported in high-resolution printing. data annotations. especially when Anti-alias settings are greater than 1. the opposite value changes to retain the proportion of the image.1 to 10. You will then be able to use snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting.Specifies the resolution for the print job in pixels per inch. and text annotations.Select to retain the proportion (x and y relationship) of the image. the options are only supported in the full product and the Photo-Realism module. some settings. If you change either the horizontal or vertical image size. but you have less than the recommended screen resolution. such as Axis.Centers the print vertically in the dimensions specified for print. Some features are not recommended in high-resolution printing. Center Vertically . measurements. Center Horizontally . Tall . High resolution image only Keep Aspect Ratio . Gamma .Specifies the number of pages vertically that the image is tiled on multiple pages. Level 1 (default) applies no anti-aliasing. Printer . Wide . These features include full screen mode. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 531 . You cannot edit the values if Fit to Printable Area is selected. The printer reduces the image for values greater than its maximum resolution.0 to adjust the Gamma to more closely match the screen display or other images. level 4 applies the maximum. However.Enter a value from 0.Printing: An Overview Fit to printable area .

532 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . you can proceed to print from the Print Preview dialog box by clicking the Print button. The Orientation option is unavailable for some printers. 2. After you review the preview.Printing: An Overview Change Page Setup Options 1. click Network. • 4. Click Portrait or Landscape to select an orientation. page 535 Print Preview Command File > Print Preview Allows you to see a representation of the material before you transmit the print request. Tip The Page Setup dialog box automatically displays the default printer specified in Control Panel > Printers options. 5. • Tip If the printer that you want is not in the printer list. Select a paper size from the Page Setup > Paper Size list. Select a different printer from the Printer option. page 536 • Quick Print the Full View. Click Printer > Properties to select advanced options. 3. or you can return to the standard view of the data by clicking the Close button. Click File > Page Setup. Related Topics • Print the Main View at a High Resolution. page 536 • Quick Print the Main View. Use the resulting Connect to Printer dialog box to select the printer.

Displays the next page. page 532 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 533 .Allows you to decrease the preview page.Closes the Print Preview dialog box and returns you to the active window. Print . Related Topics • Print Preview Command. Zoom In . Two Page -Switches the preview from one page to two pages. allowing you to switch back to a one page preview. which allows you to select options for printing the Main view. Next Page . Zoom Out . When Two Page is selected.Allows you to enlarge the preview page. Close . Prev Page .Displays the previous page.Displays the Print dialog box.Printing: An Overview Print Preview Dialog Box Allows you to preview a page as it will look when printed. the icon changes to One Page.

Properties . according to which printer and printer driver that you select.Captures an image of all SmartPlant Review windows at screen resolution and sends the image to the selected printer.Captures the Main view image at screen resolution and sends it to the selected printer. which allows you to choose options for the selected printer.Displays the Document Properties dialog box. Name . page 536 • Quick Print the Main View. Quick print full . page 535 Print Dialog Box The following features are available on the Print dialog box. Some options may be unavailable.Lists the printers that are set up on your computer.Printing: An Overview Print Command File > Print Allows you to print the active drawing if the printer is configured for your computer. The available options depend on the features of the printer. Related Topics • Print the Main View at a High Resolution. Quick print main . 534 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 536 • Quick Print the Full View.

page 532 • Print the Main View at a High Resolution. data annotations. Notes • The high-resolution printing option is visible in the Page Setup dialog box in all modules. page 536 • Quick Print the Main View. page 535 Quick Print the Main View 1.Captures an image at high resolution and sends it to the selected printer. Select the options for your print job. Tips • Printing an image on-screen. 2. some settings. page 536 • Quick Print the Full View. Some features are not recommended in high-resolution printing. • Print Dialog Box.Allows you to specify collation for multiple copies.Printing: An Overview High resolution . If you are trying to get a higher resolution output. takes full advantage of any hardware acceleration and enables SmartPlant Review to capture and process the image quickly. especially when Anti-alias settings are greater than 1. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting. page 536 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 535 . rather than off-screen. and text annotations. measurements. page 534 • Print the Main View at a High Resolution. click Single View Layout on the Common toolbar. However. Click Quick print main. Related Topics • Print Command. Quick print main captures the Main view image at the current screen resolution and prints the view on the selected printer. These features include full screen mode. such as Axis. Also. are not supported in high-resolution printing. but have less than the recommended screen resolution. Click File > Print. this option is supported only in the full product and the Photo-Realism module. • • Number of copies .Provides a space for you to type the number of copies that you want to print. page 534 3. Related Topics • Change Page Setup Options. Collate .

Click File > Print. Click File > Print. Click High Resolution. these options are supported only in the full product and the Photo-Realism module. Print the Main View at a High Resolution 1. SmartPlant Review automatically disables your screen saver for this reason. Some features are not recommended in high-resolution printing. If you are trying to get a higher resolution output. Print Dialog Box. but you have less than the recommended screen resolution. Also. Select the options for your print job. There must be sufficient hard disk space when using high-resolution printing. such as Axis. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting. A general rule of thumb for calculating print file size is: Bytes = Image Height X Image Width X 32. are not supported in high-resolution printing. Tips Printing an image on screen. rather than off screen takes full advantage of any available hardware acceleration. Caution • Do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus during the printing process or SmartPlant Review will capture those images instead of the Main view.Printing: An Overview Quick Print the Full View 1. measurements. especially when Anti-alias settings are greater than 1. • • 536 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 3. data annotations. 2. • Notes • • The high-resolution printing options are visible in the Page Setup dialog box in all modules. and text annotations. 2. some settings. However. Select your print job options. page 534 3. click Single View Layout on the Common toolbar. Click Quick Print Full. These features include full screen mode. Note • Quick Print Full captures an image of the entire SmartPlant Review application window at the current screen resolution and sends it to the selected printer. This enables SmartPlant Review to capture and process the image quickly.

page 555 • Manipulating Text Annotations: An Overview. page 538. such as a CAD application.TXT file. Add-in example programs delivered with the software demonstrate a number of custom functions. page 541 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 537 .chm) for in-depth documentation on developing custom add-in functions. and deletes text annotations. a raster image editor. See the SmartPlant Review Programmer's Guide (DRAPI_API.chm and DRAPIX_API. Set Window Size (WINSIZE. and Elevation view windows.Using Accessories: An Overview Using Accessories: An Overview You can add commands and programs to the Accessories menu to extend the functionality of the software.EXE) . turns on and off. • • You can customize the add-in examples by using development tools and resources. edits. You also can specify the position and color of the annotations. Plan. which is located in the SmartPlant Review application folder.Selects a display set and a distance and moves or rotates the display set accordingly. you can add commands to start other programs. or a word processor. • Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE) . To specify which add-ins appear on the Accessories menu.EXE) . See the API folder for programming resources and tools. page 542 • Setting Window Size: An Overview.Places.Specifies custom sizes for the Main. Related Topics • Creating Display Set Movement: An Overview. For more information. For example. you edit the ACCESSRY. see Modifying the Accessories Menu. Move Display Set (MOVEDSET. page 553 • View Point Cloud Data.

page 537 • View Point Cloud Data. the only command available on the Accessories menu is the Load Accessories command. page 541 Modifying the Accessories Menu The Accessry. To place an application on the Accessories menu. the working folder is the project folder (where the . the program name string follows the equals (=) sign. enclosed within an open bracket ([) and a close bracket (]). page 540 • Using Accessories: An Overview. An optional working folder. The ampersand (&) inserted in front of a given letter creates a mnemonic. save the file as text-only. to aid in menu navigation. add a call to the application to the ACCESSRY.Using Accessories: An Overview Load Accessories Command Accessories > Load Accessories Allows you to access external programs and or API applications by adding them to the Accessories menu.txt file. Related Topics • Modifying the Accessories Menu.txt file (delivered to the C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\Review folder) defines entries on the Accessories menu. You can edit Accessry. follows the close bracket (]) if a working folder is specified. The working folder might be the location of other files needed by the program or may be an output location for any files generated by the program. If not specified. The program name. see Modifying the Accessories Menu. page 538 • Starting Programs Automatically. Important • If you move or delete the Accessry. an underline on that letter. 538 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .txt file. The string before the equals (=) sign is the text that displays as an entry on the Accessories menu. if you edit the file in a word processor. such as Microsoft Word. save the file. However. including any path and any parameters.txt with a text editor such as Notepad.txt file delivered with SmartPlant Review. follows the equals (=) sign. then use the Load Accessories command to read the updated file. page 538. For more information about using the Accessories menu and the Accessry.dri file is located). If the working folder is not listed.TXT file. File conventions The following graphic shows the contents of the default Accessry.

) and are ignored. To create a submenu. The keyword ENDMENU is used after the last item in the submenu.txt file conventions include the following: • • • Comment lines begin with a semicolon (. • SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 539 . Leading or trailing white space characters are ignored. A blank line between menu entries signifies a separator (horizontal line) on the menu. use greater than signs (>) to enclose menu text strings.Using Accessories: An Overview Other Accessry. Blank lines before first menu entry and after the last are ignored.

txt file.txt file appear on the menu when you save it and click the Load Accessories command. page 538 • Using Accessories: An Overview. page 542 • Modifying the Accessories Menu.exe place. Related Topics • Manipulating Text Annotations: An Overview. 1.txt file.txt files in any other locations). 3.Using Accessories: An Overview Additional file information The software looks for the Accessry.txt file found (ignores any other Accessry. the following syntax in the Accessry. In the project folder where the .dri file is located. The software reads this file at program start-up and when you click the Load Accessories menu command. For example. the software places those entries on the Accessories menu in the order that they appear in the Accessry.txt file in the following order and reads the first Accessry. If you move or delete the Accessry. only the Load Accessories command is available on the Accessories menu.exe is located. page 537 540 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .txt file that the software finds contains entries.txt file. 2.txt file will automatically start the Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > One command every time that you open the software: *Text Annotations = c:\Program Files\Intergraph\SmartPlant\Review\Api\txtanno. Note • The menu entries marked by asterisks will NOT appear in the Accessories menu. In the product folder where SPR. Starting Programs Automatically You can automatically start an external accessories program when you start the SmartPlant Review by designating them by an asterisk (*) in the Accessry. If the first Accessry. In the home folder. Edits to the Accessry.

txt file to add the point cloud software command calls. page 538 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 541 .txt file. Leica Geosystems HDS or BitWyse Solutions). page 22 Paint Command Accessories > Paint Launches the Microsoft Paint program. Click Accessories > Load Accessories to load the updated Accessry. Install the SmartPlant Review Point Cloud Integrator module. 3. Edit the C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\Review\Accessry. page 538 • Point Cloud Integrator Module.Using Accessories: An Overview View Point Cloud Data 1. 2. 5. which can be used for editing images. 6. Open the model in SmartPlant Review. Related Topics • Modifying the Accessories Menu. Follow the directions in the point cloud vendor documentation for using their point cloud functionality. Install the point cloud software product of your choice from a point cloud software vendor (for example. Modifying the Accessories Menu. page 538 4. Related Topics • Load Accessories Command.

page 552 • Edit Text Annotations. page 551 • Display Text Annotations. the software displays the Place Annotation dialog box that allows you to approve the settings for the text. You can also specify the position and color of the annotations. you are given the choice to store your annotations in the project database or let them be deleted. page 544 • Place Many Text Annotations Command. as well as a leader line. page 548 • Place Text Annotations. You also can specify the position and color of the annotations. You can use the text annotation feature to place. and other alphanumeric strings. After you click Text Annotations > Place on the Accessories menu. page 543 • Place One Text Annotation Command. turn on and off. Related Topics • Place Annotation Dialog Box. Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations. descriptions. Once you confirm your selection. After you select one of these commands. as well as leader lines. and delete text annotations. Tip • You can further customize this add-in by using development tools and resources. When exiting the software. edit.EXE) add-in allows you to place. such as equipment numbers. page 545 542 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . page 545 Placing One or More Text Annotations: An Overview SmartPlant Review allows you to attach textual annotations to your model. two commands are available: One or Many.Using Accessories: An Overview Manipulating Text Annotations: An Overview The Text Annotations (TXTANNO. select the element you want to annotate. and move textual information. edit. See the API folder for programming resources and tools. page 543 • Place Text Annotations. page 549 • Move Text Annotations.

page 545 Place Many Text Annotations Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > Many Allows you to place textual annotation in your model. like the Place > One command. After selecting the command. which allows you to control the settings for the annotation. as opposed to the Place > Many command. This command does not automatically exit after the placement of an annotation. a message on the status bar prompts you to select the object that you want to annotate and then confirm your selection. you must apply the settings to each annotation. Turn on the Use these settings for annotations to follow option to automatically apply the settings to subsequent annotations. If this option is turned off. The command automatically exits after you place the annotation. After confirmation. Related Topics • Place Annotation Dialog Box. page 544 • Place Text Annotations. After confirmation. After selecting the command. which remains active so that you can place another annotation. page 544 • Place Text Annotations. which allows you to control the settings for the annotation. the Place Annotation dialog box displays.Using Accessories: An Overview Place One Text Annotation Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > One Allows you to place one textual annotation in your model. Related Topics • Place Annotation Dialog Box. but remains active so that you can place additional annotations. page 545 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 543 . the Place Annotation dialog box displays. a message on the status bar prompts you to select the object that you want to annotate and then confirm your selection.

Data attribute . Text .Allows you to select a color for the annotation line. Persist .Lists the object's available attributes to display in the annotation.Using Accessories: An Overview Place Annotation Dialog Box Allows you to specify the contents and color of the annotation labels. This option is not available if you have turned off the Leader option. Arrow . page 545 • Placing One or More Text Annotations: An Overview.Determines whether a leader line should display with the annotation. Background . Use these settings for annotations to follow .Determines whether an arrow should display with the annotation. Background . as well as the appearance of annotation leader lines.Shows how the annotation will look based on the selected display options and the chosen attribute.Determines whether the positional units (MU:SU:PU) should display for the Display Leader Point attribute.Allows you to select a color for the annotation text. You can also type the text to be displayed in the annotation.Sets the current settings as the default for subsequent text annotations.Determines whether the background should display on the annotation label. • • • • Colors • • • Preview . Positional units . Related Topics • Place Text Annotations. SmartPlant Review does not save the text annotation when you exit. Line . If not checked. Display options • Leader .Allows you to select a color for the annotation background. only master unit and sub-unit will display for the location of the leader. If you turn off this option. page 542 544 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . This option is available on when using the Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > Many command.Stores the created text annotation in the project database.

page 548 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 545 . click the button corresponding to the color attributes that you want to change. you can place another annotation after clicking OK on the Place Annotation dialog box.TXT file delivered with the software. • • Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations. The Place Annotation dialog box appears. Then click Place > One. click Accessories > Text Annotations. and lines for annotations.Using Accessories: An Overview Place Text Annotations 1. Do one of the following: • To place a single annotation. page 551 • Display Text Annotations. Click locations for a leader point and a center point. page 549 • Move Text Annotations. select the items that you want to display. Under Display options. • 3. If you chose the Place Many command. background. For more information. You can change the color of text. page 538. Then click Place > Many. page 552 • Edit Text Annotations. 4. The area under Preview updates to reflect the changes that you made. click Accessories > Text Annotations. Use the standard Windows Color dialog box to choose a color. Under Colors. or type the text that you want to display. 2. see Modifying the Accessories Menu. To place several consecutive annotations. edit the ACCESSRY. Notes • If the Text Annotations command does not appear on the Accessories menu. select an attribute to display as the annotation. In the Data attribute list.

You can change the location of the leader line or the center of the label by typing in values in the North. page 549 • Text Annotations Edit One Command. You can use the Apply button to test the appearance of the annotation in the Main view. Select Many if you want the Move command to remain active so that you can select and move additional text annotations. page 548 • Text Annotations Move Many Command.Using Accessories: An Overview Moving or Editing Text Annotations: An Overview After you have added text annotations in the model. A message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to change and then confirm your selection. the Edit Annotation dialog box appears. page 548 • Text Annotations Edit Many Command. East. or by snapping to an element in the model. Positional units. page 547 546 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . the Move Annotation dialog box appears. page 547 • Text Annotations Move One Command. The Colors group box allows you to change settings in the Text. SmartPlant Review allows you to relocate those annotations or change their contents and display options. You can select a different item from Data attribute list. and Line boxes. After confirmation. Arrow. Like the Move command. After you click Text Annotations > Move on the Accessories menu. You can use the Apply button to text the appearance of the annotation in the Main view. A message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to move and then confirm your selection. These commands are available by clicking Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit. Related Topics • Edit Text Annotations. two commands are available: One or Many. The Display Options group box allows you to select or clear check boxes for Leader. and Persist. Background. a standard 3D placement point. and Elevation boxes. Background. the Edit command also has the One and Many options. After confirmation. The Select button allows you to define the new location with a data point. page 549 • Move Text Annotations. Select One if you want to exit the Move command after moving one text annotation.

and Elevation boxes to change the location of the label center or the leader endpoint. which remains active so that you can move one or more annotations. East. and Elevation boxes.Using Accessories: An Overview Text Annotations Move One Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Move > One Allows you to relocate annotation labels or leaders. Related Topics • Move Text Annotations. a message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to move and then confirm your selection. This command works the same as the Move > One command except that the command does not automatically exit after moving a single annotation. East. After you select an annotation and confirm your selection. Related Topics • Move Text Annotations. You can change the values in the North. After clicking the Move > Many command. The command automatically exits after moving one annotation as opposed to the Move > Many command. page 548 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 547 . You can change the values in the North. the Move Annotation dialog box appears. After clicking the Move > One command. The Select button allows you to graphically define the new location of the annotation label or the leader line. After you select an annotation and confirm your selection. You can use the Apply button to test the appearance of the annotation in the Main view. the Move Annotation dialog box appears. You can use the Apply button to test the appearance of the annotation in the Main view. a message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotations that you want to move and then confirm your selection. page 548 Text Annotations Move Many Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Move > Many Allows you to relocate annotation labels or leaders. The Select button allows you to graphically define the new location of the annotation label or the leader.

You can also graphically identify a new coordinate for the annotation by clicking Select on the Move Annotation dialog box and identifying the new location. 2. and Line boxes. page 551 • Display Text Annotations. a message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to change and then confirm your selection. Edit the North. the Edit Annotation dialog box appears. • Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations. The new coordinates appear in the dialog box. page 545 Text Annotations Edit One Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit > One Allows you to change the contents and display options of an annotation. page 552 • Edit Text Annotations. You can use the Apply button to test the appearance of the annotation in the Main view. • 3. The Colors group box allows you to change settings in the Text. Arrow. Tip Select One if you want to exit the Move command after moving a single annotation. page 549 • Place Text Annotations. Positional units. The Display Options group box allows you to select or clear check boxes for Leader. The Move Annotation dialog box appears. page 538. For more information. Related Topics • Edit Text Annotations. see Modifying the Accessories Menu. Click the annotation that you want to move. After selecting the command. Background. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Move and then select either One or Many. and Persist.TXT file delivered with the software. Select Many if you want the Move command to remain active so that you can select and move additional text annotations. click again to accept. You can select a different item from the Data attribute list. East. Background. page 549 548 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . and Elevation values to define a new coordinate for the center of the annotation or the endpoint of the leader line. edit the ACCESSRY.Using Accessories: An Overview Move Text Annotations 1. After confirmation. Notes • If the Text Annotations command does not appear on the Accessories menu.

After selecting the command. For more information. Edit Text Annotations 1. page 551 • Display Text Annotations. • 3. Tip Select One if you want to exit the Edit command after editing a single annotation. After confirmation. The Colors group box allows you to change settings in the Text. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit and then select either One or Many. click again to accept.TXT file delivered with the software. page 545 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 549 . and Persist. Change the settings as needed. You can select a different item from the Data attribute list. Positional units. Notes • If the Text Annotations command does not appear on the Accessories menu. The Edit Annotation dialog box appears. page 538. page 548 • Place Text Annotations. edit the ACCESSRY. a message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to change and then confirm your selection. Arrow. see Modifying the Accessories Menu. Background. Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations. 2. Background. and Line boxes. the Edit Annotation dialog box appears. The Display Options group box allows you to select or clear check boxes for Leader. Select Many if you want the Edit command to remain active so that you can select and edit additional annotations. Click the annotation that you want to edit.Using Accessories: An Overview Text Annotations Edit Many Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit > Many Allows you to change the details that you recorded when you created an annotation. This command works like the Edit > One command except that the command does not automatically exit after editing a single annotation. page 552 • Move Text Annotations. You can use the Apply button to test the appearance of the annotation in the Main view.

as opposed to the Delete > Many command. If you click Many. three commands are available: One. You can also specify the position and color of the annotations. the status bar prompts you to select the item to delete. Note • Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On to turn the annotation display on. Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations. page 551 550 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . and move textual information. and other alphanumeric strings. After selecting the annotation that you want to delete. Then. After you click Delete on the Accessories menu. page 551 Text Annotations Delete One Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > One Allows you to delete a text annotation. Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations. which remains active so that you can delete another annotation. You can use the text annotation feature to place. or All. you also receive a message that prompts you to confirm deletion of all the text annotations in the model. such as equipment numbers. as well as a leader line. an alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the text annotation. If you click All. descriptions. page 551 • Text Annotations Delete All Command.Using Accessories: An Overview Deleting One or More Text Annotations: An Overview SmartPlant Review allows you to delete textual annotations that you have placed in your model. the command works the same except that you will not exit the command after you have deleted one text annotation. a message prompts you to confirm the deletion and states the positional attributes for the item that you are deleting. The command automatically exits after the annotation is deleted. If you click One. page 551 • Text Annotations Delete Many Command. edit. Many.

TXT file delivered with the software. A Delete alert box appears. For more information. edit the ACCESSRY. like the Delete > One command. 2. an alert box appears. Text Annotations Delete All Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > All Allows you to delete all text annotations in the model. Note • Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On to turn the annotation display on. A Delete alert box appears. Locate and accept the annotation that you want to delete. Click Yes to delete the annotation. • • Notes • If the Text Annotations command does not appear on the Accessories menu. After selecting the annotation that you want to delete. Click Yes to delete the annotation. Do one of the following: • Click One to delete one text annotation. an alert box appears. page 549 • Place Text Annotations. but remains active so that you can delete another annotation.Using Accessories: An Overview Text Annotations Delete Many Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > Many Allows you to delete multiple text annotations. Click All to delete all annotations. After selecting the command. see Modifying the Accessories Menu. Note • Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On to turn the annotation display on. Locate and accept the annotation that you want to delete. page 538. Click Yes to delete the text annotation. Related Topics • Display Text Annotations. A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the annotation. Click Many to continue in the command after deleting one text annotation. This command does not automatically exit after deleting an annotation. Delete Text Annotations 1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete. page 552 • Edit Text Annotations. Click Yes to delete all text annotations in the model. page 545 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 551 .

You can also toggle the display of text annotations on or off from the Display tab on the View Settings dialog box. If the annotations currently are not displaying. After you click Accessories and point to Text Annotations. page 551 • Edit Text Annotations. page 538 • Move Text Annotations. Notes • If the Text Annotations command does not appear on the Accessories menu. see Modifying the Accessories Menu. two commands are available: On or Off. • Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations. edit the ACCESSRY. page 538.Using Accessories: An Overview Displaying Text Annotations: An Overview SmartPlant Review allows you to show textual annotations in your model. If the annotations currently are shown. click Off to turn off the display.TXT file delivered with the software. page 548 • Place Text Annotations. Display On Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On Allows you to show textual annotations in your model. Display Off Command Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > Off Allows you to turn off the display of textual annotations in your model. page 545 552 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . For more information. page 549 • Modifying the Accessories Menu. or you can turn off the display of the annotations. Display Text Annotations Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On or Off. click On to view the information.

page 554 Set Window Size Command Accessories > Set Window Size Allows you to change the size of the software windows. Note • You can further customize this add-in by using development tools and resources. page 554 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 553 . Related Topics • Set Window Size. providing a What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG) animation sequence. See the API folder for programming resources and tools. You can use this add-in to set a window to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animation. This add-in ensures the aspect ratio of the Main view is correct before you save the animation view.Using Accessories: An Overview Setting Window Size: An Overview The Set Window Size (WINSIZE.EXE) add-in allows you to change the size of the software windows. This add-in ensures the aspect ratio of the Main view is correct before you save the animation view. Related Topics • Set Window Size. You can use this add-in to set a window to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animations. providing a What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG) animation sequence.

you can view the width and height of the entire application window. 2. select the view window that you want to modify (either Main.Displays the current version of the software. Height .TXT file delivered with the software.Displays the height of application window in pixels. SmartPlant Review . Plan. Set Window Size 1.Allows you to select the type of window. Type new width and height coordinates for the window. 3. Old width . Name .Type a new width in pixels.Sizes the new window to the new size. You can use this dialog box to set a window to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animation. For more information. Set . Old height . edit the ACCESSRY. Note • If the Set Window Size command does not appear on the Accessories menu.Displays the width of application window in pixels. Under View. Related Topics • Setting Window Size: An Overview. see Modifying the Accessories Menu.Displays the width of the window in pixels. page 553 554 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .Using Accessories: An Overview Set Window Size Dialog Box Allows you to change the size of the software windows. New width . page 538. Click Accessories > Set Window Size. Tip • Under Application window. and then click Set. or Elevation views).Displays the width of the window in pixels. New height . Width . The window displays in its new size.Type a new height in pixels.

You can start. Note • You can further customize this add-in by using development tools and resources. any movement using the Move Display Set API with the same display set name will use collision detection. Note To enable collision detection while using the Move Display Set API. This script is not associated with any display set. page 540 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 555 . Using the Move Display Set add-in. The interactive display set motion and edit display set position functionality in the software allow you to directly position display sets.EXE) add-in allows you to create scripts of movements and rotations that can then be played on any selected display set. and reverse-step through this script of movements. Related Topics • Modifying the Accessories Menu. you create a sequence of movements to apply to a display set. do the following: 1. page 558 • Starting Programs Automatically. which can be saved. Thereafter. The final display set position is saved to the database. stop. 3. activate collision detection. forward-step. and revised. opened. You can play the script or take a snapshot to save a view. you can use this program to help plan equipment removal. The API will only honor the current collision detection settings of the Display Set tab of the Motion Settings dialog box if the selected display set name on the Move Display Set API dialog box matches the currently selected display set. and to select the collision set to use. but the sequence of motions is not saved. Use the Tools > Collision Detection command to create the collision set. Switch to display set motion using the Motion > Display Set Motion command. This program is useful when you need to see how an object fits in a space in the design. See the API folder for programming resources and tools. This sequence of movements is similar to a script. Use the Motion > Settings command's Display Set tab to select the display set to move. The results can be reviewed at any time using the Tools > Collision Detection command. 2. page 538 • Move and Rotate Display Sets. This add-in allows you to analyze the removal process and allows you to predict possible problems prior to actual removal.Using Accessories: An Overview Creating Display Set Movement: An Overview The Move Display Set (MOVEDSET. For example.

Screen .Takes a picture of the movements.Displays the movements on your computer screen. you can use this program to help plan equipment removal.Sets the mode for capturing the display set movement. Related Topics • Move and Rotate Display Sets. Name . File name . opened. and revised.Returns the selected display set to its original (unmoved) position. This program is useful when you need to see how an object fits in a space in the design.Displays the file in which to save the display set script. See the API folder for programming resources and tools if you have installed the API module. this add-in accessory allows you to create a sequence of movements to apply to a display set.Provides information about the selected display set.Sets properties for the display set movement. page 558 Move Display Set Dialog Box Displayed by clicking Accessories > Move Display Set. You can play the script or take a snapshot to save a view. You can start. Mode . You can further customize this add-in by using API development tools and resources. which allows you to create scripts of movements and rotations that can then be played on any selected display set. see Using Accessories: An Overview. Move display set . This add-in allows you to analyze the removal process and allows you to predict possible problems prior to actual removal.Using Accessories: An Overview Move Display Set Command Accessories > Move Display Set Displays the Move Display Set dialog box.Allows you to select a file. Display set . 556 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . For more information about using accessories with SmartPlant Review. For example. Restore . Movie snapshot . stop.Displays the name of the display set selected from the display set project tree. This sequence of movements is similar to a script. page 537. File . forward-step. and reverse-step through this script of movements. which can be saved.

Displays the distances for moving and degrees for rotation. You can specify the step as moving or rotating.Creates a new step in the script. Loop . page 558 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 557 .Halts the display set movement script. Start . Motion and move list .Lists the steps defined for the display set movement script.Steps backward through the display set movement script. Number of steps .Begins the display set movement script.Allows you to change a step.Displays the number of steps in the script.Displays the current version of the software. SmartPlant Review version . Delta distance/degree . page 555 • Move and Rotate Display Sets.Using Accessories: An Overview Update time . Related Topics • Creating Display Set Movement: An Overview. Delete .Steps forward through the display set movement script.Moves the selected step. Continue . Stop .Specifies the number of seconds between each step. Pong . M indicates moving and R indicates rotation.Resumes the display set movement script. Forward . Edit . Reverse . Insert.Steps forward through the movement script and then backward.Repeats the display set movement script until you click Stop.

Backfaces and End caps view settings are temporarily switched on during dynamic display set moves and all Collision Detection displays. the temporary change to the Backfaces and End caps view settings does not affect normal updates or eye motion movement. To take a picture of the movements. To keep repeating the display set movement. Forward. Under Mode. type a value in the Update time box. 4. Also. click Start. 2. East. You can control the display set movement by clicking Continue. type distance values for the North. 5. and Plan directions. 6.Using Accessories: An Overview Move and Rotate Display Sets 1. Under Display set. select either Move or Rotate. and Elevation directions. Tips • If you select Move. and Stop. To step forward through the movement and then backward. you can break the process of moving a display set into 10 distinct steps to make the process easier to analyze. select the display set that you want to move. • 7. Reverse. All other elements are updated according to the active view settings. 8. click Pong. select either Screen or Movie snapshot. Under Motion and move list. 9. Continue to define your script of display set movement by clicking Insert or Edit. click Insert. For example. Type the number of steps for this movement. 3. Notes • To define the number of seconds between each step. If you select Rotate. Click Accessories > Move Display Set. Side. click Loop. On the Edit Step dialog box. • • • Related Topics • Creating Display Set Movement: An Overview. User settings are maintained and honored for all other updates. Tips • • To display the movements on your computer screen. page 555 558 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . select Screen. Click File to specify a file in which to save the display script. Only the display set that is in motion is affected. type degree values for the Front. When you are ready to begin the script. select Movie snapshot.

page 152 Set Center Point. Adjust the front and back clipping planes. end caps. More information may be available in the readme. Main view is Move the eye point and adjust the blank but Plan and view cone. Click View > Fit > View to Model. page 55 Fit View to Model. page 120 View Settings Dialog Box. values. Views are blank or objects seem to be missing or hidden.Troubleshooting Troubleshooting The following tables lists solutions to common problems that you may have when using SmartPlant Review. page 155 Set Eye Point. page 152 Set Clipping Planes. Check the view settings (turn on backfaces. The current active view will be updated. page 102 Level Settings Dialog Box. page 213 Set Eye Point. General Viewing Issues Problem Solution See. Make sure that the eye point and the center point are not set to the same. page 155 Fit View to Model. Part of the model appears cut off. page 133 Working with Display Sets: An Overview. or nearly the same.. or increase tolerance). page 154 You are lost in the view.htm file. Check the settings for levels and display sets.. page 120 Set Clipping Planes. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 559 . Working with Views: An Overview. Elevation views display the model.

0. then refresh all views. However...1 . SPR 5. page 139 560 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . Objects in my new display set do not appear.0.0.X and the SPR 4. Stereo viewing depth perceptions appear mostly flat or turning the glasses upside down corrects the view.x .48 and version 5. Possible overlapping display sets. Generate new SPR 5.x . and so forth are not overlapping the view. page 48 Refresh All Command.VUE File. The .x . The last action performed on the object by corresponding display set manipulations wins. Working with Display Sets: An Overview.1. dialog boxes. Changes do not Refresh the view or refresh the data. Make sure windows.vue file format is different from the SPR 5. particularly projection system.vue file version also changed between version 5.vue files are not compatible with SPR 5. Change the stereo polarity by clicking View > Advanced > Stereo. Right is the normal and default polarity direction setting. and then selecting either polarity direction. appear in the view.Troubleshooting Problem Solution See.0. page 44 Save As a .0.vue files from the original model data set. left may be necessary on some setups. SPR 4. Save As Command.65 to incorporate a significant display set fix and several significant performance enhancements.vue file.vue files are not compatible with SPR 5.x .x. toolbars.0. page 58 Saved image contains overlapping image that you do not want.vue file format. Refresh Command. The SPR 5.x . page 58 Refresh Data Command.vue files. page 213 Viewing in Stereo: An Overview. page 45 Cannot open an existing .

. Click the left mouse button in the Main view to stop the motion. page 181 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 561 . Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box). movement still continues after releasing keypad keys. When using keypad motion. Motion Problem Solution See. movement continues after releasing left mouse button.Troubleshooting Problem Solution See.. page 185 Joystick Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box). When using keypad motion. page 184 Navigate using a Mouse. See the documentation provided by your video card manufacturer for more information about turning on hardware anti-aliasing.. page 173 Motion Settings Command. or Elevation view (the title bar displays which view has focus). Check motion settings. Turn off continuous motion. You may need to download the current display driver from your video card manufacturer rather than using the generic display driver delivered with your operating system. page 162 Navigation speed is too Increase or decrease dynamic motion fast or too slow. Plan. speed. Make sure Num Lock is turned on and that the focus is on either the Main. When using mouse motion. page 190 Keypad Keys.. Click the Advanced button on the Start > Settings > Control Panel > Display > Settings tab to access your video card settings. movement does not occur. Jagged edges on objects Turn on hardware anti-aliasing if your video card supports it. Set Continuous Motion.

page 69 562 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . This problem is especially obvious when two issues planes are coincident on the ground. Flicker caused by element center lines and line strings Improve curvature of many circular graphic elements During motion the lines may show up at some view angles. 2. Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box). and reducers. floors or walls of a plant. Increasing this setting may reduce performance but will improve visual quality. No Specular Command.. Turning on more solid look these settings may reduce performance but will improve visual quality.Troubleshooting Animation and Lighting Problem Solution See. Assign the same material and /or color to all elements coincident at one place. page 108 Level Settings Dialog Box. causing some flickering to occur. A similar problem exists for photographers with shiny objects causing bright hot spots on film. We recommend not keeping the lines and line strings when creating the project database. To work around the coincident surface flicker problem: 1. Increase the stroking tolerance from the minimum setting of 16 to give a smoother curve on pipes. page 71 Lighting Tab (View Settings Dialog Box). valves. page 42 Stroking Tolerance Command.. Thin volumes such as I-beams may have a special type of coincident surface bleed through caused by the back side of the I-beam behaving as a coincident surface with the front side of the I-beam at some view angles. elbows. Backfaces Command. page 76 Give the Turn on backfaces and end caps as appropriate to graphics a improve the quality of the display. page 67 End Caps Command. Turn on two-sided lighting. page 402 Bright spots on shiny surfaces Flicker on thin volumes Turn off specular light on animation key frames. This will help disguise the bleed through problem. Increasing the stroking tolerance to between 30 and 50 is usually adequate to give smoothly stroked curves on basic circular elements. Turn off the level of all but one of the coincident planes in the offending files. page 133 Assign Materials Command. Coincident Coincident surface bleed through occurs when surface shading two surfaces are defined at the same coordinates.

. OpenGL lights too bright in shaded mode Reduce the brightness setting on the View > Settings > Lighting dialog box. the lights do not rotate with the model. page 544 Turn on all annotations on the Display tab on the View Settings dialog box. Annotations do not display.. page 128 Lighting Tab (View Settings Dialog Box). Annotations Problem Solution See. Special lighting Uses the Stationary Light Positions command to hold the direction of the light constant for the effects entire animation. Lighting Tab (View Settings Dialog Box). page 423 Stationary Light Positions Command. Reducing the brightness may help most with directional and positional lights.Troubleshooting Problem Solution See. page 108 Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview.. page 361 Display Text Annotations. Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box). Place the text annotations using Place Annotation the Persist option.. With this setting checked. page 108 Lighten or darken the display Adjust the ambient and brightness settings. add lights to the model. page 103 Display Data Annotations. page 552 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 563 . Dialog Box. If you have the Photo-Realism module. Text annotations disappear after you exit the program.

Troubleshooting Performance Tips Virtual Memory (Swap Space) Make sure you have enough virtual memory. however. Calculate the minimum virtual memory (swap space) by taking the larger of these two calculations: (1. It is also important to defragment the page file for best performance.vue files. For NTFS file systems. For large . it can become very fragmented.vue file with the maximum amount of space possible. The operating system can address only 2 GB of virtual memory at one time for each application. 564 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .5 * the largest dataset used in the application) * the number of processors Set the minimum and maximum virtual memory (swap space) settings to the same value for best performance. virtual memory should be set to much larger than the .5 * RAM) * the number of processors on the machine (1. The operating system and other applications will take a portion of available memory leaving less memory available for SmartPlant Review. defragment the drive. For FAT and FAT32 file systems. you may need to set the virtual memory to the maximum for your file system. You can also use the DBCompact utility delivered with the SPR executable to compact and defragment your Microsoft Jet databases. Disk Fragmentation Defragment your disks regularly.59 GB. It is important to have sufficient virtual memory for all operating systems. File fragmentation on the disk will slow down the system and SPR.vue file size. the swap space can be larger because multiple applications can be in virtual memory at the same time. virtual memory is limited to approximately 4 GB. virtual memory is limited to approximately 17. Use a tool like DiskKeeper to avoid disk fragmentation. and close any non-essential programs to provide the . If the page file has to grow.vue files. For extremely large .

especially over a Novell network.Troubleshooting Page Timeout Check the Microsoft Jet database Page Timeout registry settings.5\Engines\Jet 3. studies have shown that the NTFS file system with a 4K cluster size provides better performance than a FAT or FAT32 file system. Set this value to 5 milliseconds for best performance. File System Make sure the system is using the fastest file system.5 and 4.0\Engines\Jet 3.0\Engines\Jet 2.x\Page Timeout \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\4. if you have the space and need the speed. Make sure that you find and set all values of the Page Timeout setting in each Jet version registry entry.x\Page Timeout \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\3.0\Engines\Jet 4. However. The actual Access 2000 database size will depend on the amount of text data in the database.x\Page Timeout \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\4. Therefore.5\Page Timeout \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\4. The Page Timeout value for the Microsoft Jet database 3. Database Format Because Access 2000 databases are much faster than Access 97 databases. which makes the database file size larger than Access 97 because the UniCode format doubles the size of text fields.0\Page Timeout Caution • Any changes to the registry are at your own risk. use the Access 2000 format databases instead of the Access 97 format. Access 2000 is in UniCode. \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\3. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 565 .5\Engines\Jet 2. use the Access 2000 format. which can affect database performance over the network.0 versions is set to 5000 milliseconds by default. For Windows 2000 and Windows XP.

mdb2) and allowing the software to rebuild it from the current project data. one label database took 7 hours to update by replacing records. the software attempts to replace the label database records on a file by file basis.mdb2 file) needs to be deleted. However. 566 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .mdb). we recommend simply deleting the existing label database (*. then rebuilding the label database also kicks off display set resolution. if several design or label files have been changed since the current label database was created. If display sets exist in the main project database (*. For example. which can lead to poor performance. which rebuilds the display sets based on the current label and project file contents. Only the label database (*.Troubleshooting Label Database Fragmentation If the label or project files are updated for an existing project. Compressing the database on exit will remove this fragmentation. This same data set was up in minutes when the old database was deleted and SPR was allowed to re-build a clean database. Deleting and replacing large numbers of records in the label database may lead to significant database fragmentation.

exe) . after installing the software. see the following documentation. along with notes about last-minute fixes and other helpful hints.htm) . presented in a printable . see the ReadMe. SmartPlant Review Utilities SmartPlant Review delivers the following utilities to help you manage your data.exe) .pdf) . You will find these files in the \SmartPlant\Review\resdlls\0009 installation folder after you install the SmartPlant Review API module.HLP file in the \SmartPlant\Review\Utilities\ImgView folder. This guide. You will find this guide in the \SmartPlant\Review\resdlls\0009 installation folder on your computer after you install the software.0 databases. see the IMGVIEW.PDF format.Allow users to merge multiple tag files into a single tag file. in the \SmartPlant\Review\ folder on your computer.chm and DRAPIX_API.Provides image viewing and printing support for Intergraph RGB file formats and other image file formats. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 567 . is available on the SmartPlant Review CD. DBCompact (DBCompact. Each utility is delivered separate folders under the \SmartPlant\Review\Utilities folder.Provides installation and configuration information for system administrators.exe) . This utility enables users to identify duplicate tags and handle the resolution of these duplicates in a variety of ways. For more information.These files.Provides all of the information found in the online Help file.pdf) . Tag Merge (TagMerge. on the AutoPlay dialog box.Contains installation and configuration information. For more information.chm) . You will find this file on the SmartPlant Review CD and. and in the \SmartPlant\Review\resdlls\0009 installation folder on your computer after you install the software. available online only. see the ReadMe. SmartPlant Review Installation Guide (SPRInstall. contain instructions and complete reference information for programming with the SmartPlant Review Automation Interface. SmartPlant Review User's Guide (SPRUsersGuide.Compacts and defragments your Microsoft Jet 4. available online only. SmartPlant Review README (readme.txt file in the \SmartPlant\Review\Utilities\TagMerge folder.Troubleshooting Additional Documentation For more information about installing and using SmartPlant Review. For more information. SmartPlant Review Programming Help (DRAPI_API.txt file in the \SmartPlant\Review\Utilities\DBCompact folder. Slide show capability is provided for viewing multiple images. ImageView (ImgView.

Send documentation comments or suggestions to PPMdoc@ingr. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://ppm.Troubleshooting Customer Support and Documentation Comments For the latest support information for this product. 568 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide .intergraph.com.com/support/.

and then manipulated as individual elements.Glossary Glossary A ambient A light source that distributes light uniformly in all directions from no specified location. D default The predemyArray[myArray. All objects are illuminated equally regardless of their location and orientation. More colors are produced with the loss of some detail. The ambient light and the brightness setting interact directly in a given view of the model. This technique fills the pixels along the jagged edges with varying amounts of transition colors which soften the edge and blend the edge smoothly into the background. anti-aliasing A technique for smoothing the jagged edges of pixelized graphics by blending the edges with colors. attenuation The reduction of the intensity of light based on the distance from the source of the light. B bore line A line displayed during 3-D input to assist in depth selection. dithering A technique for achieving greater color resolution at the expense of spatial resolution. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 569 . delta A specified offset or distance between two points in space.length] = new Array ("TERMined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. C cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. Attenuation can be illustrated as the difference between a 100 Watt and a 60 Watt light bulb.

O offset The distance perpendicular to an alignment. denoted as minus left and positive right.Glossary E element The basic building block of a geometric figure. in American television.length] = new Array ("TERMines where the light is cast. levels The MicroStation design plane consists of a multilevel design structure. For distance and spot lights. this point is normalized.length] = new Array ("TERMinal screen or TV monitor is refreshed on each pass. interest represents the falloff point located on a sphere centered on the light location that is tangent to the interest point. For example. The active level must be displayed. Interlacing saves half of the signal information that non-interlaced screens use. opaque A characteristic of an element through which light cannot pass. L label The database information associated with an element. F fresnel The simulated reduction of the intensity of light passing through transparent materials and the increase in reflectivity of reflective materials as the angle of incidence deviates from perpendicular. For point lights.length] = new Array ("TERM that describes a situation when only every other line of pixels on a computer myArray[myArray. Note that once the light is placed. although no element can span two levels. but any combination can be displayed or blanked from the screen. every second line is refreshed 60 times per second. Only one level can be active at a time. Elements can be organized in any fashion on 63 levels. circles. the second point in a two-point placement that demyArray[myArray. interest represents an idealized point on a line from the light location in the direction that the light is cast. also completed geometric figures such as lines. 570 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . and so forth. I interest In lighting. interlaced A myArray[myArray. shapes.

While they work well for quick measurements between two or more objects. not the ratio among the pieces. surface points Any point on any piece of geometry in shaded mode. and then recursively casts rays toward light sources and other objects in order to compute the color of a pixel. A snaplock point is displayed as either a small square or round tag point on a surface. making snaplock measurement more precise because it is repeatable.Glossary P palettes A file for the storage of materials. This technique creates more realistic 3-D effects by adding reflections and shadows to images. snaplock points Points generated by SmartPlant Review at fixed locations on a given piece of geometry for use during snaplock measurement. surface The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. refraction The change of direction that light makes as it passes through a transparent surface. rendering A method for generating synthetic images in a scene from a precise description of the geometry and other characteristics of the scene. to change the angular orientation. SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 571 . colors. R raytracing A rendering algorithm that casts an imaginary ray from the viewpoint back into the screen until it hits an object. modifying only the dimensions. point A graphic element representing a position in space. and patterns to be assigned to objects in a model. S scale To enlarge or reduce the size of a defined element. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. The location of a given snaplock point is always in the same place for a specific type of geometry. surface point measurements are difficult to repeat preciselybecause they can be at any point on a given surface. not including background points. rotate To turn.

Values range from 0-1. 572 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . V vector A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction.y. transmittance The degree of transparency that a surface exhibits.Glossary T translucent Permitting the passage of light. Glass bottles are examples of transparent objects. or opaque. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. generally represented as a line. and 1 is 100 percent transparent. or invisible.z). where 0 is 0 percent transparent. A ray goes through a translucent surface. transparency A surface property that allows light to pass through the surface.

360 ns. 361. 297 annotations arrowheads. 549 properties. 407 associations adding. 217. 375. 79 annotations:. 365 leader lines. 416 gamma. 538 menu. 262. 358. 57. 541 customizing. 73 settings. 110. 341 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 573 . 357 data. 103 displaying. 140. 244. 332 viewing. 365. 540 starting. 186 angles bearing. 347 display. 381. 366. 546. 362. 438. 338. 433 snapshot. 92. 542. 501 tags. 519 display sets. 67. 522 saved views. 361. 56 views. 544. 259. 546. 347 Elumens. 549. 369. 451 range rejection. 58. 496 settings. 329 project. 550. 442. 542. 57. 543. 56 arranging icons. 358. 519. 548. 545. 542 troubleshooting. 140 tags. 517. 380. 528 ScheduleReview. 402. 360 clipping volume. 405. 59. 79. 217. 23 troubleshooting. 549. 439. 520 attributes. 538. 353 tags. 499. 360. 495.displaying. 542. 386 annotations. 358. 401. 121 adding associations. 363. 437. 303 applications programming interface. 175 lighting. 362 deleting. 374. 188. 261 key frames. 79 placing. 380. 118. 151 adjusting volume annotations. 541 programs. 79 anti-alias key frames. 445. 305 raytrace. 444. 116. 242. 113. 192 animation ScheduleReview. 554 activating commands. 79. 553. 358. 504 snapshot. 314. 59. 537. 360. 554 arrange icons. 518 removing. 242. 357. 519 auto. 401. 56. 522 views. 552 editing. 264 ScheduleReview. 79. 545. 60 aspect ratio. 358. 331. 56. 58. 360 creating. 259. 505. 119. 146 joystick. 361. 433 patterns. 538 loading. 260. 433 settings. 261. 109. 17 windows. 243. 551 display settings. 522 projects. 375 bump. 547. 380 advanced commands. 547. 563 volume. 360 hiding. 540 using. 347 active measurements. 357.. 217 project manager. 260 defining views. 381. 60 windows. 315. 552 files. 66. 184. 271 allowing texturing. 129 stereo. 520 ScheduleReview. 441. 415 views. 551. 546. 524 project. 548. 543. 331. 407 properties. 550. 278 adjusting annotations. 365. 552 commands. 385 colors. 504.. 495. 402. 365.Index Index accessories annotations. 291. 499. 530 assigning materials. 359. 538 paint. 547. 59. 115. 548. 139. 538 windows. 292. 359 text. 562 animations creating.

448. 491 sessions. 477. 322. 435 bearing compass. 447 command mapping joystick. 435 collision detection. 78. 471. 127. 92. 477. 318. 437. 479. 475. 221. 479. 463. 191 cascade view. 192 sun. 323. 326 display sets. 470. 479 static. 308. 322. 479. 236. 442. 63 background colors. 313 restoring. 471. 309. 250. 468. 324 measurements. 114 symbology. 477. 459 measurements. 494 running. 324. 169 view. 416 map. 309. 480 indexes. 84. 213 back view.Index volume annotations. 89. 469. 476. 312. 469. 477. 472. 475. 265. 441. 468. 326 page setup. 444. 237. 474. 498. 468. 418. 19 dynamic. 64 bottom front left view. 480. 18 track mouse cursor. 237. 435 editing. 480. 92 formatting. 475. 236. 150 motion. 114. 475. 485 collections creating. 550. 234. 485 snapshots. 327 deleting. 471. 188. 64 bottom back right view. 427 lighting. 114. 233. 469. 516 tables. 538. 489. 471. 494 editing. 472. 479. 542 collaboration. 463. 410. 62 buffer updates. 493. 547. 322. 312. 465. 372. 103. 474. 437. 309 collision detection colors. 324. 532 positions. 308. 308. 480. 551. 313 snaplock. 233. 103. 549. 483 type filter. 541. 463. 325. 485 work offline. 239 settings. 427 clipping plane placing. 476. 552. 468. 466. 465. 471. 324. 455. 556 activate clipping volume. 417. 493. 84. 479. 386 closing files. 155 clipping volume. 445. 307. 371. 474. 483 colors background. 465. 471. 465. 448 lighting. 19 selections. 466. 192 settings. 438. 308 surface. 466. 480 construction. 316. 548. 373 auto-defining display sets. 186 collaborations drivers. 443. 239. 270 bottom back left view. 326 settings. 479. 64 bottom front right view. 328 editing. 385 adjust. 325. 318. 118 bump adjusting. 265. 472. 469. 19 sounds. 328 positioning. 325. 220. 466. 494 modules. 427 settings. 493. 477. 323. 420 buttons mapping for joystick. 494 settings. 474. 403. 232. 126. 472. 44 models. 252. 468. 94 changing annotations. 323. 490. 234. 474. 483 modules. 244. 411 bump maps. 472. 456. 252. 543. 480 single step. 318. 479. 439. 472. 44 coarse facets. 325. 19 point clouds. 470. 375 574 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 492 collections. 478. 64 bottom view. 471.. 458. 479. 463. 471. 176 commands accessories. 188. 474. 317. 108. 322. 419 comamnds Photo-Realism. 170 modes. 437. 326. 481 reports. 318. 18 NetMeeting. 476. 19 passengers. 56 center lock. 466. 308. 253. 18. 478. 438. 251. 256 environments. 309. 483 ScheduleReview. 478. 114. 480 snapshot. 476. 445 points. 318.

446. 345. 66. 77. 395. 317. 57. 64 bottom front right. 449. 326. 437. 382. 439. 179. 64 south west. 325. 131. 318. 469. 63. 327 projects. 137. 543. 66. 548. 548. 215. 250. 521 queries. 492. 329 motion. 311. 512. 523. 183. 309. 465. 480. 62. 141. 99 tools. 520. 120. 463. 60 comments on documentation. 297. 63 front. 385 window. 72. 63. 480. 310. 479. 262. 247. 323. 552 display sets. 288. 260 annotations. 328 delete. 71. 244. 70. 171 lighting. 261. 152. 361. 184. 323. 46. 67. 526. 383. 63 north. 488 volume annotations. 245. 260 lighting. 215 folders. 13. 325. 64 right. 520. 56. 444. 310. 382 ScheduleReview. 445. 309. 68 edit. 132. 474. 448. 437. 337. 64 bottom back right. 316. 527. 506. 169. 318. 395. 259. 511 file. 146. 474. 129. 303 place. 76. 381. 311. 141 tags. 466. 382. 202. 552 collaboration. 356. 64 east. 65. 461. 59. 309. 550. 455. 67. 140. 220. 251. 350. 506. 513 snapshots. 69. 217. 351. 163. 171. 357 collections. 455. 122. 305 toolbars. 315. 64 north west. 151. 256. 217. 313. 455. 447. 127. 180. 317. 309. 63 top front right. 284. 35. 57. 559 common views back. 127. 523. 460. 458. 383. 517. 471. 155. 349. 63. 99 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 575 . 134. 247. 477. 519. 356 toolbars. 180 keys. 351. 63 west. 307. 313. 33. 141. 144. 519. 437. 62 bottom back left. 292. 75. 70. 463. 335. 521. 455. 375. 403. 418. 172 import. 260. 346. 288. 348. 329. 13 common problems viewing issues. 242. 549 Elumens. 316. 383. 469. 61 compatibility software. 242. 140. 63 top back right.. 511. 426. 254. 479. 478. 458. 513. 478. 333. 451. 308. 68. 309. 365. 129. 242 measurements. 454. 516. 251. 180. 62 rotate with model fit. 182. 340. 328. 247. 351. 556 dot box. 312. 417. 317. 568 controlling display sets. 532. 458 materials. 146 export. 78. 476. 58. 517. 206 ScheduleReview. 468. 29. 516. 488 annotation. 477. 510 levels. 288. 511. 181. 337. 344. 63. 470. 419 measurements. 48. 62 top back left. 57. 472. 308. 40. 355. 312. 489. 327 display sets. 476. 356. 441. 361. 66. 314. 63 top front left. 410. 526 stereo. 42. 71. 438. 326. 528 ScheduleReview. 307. 252. 244. 317. 308. 170. 318. 512. 204. 69. 62 common views control.. 355. 245. 126. 308. 483. 301. 471. 203. 447. 318. 62 left. 365 saved views. 547. 510.Index advanced. 63. 134 lighting. 357. 121. 75. 447. 525. 284. 361. 49. 311. 126. 217 groups. 489. 69. 528 tools. 218. 380. 524. 521 consulting services. 78. 315. 456. 496. 250. 64 top. 523. 483 modules. 63 bottom. 34. 423. 459 motion. 259. 472. 72. 44. 442. 391. 310. 475. 131. 205. 443. 341. 313. 220. 344 functions. 215. 465. 252. 453. 510. 76. 71. 468. 524 view. 387. 551 display. 340. 119. 64. 526. 525 creating animation paths. 126. 312. 64 bottom front left. 74. 257. 71. 527. 245. 48. 317. 362. 140. 521. 534 find tags results. 496. 492. 63 south east.. 318. 507. 470. 357. 62 north east. 308. 302. 475. 529. 47. 549. 391. 254. 284. 314. 507. 127. 259. 365. 67. 524. 180 movements. 24 construction collision detection. 355. 153. 492 collections. 256. 365. 65 south. 132. 525. 466. 102. 303. 281 key frames. 457 materials.

347 annotations. 217 databases. 357. 73. 297. 349 view cone. 380. 231. 297. 27 position control changes. 250. 387 performance. 233. 253. 100 dashed line. 40. 458. 552 axis. 103. 298. 215. 186. 273 criteria queries. 93. 92. 214. 381. 264 viewing. 237. 137 view. 328 display sets. 179. 365. 495. 262 customer support. 329 projects. 231 deleting. 265 query. 25 creating. 73 display sets adding. 66 commands. 26 measurement changes. 315. 505 exporting. 88. 298. 25. 564 project. 214. 39. 240 current date. 68. 505 levels. 206 view dependent. 113. 66. 218. 348. 564 opening. 509. 215. 35. 144 key frames. 485 tags. 213 brightness. 114. 184. 550. 131 settings. 239. 116. 113. 106. 359 attributes. 328. 299 lighting. 117 data annotations. 215 key frames. 68 pattern. 219 auto-defining. 322 view cone. 262 descriptions editing. 332. 78. 234. 180. 515 range rejection. 84. 501. 210 quality. 76. 99. 217 assigning materials. 568 customizing accessories. 13. 551 collections. 264 DesignReview changes from. 189. 362. 221. 84. 299 order. 113 project manager. 180. 459 measurements. 71. 260 bore sight. 257. 453 toolbars. 287 directional modes plant north. 156 refresh. 259. 260 search path. 27 DesignReview saved views importing. 523 source lights. 213. 84. 337. 117. 67. 247. 421 deleting annotations. 129. 79 placing. 79 database formats. 252. 507. 244 auto-define. 79 editing. 96. 257 groups. 98. 173. 251. 318. 77. 72. 48 sets. 185. 358. 184. 131. 236. 141. 203 view dependent level. 538 settings. 87. 47 model. 115. 340 views. 229 creatubg groups. 347. 513 searching.definitions. 68. 520 editing. 361. 458 tags. 344. 204 view independent. 156 criteria. 240 display sets. 91. 318. 97. 249 576 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 331. 232. 208. 33. 345.Index creating. 66. 102. 69. 185. 282 lighting. 66. 420. 252 changes from DesignReview. 268 status bar. 141 tags. 69. 31 databases fragmentation. 115. 185. 92. 24 display set changes. 205 display action comments. 116 measurements. 186. 220. 179. 248. 28 VUE file changes. 347 Elumens. 71 menu bar. 25 defining. 48 stereo. 243. 314. 544 points. 29. 57. 350 activating. 119 motion. 341 data annotations deleting. 69. 213 function key changes. 189. 24 using. 42 defining animation paths.

466. 164 off. 152 lock. 308. 201 far clip ratio. 200. 309. 92. 423. 480. 459 materials. 427. 324. 57 Elumens activating. 249 projects. 195. 93. 395. 543. 73 commands. 483 updating. 556. 217. 542. 144 settings. 179 view cone. 135. 92 label data. 113 editing materials. 250. 318. 232. 402. 233. 441. 150 eye point. 209. 55. 393. 196. 88. 193. 308. 469. 255 immediate update mode. 84 motion. 451. 239 queries. 201 radius toolbar. 200. 339 undoing. 283 volume annotations. 245. 254. 46 views. 283 levels. 73. 151 settings. 501. 463. 322. 446. 326 motion. 326 commands. 472. 46. 324. 409 elevation compass. 152. 144 files annotations. 387. 265 date. 69. 69 clipping plane. 239. 101 elevation view. 468. 288. 388. 92. 254. 197 end caps. 155 features Elumens. 318. 109 snapping to. 96 documentation comments. 479. 471. 455. 122. 213. 405. 236. 511 tags. 355. 383. 247. 322. 25 viewing. 511 saved views. 207 settings. 199. 505. 194. 179 placing. 396. 193. 448. 211 importing. 492. 290 ScheduleReview. 515 saved views. 13 dot box settings. 244 membership. 192 docking project manager. 337. 325. 401. 170 view. 465. 89. 250 materials. 264 settings. 255 displaying measurements. 360. 398 frames. 357 display sets. 410 measurements. 252. 20 dynamic collision detection. 265 lighting. 370 elements assigning materials. 68. 457. 550. 407 auto-highlight. 427. 547. 280. 549. 234. 398 collaborations. 395. 312. 408. 83 surface. 289. 252. 393. 462 positions. 200 vertical. 494 collections. 92.Index hiding. 173. 264. 250. 462 tags. 453. 475. 73. 439. 164 display order. 458. 356 volume annotations. 442. 234. 242. 325. 231. 513. 360 AutoCAD. 242. 384 eye point motion. 221. 449. 239. 156. 438. 443. 253. 275. 92. 456. 548. 233. 505 ScheduleReview. 392. 520 show membership. 546. 551 attachments. 505 files. 103. 220. 445. 323. 47. 237. 147. 512. 499. 144 modes. 444. 255 user IDs. 504 exporting display sets. 256. 210 docking toolbars. 505 frame. 237. 134. 103. 195. 391. 148 encircle horizontal. 157 unassigning materials. 236. 237. 193. 309. 113. 63 editing annotations. 213 positioning. 558 project manager. 236. 251 showing. 163. 233. 103 drawing backfaces. 67 on-site drawing generation. 501. 52 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 577 . 408. 474. 323. 358. 92. 184. 136. 163. 357. 122. 555. 262. 231. 192 project manager. 248. 476. 209. 388. 437. 234. 91. 254. 387. 185 Photo-Realism. 193. 505 east view. 146. 396. 213. 247 manipulating. 477. 275. 312.

62 full shading.object. 274. 275. 137. 396. 346 graphics card. 387. 245. 372. 302 moving. 35. 254. 352. 460 resolutions. 301. 511 saved views. 421 opening. 276 renaming. 448 installing joystick. 324 forward mouse modes. 17. 392. 398 go to date. 213. 32. 525 matching. 91. 499. 371. 196 printing. 135. 297. 137. 286. 395. 534. 388. 403 designing. 52. 92. 38 editing. 393. 395. 387. 284. 387. 504 front view.INI. 332. 91. 283 motion. 299. 286. 509. 175 joystick 578 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 52. 511. 241 tags. 527 start. 138 objects. 332. 287. 302 modifying. 510. 291 groups creating. 427 importing.. 136. 52 saving. 420. 382. 240. 127. 344 volume. 255 levels. 165 ScheduleReview. 391. 90. 398 getting data.Index closing. 527 start. 318 files. 120. 221 objects. 299. 138 project manager. 530 importing. 281 moving. 504 snapshot. 396. 44 defaults. 119. 270 raytracing. 353 DesignReview saved views. 384. 398. 133. 230 volume annotations. 283 shadows. 94. 273. 398 exporting. 391. 527 end. 515 views. 396. 45 ScheduleReview. 229 finding display sets. 39. 121. 38 types. 382 ScheduleReview. 383. 300. 341. 388. 288. 525 tags. 33. 213 objects. 298. 209. 388. 372. 297. 530 icons arrange. 435 getdata arguments.. 274. 393. 351. 396. 139. 172 functionality new. 341. 140 display sets. 299 key frames. 535. 233 lighting. 510. 346 tags results. 297. 393. 287 display sets. 32. 137 material. 351. 387. 161. 245. 511 formats. 133. 395. 318. 90. 37 printing. 383. 53 measurements. 284. 276. 511 searching. 382. 207 SAT. 511. 392. 48 horizontal encircle. 34. 56 images files. 208 status bar. 282 hiding display sets. 510. 536 function changes. 171. 52 SATACIS. 281 settings. 213 viewing. 510. 352 volume annotations. 247. 393. 529. 26 keys. 283. 93. 24 generating modelview view files. 500. 290. 500 find. 298. 122 formatting collections. 44. 536 projects. 298. 427 lighting. 70 view. 511. 395. 247 files. 373 fitting queries.. 355. 526 frames copying. 532. 530 sizes. 285. 525 projects. 388. 126. 233 editing. 383 information display sets. 500. 90 tags. 343. 535. 93. 262. 356. 428.. 280 displaying. 52 images. 108.

323. 405. 136. 87. 562 two-sided. 136. 92. 421 Photo-Realism. 444. 318. 444. 329 displaying. 134. 135. 27 collections. 265 lighting controlling. 103. 416 annotations. 325. 172 labels data. 455 spot. 308. 134. 318 colors. 451. 437. 551. 324 lines. 84. 135. 317. 88. 455 editing. 453. 117 width. 322 patterns. 88. 417. 308 positioning. 244. 453. 325. 438. 307. 298. 326. 446. 427 project manager. 298. 71.Index activating. 58 manipulating annotations. 20. 442. 307. 542. 547. 176 installing. 438. 318. 92. 427 lighting. 549. 318. 322. 21 unassigning. 402. 446. 448. 455 stationary light positions. 328. 87. 137. 451. 242. 84. 449. 234. 70 left view. 299 motion. 84. 127. 456. 126. 126. 323. 313 large plant monument switching to. 455 settings. 308. 439. 117 measurements. 93. 449 shadows. 191 command mapping. 313 restoring. 322 dashed. 424 Photo-Realism. 244. 317. 445. 455. 242. 401. 322 view cone. 265 hiding. 420. 20 positioning. 312. 415. 409 measurements changing. 410. 88 levels. 455. 401. 313 shortest distance. 455. 448. 327 deleting. 448 lighting. 72. 137. 93. 443. 135. 128 troubleshooting. 448. 84 editing. 451. 324 formatting. 312. 546. 191 keeping ratio. 220. 313 restoring. 300. 331 assigning. 445. 459 measurements. 443. 185. 456. 328 creating. 552 collaborations. 458. 132. 322 loading accessories. 243. 256 environments. 172 keypad keys. 137 materials adjusting. 437. 297. 88. 92. 88. 410. 407 backgrounds. 184. 457 source. 301. 221. 327. 443. 138 indexes. 435 creating. 427 map files bump maps. 190 motion types. 459 deleting. 459 distant. 309. 173 keys changes. 127. 411. 455. 402. 407. 314. 532 Photo-Realism. 239. 252. 251. 418. 408. 318. 175 buttons. 538 Main view. 447. 236. 420 matching files. 538 commands. 403. 318. 441. 316. 408. 458. 190. 451. 322 one click mode. 116. 550. 261 keyboard functions. 453. 233. 243. 92. 21 point. 232. 108 lines collections. 437. 446. 451. 136. 439. 302 save and recall views. 309. 492 display sets. 548. 446. 171. 39. 448. 326. 210 settings. 311 point-to-point. 244 editing. 318. 448. 84 page setup. 297. 253. 446. 419 display sets. 175 motion. 250. 312. 447. 456. 176 settings. 453. 411. 103. 136 editing. 173. 324. 63 levels anti-alias. 315. 26 shortcut. 53 on-site drawing generation. 318. 457 OpenGL. 543. 322. 128 new. 458. 133. 433 current. 252. 326 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 579 . 530 key frames displaying. 207. 126. 237. 299. 88. 128 settings. 308. 72. 453. 442. 316. 325. 318. 310 snaplock. 441. 435 files. 448.

45 viewing. 203. 471. 67. 466. 170 outline. 326. 163. 541 point cloud integrator. 74. 470. 165 auto-highlight complex elements. 418. 513. 202. 538 customizing. 303. 162. 164. 166. 85 troubleshooting. 204. 186. 193. 179. 478. 84. 206 display. 160. 281 580 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 162. 195. 265 modules API. 318. 185. 176. 485. 168. 184. 167. 161. 203. 494 new collections. 474. 120. 200. 443. 493. 325. 20 navigation toolbars. 555. 521. 233. 525 on-site drawing generation. 175 on-site drawing generation. 199. 197. 169 rates. 206 joystick. 455. 476. 184. 308. 318. 201 priority. 23. 144 mouse drag. 441. 195. 185. 69. 327 display sets. 183 toolbars. 297. 165. 57. 465. 204. 466. 251. 193. 70. 204. 184. 298. 77. 205. 209 modes backfaces. 234. 164. 479. 203. 84. 316. 303. 161. 479. 483 construction. 185. 161. 121. 480. 196 mouse. 301 snapshot. 19 Simulation and Visual Effects. 492. 561 types. 196. 167. 556. 44 fitting. 439. 21. 548. 178 mouse auto-highlight. 19. 189. 299 encircle. 477. 168. 192 settings. 183 project manager. 301 directional. 437. 167. 178. 206 displaying. 200. 488. 71. 185. 305. 302. 472. 491. 182. 403. 196. 163. 188. 161. 180. 237. 35. 73. 202. 251 menu accessories. 507. 458. 215 folders.Index surface. 469. 205. 119. 273. 192 view. 475. 192. 19. 161. 410. 169. 169 rendering. 163 modes. 323. 198. 193. 213. 474. 476. 67 directional. 281 with mouse. 161. 210 save and recall. 256. 317. 276 measurements. 262 speed. 201 joystick. 442. 167. 199. 204. 189. 546. 312 motion. 463. 301. 538 menu bar. 121 opening. 86 NetMeeting collaboration. 460 point cloud. 180. 33. 190. 470. 170. 168. 18. 463. 37 saving. 51 model rotation. 165. 18 collision detection. 205. 459. 160. 309 text. 166. 192 controlling. 163. 203. 167. 105 positioning. 164. 173 lateral. 194 modes. 468. 305 steps. 165. 202. 477. 69 Elumens. 163. 194. 309. 72. 162. 194. 23. 164. 483. 297. 169. 444. 481 ScheduleReview. 217 groups. 299. 180. 419 design files. 44. 490. 480. 478. 202. 190 key frames. 22. 118. 547. 168 rotating. 445. 186. 20 Photo-Realism. 558 moving annotations. 170 priority. 200. 184. 205. 160. 159. 417. 67 coarse facets. 549 display sets. 182. 197. 103. 307. 472. 165. 68. 206 motion. 179. 120. 469. 164 auto-highlight elements. 465. 323 membership display sets. 306 keyboard. 166. 65 models closing. 300. 438. 192 snapshot. 119. 538 using. 165. 164. 468. 475. 34. 558 groups. 75. 19 motion bearing. 471. 456. 166. 167 movements controlling. 17 collaboration. 169. 188. 178. 47 MicroStation color table. 166. 298. 168 navigating joystick.

262. 409 pane layout. 449. 436 settings. 20 measurements. 405. 438. 34. 92. 451.Index measurements. 509. 431 display. 130 tag. 433. 62 north west view. 446. 457. 362. 277. 458 lighting. 477 deleting. 495. 506. 64 number go to. 564 perspective angles. 564 page timeout. 532 palettes. 507. 409 one click measurement mode. 454. 265 unassigning materials. 441. 455. 381 display order. 326. 120 hiding. 462 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 581 . 164 linking. 431. 318. 64 north view. 113 tags. 357 pick. 114 threshold. 20 SmartSketch. 20 navigating. 317. 433 printing. 432 outline rendering. 93. 387 files. 433 database fragmentation. 133. 309. 380. 415 weight. 118. 529. 460. 494 patterns adjusting. 453. 138 label data. 217. 447. 103. 443. 521. 534 raytrace. 381 assigning materials. 533 range rejection. 493. 242. 445. 433. 405. 457 toolbars. 68. 20 modules. 423. 430 transmittance. 87. 455. 346 objects annotations. 59. 444. 442. 21. 72. 20 drawing. 427. 37 options bounce. 460 settings. 530. 20 snapshot. 431. 316. 325. 307. 93. 426. 448. 435 settings. 564 database performance. 109 textures. 240 findng. 428. 73. 35. 362. 277. 468. 164 collision detection. 63. 20 tags. 113 gamma. 564 disk fragmentation. 37 models. 241 fitting. 102 tips. 433 swap space. 87 view cone. 32. 99 next lighting. 411 pausing key frames. 407 auto-highlight. 446. 71. 173 tags. 522 queries. 447. 113 finding. 206 eye point. 137. 402. 423. 311 on-site drawing generation annotations. 308. 521 source lights. 323. 344 north directional mode. 23 raytrace. 436. 526 performance anti-alias. 279 set up. 243. 564 system. 117. 461 raytracing. 160 page setup. 430. 20 labels. 231 range rejection. 29. 451. 279 passengers collaborations. 21. 34. 454. 152 north east view. 439. 59 partial recall. 346 keys. 327 projects. 33. 60. 91. 126 printing. 458 modules. 163. 303 view. 432. 301 ScheduleReview. 95 restoring. 277. 20 opening databases. 63. 33. 244. 437. 435. 105 overviews motion. 449. 453. 448. 401. 564 raytrace. 408. 55. 84. 301 motion. 380. 35. 564 virtual memory. 117 Photo-Realism deleting. 57.

236. 233. 523 ScheduleReview. 402. 423. 401. 533 properties. 535. 210. 339 views. 210 ScheduleReview. 325. 326 positioning annotations. 534. 308. 242. 28. 540 starting. 194. 448 measurements. 231 point. 522 display sets. 21 threshold. 535. 196. 84 modes. 505. 22. 231. 357. 453. 507. 193. 501. 251. 313 previous printing. 431. 89. 533. 256 editing. 207. 129. 338. 507. 363. 358. 402. 524 project manager adding. 156 annotations. 151 volume annotations. 141. 33. 122. 532. 155 tags. 198. 115. 521 properties assigning. 234. 201 modes. 365 placing 3D points. 239. 250 displaying. 239 labels. 211 moving. 407. 521 editing. 407 editing. 543. 536 programs accessories. 541 points colors. 217 projects creating. 326 styles. 33. 525 point cloud collision detection. 35 ScheduleReview. 322 width. 40. 197. 217. 542. 505 hiding. 42. 308. 325. 211 viewing. 208. 209 immediate update mode.Index snapshot. 313 lighting. 506. 22. 534. 326 measurements. 156 eye point. 536 settings. 545 collections. 155 play key frames. 408 queries. 359. 337. 333. 509. 505 updating view. 481 display. 432 pick objects. 431 toolbars. 515 executing. 210 editing. 523 files. 237. 131 range box colors. 523. 209. 322 patterns. 360 controlling. 345 printing options. 510 opening. 507. 506 creating. 93. 495. 448. 360 display sets. 540 project active. 308. 506. 496. 239. 234. 534 previewing. 408 printing. 155 near clipping plane. 509 range cube. 524 creating. 29. 322 measurements. 447. 534 unassigning. 155 lighting. 449 place annotations. 532. 88 rejection. 58 plane far clipping plane. 454. 300 ScheduleReview. 451. 455. 497. 199. 308 sizes.. 150 data. 497 importing. 195. 143. 130. 513. 91. 233. 530 views. 533 tag. 536 resolutions. 21 textures. 468. 322 rates 582 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 109. 152 far clipping plane. 510. 401. 437. 208. 446. 335. 217. 307 near clipping plane. 307 data points. 242. 449. 513. 236. 207. 159 restoring. 477 raytrace. 430. 217. 534 quick print. 513 ScheduleReview. 541 support. 366 plan view. 522 deleting. 512. 29. 457 measurements. 237. 521 deleting. 142. 200. 84. 210 docking. 325. 88 transmittance. 35. 21 stereo.

261. 480. 59.Index animation. 44 . 495 ScheduleReview. 499. 313 measurements. 279 views. 192 settings. 239. 72 restoring collections. 525. 52 SATACIS. 173 using mouse. 431 gamma. 184. 495. 71 wireframe. 461 recalling key frames. 292. 506. 525 project manager. 192 raytrace anti-alias. 513 review play. 496. 261 recall. 483 SAT files ACIS. 70. 503 review. 558 motion. 289 importing. 271 reflective bounce. 474. 52 save and recall renaming groups. 329 rendering full shading. 432 viewing. 501. 501. 436 range. 496. 519. 315. 261. 286. 490. 431. 19 construction.INI. 273 ScheduleReview active project. 509 record. 262. 237. 435 snapshot. 328. 44. 527 importing. 284. 62 rotating display sets. 479. 520 collections. 48 projects. 95 windows. 285 saved views adding. 72 raytracing. 475. 328 measurements. 59 results displaying. 184. 511. 277. 262. 167 view cone. 382 saving . 521 percent complete. 75 modes. 510. 521. 161. 503. 491 collision detection. 525 ScheduleReview. 95 positions. 290 saved view exporting. 524 views. 261 views. 504 motion. 472. 526 play. 525 modules.mdb files. 313 panes.vue files. 88. 461. 428. 273. 278. 471. 75 wireframe outline. 185. 495. 517. 68. 520 collision detection. 430 transmittance. 264 editing. 433. 67. 110. 476. 496 right view.. 507. 84. 72 textures. 313 windows. 318. 281 save views exporting. 504 associations. 264 exporting. 523. 462 shadows. 499. 497. 45 commands. 185. 71. 510. 505 projects. 528 refresh. 282 views. 261. 468. 167 rotating model. 460. 236. 306 partial. 507. 278. 288 importing. 167 snapshot. 431 threshold. 460 shaded outline. 469. 524 queries. 292 using keypad. 65 running collaborations. 74. 462 settings. 511. 77 outline. 276. 260. 505 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 583 . 313 labels. 556. 436. 505. 58 removing associations. 524 resetting. 477. 433 bounce. 433 performance. 72. 523 editing. 526 deleting. 19 new. 497. 524 animation. 233. 430 refreshing data. 279 redraw on refresh. 318. 69. 513 queries. 433. 489. 505 go to. 314. 518. 466. 303 threshold. 75. 19 controls.

516 search defining criteria.Index settings. 129. 155. 306 motion. 505 sending driver's state. 154 print. 501. 499. 501. 540 steps in days. 183. 18 collision detection. 114. 497. 305 on-site drawing generation. 88. 306 recall. 114. 505. 291. 528 ScheduleReview. 141. 117. 117. 326 snapshot animation. 116. 310 showing display sets. 501. 116. 39. 131 saved views. 113. 182. 76. 527 snapshot. 499. 420. 114. 106. 92. 131. 73. 184 window. 135. 75. 267 ScheduleReview. 436. 15. 64 south view. 498. 250. 495. 501. 500. 143 584 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 326 measurements. 540 date. 140 distances. 259. 63. 303. 420. 500 programs. 140. 277. 505. 75. 127. 142. 208 project manager settings. 20 Photo-Realism. 318. 15. 348. 148 joystick. 63. 105 Photo-Realism. 115. 103. 501. 76 range rejection. 259. 504 stop. 270. 141. 292. 209. 496. 529 partial. 291. 496. 530 projects. 115. 492 collision detection. 349 view. 93. 437. 471. 141. 102. 21 ScheduleReview. 500. 449. 131 settings. 480. 423. 504. 454. 101. 131. 153. 90. 68. 103 collaboration. 185. 420 selecting collision detections. 308. 453. 153. 143 Photo-Realism. 526. 516. 183 stereo. 178. 496. 185. 184. 93. 21 settings. 265. 262. 182. 318. 421 search paths. 497. 19. 457. 64 starting accessories. 303 view. 426. 462 placing. 500. 73. 108. 466. 241 search path defining. 306 page. 501 motion. 325. 295 sequencer. 130. 504. 252. 451. 504. 498. 144 snaplock collections. 505. 433. 279. 170. 133. 23 calculations. 171 shortest distance. 325.. 70 shortcut keys. 472. 142. 553. 181. 279 settings advanced. 522. 305 view. 115. 481. 499. 183 stereo activating. 116. 268 Elumens. 136. 103 view cone. 277. 84 measurements. 295 set up key frames. 182. 87. 253 project manager. 139. 76. 496. 495. 84. 132. 260 taking. 448. 146. 39. 77. 113. 447. 447. 503. 427. 140. 524 range rejection. 179. 436 angles. 191 levels. 468. 457 motion. 303 snapshots key frames. 504 number. 168 views. 72. 504 taking. 277. 134. 186 display sets. 306 snapshot. 184. 499. 466. 198 outline. 421 design file. 479. 251 modes. 497. 526 symbology. 477 queries. 154. 169. 126. 192 annotations. 503. 296 collaborations. 503. 144 modules. 77. 505 frame. 526 steps. 303. 554 shading. 475. 446. 260 south east view. 131 SmartPlant Review features. 252. 483 display. 143 tags. 63 south west view. 116. 38 directories. 137 lighting. 192. 142. 485 snapshots. 495. 129. 435. 87. 90. 503. 308. 73. 19 key frames. 147. 455. 140. 496 sending.

332. 93. 517 ScheduleReview. 91. 198 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 585 . 346 go to. 91. 118. 84. 547. 91. 95. 164 text annotations deleting. 186 views. 79. 348. 63 top front left view. 92. 82 common views control. 72. 340 example workflow. 97. 564 lighting. 48 refresh. 271 zone. 97. 93 viewing. 340 displaying. 150 resetting. 562 motion. 63 top back right view. 408 updating backing store. 550. 271 display. 48. 341. 551 displaying. 548 text view. 517 vertical encircle. 338. 75 window. 341. 561 page timeout. 347 deleting. 90 standard. 564 performance tips. 563 database performance. 91 tag. 353 commands. 89. 92. 332. 80 common views. 63 top front right view. 323 viewing. 101 buffer. 564 unassigning materials. 349 editing. 344 finding. 66. 542. 93. 353 technical support. 564 swap space. 409 properties. 101. 96. 100 views. 103. 83 motion. 67 using accessories. 62 troubleshooting animation. 95 tools collaborations. 341. 96 encircle. 353 tags. 91. 110. 48 top back left view. 309 switching to large plant monument. 63 top view. 90. 94. 265 view cone. 356 find results. 332. 98. 332. 352. 323 measurements. 21 rendering. 338. 355.Index viewing. 91 tools. 101. 548. 113. 163. 84. 543. 79 common. 332. 99 docking. 344. 347. 113 objects. 564 label databases. 545. 96. 59 textures displaying. 339. 439 toolbars annotation. 302 ScheduleReview. 353 exporting. 85 naigation. 552 editing. 549 manipulating. 199. 564 disk fragmentation. 100 ScheduleReview. 97. 67. 542 placing. 562 annotations. 60 time display. 335 settings. 350 activating. 61 customizing. 343. 110. 343. 489 data. 408. 271 position. 98. 268 tags action comments. 91. 71. 564 viewing issues. 559 virtual memory. 114 symbology. 99. 351. 93. 318. 345. 537 auto-association. 197. 141 stopping key frame motion. 568 text annotations. 546. 73. 265 Photo-Realism. 114. 71 settings. 93. 353 placing. 339. 117 tile view. 331 collections. 526 surface collections. 28. 346 importing. 318. 347 attributes. 343 tabs advanced. 333. 88 position control. 86 Photo-Realism. 339. 13. 70 symbology. 200 measurements. 309 encircle. 337.

69. 384 finding. 372 importing. 375 placing. 56. 461. 154. 62 north west view. 383 inactivating categories. 173 moving. 275. 296. 267 saving. 82 display sets. 63 north east view. 427 editing. 264. 66. 101. 277. 59. 126. 124. 63. 64 north view. 47 placing. 201 manipulating. 138. 48. 128 stereo. 63 front view. 283 settings. 535. 60 toolbars. 96. 131. 133. 211 view cone. 210 range rejection. 195. 382. 200. 114. 380 attributes. 303 stationary light positions. 64 bottom back right view. 119. 373 wireframe. 99. 554 zooming. 60 cascade. 56 cascade. 383. 155 eye point. 380. 64 point cloud data. 63 bottom. 58 printing. 76. 64 bottom front left view. 115. 282. 153. 64 east view. 67. 194. 530 view advanced. 250. 63. 261 saved. 264 editing. 285 levels. 132. 152. 75. 138 lighting. 273. 280. 59 tile horizontally. 97. 68. 265. 270 main. 153 common views. 63 top front right view. 69. 63. 63 top back right view. 386 creating categories. 460. 73 windows. 57. 105. 262. 139. 291. 67. 58 measurements. 536 project manager. 374 exporting.. 373 west view. 82 control. 275. 76. 58. 292. 264. 77. 103. 113. 151. 68. 428. 76. 73. 278. 381 displaying. 62 west view. 63 top front left view. 62 window arranging. 373 editing. 108. 281.. 462 refreshing. 499. 289 fitting. 71 menu bar. 135. 79. 63. 305. 68. 152 toolbar. 87 rotating. 103. 120. 152. 117 perspective angle. 528 importing. 168. 370. 72. 125 view cone center point. 64 top back left view. 57 exporting. 268 settings. 116. 102. 154 clipping planes. 279. 79. 62 bottom back left view. 56. 62 rotate with model fit. 270 snapshot. 504. 60 updating. 273. 94. 115. 255 displaying. 65 south east view. 208. 69.Index printing. 69. 153. 369. 140 tags. 369 deleting. 126. 282. 131. 117. 303. 137. 132. 62 left view. 106. 149 viewing back view. 137. 75. 281 plan. 264. 67. 541 project manager. 102. 153. 488 arrange icons. 66. 118. 123. 63 top view. 109 raytrace. 98. 108. 87 using. 64 bottom front right view. 372 clipping volume. 62 views adding. 276. 116. 56 586 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide . 371. 101. 265. 127. 209. 76. 70. 165 perspective. 114. 283 elevation. 55. 366 symbology. 48 save and recall. 207 right view. 94. 260 volume annotations adjusting. 57. 121. 254. 136. 113. 100 tile vertoca. 280. 60. 371. 117. 57. 345 text. 274. 64 south view. 193. 134. 167 settings. 63 south west view. 267 save and recall. 151. 372. 79. 122 groups. 105. 56 commands. 127.

120. 124 printing. 95 views. 59. 94. 60 wireframe background. 57 icons. 353 zoom about point. 125 in. 57. 78 workflow tags. 58 project manager. 58 restoring.Index elevation. 554 text. 210 refreshing. 56 main. 58 pane layout. 58. 59 tile horizontally. 125 factor. 56. 60 toolbar. 123. 94. 554 size. 78 color. 124 out. 60 tile vertically. 533 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 587 . 123. 59 plan. 59 settings.